Littelfuse S PROTECTION RELAYS & CONTROLS CATALOG
script async src="https://cse.google.com/cse.js?cx=partner-pub-9240403615691497:8294107348">
RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS FEEDER PROTECTION ARC-FLASH PROTECTION MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION PUMP CONTROLLERS AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS TOWER AND OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL TIMERS FLASHERS PROTECTION RELAYS & CONTROLS CATALOG *Bluetooth is a trademark of its respective owner. Over 1000 Littelfuse MotorSaver ,® PumpSaver ,® and SSAC parts added! New Arc-Flash Relays AF0500 with zone protection and AF0100 with compact, cost-effective design AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay AF0100 Arc-Flash Relay MP8000 Motor Protection Smartphone Application MP8000 Motor Protection Relay New Smart Motor Protection Relay MP8000 with Bluetooth* capabilities 1 Your questions answered, any way you ask them. Choose your preferred product-selection method from the examples below. By Application...................................................................................................................................Pg 6 By Feature Set ..............................................................................................................................Pg 7-10 By Product Category & Common Questions: Product Selection Guide..........................Pg 11-41 By Product Category & Part Number: Table of Contents...................................................... Pg 2-5 By Keyword or Part Number: Alphanumeric Index .......................................................Pg 517-520 FEATURE PGR-8800 AF0100 AF0500 Current detection ✔ Point sensors ✔ ✔ ✔ Fiber optic sensors ✔ - ✔ Arc-Flash Protection pg 14, 73 ARP Series pg 157 ASQU / ASTU Series pg 270 Brackets & Clips pg 486 APPLICATION COMMON PROBLEMS PRODUCT PROTECTION CATEGORY (PG NO.) GENERATORS - Insulation breakdown due to vibration and corrosion - Ground-fault currents often exceed short-circuit current - Arc-flash hazard from local and paralleled generators Ground Fault (pg 43) Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Arc Flash (pg 73) TRANSFORMERS - Overloading and overvoltage Resistance Grounding (pg 61) Feeder (pg 69) Arc-Flash Relays MOTOR AND PUMP PROTECTION PGR-6100 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay.............................94 7 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION ARC-FLASH DETECTION Rapidly detect an arc flash to reduce damage to equipment and risk to personnel Designed for use in OEM equipment Sensor Health Monitoring AF0500 SERIES pg. 77 PGR-8800 SERIES pg. 75 D0920 pg. 74 Overcurrent Detection Y N N Designed for use in Sensor Health Monitoring OEM equipment Y Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 2 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS FEEDER PROTECTION FPU-32 Series Feeder Protection Unit .............................................. 86 FPS Series Feeder Protection System......................................... 87 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION D0920 Arc Detection Unit................................................ 90 PGR-8800 Series Arc-Flash Relay..................................................... 91 AF0500 Series Arc-Flash Relay..................................................... 93 AF0100 Series Arc-Flash Relay..................................................... 95 A0220 Series Light Sensor.......................................................... 96 PGA-1100 Diode Logic........................................................... 97 SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS PHS Series Phase Control............................................................... 100 SIR Series Solid-State Relay - Isolated ........................................ 102 SLR Series Solid-State Relay - Non-Isolated ............................... 104 TCR9C Temperature Controller ............................................... 106 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION PGR-6100 Series Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay...... 110 PGR-6101-120 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay...... 111 MPU-32 Series Motor Protection Unit ................................. 112 MPS Series Motor Protection System............................ 114 MPU-32-X69X Series Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ............ 116 MPS-469X Series Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit ............ 116 111-Insider-P / 231-Insider-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 117 232-Insider Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 120 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 Series Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 122 234-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ...................... 124 235P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ....................... 126 MP8000 Series Bluetooth* Current & Voltage Monitor ....... 128 777 Series 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ........... 132 777 / 77C Series Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor... 134 777-KW/HP-P2 Series 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ........... 136 777-AccuPower 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor ........... 139 77C-KW/HP Series Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor... 141 SIO-RTD-02-00 Temperature Input Monitor......................... 143 FIND THE RIGHT PRODUCT FOR YOUR APPLICATION Typical Product Application ................................................................... 6 Product Feature Comparison.............................................................7-10 Product Selection Guide..................................................................11-42 Alphanumeric Index....................................................................537-540 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION Ungrounded AC Systems EL3100 Series Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator.............. 44 PGR-3100 Series Ground-Fault Indication System........................... 45 PGR-3200 Series Insulation Monitor................................................ 46 Ungrounded DC System SE-601 Series DC Ground-Fault Monitor ..................................... 47 Grounded AC/DC System EL731 Series AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay................. 48 Solidly-Grounded Systems SE-701 Series Ground-Fault Monitor........................................... 50 SE-703 Series Earth-Leakage Monitor......................................... 51 SE-704 Series Earth-leakage monitor.......................................... 52 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters SB5000 Series Industrial Shock-Block.......................................... 53 SB6000 Series Industrial Shock-Block.............................................. Generator and Single-Function Protection PGR-4300 Series Generator Ground-Fault Relay.............................. 55 GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING SE-105 / SE-107 Series Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...... 60 SE-134C / SE-135 Series Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor...... 61 RESISTANCE GROUNDING/ NGR MONITORING Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Sizing Chart ............................................ 62 SE-325 Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ................ 64 SE-330 / SE-330HV Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ................ 65 SE-330AU Series Neutral-Grounding-Resistor Monitor ................ 67 NGR Series–US Neutral Grounding Resistor System.................. 68 NGR Series–Canada Neutral Grounding Resistor System.................. 77 NGRM-ENC Series Enclosed Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor... 83 1 2 3 6 7 5 4 *Bluetooth is a trademark of its respective owner. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 3 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS PUMP CONTROLS/ LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS ACBC-120 Series Alarm Controller / Battery Charging Unit.... 146 PC-102 Series Dual Channel Switch................................. 148 PC-105 5-Channel Pump Controller ....................... 149 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ Series Liquid Level Control Relay......................... 150 PC-XXX-LLC-GM Series Liquid Level Control Relay......................... 150 201-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 152 460-15-100-LLS Single-Channel Liquid Level Sensor.......... 153 460-15-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 155 LLC1 Series Open Board Liquid Level Control............... 157 LLC2 Series Open Board Liquid Level Control............... 159 LLC4 Series Octal Plug-In Liquid Level Control ............ 161 LLC5 Series Liquid Level Control .................................. 163 LLC6 Series Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 165 LLC8 Series Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 167 Alternating Relays ALT Series 8-Pin Plug-in Alternating Relays ............... 169 ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW Series Alternating Relays..................................... 171 ARP Series Alternating Relays..................................... 173 50R-400-ALT Alternating Relay....................................... 175 Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-100 Intrinsically Safe Switch......................................... 176 ISS-101 Intrinsically Safe Switch......................................... 177 ISS-102 Series Two-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch................... 179 ISS-105 Series Five-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch................... 181 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers CP5 Series Single-Phase Current Monitor................... 184 LSR-0 Load Sensor, Low Cost Relay ................... 185 LSR-XXX Series Load Sensors............................................. 186 LSRU Series Load Sensors............................................. 187 LSRX / LSRX-C Series Load Sensors, Low Cost Relays ................ 189 ECS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 191 ECSW Series Current Sensors ........................................ 194 TCS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 197 TCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 199 DCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 201 LCS10T12 / LPM Series Current Indicators ..................................... 203 Voltage Monitoring Relays 50R Series Single-Phase Voltage Monitor .................. 204 201-XXX-SP Series Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor....... 206 201-XXX-SP-DPDT Series Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor....... 208 202-200-SP Series Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor....... 210 460-XXX-SP Series Single-Phase Voltage Monitor .................. 212 102A Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 214 201A Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 216 201A-AU Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 218 201-XXX-DPDT Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 220 202 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 222 250A Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 224 350 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 226 355 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 228 455 Series 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor ............... 230 460 Series 3-Phase Voltage Monitor........................... 232 601 Series 3-Phase Voltage & Frequency Monitor ..... 234 601-CS-D-P1 3-Phase Power Monitor............................. 236 WVM Series ................................................................... 238 DLMU Series ................................................................... 240 HLMU Series ................................................................... 243 PLMU11 Voltage Monitor......................................... 245 PLM Series Voltage Monitor......................................... 247 TVW Series ................................................................... 249 TVM Series ................................................................... 251 PLR Series ................................................................... 253 PLS Series ................................................................... 255 HLVA6I23 Single-Phase Monitor................................ 257 KVM Series ................................................................... 259 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING RM1000 Series Remote Monitor ................................................. 262 RM2000 Series Remote Monitor ................................................. 264 Informer Remote Diagnostics Tool.................................... 266 Informer-MS Remote Diagnostics Tool.................................... 268 COMMUNICATION MODULES RS485MS-2W Communication Module.......................................... 270 CIO-MB/ CIO-120-MB Communication Module.......................................... 271 CIO-DN-P/ CIO-120-DN-P Devicenet™ Interface ............................................. 273 CIO-777-PR Profibus Interface.................................................... 275 CIO-EN Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU Interface............... 276 COM 4-20 Output Module for use with the 777-AccuPower... 277 8 11 9 10 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 4 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS TIME DELAY RELAYS Timer Function Guide ......................................................................... 280 Multifunction TRDU Series....................................................................................... 281 TRU Series.......................................................................................... 283 ASQU / ASTU Series.......................................................................... 286 DSQU / DSTU Series.......................................................................... 288 Dedicated On Delay T10 Series.......................................................................................... 290 Delay-on-Make ERDM Series...................................................................................... 291 HRDM Series...................................................................................... 293 KRDM Series...................................................................................... 295 KRPS Series........................................................................................ 297 KSD1 Series....................................................................................... 300 KSDU Series....................................................................................... 302 KSPS Series........................................................................................ 304 MSM Series....................................................................................... 307 ORM Series........................................................................................ 309 PRLM Series....................................................................................... 311 TDM /T DMH / TDML Series............................................................. 313 TDU / TDUH / TDUL Series................................................................ 315 TH1 Series.......................................................................................... 317 THD1B410.5S..................................................................................... 319 TMV8000 / TSU2000 Series.............................................................. 321 TRM Series......................................................................................... 323 TS1 Series.......................................................................................... 325 TSD1 Series........................................................................................ 327 Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed TS441165 ........................................................................................... 329 Delay-on-Break HRDB Series....................................................................................... 331 HRPS / HRIS Series............................................................................ 333 KRDB Series....................................................................................... 335 KSDB Series....................................................................................... 337 ORB Series......................................................................................... 339 TDB / TDBH / TDBL Series................................................................. 341 TDUB Series....................................................................................... 343 THDB Series....................................................................................... 345 TRB Series.......................................................................................... 347 TSB Series.......................................................................................... 349 TSDB Series....................................................................................... 351 Single Shot HRDS Series....................................................................................... 353 HSPZA22SL........................................................................................ 355 KRDS Series....................................................................................... 357 KSDS Series....................................................................................... 359 ORS Series......................................................................................... 361 PRS65................................................................................................. 363 TDS / TDSH / TDSL Series................................................................. 364 TDUS Series....................................................................................... 366 THC / THS Series............................................................................... 368 THDS Series....................................................................................... 370 TRS Series.......................................................................................... 372 TSDS Series....................................................................................... 374 TSS Series.......................................................................................... 376 Interval ERDI Series......................................................................................... 378 HRDI Series........................................................................................ 380 KRDI Series........................................................................................ 382 KSD2 Series....................................................................................... 384 KSPU Series....................................................................................... 386 TDI / TDIH / TDIL Series..................................................................... 388 TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL Series............................................................. 390 THD2 Series....................................................................................... 392 THD7 Series....................................................................................... 394 TS2 / TS6 Series................................................................................ 396 TSD2 Series........................................................................................ 398 TSD6 Series........................................................................................ 400 TSD7 Series........................................................................................ 402 Retriggerable Single Shot KRD9 Series....................................................................................... 404 TSD94110SB ...................................................................................... 406 Recycle ERD3425A .......................................................................................... 407 ESDR Series....................................................................................... 409 HRDR Series....................................................................................... 412 KRD3 Series....................................................................................... 414 KRDR Series....................................................................................... 416 KSD3 Series....................................................................................... 418 KSDR Series....................................................................................... 420 KSPD Series....................................................................................... 422 RS Series............................................................................................ 424 TDR Series.......................................................................................... 426 THD3C42A0........................................................................................ 428 TSD3411S........................................................................................... 430 TSDR Series....................................................................................... 432 12 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 5 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls TABLE OF CONTENTS Percentage PTHF4900DK....................................................................................... 434 Dual Function TDMB Series...................................................................................... 436 ESD52233........................................................................................... 438 KRPD Series....................................................................................... 440 HVAC CT Series............................................................................................ 442 T2D120A15M..................................................................................... 444 TA Series............................................................................................ 446 TAC1 Series........................................................................................ 448 TL Series............................................................................................. 450 TSA141300......................................................................................... 452 Coin Vending HRV Series......................................................................................... 453 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS Flashers FSU1000 Series ............................................................................ 456 FS100 Series Low Current Flasher ........................................... 458 FS100 Series Med Power Flasher ............................................ 460 FS200 Series ............................................................................ 462 FS300 Series ............................................................................ 464 FS491 ............................................................................ 466 FS500 Series ............................................................................ 467 SC3 / SC4 Series Sequencing Controls........................................... 469 Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FA / FS Series ............................................................................ 471 FB Series Flasher & Incandescent Beacon Alarm Relay.... 473 SCR490D Obstruction Lamp Alarm Relay........................... 474 SCR Series Universal Lamp Alarm Relay.............................. 475 FB9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay.............................. 477 SCR9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay.............................. 479 PCR Series Photo Control...................................................... 481 ACCESSORIES Software .......................................................................................... 484 Electrical .......................................................................................... 485 Ground Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, & Relay Testers.................................................................................. 488 Remote Indication.............................................................................. 489 Communication Adapters & Modules................................................ 492 Terminations & Adapters................................................................... 493 Liquid Level Control............................................................................ 494 Current Transformers (CTs) CT Selection Guide............................................................................. 495 Current Transformers......................................................................... 496 Instrumentation & Metering Transformers........................................ 497 Current Transformer Sizing Chart....................................................... 498 ELCT Series........................................................................................ 498 ZSCT Series........................................................................................ 501 Mounting Adapters and Enclosures Panel-Mount Adapters....................................................................... 503 DIN Rail & Mounting Adapters.......................................................... 505 Brackets & Clips................................................................................. 506 Enclosures & Watertight Covers........................................................ 507 Sockets............................................................................................... 508 PROTECTION OVERVIEW Glossary of Terms............................................................................... 510 Introduction........................................................................................ 513 I. Introduction to Protection Relays............................................ 513 II. Relay Application.................................................................... 514 III. CT Application ....................................................................... 522 IV. Resistance-Grounding Conversion ........................................ 523 IEEE/ANSI Device Numbers and Typical Suffixes.............................. 526 Typical Suffixes.................................................................................. 526 APPENDIX Dimensional Drawings....................................................................... 527 ALPHANUMERIC INDEX Alphanumeric Index........................................................................... 537 13 14 15 16 17 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 6 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays & Controls TYPICAL PRODUCT APPLICATIONS APPLICATION COMMON PROBLEMS PRODUCT PROTECTION CATEGORY (PG NO.) GENERATORS - Insulation breakdown due to vibration and corrosion - Ground-fault currents often exceed short-circuit current - Arc-flash hazard from local and paralleled generators Ground Fault Resistance Grounding Arc Flash TRANSFORMERS - Overloading and overvoltage Resistance Grounding Feeder SWITCHGEAR & MCCs - Highest average downtime (IEEE 493-1997) - Arc-flash risk to personnel maintaining and working on live equipment - A fault on one load or feeder trips the entire lineup Ground Fault Resistance Grounding Motor Feeder Arc Flash Pump Control SWITCHBOARDS & PANELBOARDS - Low-level leakage current undetected by typical OCPDs Ground Fault DRIVES - Switching frequencies cause nuisance tripping - Resistance grounded drives require sensitive, wide-frequency ground-fault protection Ground Fault Motor Arc Flash MOTORS & PUMPS - Winding faults due to overloading, water, dust and vibration - Pump damage due to dry running, deadheading, rapid cycling, seal failure (submersible pumps), over heating, plugged intake, jammed impeller, or voltage fault conditions. Ground Fault Motor Voltage Monitoring Pump Control FEEDER CIRCUITS - Temperature and mechanical stress lead to severe damage - Older electromechanical protection is difficult to maintain - Uncoordinated feeders causing unnecessary downtime Ground Fault Feeder PORTABLE EQUIPMENT - Movement causing broken conductors and failed insulation - Requirement to keep low ground-fault potential - Loss of ground or high ground resistance due to cable faults Ground Fault Feeder Arc Flash Ground-Conductor Monitoring Resistance Grounding/NGR Monitoring GROUNDING RESISTORS - Open-circuit resistors due to corrosion or loose connections Resistance Grounding WATER/WASTEWATER - Electrocution hazard due to personnel working on submersible pumps or in vicinity of water and electricity - Pump damage due to dry running, deadheading, rapid cycling, seal failure (submersible pumps), over heating, plugged intake, jammed impeller, or voltage fault conditions. - Higher risk of arc flash and steam blast due to moisture - Electrical conductors can cause explosions in explosive methane atmosphere - H2S causing premature electronics failure Ground Fault Motor Arc Flash Pump Control Time Delay Resistance Grounding HVACR - Voltage issues causing premature failure - Short cycling increasing wear and tear on compressors - Worn contactor causing voltage fault on compressor motor - Rapid cycling - Low voltage/brownout condition - Contactor chatter - Reverse phase in a 3-phase system - Overload Motor Time Delay © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 7 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Use the feature tables below and the Product Selection Guide on pages 11-41 to choose the appropriate protection relay or monitor for your application. FEATURE SE-601 EL731 PGR-3100 PGR-3200 SE-502 SE-701 SE-703 SE-704 SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C SE-135 SE-325 SE-330 SE-330HV SE-330AU Detects GF via Voltage ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Detects GF via Current ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Detects DC GF ✔ ✔ Adjustable GF Pickup ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Adjustable Time Delay ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Remote Reset ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Analog Output ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Fail-Safe Option ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Harmonic Filtering ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ CT-Loop Monitoring ✔ ✔ ✔ Insulation Monitoring ✔ Ground-Check Monitoring ✔ ✔ Grounding-Resistor Monitoring ✔ ✔ PTC/RTD Overtemperature ✔ Communications ✔ ✔ Conformal Coating ‡ ✔ ✔ ‡ ‡ ‡ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Ground-Fault Protection Relays Arc-Flash Relays FEATURE PGR-8800 AF0100 AF0500 Current Detection ✔ Point Sensors ✔ ✔ ✔ Fiber Optic Sensors ✔ - ✔ Cable Monitoring on Sensor Inputs ✔ ✔ ✔ USB ✔ ✔ ✔ DC Supply ✔ ✔ ✔ AC Supply ✔ ✔ ✔ Data Logging ✔ ✔ Multi-Zone ✔ Communications ✔ ✔ NOTE: Tables are for reference only and include standard and optional configurations. Please see the respective catalog page for exact product specifications. ‡ Optional Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Pump Controllers FUNCTION MP8000 777-KW 77C-KW MPU-32 MPS Supply Voltage Single-Phase or 3-Phase 90–690 VAC 3-Phase 200-480 VAC* Single-Phase 100-240 VAC* 65-265 VAC, 80-275 VDC Monitored Current 0.5-1,000A (>100A w/external CTs) 2-800A (>90 A w/external CTs)* Accepts broad range of external CTs HP Rating Any 871 Any Control Box Compatibility - - - - - Overload ✔ ✔ ✔ Underload/Dry-well/Dead-head ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Undercurrent/Dry-well/Dead-head ✔ ✔ ✔ Overcurrent/Jam ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Reduced Overcurrent Mode ✔ ✔ Current Unbalance, Phase Loss/ Reversal ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Over/Undervoltage ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Voltage Unbalance ✔ ✔ ✔ Ground Fault Calculated Calculated Calculated ✔ ✔ Overtemperature ✔ ✔ Dynamic Thermal Model ✔ ✔ Over/Underfrequency ✔ ✔ Failure to Accelerate/Underspeed ✔ ✔ Power Factor ✔ Rapid Cycling/Jog ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Starter Control ✔ Differential ✔ ✔ Output Contact Rating 10 A at 240 VAC 10 A at 240 VAC* 8 A at 250 VAC Internal CT’s ✔ (up to 100 A)* ✔ (up to 90 A)* On-unit Metering 3 Digit display 4 line x 20 characters Remote Display Via smartphone ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Remote Reset Button ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Datalogging Last 1,000 faults Last fault Last fault 100 events 64 events Local Communications RS-485 RS-485 RS-232 RS-485 Bluetooth® Communication to Smartphone App** ✔ NETWORK COMS. (Optional) Modbus TCP ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Modbus RTU ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ DeviceNet ✔ ✔ ✔ Profibus ✔ ✔ Ethernet/IP ✔ ✔ ✔ Allen-Bradley DF1 ✔ Analog Output ✔ ✔ Analog Input (Prog.) ✔ Digital Input (Prog.) ✔ ✔ Conformal Coating ✔ ✔ Operating Temp Degree C -40 to 70 -20 to 70 -20 to 70 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 Warranty 5 year 10 year Certifications UL, CSA, CE UL Recognized, CSA, CE, RCM *Other versions exist with different voltage ranges, current monitoring ranges, output contact ratings, and temperature monitoring. Consult specific series datasheets for more details. ** iPhone® and select Android™ smartphones and tablets are supported via Littelfuse app © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 9 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Pump Controllers FUNCTION 111P 111-INSIDER-P, 231-INSIDER-P 232-INSIDER 233P 234-P 235P Supply Voltage Single-Phase 115 VAC Single-Phase 115 VAC or 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Single-Phase 230 VAC Monitored Current - - - - - - HP Rating 1/3 – 1hp 1/3 – 1/2hp or 1/3 – 1hp 1/3 – 1hp 1/3 – 1.5hp or 1/3 – 3hp 1/3 – 3hp 5 – 15hp (external CT required) Control Box Compatibility - Franklin™, Pentek®, CentriPro™, Flint & Walling™, Grundfos® (mid-2014 or later) Grundfos® (prior to mid-2014) - Grundfos® - Overload Underload/Dry-well/Dead-head ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Undercurrent/Dry-well/Dead-head Overcurrent/Jam ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Reduced Overcurrent Mode Current Unbalance, Phase Loss/ Reversal Over/Undervoltage ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Voltage Unbalance Ground Fault Overtemperature Dynamic Thermal Model Over/Underfrequency Failure to Accelerate/Underspeed Power Factor Rapid Cycling/Jog ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Starter Control Differential Output Contact Rating Internal CT’s On-unit Metering Remote Display Remote display capability when using the Informer via IR Remote Reset Button Datalogging Remote display capability when using the Informer via IR Local Communications Bluetooth® Communication to Smartphone App** NETWORK COMS. (Optional) Modbus TCP Modbus RTU DeviceNet Profibus Ethernet/IP Allen-Bradley DF1 Analog Output Analog Input (Prog.) Digital Input (Prog.) Conformal Coating Operating Temp Degree C -40 to 60 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 -40 to 60 Warranty 5 year Certifications cULus cURus cCSAus, cURus cULus cULus *Other versions exist with different voltage ranges, current monitoring ranges, output contact ratings, and temperature monitoring. Consult specific series datasheets for more details. ** iPhone® and select Android™ smartphones and tablets are supported via Littelfuse app Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 10 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays & Controls FEATURE COMPARISONS Motor & Feeder Protection Relays FUNCTION/FEATURE (IEEE#) MP8000 777 77C MPU-32 MPS FPU-32 FPS Supply Voltage Single or 3-Phase 90-690 VAC 3-Phase 200-480 VAC* Single-Phase 100-240 VAC* 65-265 VAC, 80-275 VDC Monitored Current 0.5-1,000A (>100A w/ external CTs) 2-800A (>90A w/external CTs)* Accepts broad range of external CTs Overload (49, 51) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Underload ✔ ✔ Overcurrent (50, 51)/Jam ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Reduced Overcurrent Mode ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Undercurrent (37) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Current Unbalance, Phase Loss/Reversal (37) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Over (59)/Undervoltage (27) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Voltage Unbalance (47) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Calculated Calculated Calculated ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Overtemperature (49) * ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Dynamic Thermal Model ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Over/Underfrequency (81) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Failure to Accelerate/Underspeed ✔ ✔ Power Factor (55) ✔ ✔ Rapid Cycling/Jog ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Starter Control ✔ Breaker Control ✔ Differential (87) ✔ ✔ Feeder Protection ✔ ✔ Definite-time Overcurrent ✔ ✔ Inverse-time Overcurrent ✔ Output Contact Rating 10A at 240 VAC 10A at 240 VAC* 8A at 250 VAC Internal CT’s ✔ (up to 100 A) ✔ (up to 90 A)* On-unit Metering 3 Digit display 4 line x 20 characters Remote Display Via smartphone ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Remote Reset Button ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Datalogging Last 1,000 faults Last fault Last fault 100 events 64 events 100 events 64 events Local Communications RS-485 RS-485 RS-232 RS-485 RS-232 RS-485 Bluetooth® Communication to Smartphone App** ✔ NETWORK COMS. (Optional) Modbus TCP ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Modbus RTU ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ DeviceNet ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Profibus ✔ ✔ ✔ Ethernet/IP ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Allen-Bradley DF1 ✔ ✔ Analog Output ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Analog Input (Prog.) ✔ ✔ Digital Input (Prog.) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Conformal Coating ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Operating Temp Deg C -40 to +70 -20 to +70 -20 to +70 -40 to +60 -40 to +60 -40 to +60 -40 to +60 Warranty 5 year 5 year 5 year 10 year 10 year 10 year 10 year Certifications UL, CSA, CE UL Recognized, CSA, CE, RCM *Other versions exist with different voltage ranges, current monitoring ranges, output contact ratings, and temperature monitoring. Consult specific series datasheets for more details. ** iPhone® and select Android™ smartphones and tablets are supported via Littelfuse app NOTE: IEEE Device Numbers are shown in parenthesis after the applicable features. 11 Product Selection Guide © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE Ground-Fault Protection....................................................................... 12 Ground-Conductor Monitoring............................................................. 13 Resistance Grounding / NGR Monitoring............................................ 13 Feeder Protection................................................................................. 14 Arc-Flash Protection............................................................................. 14 Switching Relays & Controls............................................................... 15 Motor & Pump Protection .................................................................... 16 Pump Controllers.................................................................................. 18 AC System Monitors / Load Sensors................................................... 22 Timers................................................................................................... 26 Flashers, Tower and Obstruction Lighting Control............................... 40 Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 12 GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION EL3100 SERIES pg. 44 PGR-3100 pg. 45 SE-704 SERIES pg. 52 SE-601 SERIES pg. 47 PGR-3200 SERIES pg. 46 PGR-4300 SERIES pg. 55 SE-701 SERIES pg. 50 SE-703 SERIES pg. 51 SB6100 pg. 53 Connectors Type Locate Ground Fault & Reduce Transient Overvoltage Connectors Type Detect & Limit Ground Faults Resistance Grounded Connectors Type Output Contact Solidly Grounded N Ground-Fault Protection Relays DC AC N N N Y 3-Types Control Logic Detect Insulation Breakdown 3-Types Control Logic Reduce Potential for Arc Flash 3-Types Control Logic Personnel Protection 3-Types Control Logic Detect Ground Fault by Phase-Voltage Measurement AC Y N N Digital Metering & Communications Connectors Type Detect AC/DC Ground Fault in VFDs Connectors Type Y Y Convert System to Resistance Grounding Convert System to Resistance Grounding GENERATOR AS 2081:2011 WIDE RANGE 10 mA - 5A EL731 SERIES pg. 48 Connectors Type Detect Low-Level Ground-Faults Currents DC + VFDs DC - 6kHz Y Y GROUNDED Detect ground faults on a grounded system N UNGROUNDED Detect ground faults on an ungrounded system Y Product Selection Guide 13 RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING SE-330 SERIES pg. 63 SE-330 & SE-701 SERIES (use in combination) pg. 63 pg. 50 SE-325 SERIES pg. 62 NGR SERIES pg. 66 RESISTANCE-GROUNDED AC Solve problems commonly associated with ungrounded and solidly grounded systems and monitor the neutral-to-ground connection Connectors Type Neutral-Grounding Resistance (NGR) Continuity Monitoring Pulsing, Digital Filtering, Connectors Type Communications, or Software Resistance Grounding Systems & NGR Monitors Connectors Type Implement Resistance Grounding 3-Types Control Logic Identify Faulted Feeder Y Y N N GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING SE-105, SE-107 SERIES pg. 58 SE-134C, SE-135 SERIES pg. 59 Ground-Conductor Monitoring Relays 3-Types Control Logic Cable Voltage <5kV >5kV GROUND-FAULT & GROUND-CHECK Ensure ground- conductor continuity for portable equipment and submersible pumps, and detect ground faults Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 14 FEEDER PROTECTION FPU-32 SERIES pg. 70 FPS SERIES pg. 70 ADVANCED Monitor voltage and current using a modular system with integrated protection, breaker control, metering, and data-logging functions STANDARD Protect distribution feeders in processing, manufacturing, petroleum, chemical, and wastewater treatment facilities Feeder Protection Relays Connectors Type Current Protection & Metering IEEE/IEC Overcurrent Current Protection, Connectors Type Voltage Protection, & Metering IEEE/IEC Overcurrent AF0500 SERIES pg. 77 PGR-8800 SERIES pg. 75 D0920 pg. 74 AF0100 SERIES pg. 79 Arc-Flash Relays ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Overcurrent Detection Y N N Y N Designed for use in OEM equipment Sensor Health Monitoring Y ARC-FLASH DETECTION Rapidly detect an arc flash to reduce damage to equipment and risk to personnel Multiple Zones, Communications, & Data Logging Product Selection Guide 15 Solid-State Switching Relays Phase Control Switching Relays SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS PHASE CONTROL Designed for changing lamp intensity, varying the speed of a fan, or controlling the temperature of a heater TEMPERATURE CONTROL A single set point controller with high current, solid state output for resistive loads SOLID-STATE RELAYS Designed for industrial applications requiring rugged, reliable operation SIR2 SERIES pg. 86 SLR SERIES pg. 88 SIR1 SERIES pg. 86 PHS SERIES pg. 84 Power Supply Zero Voltage Switching for Resistive and Incandescent Loads Designed for use in OEM equipment Random Switching for Inductive Loads Designed for use in OEM equipment Random Switching for Inductive Loads Y Y N N Designed for use in OEM equipment Optical Isolation Between the Control Voltage Input and the Solid-State Output TCR9C pg. 90 Temperature Control Relays Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 16 PGR-6100 SERIES pg. 94 111P pg. 106 SIO-RTD-02-00 SERIES pg. 128 SUPPLEMENTAL PROTECTION (MOTOR) Protection for motors against insulation degradation, overheating, or ventilation failure BASIC (PUMP) Protection of single-phase pumps against dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid-cycling and over/under voltage Power Supply Ground-Fault Protection & Insulation Monitoring Temperature Monitoring Using RTDs Hand-Held Diagnostic Tool Helpful for Troubleshooting MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Mounting Options Power Supply Power Supply Voltage Power Supply Voltage Basic Motor & Pump Protection 233P SERIES pg. 106 235P pg. 110 111- INSIDER-P pg. 101 231- INSIDER-P pg. 101 232- INSIDER pg. 104 234-P pg. 108 INFORMER pg. 250 SURFACE MOUNT OPEN BOARD 115V <3HP 230V 115V 1/3 - 1HP 1/3 - 3HP GRUNDFOS® >5HP 230V Connectors Type HP Connectors Type Control Box Type Connectors Type HP FRANKLIN™, PENTEK®, CENTRIPRO™ FOR ALL BASIC SINGLE-PHASE UNITS ON THIS PAGE Product Selection Guide 17 77C SERIES pg. 118 777-KW/ HP-P2 SERIES pg. 120 MPU-32 SERIES pg. 96 777-P2 SERIES pg. 114 MP8000 SERIES pg. 112 77CKW/HP SERIES pg. 125 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION STANDARD WITH BLUETOOTH® Multi-function protection for single-phase and three-phase low and medium voltage motors and pumps with real-time data, programming and troubleshooting via iPhone® or Android™ app STANDARD Multi-function protection for low and medium voltage motors Connectors Type Three-Phase Connectors Type Single-Phase Power Supply Under Power Protection for Pump Applications Under Power Protection Power Supply for Pump Applications Connectors Type Temperature Protection & Reduced Overcurrent Connectors Type 4-20mA Output Power N Y N N Y Y Y N Standard Motor & Pump Protection Standard Motor & Pump Protection with Bluetooth* 777-ACCUPOWER & COM 4-20 (use in combination) pg. 123 pg. 261 Standard Motor & Pump Protection *Bluetooth is a trademark of its respective owner Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 18 SINGLE-CHANNEL DUAL-CHANNEL Y N 8-PIN SOCKET DIN RAIL Designed for use in OEM equipment Mounting Option 3-Types Control Logic Seal Leak & Over Temperature Dual Seal Leak PUMP CONTROLLERS 201-100-SLD pg. 136 PC-102CICILT pg. 132 PC-102CICIDL pg. 132 460-15- 100-SLD pg. 139 Seal Leak Detection Designed for use in OEM equipment Controller Functionality MPU-32-X69X SERIES pg. 100 MPS-469X SERIES pg. 100 MPS SERIES pg. 98 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION RETROFITS Pre-wired plug & play replacement for obsolete and competitors’ relays ADVANCED Comprehensive voltage protection and starter control for medium voltage motors and pumps SEAL LEAK DETECTORS Detect pump seal leaks & motor overheating on submersible pumps Advanced Motor & Pump Protection Retrofits Product Selection Guide 19 PC-XXXLLC-GM SERIES pg. 134 LLC6 SERIES pg. 149 LLC4 SERIES pg. 145 LLC5 SERIES pg. 147 LLC2 SERIES pg. 143 PC-XXXLLC-CZ SERIES pg. 134 460-15- 100-LLS pg. 137 LLC1 SERIES pg. 141 LLC8 SERIES pg. 151 LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Control liquid pumping operations in a pump-up or pump-down application N Power Supply Probe Style Power Supply Compatibility Power Supply Probe Style PUMP CONTROLLERS Power Supply Mounting Option Y GEM’S SERIES 16M LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL CROUZET’S PNR & PNRU SERIES LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL Low Liquid Level Cut-off Protection That Meets UL 353 Low Liquid Level Cut-off Protection That Meets UL 353 8-PIN SOCKET 8-PIN SOCKET 11-PIN SOCKET DIN RAIL/ SURFACE MOUNT OPEN BOARD PROBE SINGLE PROBE DUAL PROBE DUAL PROBE SINGLE PROBE Liquid Level Controls Power Supply Sensing Type PC-105 pg. 133 FLOAT Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 20 SINGLE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N 11-PIN, DPDT 11-PIN, DPDT Power Supply Float Switch Configuration Mode Selector Switch 3-Types Mode Selector Switch Control Logic 3-Types Control Logic Mode Selector Switch Connectors Type 600VAC Rated Contacts ARPX1S SERIES pg. 157 ARPX2S SERIES pg. 157 ARPX3S SERIES pg. 157 ARP41 pg. 157 ARP43 pg. 157 ALT-XXX3-SW SERIES pg. 155 50R-400- ALT pg. 159 ALTXXXS-SW SERIES pg. 133 ALTXXX-S SERIES pg. 133 ALTXXXX-SW SERIES pg. 133 ALT-XXX1-SW SERIES pg. 155 ALTXXX-X SERIES pg. 133 DUAL Alternating Relays Connectors Type Debounce Delay Connectors Type Debounce Delay Debounce Delay Connectors Type Debounce Delay Connectors Type Debounce Delay Connectors 8-Pin, SPDT Type Connectors 8-Pin, SPDT Type ALTERNATING RELAYS Used in duplex pumping applications to balance the run time of both pumps PUMP CONTROLLERS DUAL PLUS STOP FLOAT Y Y Product Selection Guide 21 ACBC-120 -SD pg. 130 ACBC-120 pg. 130 ISS-100 pg. 160 ISS-105- ISO pg. 165 ISS-105- ISO-4 pg. 165 ISS-105- ISO-3 pg. 165 ISS-105 pg. 165 ISS-102 SERIES pg. 163 ISS-101 pg. 161 Power Supply Mounting Option Power Supply Number of Channels SINGLECHANNEL TWO CHANNELS THREE CHANNELS FOUR CHANNELS FIVE CHANNELS 8-PIN SOCKET DIN RAIL/ SURFACE MOUNT Intrinsically Safe Relays Intrinsically Safe Pump Controller ALARM CONTROLS/ BATTERY CHARGERS Dual-purpose alarm control/battery charger for pump control panels INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS Used to interface between hazardous and non-hazardous areas INTRINSICALLY SAFE PUMP CONTROLLER Programmable to control/equalize run time of 2, 3, or 4 pumps, with the ability to interface between hazardous and non-hazardous areas Alarm Control/Battery Charger PUMP CONTROLLERS Power Supply 12-Pin Socket Included Y N Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 22 202-RP pg. 206 201A-AU SERIES pg. 202 PLMU11 pg. 229 201A SERIES pg. 200 460 SERIES pg. 216 PLM SERIES pg. 231 PLS SERIES pg. 239 PLR SERIES pg. 237 DLMU SERIES pg. 224 SURFACE MOUNT DIN RAIL/SURFACE MOUNT VOLTAGE MONITORS (1 of 2) Highly accurate and precise voltage measurements to provide high sensitivity while minimizing nuisance tripping Y N Power Supply Mounting Options Designed for use in Reverse Phase Only Designed for use in OEM equipment Adjustable % Voltage Unbalance AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Power Supply Three-Phase 201-XXXDPDT SERIES pg. 204 11-PIN SOCKET Voltage Monitoring Relays Y Power Supply Unbalanced Voltage Protection N N Designed for use in OEM equipment Reverse Phase Only Y 2-8% RANGE 2-10% RANGE 8-PIN SOCKET N Designed for use in OEM equipment Adjustable Trip Delay & Adjustable Unbalance Y Connectors Type Contactor Failure Protection with/without Hand-held Diagnostic Tool 455 SERIES & INFORMER-MS (use in combination) pg. 214 pg. 250 Y Y N Product Selection Guide 23 250A SERIES pg. 208 601 SERIES pg. 218 HLMU SERIES pg. 227 WVM SERIES pg. 222 350 SERIES pg. 210 202 pg. 206 TVM SERIES pg. 235 355 SERIES pg. 212 102A SERIES pg. 198 TVW SERIES pg. 233 Y Y Y N N N VOLTAGE MONITORS (1 of 2) (Continued from previous page) AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Voltage Monitoring Relays Y Y N N N FORM C SCREW TERMINAL Connectors Type Output Contacts Power Supply Adjustable Trip Delays Power Supply Adjustable Voltage Range Power Supply N 600V Rated Designed for use in OEM equipment Adjustable % Unbalance Designed for use in OEM equipment Frequency Monitoring 2 FORM C Designed for use in OEM equipment Fault Memory Designed for use in OEM equipment Universal 190-480 VAC FORM C FAST-ONS Y Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 24 Current Monitoring/Load Sensing Relays AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 201-XXXSP-DPDT SERIES pg. 192 201- XXX-SP SERIES pg. 190 50R SERIES pg. 188 HLVA6I23 pg. 241 202-200- SP pg. 194 KVM SERIES pg. 243 460-XXXSP SERIES pg. 196 VOLTAGE MONITORS (2 of 2) (Continued from previous page) Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N Designed for use in OEM equipment Screw Terminals Designed for use in OEM equipment Adjustable Restart Delay Designed for use in OEM equipment Power Relay Output 2 Isolated Form C Contacts Connectors Type Power Supply Single-Phase SURFACE MOUNT 8-PIN SOCKET Voltage Monitoring Relays DIN RAIL/ SURFACE MOUNT CURRENT MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (1 of 2) Multi-purpose controls used for pump and motor protection, to provide closed-loop feedback in a system, as a proof relay to indicate a load is energized, and more... Power Supply Self Powered LSRX pg. 173 LSR-0 pg. 169 LSRX-C SERIES pg. 173 Mounting Options Power Supply Power Supply Relay Output Y Y N N SPDT Form C Depluggable Terminal Block Y N SPST FORM A 0.25” QUICK CONNECTS Product Selection Guide 25 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS DCSA SERIES pg. 185 LCS10T12 & LPM SERIES (LPM required) pg. 187 TCSA SERIES pg. 183 TCS SERIES pg. 181 ONBOARD TOROID REMOTE CURRENT SENSOR Connectors Type AC Current Transducer (4-20mA output) ECSW SERIES pg. 178 ECS SERIES pg. 175 CP5 SERIES pg. 168 Y Y N N Designed for use in OEM equipment Adjustable Trip Delay Designed for use in OEM equipment Screw Terminal Block Designed for use in OEM equipment Screw Terminals CONTROL VOLTAGE Y Y N CURRENT MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS (2 of 2) (Continued from previous page) Y Y Designed for use in OEM equipment Loop Powered Connectors Type Single Trip Point LSRU SERIES pg. 171 LSR-XXX SERIES pg. 170 N 1 Amp Solid-State Output Y N N N 0.25” QUICK CONNECTS LED CURRENT INDICATOR Current Monitoring/Load Sensing Relays Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 26 TIMERS HRPSD12HI pg. 317 HRIS SERIES pg. 317 KRPD SERIES pg. 424 KRPS SERIES pg. 281 KSPD SERIES pg. 406 KSPS SERIES pg. 288 HSPZA22SL pg. 339 KSPU SERIES pg. 370 FACTORY PROGRAMMABLE Microprocessor based circuitry provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability 1 of 12 DUAL FUNCTIONS 1 of 12 SINGLE FUNCTIONS High Power Relay Output Power Supply Solid-State Output Power Supply Designed for use in OEM equipment Dual Function Y Power Supply Relay Output Y Y N N N Factory Programmable Timers Power Supply Single Function Power Supply Single Function Power Supply DIP Switch Adjustment Power Supply DIP Switch Adjustment Connectors Type Isolated Contacts Power Supply Dual Function Y N Y N Y Y N N Product Selection Guide 27 TIMERS TRDU SERIES pg. 265 TRU SERIES pg. 268 DSQU SERIES pg. 272 DSTU SERIES pg. 272 ASTU SERIES pg. 270 ASQU SERIES pg. 270 MULTIFUNCTION Universal and fully programmable timing relays QUICK CONNECTS QUICK CONNECTS SCREW TERMINAL BLOCKS ON-BOARD KNOB DIP SWITCH Power Supply Timing Functions Available Solid-State Output Power Supply Power Supply Termination Style Power Supply Termination Style Designed for use in OEM equipment Timing Adjustment Power Supply Relay Output Y N Multifunction Timers 6 21 SCREW TERMINAL BLOCKS Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 28 HRDM SERIES pg. 277 TRM SERIES pg. 307 T10 pg. 274 KRDM SERIES pg. 279 ERDM SERIES pg. 275 TDML SERIES pg. 297 PRLM SERIES pg. 295 ORM SERIES pg. 293 MSM SERIES pg. 291 TDMH SERIES pg. 297 TDM SERIES pg. 297 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements Power Supply Contact Type Power Supply 480/600V Contacts Power Supply Timing Ranges Power Supply Package Style 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s Delay-on-Make Timers DELAY-ON-MAKE Connectors Type Relay Output 8-PIN OR 11-PIN PLUG-IN Power Supply Isolated Y Power Supply DIP Switch Adjustment Y N SPDT DPDT 8-PIN PLUG-IN Power Supply Relay with Isolated DPDT or SPDT Power Isolated Supply DPDT Relay PC MOUNT/ STRANDED WIRE LEADS TO REPLACE BIMETAL TYPE TIMERS OPEN PC BOARD Y N Y N TIMERS 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s N SURFACE MOUNT KNOB TIMING ADJUSTMENT Product Selection Guide 29 TH1 SERIES pg. 301 THD1B410.5S pg. 303 KSDU SERIES pg. 286 KSDU SERIES pg. 286 KSD1 SERIES pg. 284 KSD1 SERIES pg. 284 TSD1 SERIES pg. 311 TSD1 SERIES pg. 311 TS1 SERIES pg. 309 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) Power Supply Low Current (1A) Delay-on-Make Timers Y Y Solid-State with Normally Open Contacts Power Supply Power Supply High Current (6, 10, or 20A) N Timing Ranges Power Supply Timing Adjustment Style Power Supply 0.1 s – 600 m in 4 ranges 0.1 s – 1000 m in 6 ranges 1.5 s, 2 s, 30 s 20 s 1200 s .25 s, 4 s, 5 s, 6 s, 10 s 15 s, 90 s, 150 s, 180 s 1.2 s FIXED TIMERS Power Supply Timing Ranges TS441165 pg. 313 Connectors Type Normally Closed N FIXED (continued on next page) Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 30 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) TIMERS Delay-on-Make Timers TDU SERIES pg. 299 DIP SWITCH Timing Adjustment Style Power Supply KNOB Power Supply Timing Ranges Power Supply Timing Ranges TMV8000 pg. 305 KSD1 SERIES pg. 284 KSD1 SERIES pg. 284 TSD1 SERIES pg. 311 TSD1 SERIES pg. 311 0.1 s – 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.1 s – 100 h in 7 ranges 0.1 – 8 m range 5 – 480 s in 4 ranges 0.1 s – 100 h in 7 ranges 0.05 s – 120 s in 4 ranges TSU2000 pg. 305 TS1 SERIES pg. 309 EXTERNAL (continued from previous page) 0.1 s – 1000 m in 3 ranges Product Selection Guide 31 ORB SERIES pg. 323 KRDB SERIES pg. 319 HRDB SERIES pg. 315 TDBL SERIES pg. 325 TRB SERIES pg. 331 TDBH SERIES pg. 325 TDB SERIES pg. 325 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements Timing Ranges Power Supply Power Supply Timing Ranges Package Style Power Supply Delay-on-Break Timers DELAY-ON-BREAK Connectors Type Relay Output 8-PIN OR 11-PIN PLUG-IN Power Supply Isolated Power Supply Isolated Y DIP Switch Adjustment Power Supply Y N Power Supply Solid-State with Normally Open Contacts N SPDT/DPDT SPDT 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.1 s to 100 m in 5 ranges 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s OPEN PC BOARD SURFACE MOUNT KNOB ADJUSTMENT TIMERS Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 32 Y N THDB SERIES pg. 329 THD7 SERIES pg. 378 TSB SERIES pg. 333 TSDB SERIES pg. 335 TSD7 SERIES pg. 386 KSDB SERIES pg. 321 TDUB SERIES pg. 327 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) DIP SWITCH Power Supply Adjustment Style Power Supply Adjustment Style Power Supply Low Current (1A) Delay-on-Break Timers Extended Operating Temperature Range Power Supply Power Supply High Current (6, 10, or 20A) N Y FIXED/EXTERNAL 1 s to 1000 m in 5 ranges Timing Ranges Power Supply FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL TIMERS 0.1 s – 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.05 s – 600 s in 4 ranges Product Selection Guide 33 TSD94110SB pg. 390 KRDS SERIES pg. 341 ORS SERIES pg. 345 ERDI SERIES pg. 362 KRD9 SERIES pg. 388 TDSL SERIES pg. 348 TRS SERIES pg. 356 PRS65 pg. 347 TDSH SERIES pg. 348 HRDS SERIES pg. 337 TDS SERIES pg. 348 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements Timing Ranges Power Supply Power Supply Timing Ranges Power Supply Package Style Single Shot Timers SINGLE SHOT Connectors Type Retriggerable 8-PIN OR 11-PIN PLUG-IN Power Supply Relay Output Y Y 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges Power Supply Isolated DIP Switch Adjustment Power Supply Y Y N Power Supply Relay Output N Y N N N TIMERS 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s DPDT SPDT Y Power Supply Isolated OPEN PC BOARD SURFACE MOUNT Power Supply Fixed/Knob/ External Adjustment N Knob Adjust Only Power Supply Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 34 THDS SERIES pg. 354 THC421C pg. 352 TSDS SERIES pg. 358 THS SERIES pg. 352 KSDS SERIES pg. 343 TSS SERIES pg. 360 TDUS SERIES pg. 350 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) DIP SWITCH Timing Ranges Power Supply Power Supply Timing Ranges Power Supply Adjustment Style Power Supply Low Current (1A) Coin Vending Applications Power Supply Single Shot Timers FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL 0.05 s – 600 s in 4 ranges 0.1 s – 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.1 s – 1000 m in 6 ranges 0.1 s – 600 s in 4 ranges Y Y N Power Supply Solid-State with Normally Open Contacts Power Supply Extended Operating Temperature Range Power Supply Extended Operating Temperature Range High Current (6, 10, or 20A) Power Supply N Y N TIMERS Product Selection Guide 35 THD7 SERIES pg. 378 HRDI SERIES pg. 364 KRDI SERIES pg. 366 THD2 SERIES pg. 376 TDIL SERIES pg. 372 ERDI SERIES pg. 362 TDIH SERIES pg. 372 TDI SERIES pg. 372 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements Timing Ranges Power Supply Power Supply Package Style 1-1023 s in increments of 1 s 0.1-102.3 s in increments of 0.1 s 10-10,230 s in increments of 10 s Interval Timers INTERVAL Connectors Type Relay Output 8-PIN PLUG-IN SURFACE MOUNT Power Supply Isolated Y Y N Y N Power Supply Solid-State Output Power Supply High Current (6, 10, or 20A) 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges 1 s to 1000 m in 5 ranges TIMERS Timing Ranges Power Supply N DPDT SPDT Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 36 TDUI SERIES pg. 374 TS2 SERIES pg. 380 TSD2 SERIES pg. 382 TS6 SERIES pg. 380 TSD6 SERIES pg. 384 KSD2 SERIES pg. 368 TSD7 SERIES pg. 386 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) DIP SWITCH FIXED/EXTERNAL Power Supply Adjustment Style Power Supply Low Current (1A) Timing Ranges Power Supply DC Interval Timers FIXED/ ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL 1 s to 1000 m in 5 ranges 0.05 s - 600 s in 4 ranges AC Power Supply Input Voltage 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges AC Power Supply Input Voltage DC TIMERS 0.1 s to 100 h in 7 ranges Product Selection Guide 37 N KSD3 SERIES pg. 402 THD3C42A0 pg. 412 TSD3411S pg. 414 TDR SERIES pg. 410 ERD3425A pg. 391 HRDR SERIES pg. 396 KRD3 SERIES pg. 398 KRDR SERIES pg. 400 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements Power Supply Relay Output Power Supply Isolated Contacts Type Power Supply Timing Ranges Power Supply Power Supply Recycling Flashers Power Supply Low Current (1A) Power Supply Extended Operating Temperature Range High Current (6, 10, or 20A) Power Supply Power Supply Solid-State with Normally Open Contacts Package Style Power Supply Y Y Y 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges FIXED 0.1 s to 1000 m in 6 ranges Recycling Timers RECYCLING 8-PIN PLUG-IN N N Y SPDT DPDT Adjustment Style Power Supply FIXED/ONBOARD KNOB/EXTERNAL FIXED/ ONBOARD KNOB TIMERS N SURFACE MOUNT Y N Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 38 RS SERIES pg. 408 TSDR SERIES pg. 416 PTHF4900DK pg. 418 ESDR SERIES pg. 393 KSDR SERIES pg. 404 DEDICATED — SINGLE FUNCTION (Continued from previous page) KNOB/EXTERNAL/FIXED EXTERNAL DIP SWITCH Adjustment Style Power Supply Power Supply Input Voltage AC AC/DC PERCENTAGE Recycling Timers Percentage Timers TIMERS Product Selection Guide 39 T2D120A15M SERIES pg. 428 TDMB SERIES pg. 420 TA SERIES pg. 430 ESD5 SERIES pg. 422 CT SERIES pg. 426 HRV SERIES pg. 437 TAC1 SERIES pg. 432 TL SERIES pg. 434 DEDICATED Wide product offering to meet OEM and industrial requirements Power Supply Power Supply Fan Delay Low Voltage Brownout Protection Power Supply Y Lockout Delay Y Y N N N N Dedicated Timers – HVAC DUAL FUNCTION HVAC COIN VENDING Connectors Type Anti-short Cycle with Random Start Anti-short Cycle with Random Start Connectors Type Dedicated Timers – Dual Function Dedicated Timers – Coin Vending TIMERS TSA141300 pg. 436 Y DELAY-ON-MAKE/ INTERVAL DELAY-ON-MAKE/ DELAY-ON-BREAK Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 40 FS126 FS127 FS146 pg. 442 FS143 FS152 FS162 pg. 444 FS224 pg. 446 SC3/SC4 SERIES pg. 453 FSU1000 SERIES pg. 440 FS500 SERIES pg. 451 FS219-45 pg. 446 FS491 pg. 450 FS324 pg. 448 FS312 pg. 448 24, 120, or 230VAC 24VDC 24VDC 24 or 120VAC LOW AMP 12VDC 12VDC 45-150 (CUSTOM) 75 (FIXED) 10-180 (CUSTOM) 90 (FIXED) 45-150 (CUSTOM) 75 (FIXED) N 3 or 4 Channel Chaser Designed for Sequential Power Supply Circuit Flashing of Incandescent Lamp Loads Designed for use in OEM equipment Flashes Per Minute (FPM) Solid-State with Power Supply No Moving Parts Y Y N 10-100 ON-BOARD ADJUSTABLE Connectors Type Low Leakage for Controlling LED or Resistive Loads Connectors Type High Immunity to Line Noise and Transients for Moving Vehicle Applications 60-150 (CUSTOM) 75 (FIXED) Flashers FLASHERS Designed to cycle power to lamps and LEDs to turn them on and off repeatedly FLASHERS, TOWER & OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL For Controlling Inductive, Incandescent, or Resistive Loads Connectors Type Power Supply Medium Amp 24-240VAC; 1, 6, 10 or 20 AMP 8-PIN SOCKET Product Selection Guide 41 FLASHERS, TOWER & OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL FB SERIES pg. 457 SCR9L pg. 463 SCR490D pg. 458 SCR SERIES pg. 459 FB9L pg. 461 Power Supply Connectors Type Used to Provide Designed to Sense the Failure of Various Kinds of Lamps Remote Monitoring of Steady Burning Incandescent Marker and Obstruction Lighting Connectors Type Used to Monitor the Operation of One Two-lamp Incandescent Beacon and One Beacon Flasher FLASHER AND INCANDESCENT BEACON BEACON LAMPS/ STEADY SIDE LIGHTS FLASHING LED BEACON LAMPS FLASHING/STEADY LED BEACON LAMPS/ OBSTRUCTION LAMPS BEACON OR OBSTRUCTION LAMP UNIVERSAL LAMP ALARM RELAYS Monitors any failures in flashers & incandescent beacons, obstruction and universal lamps Alarm Relays Select product category STEP 1 Select the needed features in each category STEP 2 Find the recommended product for your application STEP 3 42 FLASHERS, TOWER & OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING CONTROL PCR SERIES pg. 465 FS SERIES pg. 455 FA SERIES pg. 455 PHOTO CONTROL Designed to meet the demands of the most vigorous requirement tower & obstruction lighting control. Factory calibrated to meet FAA and FCC specifications FLASHER (OFF FIRST) AUXILIARY MODULES Beacon Tower Flashers Photo Control BEACON TOWER FLASHERS Designed for use on communication towers, smoke stacks, cooling towers, tall buildings, bridges, and utility towers 43 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION Create safer working environments and reduce incidents of arc flash without affecting the uptime of critical operations. Vital in manufacturing and processing environments, sensitive ground-fault relays with advanced filtering will detect breakdown in insulation resistance without nuisance trips. Breakdown in insulation resistance can be caused by moisture, vibration, chemicals and dust. Ungrounded AC Systems EL3100 Series Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator................ 44 PGR-3100 Series Ground-Fault Indication System............................. 45 PGR-3200 Series Insulation Monitor.................................................. 46 Ungrounded DC System SE-601 Series DC Ground-Fault Monitor ....................................... 47 AC/DC Earthed System EL731 Series AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay................... 48 Solidly Grounded Systems SE-701 Series Ground-Fault Monitor............................................. 50 SE-703 Series Earth-Leakage Monitor........................................... 51 SE-704 Series Earth-leakage monitor............................................ 52 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters – Personnel Protection SB5000 Series Industrial Shock Block............................................ 53 SB6000 Series Industrial Shock Block............................................ 55 Generator and Single-Function PGR-4300 Series Generator Ground-Fault Relay................................ 57 For More Information… and to download our White Paper on Ground-Fault Protection with VFDs, visit Littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter 44 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Littelfuse.com/EL3100 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Ground-Fault Protection – Ungrounded AC Systems EL3100 SERIES Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator Description The EL3100 is a self-powered ground-fault and phase-voltage indication system for 3-phase systems. The EL3100 meets the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) requirements for ground detectors for ungrounded alternating-current systems. Voltage connections are provided on the EL3100 for 208, 240, 480, and 600-V systems. Three green LED’s on the EL3100 indicate the presence of phaseto-ground voltage and one red LED indicates a ground fault. The EL3100 can operate stand-alone or with up to five remote LED indicators. A solid-state relay output provides indication of a ground fault. The output relay is closed when the 3-phase neutral voltage shifts as the result of ground leakage. Specifications Input Voltage Input L: 208/240 Vac Input H: 480/600 Vac Dimensions H 87.0 mm (3.43”); W 112.5 mm (4.43”) D 56.0 mm (2.2”) Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), RCM (Australia) Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface ORDERING NUMBER MOUNTING EL3100-00 DIN, Surface Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS NEC® and CEC Code compliant Meets National Electrical Code (NEC®) Article 250.21 and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded systems Low-voltage remote LEDs System voltage is not present at the remote LED location Phase-voltage indication Indicates the presence of voltage on both grounded and ungrounded systems Output relay Allows for remote ground-fault indication Features & Benefits (Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator) EL3100 Remote LEDs AH G AL BH BL CH CL DN DR DG DA DB DC Output Relay A B C Note: X=R for red LED and G for green LED Y=0 for no label and 1 for a ground-fault label Remote LEDs High-intensity 16-mm IP67 LED lamps available in red and green colors. Accessories A A ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT RK-310X-0Y Optional Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. 45 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/PGR-3100 Ground-Fault Protection – Ungrounded AC Systems Description The PGR-3100 indicates the presence of voltage on each phase of a three-phase system. The LEDs on the panel illuminate when voltage is present. When a ground-fault occurs, the voltage on the faulted phase reduces to ground potential, causing the LEDs for the faulted phase to dim and the LEDs for the unfaulted phases to become brighter. Ungrounded ac systems are required by the National Electrical Code (NEC®) Article 250.21(B) and the Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) to have ground detectors, such as the PGR-3100, installed on the system. External potential transformers (PTs) can be used to step down system voltage, allowing the PGR-3100 to be applied to any system voltage. PTs are not required for system voltages up to 600 V ac. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS NEC® and CE Code compliant Meets National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250.21(B) and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded systems Phase LEDs Indicates presence of a ground fault and the faulted phase as well as phase-to-ground voltage on an energized bus Redundant LEDs Redundant long-life LEDs (two per phase) to ensure reliability Lamp test button Verifies LEDs are operating Specifications Input Voltage Up to 600 V ac 50/60 Hz Indicator Off Voltage < 30 V ac line to ground Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 108 mm (4.3”); D 54 mm (2.1”) Test Button Local Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting Panel ORDERING NUMBER MOUNTING PGR-3100 Panel mount Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram A PGR-3100 UNGROUNDED SUPPLY B C A L2 PGR-3200 L1 B C (Ground-Fault Indication System) (Insulation Monitor) Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. PGR-3100 SERIES Ground-Fault Indication System 46 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Littelfuse.com/pgr-3200 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Ground-Fault Protection – Ungrounded AC System A L2 PGR-3200 L1 B C (Insulation Monitor) Description The PGR-3200 detects ground faults by continuously monitoring the insulation integrity of ungrounded electrical systems. The relay monitors the insulation for damage and assists with predictive maintenance and troubleshooting of developing ground faults by providing two warning and an alarm level. The PGR-3200 operates on one- or three-phase ungrounded systems up to 6 kV. The PGR-3200 can also be used on a grounded system to monitor the insulation for damage, while the power system is de-energized. The mode-of-operation terminals (27-28) are connected to the circuit breaker or contactor auxiliary contacts to toggle the relay off when the contactor or breaker is closed. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Undervoltage Relay (27) Ground Detector Relay (64) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3”); W 100 mm (3.9”); D 115 mm (4.5”) Resistance Ratings Insulation warning (30 kΩ and 50 kΩ) Insulation alarm (10 kΩ) Contact Operating Mode Non-fail-safe Test Button Local Reset Button Local and remote Output Contacts Two Form C Analog Output 0-1 mA Conformally Coated Consult factory Approvals UL Listed (E183688) Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER PGR-3200 240 Vac(1) PGR-3200-120 120 Vac Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. To convert to a resistance grounded system, see neutral-grounding-resistors packages. (1) UL Not Available PGH Series High-Tension Coupler A PGH Series high-tension coupler is required for systems between 1,300 V and 6,000 V. PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Optional PGA-0510 Analog Meter allows for metering of insulation resistance. FEATURES BENEFITS NEC® and CEC Code compliant Meets National Electrical Code (NEC®) Article 250.21(B) and Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Section 10-106 (2) requirements for ungrounded systems Output contact (50 kΩ) Form C output contact for alarming when the insulation resistance is below 50 kΩ Output contact (10 kΩ) Form C output contact for tripping when the insulation resistance is below 10 kΩ Analog output (0-1 mA) Provides means for connecting to an optional meter (PGA-0510) or control system DIN-rail or surface mount Flexible options for ease of installation Features & Benefits Accessories A A ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGH Series Required >1,300 V PGA-0510 Optional PGR-3200 SERIES Insulation Monitor 47 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/se-601 Ground-Fault Protection – Ungrounded DC System Description The SE-601 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for ungrounded dc systems. It provides sensitive ground-fault protection without the problems associated with nuisance tripping. Ground-fault current is sensed using an SE-GRM Series Ground-Reference Module—a resistor network that limits ground-fault current to 25 mA. The SE-601 is used on ungrounded dc systems ranging from industrial 24-Vdc control circuits to 1000-Vdc solar and transportation systems. SE-601 SERIES (PGR-2601) DC Ground-Fault Monitor Specifications IEEE Device Numbers DC Overcurrent Relay (76G) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3.0”); W 55 mm (2.2”); D 115 mm (4.5”) Trip Level Settings 1-20 mA Trip Time Settings 0.05 -2.5 s Output Contacts Isolated Form A and Form B Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Test Button Local Reset Button Local and remote Analog Output 0-5 V Conformally Coated Consult factory Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), C-Tick (Australian) Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-601-OU 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-601-OD 12/24 Vdc SE-601-OT 48 Vdc ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-GRM SERIES Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55 Optional PMA-60 Optional Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram SE-GRM Series Ground-Reference Module Required accessory, used to connect the SE-601 DC Ground-Fault Monitor to the DC bus. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of 22 mA. FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (1-20 mA) Ten settings provide a wide range of low-level protection Adjustable time delay (50 ms-2.5 s) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection or delayed response Output contacts Form A and Form B output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Analog output (0-5 V) Provides means for connecting to a meter (PGA-0500) or a control system Non-volatile trip Memory Retains trip state when de-energized to simplify troubleshooting Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allow connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Microprocessor based No calibration required saves on maintenance cost Features & Benefits Accessories A GROUND-REFERENCE MODULE UNGROUNDED SUPPLY L2 SE-601 SE-GRM SERIES L1 + - (DC Ground-Fault Monitor) A 48 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Littelfuse.com/EL731 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. CT1 CT2 L2 L1 GROUNDED AC SUPPLY EL731 SERIES (AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay) A B C CT1 L2 L1 EL731 SERIES (AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay) GROUNDED DC SUPPLY + – Description The EL731 is a microprocessor-based AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay that offers complete coverage for all frequencies from 0 to 6,000 Hz. Two CTs are required for the entire frequency range, or one CT can be used for only low- or high-frequency detection. An RTD/PTC sensor input allows over-temperature protection for a motor or drive. The EL731 offers metering, password-protected alarm and trip settings and optional network communications. It is primarily used to add low-level ground-fault protection to variable-speed drives, and to dc circuits. EL731 SERIES AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER COMMUNICATIONS EL731-00-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc None EL731-01-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc DeviceNet™ EL731-02-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc Profibus® EL731-03-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc EtherNet/IP™ EL731-04-X0 120/240 Vac/Vdc Modbus® TCP EL731-10-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac None EL731-11-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac DeviceNet™ EL731-12-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac Profibus® EL731-13-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac EtherNet/IP™ EL731-14-X0 48 Vdc & 24 Vac Modbus® TCP EL731-20-X0 24 Vdc None EL731-21-X0 24 Vdc DeviceNet™ EL731-22-X0 24 Vdc Profibus® EL731-23-X0 24 Vdc EtherNet/IP™ EL731-24-X0 24 Vdc Modbus® TCP Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT EFCT Series CT One Required AC700-CUA Series Com. Unit Optional AC700-SMK Surface-Mount Kit Optional AC700-CVR-00 Watertight Cover (IP66) for Panel-Mount Applications Optional PGA-0520 Analog Meter Optional Accessories EFCT Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. A A A A AC Mode DC Mode Ground-Fault Protection – AC/DC Earthed System Note: When building a part number, replace the “X” with “1” for AS/NZS 2081:2011 Compliant product, “0” otherwise. AC700-CUA Series Communication Adapter Optional network-interface and firmware-upgrade communications adapters field-install in EL731. AC700-SMK DIN-rail & Surface-mount Adapter EL731 plugs into adapter for back-plane mounting. For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page. 49 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/EL731 14 L1 L2/N GND NC TC TB TA TC TB TA TC PTC RTD 4-20mA PGA-0520 EFCT-X EFCT-X SUPPLY t˚ +t˚ TB TA AB AA ANALOG OUT REMOTE RESET RTD/PTC LINE 1 LINE 2/N OPTIONAL NETWORK COMM FAULT 20-6000 HZ CT DC-90 HZ CT RST GND SH1 S12 S11 SH2 S22 S21 19 K1 22 25 K2 K3 20 16 15 18 21 23 24 26 17 2 1 5 4 3 11 10 9 8 7 6 13 12 AC/DC SENSITIVE EARTH-LEAKAGE RELAY EL731 + – Specifications IEEE Device Numbers AC ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N), DC ground fault (79G), PTC overtemperature (49), RTD temperature (38, 49) Supply Voltage 120/240 Vac/Vdc, 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc/24 Vac Trip Level Settings 30-5,000 mA AC and DC Alarm Level Settings 30-5,000 mA AC and DC Trip Delay 0.05-2 s Output Contacts 3 Form C (programmable) Contact Operating Mode Fail-safe & non-fail-safe Reset Front panel and remote Freq. Response, CT1 0-90 Hz Freq. Response, CT2 20-6,000, 190-6,000, 20-90, 20-3,000 Hz; selectable Current Transformer EFCT-x series CT Detection Open & short detection Terminals Plug-in, wire clamping, 24 to 12 AWG (0.2-2.5 mm2 ) Communications EtherNet/IP™, DeviceNet™, Profibus®, Modbus® TCP (optional) Analog Output 4-20 mA (selectable 0-5 A or 0-100% trip-level setting) Conformal Coating Standard feature Dimensions H 48 mm (1.9”); W 96 mm (3.8”); D 129 mm (5.0”) Approvals UL Listed (E340889), CSA, RCM (Australia), CE Warranty 5 years Mounting Panel; Surface and DIN (with optional AC700-SMK) FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (30-5,000 mA) Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Frequency range (0-90 Hz, 20-6,000 Hz) Operate in either AC or DC mode or both. Use single or combined ranges. Separate metering 32-char OLED display Earth-leakage metering, setup and programming Local LED indication Visual Trip, Alarm, CT connection indication CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Analog output (4-20 mA) Connect to DCS. Allows connection to an optional meter (PGA-0520) or control system Adjustable time delay Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Alarm and trip settings Detect a deteriorating condition before damage occurs Temperature-sensor input Drive or motor temperature protection Output contacts 3 programmable: Operate 2 alarm and 1 trip circuit Network communication Optional connection to plant network Harmonic filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping due to harmonic noise Microprocessor based No required calibration saves maintenance cost Universal power supply Provides flexibility for numerous applications Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram Ground-Fault Protection – AC/DC Earthed System EL731 SERIES AC/DC Sensitive Earth-Leakage Relay Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. 50 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Littelfuse.com/se-701 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Description The SE-701 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistance- and solidly-grounded systems. In addition to common systems, it is uniquely suited for use on systems with significant harmonic content. The SE-701 can provide main-plant protection, feeder-level protection, or individual-load protection. Proper current transformer selection provides the desired pickup range. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. SE-701 SERIES (PGR-5701) Ground-Fault Monitor Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") Trip Level Settings 1-99% CT-Primary Rating Trip Time Settings 0.05-2.5 s Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Test Button Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature CT-Loop Monitoring Standard feature Output Contacts Isolated Form A and Form B Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), C-Tick (Australian) Analog Output 0-5 V Conformally coated Consult factory Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-701-OU 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-701-OD 12/24 Vdc SE-701-OT 48 Vdc SE-701-O3 24 Vac Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (1-99%) Trip setting based on input CT primary, allows use with any CT. Minimum 50 mA with EFCT Series. Adjustable time delay (50 ms-2.5 s) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Output contacts Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Analog output (0-5 V) Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or a control system CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable DFT or peak detection filtering Compatible with variable-speed drives Harmonic filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping Non-volatile trip memory Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify troubleshooting Microprocessor based No calibration required, saves on maintenance cost Universal power supply Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Features & Benefits Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT Current Transformer Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55, PMA-60 Optional SE-EFVC Voltage Clamp Optional Accessories Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required current transformer model depends on application. We offer a variety of sensitive CTs with 5- and 30-A primaries. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of the CT primary rating. A B A B C L2 L1 GROUNDED SUPPLY SE-701 SERIES (Ground-Fault Monitor) CT A Ground-Fault Protection – Solidly Grounded Systems 51 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/se-703 Ground-Fault Protection – Solidly Grounded Systems SE-703 SERIES Earth-Leakage Monitor Description The SE-703 is a microprocessor-based earth-fault relay for resistanceand solidly earthed systems. It offers sensitive earth-fault detection as low as 25 mA and can be used on systems with significant harmonic content. The SE-703 provides feeder-level protection or individual-load protection. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. The SE-703 is specifically designed to be AS/NZS 2081 compliant to either 2011 or 2002 (see ordering options). Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") Trip Level Settings 25-500 mA Trip Time Settings INST-500 ms Contact Operating Mode Fail-safe (x=0 models) or selectable (x=2 models) Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Test Button Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature CT-Loop Monitoring Standard feature Output Contacts Two isolated Form C contacts Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), RCM (Australian) Compliance AS/NZS 2081:2011 (x=0 models) or AS/NZS 2081: 2002 (x=2 models) Analog Output 0-5 V Conformally coated Yes Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-703-0U-0x 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-703-0D-0x 12/24 Vdc SE-703-0T-0x 48 Vdc SE-703-03-0x 24 Vac Note: x=0 for AS/NZS 2081:2011 compliance (fail-safe output contacts) x=2 for AS/NZS 2081:2002 compliance (selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe output contacts Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (25-500 mA) Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of lowlevel protection and system coordination Adjustable time delay (INST-500 ms) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Output contacts 2 Form C ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Analog output (0-5 V) Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Contact operating mode Fail-safe operating mode for undervoltage applications, optional non-fail-safe mode available Harmonic filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping Non-volatile trip memory Retains trip state while de-energized to simplify troubleshooting Microprocessor based No calibration required, saves maintenance cost Universal power supply Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Global certifications Compliant with US, Canadian, European, and Australian standards for applications in almost any country Features & Benefits ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT EFCT Series Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55 Optional PMA-60 Optional SE-EFVC Voltage Clamp Optional Accessories EFCT Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low-level detection. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays groundfault current as a percentage of the set-point or 5 A. PMA-60 Series – Mounting Adapter Required when panel mounting for AS/NZS 2081:2011 compliance A CT L2 L1 GROUNDED SUPPLY SE-703 SERIES (Earth-Leakage Monitor) A B C A 52 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 Littelfuse.com/se-704 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Ground-Fault Protection – Solidly Grounded Systems Description The SE-704 is a microprocessor-based ground-fault relay for resistanceand solidly-grounded systems. It offers very sensitive ground-fault detection as low as 10 mA and can be used on systems with significant harmonic content. The output contacts can be connected for use in protective tripping circuits (such as for marina or boatyard feeder circuits) or in alarm indication circuits. The analog output can be used with a PLC or a meter. The SE-704 can be integrated with a shunt trip circuit breaker to meet CE code C22.1-21 Section 78-052(2) and NEC article 555.35(A)(1), 555.35(3), and 555.53 for marina applications. SE-704 SERIES (PGR-4704) Earth-Leakage Monitor Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3.0"); W 55 mm (2.2"); D 115 mm (4.5") Trip Level Settings 10 mA–5.0 A Trip Time Settings 30–2000 ms Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Test Button Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature CT-Loop Monitoring Standard feature Output Contacts Isolated Form A and Form B Approvals UL Listed (E340889), CSA, CE (European Union) RCM (Australian) Analog Output 0–5 V & 0–1 mA Conformally coated Optional Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-704-0U 120/240 Vac/Vdc SE-704-0D 12/24 Vdc SE-704-0T 48 Vdc SE-704-03 24 Vac Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (10 mA–5 A) Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Adjustable time delay (30 ms–2.0 s) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Output contacts Form A and Form B ground-fault output contacts for operation of separate annunciation and trip circuits Analog output (0–5 V & 0–1 mA) Allows for connecting an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Harmonic filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping Non-volatile trip memory Retains trip state when de-energized to simplify troubleshooting Microprocessor based No calibration required saves maintenance cost Universal power supply Allows operation in application where one side of PT is faulted, provides flexibility for numerous applications Features & Benefits Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS30 Series Required PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55, PMA-60 Optional Accessories ELCT30 or SE-CS30 Series Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. Flux conditioner is included to prevent saturation. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays groundfault current as a percentage of the set-point or 5 A. A CT L2 L1 SE-704 SERIES (Earth-Leakage Monitor) A B C GROUNDED SUPPLY A 53 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Simplified Circuit Diagram AUXILIARY CONTACT K LOAD G TERMINATION DEVICE G L1 L2 L3 SB5000 GC A FEATURES BENEFITS UL 943 inverse time trip curve Inverse time detection circuit protects people while also reducing the probability of nuisance tripping DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) filtering algorithm Eliminates nuisance trips due to harmonics Minimum trip time < 20 msec Reduces the risk of ventricular fibrillation for leakage current of 250 mA and above Fixed 6 mA (UL 943) or 20 mA (UL 943C) trip level UL Listed GFCI and Special-Purpose GFCI personnel protection for industrial and commercial loads up to 60 A Selectable trip levels (EGFPD) The settings below 20 mA provide extra safety. The settings above 20 mA can reduce nuisance tripping on systems with high leakage current Two-stage ground monitor with Zener termination that meets UL 943C, CSA M421 Proactively protects from shock by tripping if continuity of ground wire between Industrial Shock Block and load is broken Flexible configuration Selectable manual reset or autoreset for brownout, power up, and ground monitor interruptions to fit plant safety protocols Conformal coating Internal PWB is conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture Auxiliary contact Alerts your SCADA system if the Shock Block is energized or tripped Automatic self-test The Shock Block will continuously test itself and will trip if there is an internal failure GFCI Class A, C, D and EGFPD options in one series Simplified planning and operator familiarity for multiple applications/requirements Features & Benefits Description Special-Purpose Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (SPGFCI), Class C and Class D Industrial Shock Block (ISB) is a personnel protection device designed to meet the requirements for special-purpose GFCIs defined by UL 943C. This standard outlines GFCI classes specifically designed for use in industrial facilities. Class C GFCIs are intended to be used on three-phase systems where the line-to-line voltage is 480 V or less with a trip level of 20 mA, while Class D GFCIs are intended to be used on 600 V systems. The Industrial Shock Block includes DFT harmonic filtering, an automatic self-test feature and is compliant to the UL 1998 Software in Programmable Components standard. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Class A The Shock Block is available as a 208 V Class A GFCI, allowing commercial kitchens, construction sites, and other non-dwelling units with wet areas to meet NEC 210.8(B) for their three-phase loads up to 60 A. Equipment Ground-Fault Protective Device (EGFPD) Industrial Shock Block is also available with adjustable protection settings as an EGFPD. The EGFPD models can be set to trip at 6 mA or from 10–100 mA in increments of 10 mA. This offers more flexibility since GFCI devices are not allowed to have an adjustable trip level. Ratings and Models Industrial Shock Block (GFCI & EGFPD) is available for threephase voltages from 208 to 600 V with a maximum full load current of either 32 or 60 A. The power system can be either solidly or high-resistance grounded and the load must be three phase without a neutral. The standard enclosure is IP 69K/NEMA 4X and outdoor rated, suitable for all industrial environments including hightemperature washdown used in food production. A Class II, Division 2 option is also available for applications where explosive dust may be present (future option). Ground Wire (Load-Ground) Monitor The Industrial Shock Block also monitors the ground wire (load-ground) connection between the Industrial Shock Block and load. This is a required feature for Class C and D GFCI devices and is recommended for Class A GFCI and EGFPD devices. If the ground-return path is broken, the Industrial Shock Block will trip and provide an alarm by changing the state of the alarm contacts. This monitoring circuit includes an extra wire (pilot wire) between the Industrial Shock Block and load. At the load, the pilot wire is connected to a termination device. The other end of the termination device is connected to the load ground (typically the enclosure). Ground-Fault Circuit Interruptors – Personnel Protection SB5000 SERIES 54 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Ground-Fault Circuit Interruptors – Personnel Protection SB5000 SERIES Specifications Voltage Rating 208 V, 480 V, 600 V Current Rating 32 or 60 A (continuous) System Type Three-phase, 3-wire (no neutral), 60 Hz Short-Circuit Current Rating 10,000 A extendable to 50,000 A (see manual) Trip Level Settings Fixed at 6 mA (Class A models) Fixed at 20 mA (Class C/D models) Selectable 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 mA (EGFPD models) Trip Time Setting Inverse time curve according to UL 943 Ground Monitoring Circuit Selectable short or Zener termination; Fail-safe; CSA M421 compliant Enclosure IP 69K and NEMA 4X (Outdoor), Polycarbonate, Lockable Operating Temperature -35 °C (-31 °F) to 40 °C (104 °F), up to 60 °C (151 °F) with derating Approvals UL Listed Class A GFCI (UL 943) UL Listed Class C, D SPGFCI (UL 943C) cULus Listed EGFPD (UL 943/UL 1053) UL 1998 Dimensions H 11.25" x W 9.56" x D 4.44" Accessories 1N5339B - Termination Device Axial-lead ground-check termination, included with SB5000 series SE-TA6 - Termination Assembly Optional termination assembly with terminals and mounting holes SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly Optional ground-check termination for submersible pumps SE-TA6ASF-WL Series - Termination Assembly Compact 12 W ground-check termination assembly Connection Diagram The SB5000 is installed in-line between incoming power or existing overcurrent protection device and the load. ORDERING NUMBER LOAD RATING (A) VOLTAGE (V) TRIP LEVEL (MA) UL CLASS SB5032-00x-0 32 208 20 (Fixed) UL 943C Class C SPGFCI SB5032-20x-0 480 SB5032-30x-0 600 UL 943C Class D SPGFCI SB5032-01x-0 208 6, 10–100 in increments of 10 (Selectable) SB5032-21x-0 480 UL 943/UL 1053 EGFPD SB5032-31x-0 600 SB5032-02x-0 208 6 (Fixed) UL 943 Class A GFCI SB5060-00x-0 60 208 20 (Fixed) UL 943C Class C SPGFCI SB5060-20x-0 480 SB5060-30x-0 600 UL 943C Class D SPGFCI SB5060-01x-0 208 6, 10–100 in increments of 10 (Selectable) SB5060-21x-0 480 UL 943/UL 1053 EGFPD SB5060-31x-0 600 SB5060-02x-0 208 6 (Fixed) UL 943 Class A GFCI Note: Replace x with 1 for IP 69K/NEMA 4X Enclosure; replace with 2 to add Class II, Division 2 rating (future option). Ordering Information A Electrical Panel SB5060-021-0 208 V, 60 A, Class A GFCI 55 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/IndustrialShockBlock Ground-Fault Circuit Interruptors – Personnel Protection SB6000 SERIES Simplified Circuit Diagram AUXILIARY CONTACT K LOAD SB-OPI (Operator Interface) G TERMINATION DEVICE ENCLOSED SB6100 MODELS G L1 L2 L3 SB6100 * GC * For a single-phase load; Jumper L2 & L3 & use L1 & L2 as the input terminals A B *Patented Enclosed Model* Open-Chassis Model* Operator Interface* ORDERING NUMBER VOLTAGE (V) TRIP LEVEL (MA) UL CATEGORY/CLASS SB6100-00x-0 208 20 (Fixed) UL 943C Class C special-purpose GFCI SB6100-10x-0 240 SB6100-20x-0 480 SB6100-30x-0 600 UL 943C Class D special-purpose GFCI SB6100-01x-0 208 6, 10–100 in increments of 10 UL 943/UL 1053 Equipment ground-fault protective device (EGFPD) SB6100-11x-0 240 SB6100-21x-0 480 SB6100-31x-0 600 SB6100-02x-0 208 6 (Fixed) UL 943 Class A GFCI Ordering Information Note: x=0 for open-chassis models and 1 for enclosed models FEATURES BENEFITS UL 943 inverse time trip curve Detects and interrupts to protect people and reduce the probability of nuisance tripping Minimum trip time < 20 msec Reduces the risk of ventricular fibrillation for leakage current of 250 mA and above Fixed 6 mA (UL 943) or 20 mA (UL 943C) trip level Personnel protection for industrial and commercial systems on loads up to 100 A Selectable trip levels (EGFPD) Provides extra safety when a customer is able to operate with a setting below 20 mA (GFCI) and the settings above 20 mA can reduce nuisance tripping on systems with high leakage current UL 943C ground monitor/ interrupt Protects from shock by tripping if continuity of ground wire between Industrial Shock Block and load is broken Undervoltage, brownout, chatter detection Ensures proper operation and prolongs the internal contactor lifetime 3 x Class T, 600 V incoming fuses The fuses provide overcurrent protection for a 100 A circuit and a higher short-circuit current rating (SCCR) of 50 kA Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture, yet still repairable Operator Interface Shows unit status, alarm types, percentage of leakage current, and allows for Test and Reset capabilities Auxiliary Contact Provides a normally-open contact for remote indication Automatic Self-Test All units include an automatic self-test feature include an automatic self-test feature Motor Starter Allows the user to start and stop the motor from the interface Features & Benefits Description Special-Purpose Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Class C and Class D Industrial Shock Block (ISB) is a personnel protection device designed to meet the requirements for special-purpose GFCIs defined by UL 943C. This standard outlines GFCI classes specifically designed for use in industrial facilities. Class C GFCIs are intended to be used on three-phase systems where the line-toline voltage is 480 V or less with a trip level of 20 mA, while Class D GFCIs are intended to be used on 600 V systems. The Industrial Shock Block includes an automatic self-test feature and is compliant to the UL 1998 Software in Programmable Components standard. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Class A The Shock Block is available as a Class A GFCI, allowing commercial kitchens and commercial establishments with wet areas to meet NEC 210.8(B) for their 3-phase loads up to 100 A. Equipment Ground-Fault Protective Device (EGFPD) Industrial Shock Block is also available with adjustable protection settings as an EGFPD. The EGFPD models can be set to trip at 6 mA or from 10-100 mA in increments of 10 mA. This offers more flexibility since GFCI devices are not allowed to have an adjustable trip level. Rating and Models Industrial Shock Block (GFCI & EGFPD) is available for three-phase voltages from 208 to 600 V with a maximum full load current of 100 A, and a built-in overcurrent protection supplied by Littelfuse Class T fuses. The load must be 3-phase, however, cannot have a neutral. The power system can either be solidly-grounded or high-resistance grounded. Two options for enclosures are available: UL-recognized open-chassis models are available for installation in existing electrical enclosures and UL-listed enclosed models include a NEMA-4X enclosure for stand-alone installations. Ground Wire (Load-Ground) Monitor The Industrial Shock Block also monitors the ground wire (load-ground) connection between the Industrial Shock Block and load. This is a required feature for Class C and D GFCI devices and and is recommended for Class A and EGFPD devices devices. If the connection is broken, the Industrial Shock Block will trip and provide an alarm by changing the state of the alarm contacts. This monitoring circuit includes an extra wire (pilot wire) between the Industrial Shock Block and load (since the monitoring current is low, only a small wire is required). At the load, the pilot wire is connected to a termination device. The other end of the termination device is connected to the load ground (typically the enclosure). 56 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Operator Interface (AC6000-OPI-00) 1N5339B - Termination Device Axial-lead ground-check termination, included with SB6000 series SE-TA6 - Termination Assembly Optional termination assembly with terminals and mounting holes SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly Optional ground-check termination for submersible pumps AC6000-CART-00 Two-wheeled Cart Optional for mounting ISB to allow for moving the unit while power is off AC6000-MNT-00 Mounting Frame Optional for mounting ISB to a cart or other surface. Included with the AC6000-CART-00. Littelfuse.com/IndustrialShockBlock Specifications Voltage Rating See ordering information Current Rating 100 A (continuous) System Type 3-phase, 3-wire (no neutral), 60 Hz Short-Circuit Current Rating 50,000 A Trip Level Settings Selectable (6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 mA), fixed at 6 mA, or fixed at 20 mA Trip Time Setting Inverse time trip curve Enclosure NEMA 4X, Polyester, Lockable Operating Temperature –35 °C (–31 °F) to + 40 °C (104 °F), up to + 66 °C (151 °F) with derating Wiring Requirements 2/0 AWG (maximum) Approval GFCI: UL Listed (enclosed models) and UL Recognized Component (open-chassis models) EGFPD: cULus Listed (enclosed models) and cURus Recognized Component (open-chassis models); UL1998 Compliant (revision 01 or higher); All models except SB6100-02x-0 CSA Certified Dimensions Enclosed: H 453.8 mm (17.9”); W 406.2 mm (16.0”); D 223.3 mm (8.8”) Open-chassis: H 455.0 mm (17.9”); W 340.7 mm (13.4”); D 174.9 mm (6.8”) Warranty 1 year Accessories Connection Diagram The SB6100 is installed in-line between incoming power or existing overcurrent protection device and the load. The open-chassis SB6100 can be installed in electrical equipment and the enclosed version is typically wall-mounted. Ground-Fault Circuit Interruptors – Personnel Protection SB6000 SERIES A B * Page in Protection Relay & Controls Catalog ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PAGE* AC6000-OPI-00 Included N/A 1N5339B Included 120 SE-TA6 Optional 120 SE-TA6-SM Optional 120 SE-TA6ASF-WL Optional 120 AC6000-CART-00 Optional N/A AC6000-MNT-00 Optional N/A Ordering Information - Accessories Incoming Power SB6100 Industrial Shock Block Enclosed Model Circuit Breaker SB6100 Industrial Shock Block Open-Chasis Model Circuit Breaker 57 Protection Relays GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION 1 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Littelfuse.com/pgr-4300 Ground-Fault Protection – Generator and Single-Function PGR-4300 SERIES (GFA300) Generator Ground-Fault Relay ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER PGR-4300-12 12 Vdc PGR-4300-24 24 Vdc PGR-4300-120 120 Vac Description The PGR-4300 Generator Ground-Fault Relay provides a simple method for detecting a ground-fault condition on generators without the need for current transformers (CTs). This greatly simplifies the installation. In addition, it is compatible with both three- and four-pole transfer switches. This relay also monitors the neutral-to-ground path for continuity. The PGR-4300 is ideal for any generator or application where there is not sufficient space to install CTs. Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS No CTs required Saves space and simplifies installation Adjustable pickup (100-1200 A) Adjustable trip setting provides a wide range of protection and allows system coordination Adjustable time delay (0-1.0 s) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Output contacts Form C ground-fault output contacts for alarming or tripping purposes Analog output (0-1 mA) Provides means for connecting to an optional meter (PGA-0500) or control system N-G continuity alarm Monitors neutral-to-ground integrity and alarms if ground path becomes open circuit Passive filtering Eliminates nuisance tripping Features & Benefits PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Optional panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of the set-point. Accessories ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGA-0500 Optional PMA-55 Optional PMA-60 Optional Note: For optional conformal coating please consult factory. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3.0”); W 55 mm (2.2”); D 115 mm (4.5”) Trip Level Settings 100-1200 A Trip Time Delay Settings 0-1.0 s Contact Operating Mode Non-fail-safe Test Button Local Reset Button Local and remote Output Contacts Form C Analog Output 0-1 mA Conformally Coated Consult factory Approvals UL Listed (E183688) Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface (standard) Panel (with PMA-55 or PMA-60 adapter) PGR-4300 (Generator Ground-Fault Relay) Control Power G 58 Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 59 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING 2 Protection Relays For More Information… and to download our technical note on Ground-Fault Ground-Check, visit Littelfuse.com/Ground-faultPaper GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING Continuously monitor the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. SE-105 / SE-107 Series Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor....... 60 SE-134C / SE-135 Series Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor....... 61 60 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/se-105, Littelfuse.com/se-107 GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING 2 SE-105 / SE-107 SERIES Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor Description The SE-105/SE-107 is a combination ground-wire monitor and ground-fault relay for resistance-grounded systems. It continuously monitors the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. The SE-105/SE-107 is an excellent choice for trailing cables 5 kV and under in underground mining applications. For higher voltages or long-cable applications, see the SE-134C/SE-135. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC), Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 150 mm (5.9”); W 109 mm (4.3”); D 100 mm (4.0”) Trip Level Settings 0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A Trip Time Settings 0.1-1.0 s Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe (SE-105) Fail-safe only (SE-107) Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Reset Button Local and remote Output Contacts Isolated Form A Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), C-Tick (Australian) Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting Surface ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-105 120 Vac SE-105D 120 Vac/Vdc SE-105E 240 Vac SE-107 120 Vac SE-107D 120 Vac/Vdc SE-107E 240 Vac Ordering Information Consult manual online for additional ordering options. Simplified Circuit Diagram CT200 Series Current Transformer Required CT detects ground-fault current. 1N5339B Termination Device 5 W axial-lead ground-check termination; included with SE-105/SE-107. SE-TA6 Termination Assembly Optional termination assembly with convenient terminals and mounting holes SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly Optional 50 W ground-check termination that is robust and compact for submersible pumps. Wire lead simplifies installation. Accessories A B TRAILING CABLE CT L2 L1 TERMINATION DEVICE A G GC C GROUNDED B SUPPLY M SE-105 SERIES SE-107 SERIES (Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor) B FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A) Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing cable applications Adjustable time delay (0.1-2.0 s) Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Harmonic filter Prevents false operation Zener-characteristic termination assembly Provides reliable ground-check loop verification Fail-safe ground-check circuit Ensures ground-check circuit remains safe even in the event of equipment failure Conformal coating Additional coating protects circuit boards against harsh environment SE-105: selectable UV- or shunt-trip mode Provides flexibility for different applications SE-107: UV-trip mode only Eliminates chance of unauthorized change to trip circuit Features & Benefits ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT CT200 Series Required 1N5339B Included SE-TA6, SE-TA6-SM Optional SE-TA6A Series Optional RK-102, RK-105, RK-105I Optional RK-13 Optional PPI-600V Optional A Ground-Conductor Monitoring © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 61 Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/se-134c, Littelfuse.com/se-135 GROUND-CONDUCTOR MONITORING 2 Ground-Conductor Monitoring SE-134C / SE-135 SERIES Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor Description The SE-134C/SE-135 is a microprocessor-based, combination ground-wire monitor and ground-fault relay for resistancegrounded or solidly grounded systems. It continuously monitors the integrity of the ground conductor to protect portable equipment from hazardous voltages caused by ground faults. The SE-134C/SE-135 is field proven in monitoring trailing cables on large mobile equipment such as drag-lines, mining shovels, shore-to-ship power cables, dock-side cranes, stackerreclaimers, submersible pumps, and portable conveyors. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Checking or Interlocking Relay (3GC), Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac; 85-275 Vdc; 18-72 Vdc Dimensions H 213 mm (8.4"); W 99 mm (3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2") Trip Level Settings 0.5 -12.5 A for SE-CS10, 2 - 50 A for SE-CS40 Trip Time Settings 0.1-2.5 s Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Test Button Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature Output Contacts Isolated Form A and Form B, Two Form C Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), C-Tick (Australia)(3), CE(3) Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting Panel, Surface GC Trip Resistance 28Ω (Standard), 45Ω (XGC Option) ORDERING NUMBER OPTION POWER SUPPLY COMM SE-134C Blank or XGC 0=120/240 Vac/Vdc 0=None 1=24/48 Vdc (1) SE-135 Blank or XGC 0=120/240 Vac/Vdc 0=None 1=24/48 Vdc (1) (2) 3=Ethernet (1) Ordering Information (1) CE/C-Tick not available. (2) Not available with Ethernet option 3. (3) See ordering information. See Current Transformer Selection Guide and Accessory Information. Simplified Circuit Diagram SE-CS10 or SE-CS40 Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. SE-TA6A Series, SE-TA12A Series Termination Assembly Required termination assembly; temperature compensated. Accessories A B FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable pickup (0.5-12.5 A for SE-CS10) (2 - 50 A for SE-CS40) Unit can be used on a wide variety of trailing cable applications Adjustable time delay (0.1-2.5 s) Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Output contacts Separate annunciation of ground-fault and groundcheck faults Ground-check LED indication Indication of open or short ground-check wire makes it easier to find faults CT-loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected High-induced-ac rejection Makes unit suitable for applications with high voltages and long cables DFT (Harmonic) filter Prevents false operation Zener-characteristic termination assembly Provides reliable ground-check loop verification Fail-safe circuits Ensures ground-check and ground-fault circuits remain safe even in the event of equipment failure Conformal coating Additional coating protects circuit boards against harsh environment XGC option Increases maximum cable length for groundcheck monitoring (10 km typical) Features & Benefits ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS10 Series Required SE-CS40 Series (for SE-135) Optional SE-TA6A Series (for SE-134C) Required SE-TA12A/SE-TA12B Combination (for SE-134C) Optional SE-TA12A Series (for SE-135) Required SE-IP65CVR-G Optional RK-132 Optional PPI-600V Optional TRAILING CABLE CT L2 L1 TERMINATION DEVICE A G GC C GROUNDED B SUPPLY M SE-134C SERIES SE-135 SERIES (Ground-Fault Ground-Check Monitor) B A 62 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 63 Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 For More Information… and to download our White Paper Why NGRs Need Contiuous Monitoring, visit Littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter Neutral Grounding Resistor Sizing Chart System Voltage (Line-to-line) NGR Let-Through Current and Resistance Time Rating 208 V 5 A / 24 Ohms Continuous 480 V 5 A / 55 Ohms Continuous 600 V 5 A / 69 Ohms Continuous 2,400 V 5 A / 277 Ohms or 10 A / 139 Ohms Continuous or 10 sec 4,160 V 5 A / 480 Ohms or 10 A / 240 Ohms Continuous or 10 sec 13,800 V 10 A / 798 Ohms or 200 A / 40 Ohms 10 seconds 25,000 V 200 A / 72 Ohms or 400 A / 36 Ohms 10 seconds 34,500 V 200 A / 100 Ohms or 400 A / 50 Ohms 10 seconds Note: The values shown are for any size transformer and are typical. Note: The above table is for illustrative purposes only. Actual values may differ based on a variety of individual system considerations, such as capacitive charging current and co-ordination study results. RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING Continuously monitoring the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR) and the neutral-to-ground path is critical to ensure the system operates as expected. Current-sensing ground-fault relays will not operate if the NGR or system ground is open circuit. Neutral Grounding Resistor Sizing Chart............................................. 63 SE-325 Series Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor................... 64 SE-330 / SE-330HV Series Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor................... 65 SE-330AU Series Neutral Earthing Resistor Monitor...................... 67 NGR Series–US Neutral Grounding Resistor System............................ 68 NGR Series–Canada Neutral Grounding Resistor System............................ 77 NGRM-ENC Series Enclosed Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor ... 83 64 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/se-325 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitoring SE-325 SERIES (PGM-8325) Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Description The SE-325 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor is used on resistance-grounded systems up to 25 kV to monitor the integrity of the neutral-to-ground path and to detect ground faults. It measures current and voltage in a transformer or generator neutral-to-ground connection and continuity of the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR). The SE-325 coordinates these three measurements to detect a loose connection, corrosion, ground fault, or NGR failure, and provides one alarm or trip output contact. ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER SE-325 120 Vac SE-325D 120 Vac/Vdc SE-325E 240 Vac Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram NGR L2 CT L1 SE-325 SERIES ER SERIES (Sensing Resistor) (NGR Monitor) A FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous NGR monitoring Detects resistor failure within seconds, reduces transient-overvoltage risk, removes risk of groundfault-detection failure Ground-fault Detection Main or backup protection to detect a ground fault anywhere on the monitored system Adjustable pickup (0.5-4 A) Select greatest sensitivity without false operation Adjustable time delay (0.1-2 s) Adjustable trip delay allows system coordination Output contacts Form A output contact Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil or alarm system Features & Benefits B ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT CT200 Series Required ER Series Required SE-MRE-600 Optional RK-325, RK-325I, RK-302 Optional RK-13 Optional NGRM-ENC Optional Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N), Overvoltage (59N), Lockout Relay (86), Checking Relay (3) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 150 mm (5.9"); W 109 mm (4.3"); D 100 mm (4.0") GF Trip Level Settings 0.5-4.0 A GF Trip Time Settings 0.1-2.0 s RF Trip-Level Settings 20-400 Vac (≤5 kV systems) 100-2,000 Vac (>5 kV systems) Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Reset Button Standard feature Output Contacts Form A Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), C-Tick (Australian) Conformally coated Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting Surface CT200 Series Current Transformer Required CT detects ground-fault current. B Accessories A ER Series Sensing Resistor Required interface between the power system and the SE-325. Eliminates hazardous voltage levels at the monitor. RK Series Remote Indication and Reset Optional panel-mounted remote indication and reset assemblies. Available in NEMA 1 or NEMA 4 configurations. Consult manual online for additional ordering options. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 65 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/se-330, Littelfuse.com/se-330hv Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitoring Description The SE-330 is an advanced ground-fault and neutral-groundingresistor monitoring relay that is compliant with Rule10-302 of the 2018 Canadian Electrical Code Part I (CE Code). It measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-to-ground resistance. It provides continuous monitoring of the neutral-toground path to verify that the neutral-grounding resistor (NGR) is intact and that it has not been bypassed or shorted. An open NGR renders current-sensing ground-fault protection inoperative and could result in a false belief that the system is functioning properly. A shorted NGR results in higher-than-expected groundfault current. The SE-330 can be used with low- and mediumvoltage transformers and generators with low- or high-resistance grounding used in processing, manufacturing, chemical, pulp and paper, petroleum, and water-treatment facilities. For high-voltage applications, use the SE-330HV. For applications that require conformance to Australian standards, use the SE-330AU. Resistor Monitoring The SE-330 combines the measured values of resistance, current, and voltage to continuously determine that an NGR is intact. It is able to detect an open or shorted resistor with or without a ground fault present. Sensing resistors are matched to the system voltage and are used to monitor NGRs on systems up to 72 kV. Ground-Fault Monitoring The SE-330 uses an application-appropriate current transformer to reliably detect ground-fault currents as small as 100 mA. DiscreteFourier Transform (DFT) filtering ensures that false trips due to harmonic noise from adjustable-speed drives do not occur. Should the resistor open and a ground fault subsequently occur, the SE-330 will detect the fault through voltage measurement, while other current-only sensing relays would be ineffective. Pulsing Ground-Fault Location The SE-330 is capable of controlling a pulsing contactor, which is used to switch the NGR resistance in a pulsing-compatible NGR package. The resulting ground-fault current is distinguishable from charging currents and noise and will only appear upstream of the ground fault, making fault location fast and easy, even without isolating feeders or interrupting loads. SE-330, SE-330HV SERIES Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Simplified Circuit Diagram NGR L2 CT L1 SE-330 SERIES ER SERIES (Sensing Resistor) (NGR Monitor) A B ORDERING NUMBER POWER SUPPLY COMM K4 UNIT HEALTHY CONTACT SE-330 - X X - 0 X SE-330 for applications 35 kV or less SE-330HV for 72 kV applications 0=120/240 V ac/V dc 2=48 Vdc 0=USB Only 1=DeviceNet 3=EtherNet (Dual RJ45) 4=EtherNet (SC Fiber & RJ45) 5=EtherNet (Dual SC Fiber) 6=IEC61850 (Dual RJ45) 7=IEC61850 (SC Fiber & RJ45) 8=IEC61850 (Dual SC Fiber) 0=Normally Open 1=Normally Closed NOTE: For Australian applications, see the SE-330AU. Ordering Information ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT ER Series Sensing Resistor Required Current Transformer Required SE-IP65CVR-G Optional SE-MRE-600 Optional RK-332 Optional NGRM-ENC Optional PGA-0520 Optional SE-330-SMA Optional Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page. ER Series Sensing Resistor Required interface between the power system and the SE-330/SE-330HV. Eliminates hazardous voltage levels at the relay. Accessories A B ELCT5 Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive ground-fault current detection (5 A primary). ELCT30 Series Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive ground-fault current detection (30 A primary). Other Current Transformer For low-resistance NGRs choose a CT primary approximately equal to the NGR rating. Inputs are provided for 1- and 5- A- secondary CTs. SE-IP65CVR-G Hinged Transparent Cover Watertight cover, tamper resistant, IP65 protection. 66 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/se-330, Littelfuse.com/se-330hv CONTROL POWER UNIT HEALTHY PULSE ENABLE (SE-330 ONLY) RESET TRIP OR PULSING RESISTOR FAULT GROUND FAULT + POWER SYSTEM NEUTRAL (X0) R EFCT 1 A 5 A COMMON G ANALOG OUTPUT 4-20 mA +24 Vdc 0 V (required) (required) NEUTRAL-GROUNDINGRESISTOR MONITOR ER SERIES SE-330 SERIES SENSING RESISTOR CURRENT TRANSFORMER 29 28 27 26 11 10 9 8 3 2 1 25 24 23 17 16 15 13 12 22 21 20 19 18 7 R 6 G N (K1) (K2) (K3) A B Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitoring SYSTEM VOLTAGE (VOLTS) NEUTRAL-GROUNDING RESISTOR SENSING RESISTOR GROUND-FAULT PICKUP LEVEL (AMPERES) VN PICKUP LEVEL (VOLTS) CURRENT (AMPERES) RESISTANCE (OHMS) MODEL RESISTANCE (SWITCH S5 SETTING) 480 5 55 ER-600VC 20 kΩ 2.5 170 600 5 69 ER-600VC 20 kΩ 2.5 200 2,400 5 277 ER-5KV 20 kΩ 2.5 800 4,160 5 480 ER-5KV 20 kΩ 3 1,700 7,200 10 416 ER-15KV 100 kΩ 2 170 x 5 = 850 14,400 15 554 ER-15KV 100 kΩ 3 340 x 5 = 1,700 Typical Values DISCLAIMER: The above table is for illustrative purposes only. Actual values may differ based on a variety of individual system considerations, such as capacitive charging current and coordination study results. Wiring Diagram Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. SE-330, SE-330HV SERIES Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N, 59N), Checking Relay (3), Lockout Relay (86) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 213 mm (8.4"); W 98 mm (3.9"); D 132 mm (5.2") GF Trip-Level Settings 2–100 % of CT-Primary Rating in 1% increments GF Trip-Time Settings 0.1–10 s Vn Trip-Level Settings 20–2,000 V ac (≤5 kV systems) 100-10,000 V ac (>5 kV systems) Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe (K1, K2, K3) Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature Output Contacts Two Form A and two Form C Pulsing Circuit 1.0–3.0 s in 0.2 s increments (SE-330 only) Approvals CSA certified, UL Listed (E340889), CE (European Union), RCM (Australian) Communications Mini USB (standard); DeviceNet (optional), IEC 61850 (optional), Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP (optional) Analog Output 4–20 mA, self or loop powered Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting Panel and surface (optional) FEATURES IEEE # BENEFITS Continuous NGR monitoring 3 Detects resistor failure within seconds, reduces transient-overvoltage risk, removes risk of ground-fault-detection failure Shorted NGR detection 3 Detects a ground fault on the neutral that could bypass the resistor, ensures fault current is not higher than expected Ground-fault detection 50G/N, 51G/N, 59N Main or backup protection to detect a ground fault anywhere on the monitored system Adjustable pickup (2–100 %) Select greatest sensitivity without false operation, adjustable in 1% increments (MEM setting) Adjustable time delay (0.1–10 s) Adjustable trip delay allows quick protection and system coordination Universal CT compatibility Allows the use of a CT that gives required ground-fault settings Programmable output contacts Two programmable Form C and One programmable Form A (Ground Fault, Resistor Fault, Unit Health) Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil or alarm circuit (K1, K2, and K3 output contacts) Analog output (4–20 mA) Connect an optional PGA-0520 meter or control system Pulsing output (SE-330 only) Control the operation of a pulsing ground-fault-location circuit Trip records On-board 100-event (with date and time) recorder helps with system diagnostics Harmonic filtering (DFT) Eliminate false trips due to harmonic noise from ASDs Local communications Mini USB port to view measured values, configure settings, and check event records Data logging On-board microSD card (included) can be used for long-term data logging Network communications Remotely view measured values and event records, reset trips, and cause a remote trip Available Protocol Options: IEC 61850– with dual RJ45, SC Fiber and RJ45, or Dual SC Fiber Interface Modbus TCP and Ethernet/IP– with dual RJ45, SC Fiber and RJ45, or Dual SC Fiber Interface DeviceNet– with CAN interface Software PC-interface software (SE-MON330) is available at Littelfuse.com/RelaySoftware Selectable reset mode Selectable latching or auto-reset operation Unit-healthy output Verifies SE-330 is operating correctly, available as Form A or Form B output contact Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture Features & Benefits © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 67 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/se-330au SE-330AU SERIES Neutral Earthing Resistor Monitor Simplified Circuit Diagram NER L2 CT L1 SE-330AU SERIES ER SERIES (Sensing Resistor) (NER Monitor) A B ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT ER Series Sensing Resistor Required Current Transformer Required SE-IP65CVR-G Optional SE-MRE-600 Optional RK-332 Optional Specifications Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 213 mm (8.4”); W 98 mm (3.9”); D 132 mm (5.2”) GF Trip-Level Settings 0.125 to 30 A GF Trip-Time Settings 0.1 to 0.5 s Vn Trip-Level Settings 20-2,000 Vac (≤5 kV systems) 100-10,000 Vac (>5 kV systems) Output Contacts Two Form A, Two Form C Operating Mode Fail-Safe Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Reset Front panel push button and remote input Approvals C-Tick (Australian), CE Communications Mini USB (standard); DeviceNet (optional), IEC 61850 (optional), Modbus TCP and EtherNet/IP (optional) Analog Output 4-20 mA, self or loop powered Conformal Coating Standard feature Warranty 5 years Mounting Panel, Surface (optional) Neutral Earthing Resistor Monitoring Description The SE-330AU Series is an advanced earth-fault and earthingresistor monitoring relay for low- and medium-voltage transformers and generators. It monitors neutral current, neutral-to-earth voltage, and neutral-to-earth resistance. It provides continuous monitoring of the neutral-to-earth path to verify that the neutral-earthing resistor (NER) is intact. This is of utmost importance—an open NER renders current-sensing earth-fault protection inoperative and could result in a false belief that the system is functioning properly. The SE-330AU earth-fault function complies with AS/NZS 2081.3:2002. Outputs include four relay outputs, and an analog output. A mini USB port is included to view measured values, configure settings, and check event records. An on-board micro SD card can be used for long-term data logging. Network communications options are available. For non-AS/NZS 2081 applications, see the SE-330 or SE-330HV Series. Resistor Monitoring The SE-330AU combines the measured values of resistance, current, and voltage to continuously determine that the NER is intact. It is able to detect a resistor failure with or without an earth fault present. Sensing resistors are matched to the system voltage and are used to monitor NGRs on systems up to 35 kV. Earth-Fault Monitoring The SE-330AU uses a 5- or 30-A-primary current transformer to provide a pickup-setting range of 0.125 to 5 A or 0.75 to 30 A to comply with AS/NZS 2081.3:2002. DFT filtering ensures that false trips due to harmonic noise from adjustable-speed drives do not occur. Open-CT detection is provided. ER Series Sensing Resistor Required interface between the power system and the SE-330AU. Eliminates hazardous voltage levels at the relay. EFCT Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive earth-fault current detection (5 A primary). SE-CS30 Series Earth-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive earth-fault current detection (30 A primary). Accessories A B ORDERING NUMBER POWER SUPPLY COMM K4 UNIT HEALTHY CONTACT SE-330AU - X X - 0 X SE-330AU for all apps. 35 kV or less SE-330HV for 72 kV apps. 0=120/240 Vac/Vdc 2=48 Vdc 0=USB Only 1=DeviceNet 3=EtherNet (Dual RJ45) 4=EtherNet (SC Fiber & RJ45) 5=EtherNet (Dual SC Fiber) 6=IEC61850 (Dual RJ45) 7=IEC61850 (SC Fiber & RJ45) 8=IEC61850 (Dual SC Fiber) 0=Normally Open 1=Normally Closed Ordering Information 68 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Neutral Grounding Resistor System Littelfuse.com/NGR-US NGR SERIES – US Neutral Grounding Resistor System Description High-resistance grounding prevents many of the problems that are associated with ungrounded and solidly grounded electrical distribution and utilization systems. High-resistance grounding can limit point-of-fault damage, eliminate transient overvoltages, reduce the arc-flash hazards, limit voltage exposure to personnel, and provide adequate tripping levels for selective current-based ground-fault detection and coordination. The Littelfuse Neutral Grounding Resistor System is a neutral grounding resistor (NGR), current transformer, and sensing resistor installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure used to high-resistance ground transformers and generators. The NGR system is designed for use with Littelfuse Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitors for complete system grounding and grounding protection. The NGR series – US systems are designed for use in US applications and all other parts of the world, not including Canada. For applications in Canada, please use the NGR series – Canada. Applications High-resistance grounding is applied on transformers and generators where safety and continuity of service are important. A faulted feeder may remain in operation until it is safe to repair the fault, where allowed by the local electrical code. Features Enclosure The NGR Series – US comes pre-installed in a ventilated NEMA 3R galvanized steel enclosure and components are pre-wired to terminals for ease of installation. Back view shown on left. ER Series Sensing Resistor Use with the SE-325 or the SE-330 to continuously monitor the continuity of a neutral-grounding resistor and eliminate hazardous voltage levels at the relay. ER-600VC is designed for use on systems up to 600 V for indoor applications. Available in optional moisture-proof enclosure (shown on left) for outdoor applications. ER-5KV for use on systems up to 4160 V for indoor applications. ER-5WP is designed for use on systems up to 4160 V and comes with weather-protected terminals for outdoor installations. Earth-Fault Current Transformer Used with the SE-325 or the SE-330 to measure ac current flowing through the NGR for use with the continuity monitoring circuit and to detect ground faults. ELCT5-31 used with SE-330 for 5 A and 10 A NGRs. SE-CS10-2.5 used with SE-330 for 10 A and 15 A NGRs. CT200 used with the SE-325 for all applications. 5SHT-101-E (not shown) used with SE-330 for 25 A NGRs. Benefits Eliminate phase-to-ground arc-flash incidents Eliminate transient overvoltages Reduce point-of-fault damage Can provide continuity of service during a ground fault Includes current transformer and ER series sensing resistor for use with Littelfuse monitoring relay and for ease of installation. OR © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 69 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Neutral Grounding Resistor System Littelfuse.com/NGR-US NGR SERIES – US Simplified Circuit Diagram with Littelfuse Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor NGR L2 CT L1 ER Series Sensing Resistor NGR Monitor Note 2 Note 1 Transformer or Generator Neutral (XO) Note 4 Note 5 Note 3 Note 6 NGR SYSTEM Note 1: Use minimum #8 AWG white or grey conductor insulated to system voltage to connect NGR to neutral. Note 2: Use conductor insulated to system voltage (#14 AWG is typically used) and a separate lug at the X0 point to connect ER Series Sensing Resistor to neutral. Note 3: Locate NGR system near transformer or generator. Note 4: Two-conductor twisted cable required, shielded recommended. Note 5: Voltage between ER Series Sensing Resistor terminals R and G is limited to 100 V by internal clamp. Note 6: Use minimum #8 AWG green or bare conductor to connect NGR to ground. 70 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Neutral Grounding Resistor System Littelfuse.com/NGR-US NGR SERIES – US PART NUMBER LINE-LINE VOLTAGE (V) LET-THROUGH CURRENT (A) IMPEDANCE (OHMS) TIME RATING CURRENT TRANSFOMER CT PRIMARY RATING (A) CT SECONDARY RATING (A) SENSING RESISTOR ENCLOSURE NGRUS138 480 2 138 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS278 480 2 138 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS314 480 2 138 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS315 480 2 138 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS003 480 5 55.4 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS194 480 5 55.4 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS316 480 5 55.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS317 480 5 55.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS318 600 2 173.5 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS319 600 2 173.5 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS354 600 2 173.5 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS355 600 2 173.5 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS169 600 5 69.4 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS170 600 5 69.4 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS320 600 5 69.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGRUS321 600 5 69.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS114 4160 5 480.9 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS115 4160 5 480.9 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS322 4160 5 480.9 10 s ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS323 4160 5 480.9 10 s ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS324 4160 5 480.9 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS325 4160 5 480.9 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS356 4160 5 480.9 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS357 4160 5 480.9 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS326 4160 10 240.5 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS327 4160 10 240.5 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor Ordering Information © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 71 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/NGR-US NGR SERIES – US Neutral Grounding Resistor System PART NUMBER LINE-LINE VOLTAGE (V) LET-THROUGH CURRENT (A) IMPEDANCE (OHMS) TIME RATING CURRENT TRANSFOMER CT PRIMARY RATING (A) CT SECONDARY RATING (A) SENSING RESISTOR ENCLOSURE NGRUS328 4160 10 240.5 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS329 4160 10 240.5 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS358 4160 10 240.5 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS359 4160 10 240.5 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS360 4160 10 240.5 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS361 4160 10 240.5 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS330 4160 15 160.3 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS331 4160 15 160.3 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS332 4160 15 160.3 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS333 4160 15 160.3 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS362 4160 15 160.3 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS363 4160 15 160.3 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS364 4160 15 160.3 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS365 4160 15 160.3 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS244 4160 25 96.2 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS334 4160 25 96.2 10 s 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS335 4160 25 96.2 10 s 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS336 4160 25 96.2 Continuous 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS337 4160 25 96.2 Continuous 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS366 4160 25 96.2 10s CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGRUS367 4160 25 96.2 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGRUS368 4160 25 96.2 Continuous CT200 200*** 5.0 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor * Connect to SE-330 terminals 8 and 11 ** Connect to SE-330 terminals 9 and 11 *** Connect to SE-325 terminals CT1 and CT2 Ordering Information 72 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Dimensions (in inches) and Mounting Diagrams 480 V & 600 V NGR Systems: NGRUS314 NGRUS316 NGRUS318 NGRUS320 NGRUS315 NGRUS317 NGRUS319 NGRUS321 Littelfuse.com/NGR-US Neutral Grounding Resistor System © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 73 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/NGR-US Neutral Grounding Resistor System Dimensions (in inches) and Mounting Diagrams 4160 V NGR Systems: NGRUS322 NGRUS323 NGRUS326 NGRUS327 NGRUS330 NGRUS331 NGRUS344 NGRUS345 NGRUS324 NGRUS325 74 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Dimensions (in inches) and Mounting Diagrams 4160 V NGR Systems: NGRUS328 NGRUS329 NGRUS332 NGRUS333 NGRUS336 NGRUS337 Littelfuse.com/NGR-US Neutral Grounding Resistor System © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 75 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 NGR SERIES – US Specifications: 480 V NGR Systems Voltage 480 V line-to-line, 277 V line-to-neutral Let-Through Current 2 A or 5 A Resistance 138.5 Ω (2 A) or 55.4 Ω (5 A) Tolerance +/- 10 % resistance Duty Cycle Continuous rated Current Transformer ELCT5-31: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 100:1 Current Rating: 5:0.05 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 5 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 100 mA to 5 A Window Diameter: 31 mm (1.22”) CT200: For use with SE-325 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 200:5 Current Rating: 200:5 A GF Trip Range: 0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A Window Diameter: 56 mm (2.2") Sensing Resistor ER-600VC; Optional installation in NEMA 4 enclosure for outdoor applications Insulation Level 11 KV BIL Temperature Rise 385 °C (725 °F) Resistor Type Stainless steel wire wound Dimensions Refer to dimensions drawings Weight 23 kg (50 lbs) Altitude 0–2000 masl Enclosure Style NEMA 3R, galvanized steel Finish Powder coated Color ANSI 61 grey Mounting Floor mount Siesmic Bracing Included Approvals cULus or CSA at customer request Warranty 12 months in service or 18 months from the date of shipment whichever occurs first Specifications: 600 V NGR Systems Voltage 600 V line-to-line, 347 V line-to-neutral Let-Through Current 2 A or 5 A Resistance 174 Ω (2 A) or 69 Ω (5 A) Tolerance +/- 10 % resistance Duty Cycle Continuous rated Frequency 50–60 Hz Current Transformer ELCT5-31: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 100:1 Current Rating: 5:0.05 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 5 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 100 mA to 5 A Window Diameter: 31 mm (1.22”) CT200: For use with SE-325 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 200:5 Current Rating: 200:5 A GF Trip Range: 0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A Window Diameter: 56 mm (2.2") Sensing Resistor ER-600VC; Optional installation in NEMA 4 enclosure for outdoor applications Insulation Level 11 KV BIL Temperature Rise 385 °C (725 °F) Resistor Type Stainless steel wire wound Dimensions Refer to dimensions drawings Weight 23 kg (50 lbs) Altitude 0–2000 masl Enclosure Style NEMA 3R, galvanized steel Finish Powder coated Color ANSI 61 grey Mounting Floor mount Siesmic Bracing Included Approvals cULus or CSA at customer request Warranty 12 months in service or 18 months from the date of shipment whichever occurs first Littelfuse.com/NGR-US Neutral Grounding Resistor System 76 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Specifications: 4160 V NGR Systems Voltage 4160 V line-to-line, 2400 V line-to-neutral Let-Through Current 5 A, 10 A, 15 A, or 25 A Resistance 480 Ω (5 A), 240 Ω (10 A), 160 Ω (15 A), or 96 Ω (25 A) Tolerance +/- 10 % resistance Duty Cycle Continuous-duty or 10-second-duty rating Frequency 50-60 Hz Current Transformer ELCT5-31: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 100:1 Current Rating: 5:0.05 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 5 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 100 mA to 5 A Window Diameter: 31 mm (1.22”) SE-CS10-2.5: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 200:1 Current Rating: 12.5:0.0625 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 10 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 200 mA to 10 A Window Diameter: 63.5 mm (2.5”) Turns Ratio: 100:5 Current Rating: 100:5 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 20 A when connected to terminals 9 and 11 GF Trip Range: 400 mA to 20 A Window Diameter: 40 mm (1.56”) CT200: For use with SE-325 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 200:5 Current Rating: 200:5 A GF Trip Range: 0.5, 2.0, 4.0 A Window Diameter: 56 mm (2.2") Sensing Resistor ER-5KV Optional ER-5WP for outdoor applications Insulation Level 75 KV BIL Temperature Rise Continuous-duty rated: 385 °C (725 °F) 10-second-duty rated: 760 °C (1400 °F) Resistor Type Stainless Steel Wire Wound Dimensions Refer to dimensions drawings Weights 5 A, continuous-duty rated: 192 kg (424 lbs) 10 A, continuous-duty rated: 235 kg (519 lbs) 15 A, continuous-duty rated: 258 kg (568 lbs) 25 A, continuous-duty rated: 320 kg (705 lbs) 5 A, 10-second-duty rated: 136 kg (300 lbs) 10 A, 10-second-duty rated: 136 kg (300 lbs) 15 A, 10-second-duty rated: 136 kg (300 lbs) 25 A, 10-second-duty rated: 136 kg (300 lbs) Altitude 0-1000 masl Enclosure Style NEMA 3R, galvanized steel Finish Powder coated Color ANSI 61 grey Mounting Floor mount Siesmic Bracing Included Approvals cULus or CSA at customer request Warranty 12 months in service or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first Accessories SE-325 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Basic ground-fault and neutral-grounding resistor monitoring relay that measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-to-ground continuity. SE-330 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Advanced ground-fault and neutral-grounding resistor monitoring relay that measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-toground resistance. NGRM-ENC Enclosed Neutral Grounding Resistor (NGR) Monitor Type 4X enclosure housing a Littelfuse Startco SE-325 or SE-330 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor and optional accessories that include a 480/600 V control power transformer (CPT), faulted-phase indication (FPI; implemented with an EL3100 Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator), earth-leakage panel meter, pulse-enable control, and mounting options. Appropriate fusing is included and field wiring is to terminal blocks. Custom NGR Systems Additional custom NGR systems are also available from Littelfuse. For NGR systems not listed on this sheet please contact Littelfuse by emailing NGRquotes@Littelfuse.com NGR SERIES – US Neutral Grounding Resistor System Littelfuse.com/NGR-US © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 77 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/NGR-CA Neutral Grounding Resistor System Description High-resistance grounding prevents many of the problems that are associated with ungrounded and solidly grounded electrical distribution and utilization systems. High-resistance grounding can limit point-of-fault damage, eliminate transient overvoltages, reduce the arc-flash hazards, limit voltage exposure to personnel, and provide adequate tripping levels for selective current-based ground-fault detection and coordination. The Littelfuse Neutral Grounding Resistor System is a neutral grounding resistor (NGR), current transformer, and sensing resistor installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure used to highresistance ground transformers and generators. The NGR system is designed for use with Littelfuse Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitors for complete system grounding and grounding protection. The NGR series – Canada systems are specifically designed for use in Canadian applications. For applications in the US and other parts of the world, please use the NGR series – US. Applications High-resistance grounding is applied on transformers and generators where safety and continuity of service are important. A faulted feeder may remain in operation until it is safe to repair the fault, where allowed by the local electrical code. Features Enclosure The NGR Series - Canada comes pre-installed in a ventilated NEMA 3R galvanized steel enclosure and components are pre-wired to terminals for ease of installation. Back view shown on left. ER Series Sensing Resistor Use with the SE-330 to continuously monitor the continuity of a neutral-grounding resistor and eliminate hazardous voltage levels at the relay. ER-600VC is designed for use on systems up to 600 V for indoor applications. Available in optional moisture-proof enclosure (shown on left) for outdoor applications. ER-5KV for use on systems up to 4160 V for indoor applications. ER-5WP is designed for use on systems up to 4160 V and comes with weather-protected terminals for outdoor installations. Earth-Fault Current Transformer Used with the SE-330 to measure ac current flowing through the NGR for use with the continuity monitoring circuit and to detect ground faults. ELCT5-31 used with SE-330 for 5 A and 10 A NGRs. SE-CS10-2.5 used with SE-330 for 10 A and 15 A NGRs. 5SHT-101-E used with SE-330 for 25 A NGRs. Benefits Eliminate phase-to-ground arc-flash incidents Eliminate transient overvoltages Reduce point-of-fault damage Can provide continuity of service during a ground fault Includes current transformer and ER series sensing resistor for use with Littelfuse monitoring relay and for ease of installation. NGR SERIES – CANADA Neutral Grounding Resistor System 78 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 NGR SERIES – CANADA Neutral-Grounding-Resistor System Littelfuse.com/NGR-CA Simplified Circuit Diagram with Littelfuse Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor NGR L2 CT L1 ER Series Sensing Resistor NGR Monitor Note 2 Note 1 Transformer or Generator Neutral (XO) Note 4 Note 5 Note 3 Note 6 NGR SYSTEM Note 1: Use minimum #8 AWG white or grey conductor insulated to system voltage to connect NGR to neutral. Note 2: Use conductor insulated to system voltage (#14 AWG is typically used) and a separate lug at the X0 point to connect ER Series Sensing Resistor to neutral. Note 3: Locate NGR system near transformer or generator. Note 4: Two-conductor twisted cable required, shielded recommended. Note 5: Voltage between ER Series Sensing Resistor terminals R and G is limited to 100 V by internal clamp. Note 6: Use minimum #8 AWG green or bare conductor to connect NGR to ground. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 79 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/NGR-CA Neutral Grounding Resistor System Ordering Information PART NUMBER LINE-LINE VOLTAGE (V) LET-THROUGH CURRENT (A) IMPEDANCE (OHMS) TIME RATING CURRENT TRANSFOMER CT PRIMARY RATING (A) CT SECONDARY RATING (A) SENSING RESISTOR ENCLOSURE NGR1050 480 2 138 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGR1041 480 2 138 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1036 480 5 55.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGR1051 480 5 55.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1052 600 2 173.5 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGR1053 600 2 173.5 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1038 600 5 69.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGR1045 600 5 69.4 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1066 4160 5 480.9 10 s ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-600VC NEMA 3R NGR1067 4160 5 480.9 10 s ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1068 4160 5 480.9 Continuous ELCT5-31 5* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R NGR1069 4160 5 480.9 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 5* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1070 4160 10 240.5 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGR1071 4160 10 240.5 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1072 4160 10 240.5 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGR1073 4160 10 240.5 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1074 4160 15 160.3 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGR1075 4160 15 160.3 10 s SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1076 4160 15 160.3 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGR1077 4160 15 160.3 Continuous SE-CS10-2.5 10* 0.05 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1078 4160 25 96.2 10 s 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGR1079 4160 25 96.2 10 s 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor NGR1080 4160 25 96.2 Continuous 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5KV NEMA 3R NGR1081 4160 25 96.2 Continuous 5SHT-101-E 20** 1 ER-5WP NEMA 3R; Weather Protected Sensing Resistor * Connect to SE-330 terminals 8 and 11 ** Connect to SE-330 terminals 9 and 11 NGR SERIES – CANADA 80 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Dimensions and Mounting Diagrams For 480 V NGR Systems: For 600 V NGR Systems: Proprietary and confidential: information contained in this drawing is the sole property of MegaResistors. Reproduction without explicit and written permission by MegaResistors is prohibited. 18.50 in 470mm 19.50 in 495mm 4 x .40in 10mm BOTTOM VIEW (MOUNTING DIMENSIONS) 22.00 in 559mm 22.00 in 559mm 12.44 in 316mm ENNG=2-3R (ISO VIEW) TERMINAL BLOCK, 2 OR 3 POLE FLAT HEAD SCREW WIRE RANGE WITH BINDING SCREW #14 - #2 AWG, Cu # DESCRIPTION QTY 1 ENCLOSURE, N2, NEMA 3R 1 2 ELEMENT, WIREWOUND/EDGEWOUND, X Ω X 3 BONDING LUG, SLU-70 1 4 TERMINAL BLOCK, 2 OR 3 POLE 1 1:10 A ENNG=2-3R NGR G.C. Size Units Scale Product Line Drawing # X V X kV X V L/N X A X Ω X 50-57 lbs IN-LB Type 3R Product Drawing Revision # Approval Date 0 Apr 12, 2019 Revision Date Apr 12, 2019 Drawn By P.K. Part Number ENNG=2-3R Drawing Status Drawing Type Mechanical Reference Voltage Class BIL Duty Cycle Resistance Current Env Rating Weight Notes [1] Enclosure Material: 14 Ga. Steel [16 Ga. Top and Side Covers] Proprietary and confidential: information contained in this drawing is the sole property of MegaResistors. Reproduction without explicit and written permission by MegaResistors is prohibited. 27.25in 692mm 19.50in 495mm 4 x .40in 10mm BOTTOM VIEW (MOUNTING DIMENSIONS) 30.75 in 781mm 22.00 in 559mm 12.43 316 ENNG=2L-3R (ISO VIEW) TERMINAL BLOCK, 2 OR 3 POLE FLAT HEAD SCREW WIRE RANGE WITH BINDING SCREW #14 - #2 AWG, Cu # DESCRIPTION QTY 1 ENCLOSURE, N2L, NEMA 3R 1 2 ELEMENT, WIREWOUND/EDGEWOUND, X Ω X 3 BONDING LUG, SLU-70 1 4 TERMINAL BLOCK, 2 OR 3 POLE 1 ENNG=2L-3R NGR Units Product Line Drawing # X V L/N X A in [mm] Type 3R Product Drawing Revision # 0 Part Number ENNG=2L-3R Drawing Status Drawing Type Mechanical Reference Voltage Current Env Rating Notes [1] Enclosure Material: 14 Ga. Steel [16 Ga. Top and Side Covers] Neutral Grounding Resistor System © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 81 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/NGR-CA NGR SERIES – CANADA Neutral Grounding Resistor System Specifications: 480 V NGR Systems Voltage 480 V line-to-line, 277 V line-to-neutral Let-Through Current 2 A or 5 A Resistance 138.5 Ω (2 A) or 55.4 Ω (5 A) Tolerance +/- 10 % resistance Duty Cycle Continuous rated Current Transformer ELCT5-31: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 100:1 Current Rating: 5:0.05 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 5 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 100 mA to 5 A Window Diameter: 31 mm (1.22”) Sensing Resistor ER-600VC; Optional installation in NEMA 4 enclosure for outdoor applications Insulation Level 11 KV BIL Temperature Rise 385 °C (725 °F) Resistor Type Stainless steel wire wound Dimensions H 324 mm (12.75”); W 558 mm (22.00”); D 558 mm (22.00”) Weight 23 kg (50 lbs) Altitude 0–2000 masl Enclosure Style NEMA 3R, galvanized steel Finish Powder coated Color ANSI 61 grey Mounting Floor mount Siesmic Bracing Included Approvals cULus Warranty 12 months in service or 18 months from the date of shipment whichever occurs first Specifications: 600 V NGR Systems Voltage 600 V line-to-line, 347 V line-to-neutral Let-Through Current 2 A or 5 A Resistance 174 Ω (2 A) or 69 Ω (5 A) Tolerance +/- 10 % resistance Duty Cycle Continuous rated Frequency 50–60 Hz Current Transformer ELCT5-31: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 100:1 Current Rating: 5:0.05 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 5 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 100 mA to 5 A Window Diameter: 31 mm (1.22”) Sensing Resistor ER-600VC; Optional installation in NEMA 4 enclosure for outdoor applications Insulation Level 11 KV BIL Temperature Rise 385 °C (725 °F) Resistor Type Stainless steel wire wound Dimensions H 324 mm (12.75”); W 558 mm (22.00”); D 558 mm (22.00”) Weight 23 kg (50 lbs) Altitude 0–2000 masl Enclosure Style NEMA 3R, galvanized steel Finish Powder coated Color ANSI 61 grey Mounting Floor mount Siesmic Bracing Included Approvals cULus Warranty 12 months in service or 18 months from the date of shipment whichever occurs first 82 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Neutral Grounding Resistor System Specifications: 4160 V NGR Systems Voltage 4160 V line-to-line, 2400 V line-to-neutral Let-Through Current 5 A, 10 A, 15 A, or 25 A Resistance 480 Ω (5 A), 240 Ω (10 A), 160 Ω (15 A), or 96 Ω (25 A) Tolerance +/- 10 % resistance Duty Cycle Continuous-duty or 10-second-duty rating Frequency 50-60 Hz Current Transformer ELCT5-31: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 100:1 Current Rating: 5:0.05 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 5 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 100 mA to 5 A Window Diameter: 31 mm (1.22”) SE-CS10-2.5: For use with SE-330 NGR Monitor Turns Ratio: 200:1 Current Rating: 12.5:0.0625 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 10 A when connected to terminals 8 and 11 GF Trip Range: 200 mA to 10 A Window Diameter: 63.5 mm (2.5”) Turns Ratio: 100:5 Current Rating: 100:5 A Primary Rating with SE-330: 20 A when connected to terminals 9 and 11 GF Trip Range: 400 mA to 20 A Window Diameter: 40 mm (1.56”) Sensing Resistor ER-5KV Optional ER-5WP for outdoor applications Insulation Level 75 KV BIL Temperature Rise Continuous-duty rated: 385 °C (725 °F) 10-second-duty rated: 760 °C (1400 °F) Resistor Type Stainless Steel Wire Wound Weights and Dimensions 5 A, continuous-duty rated: H 1226 mm (48.28”); W 1143 mm (45.00”); D 940 mm (37.00”); 192 kg (424 lbs) 10 A, continuous-duty rated: H 1214 mm (47.78”); W 1270 mm (50.00”); D 1143 mm (45.00”); 235 kg (519 lbs) 15 A, continuous-duty rated: H 1214 mm (47.78”); W 1270 mm (50.00”); D 1143 mm (45.00”); 258 kg (568 lbs) 25 A, continuous-duty rated: H 1283 mm (50.50”); W 1575 mm (62.00”); D 1143 mm (45.00”); 320 kg (705 lbs) 5 A, 10-second-duty rated: H 749 mm (29.50”); W 1143 mm (45.00”); D 940 mm (37.00”); 136 kg (300 lbs) 10 A, 10-second-duty rated: H 749 mm (29.50”); W 1143 mm (45.00”); D 940 mm (37.00”); 136 kg (300 lbs) 15 A, 10-second-duty rated: H 749 mm (29.50”); W 1143 mm (45.00”); D 940 mm (37.00”); 136 kg (300 lbs) 25 A, 10-second-duty rated: H 749 mm (29.50”); W 1143 mm (45.00”); D 940 mm (37.00”); 136 kg (300 lbs) Altitude 0-1000 masl Enclosure Style NEMA 3R, galvanized steel Finish Powder coated Color ANSI 61 grey Mounting Floor mount Siesmic Bracing Included Approvals cULus Warranty 12 months in service or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first Accessories SE-330 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Advanced ground-fault and neutral-grounding resistor monitoring relay that measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-toground resistance. NGRM-ENC Enclosed Neutral Grounding Resistor (NGR) Monitor Type 4X enclosure housing a Littelfuse Startco SE-330 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor and optional accessories that include a 480/600 V control power transformer (CPT), faulted-phase indication (FPI; implemented with an EL3100 Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator), earthleakage panel meter, pulse-enable control, and mounting options. Appropriate fusing is included and field wiring is to terminal blocks. Custom NGR Systems Additional custom NGR systems are also available from Littelfuse. For NGR systems not listed on this sheet please contact Littelfuse by emailing NGRquotes@Littelfuse.com Littelfuse.com/NGR-CA NGR SERIES – CANADA © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 83 Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/ngrm-enc Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitoring Description The NGRM-ENC Enclosed Neutral Grounding Resistor (NGR) Monitor series is a Type 4X enclosure housing a Littelfuse Startco SE-325 or SE-330 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor and optional accessories that include a 480/600-V control power transformer (CPT), faulted-phase indication (FPI; implemented with an EL3100 Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator), earth-leakage panel meter, pulse-enable control, and mounting options. Appropriate fusing is included and field wiring is to terminal blocks. NGRM-ENC SERIES NGRM-ENC NGR L2 CT L1 SE-330 SERIES ER SERIES (Sensing Resistor) (NGR Monitor) EL3100 NGRM-ENC (SE-330 with voltage indication shown) DN DA DB DC NGR Assembly (ordered separately) Simplified Circuit Diagram Ordering Information The following options are available with a faster shipping time: ORDERING NUMBER PROTECTION RELAY OPTION NGR MONITOR MOUNTING OPTION AMMETER & PULSE CONTROL OPTION COMMS CONTROL-POWER TRANSFORMER OPTION NGRM-ENC-000-01 SE-325 Surface mounted None None CPT NGRM-ENC-200-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Surface mounted None None CPT NGRM-ENC-201-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Panel mounted None None CPT NGRM-ENC-201-11 SE-330 (K4=NO) Panel mounted Ammeter None CPT NGRM-ENC-230-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Surface mounted None Ethernet/2 RJ45 ports CPT NGRM-ENC-231-01 SE-330 (K4=NO) Panel mounted None Ethernet/2 RJ45 ports CPT Options SE-325 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Measures current and voltage in a transformer or generator neutral-to-ground connection and continuity of the neutral-grounding resistor. SE-330 Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitor Advanced ground-fault and neutral-grounding resistor monitoring relay that measures neutral current, neutral-to-ground voltage, and neutral-toground resistance. EL3100 Ground-Fault & Phase-Voltage Indicator Three panel-mounted LEDs indicate the ground-faulted phase. Panel Meter Panel-mounted meter displays earth leakage current as a percentage of the ground-faultCT-primary rating. RK-332/RK-302 Remote Indication and Reset Panel-mounted remote indication and reset assemblies are included with SE-325 and surface-mounted SE-330 configurations. 84 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays RESISTANCE GROUNDING/NGR MONITORING 3 Littelfuse.com/ngrm-enc Specifications Enclosure Polyester, Lockable. SE-330 panel-mount options are rated to IP65. All other options are rated to Type 4X. Dimensions H 454 mm (17.9”); W 406 mm (16”); D 264 mm (10.4”) Clearance required to open SE-IP65CVR-G 112 mm (4.4”) Approvals CCSAUS Warranty 1 year Ordering Information PROTECTION RELAY OPTION NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS OPTION NGR MONITOR MOUNTING OPTION AMMETER & PULSE CONTROL OPTION CONTROL-POWER TRANSFORMER OPTION NGRM-ENC- X X X – X X 0=SE-325 1=SE-325 & voltage indication(1) 2=SE-330 (N.O. K4) 3=SE-330 (N.O. K4) & voltage indication(1) 4=SE-330 (N.C. K4) 5=SE-330 (N.C. K4) & voltage indication(1) 6=SE-330HV (N.O. K4) 7=SE-330HV (N.O. K4) & voltage indication(1) 8=SE-330HV (N.C. K4) 9=SE-330HV (N.C. K4) & voltage indication(1) 0=No network communications 1=DeviceNet(2) 3=Ethernet, dual RJ45(2) 4=Ethernet, 1 RJ45 & 1 fiber(2) 5=Ethernet, dual fiber(2) 6=IEC 61850, dual RJ45(2) 7=IEC 61850, 1 RJ45 & 1 fiber(2) 8=IEC 61850, dual fiber(2) 0=Surface-mounted NGR monitor(4) 1=Panel-mounted NGR monitor(5) 0=No ammeter 1=Earth-leakage panel meter(2) 2=Earth-leakage panel meter & pulse-enable switch(3) 0=No CPT 1=480/600-V CPT(1) Neutral Grounding Resistor Monitoring NGRM-ENC SERIES Note (1) - Includes fuses, (2) - SE-330 models only, (3) - SE-330 models only, excluding SE-330HV models, (4) - Includes panel-mounted indication & reset, and USB connector for SE-330 models, (5) - SE-330 models only; includes IP65 hinged transparent cover Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 85 4FEEDER PROTECTION Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols For More Information… and to download datasheets and manuals on our Feeder Protection Relays, click Technical Resources at Littelfuse.com/FeederProtection FEEDER PROTECTION Protect feeder circuits from overcurrents, earth faults, phase loss and other detrimental conditions in critical applications and processes.They provide essential data for predictive and preventive maintenance, extending the life of equipment, enhancing safety and maximizing efficiency. FPU-32 Series Feeder Protection Unit ........................................... 86 FPS Series Feeder Protection System...................................... 87 Protection Relays 86 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 4 RFEEDER PROTECTION Littelfuse.com/fpu-32 FPU-32 SERIES (PGR-7200) Feeder Protection Unit Description The FPU-32 Feeder Protection Unit provides integrated protection, metering, and data-logging functions. It is an excellent choice for retrofitting and upgrading older relays because of its compact size and ability to use existing CTs. The FPU-32 is used to protect distribution feeders in processing, manufacturing, petroleum, chemical, and wastewater treatment facilities. MPU-CIM (Current Input Module) (Feeder Protection Unit) FPU-32 PHASE CT PHASE CT CT PHASE CT GF L2 L1 NOTE: The FPU-32 consists of the Feeder Protection Unit (pictured above) and the MPU-CIM Current Input Module (not pictured). ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATIONS FPU-32-00-00 TIA-232 FPU-32-01-00 TIA-232 & RS-485 FPU-32-02-00 TIA-232 & DeviceNet™ FPU-32-04-00 TIA-232 & Ethernet NOTE: One of the following is required: MPU-CIM-00-00 Current Input Module, or MPU-CTI-RT-00 Current Input Module with ring-tonque terminals. Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS IEC & IEEE overcurrent protection curves Definite and inverse time settings for system coordination; prevents catastrophic failures Two setpoint groups Create distinctive settings for maintenance or for two different loads Reduced overcurrent mode Maintenance mode setting to reduce the risk of arc-flash hazards Data logging On-board 100-event recorder and remote data logging helps with system diagnostics Overload Thermal protection for connected load Phase loss/Phase reverse (current) Detects unhealthy supply conditions Unbalance (current) Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases Communications Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips Features & Benefits A B ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT Phase CTs Recommended Ground-Fault CT Optional MPU-16A-Y92A-96N Optional Specifications Protective Functions (IEEE #) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 30 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 400 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak 32 samples/cycle and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50, 60 Hz Output Contacts Three Form C Approvals CSA certified, CE, C-Tick (Australian), UL Recognized Communications TIA-232 (standard); TIA-485, DeviceNet™, Ethernet (optional) Analog Output 4-20 mA, programmable Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting (Control Unit) Panel (standard) Surface (with MPU-32-SMK converter kit) (Current Input Module) DIN, Surface Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. Ground-Fault Transformer Zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. B Accessories A Overload (49, 51) Phase sequence (46) Unbalance (46) Phase loss (46) Definite-time overcurrent (50, 51) Inverse-time overcurrent (50, 51) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) RTD/PTC temperature (49) Feeder Protection–Standard Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 87 4FEEDER PROTECTION Littelfuse.com/fps Feeder Protection–Advanced FPS SERIES Feeder Protection System 1 2 Description The FPS Feeder Protection System monitors voltage and current to provide a comprehensive package of 17 protective functions. The FPS is a modular system with integrated protection, breaker control, metering, and data-logging functions. 1 Operator Interface (FPS-OPI) g Large, bright, 4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display g Display metered values g Access set points g Powered by Control Unit g Panel mount or attach directly to Control Unit g Remote mounting (1.2 km or 4000 ft maximum loop length) g 1/2 DIN size g Hazardous-location certified 2 Control Unit (FPS-CTU) g Current inputs—5-A or 1-A secondary phase current transformers g Voltage inputs—up to 600 V without PTs g Earth-leakage input—5-A or 1-A secondary or sensitive transformer g 8 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, 1 analog input and output g 24-Vdc supply for OPI and RTD modules, and for digital inputs g IRIG-B time-code input g 1/2 DIN size, surface mount g RS-485 network communications (Standard) g DeviceNet™, Profibus®, or Ethernet communications available Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. Ground-Fault Current Transformer Zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. SE-IP65CVR-M Cover Optional gasketed, transparent cover for limited access and IP65 protection for an Operator Interface Module. B C Accessories A ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT FPS-OPI-01-00 Recommended SE-IP65CVR-M Optional Phase CTs Required Ground-Fault CT Recommended MPS-RTD-01-00 Optional ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATIONS FPS-CTU-01-00 RS-485 FPS-CTU-02-00 RS-485 & DeviceNet™ FPS-CTU-03-00 RS-485 & Profibus® FPS-CTU-04-00 RS-485 & Ethernet Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram PHASE CT PHASE CT PHASE CT GF CT L2 FPS-CTU L1 FPS-OPI (Control Unit) (Operator Interface) 1 2 A B Protection Relays 88 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 4 RFEEDER PROTECTION Littelfuse.com/fps Feeder Protection–Advanced Wiring Diagram PHASE VOLTAGES FPS-CTU CONTROL UNIT RELAY OUTPUTS I/0 MODULE DIGITAL INPUTS 4-20 mA ANALOG INPUT + ANALOG OUTPUT 4-20 mA + 39 40 53 52 43 51 ...... 5 16 ...... 1 2 20 17 60 56 ...... 33 22 CONTROL POWER RS-485 35 37 ...... 30 29 27 26 23 22 PHASE CURRENT TRANFORMERS GROUND-FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER OPERATOR INTERFACE FPS-OPI (recommended) (required) (recommended) RTD MODULE MPS-RTD (optional) A B C 1 2 Specifications Protective Functions (IEEE Device Numbers) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 Vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 100 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Inputs Phase current, Earth-leakage current, Phase voltage, 7 digital, 1 analog Output Contacts 5 contacts — See Product Manual Approvals CSA certified, C-Tick (Australian) Communications Allen-Bradley® DFI and Modbus® RTU (Standard); DeviceNet™, Profibus®, Ethernet (Optional) Conformal Coating Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting: Control Unit Surface Operator Interface Panel, Control-Unit mounted Overload (49, 51) Phase reverse (current) (46) Overfrequency (81) Overcurrent (50, 51) Underfrequency (81) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Unbalance (voltage) (47) RTD temperature (38, 49) Unbalance (current) (46) Phase loss (voltage) (47) Overvoltage (59) Phase loss (current) (46) Undervoltage (27) Phase reverse (voltage) (47) Power factor (55) Features & Benefits FEATURES IEEE # BENEFITS Overload 49, 51 Long-time overcurrent provides thermal protection for feeder or load Inverse-time overcurrent 50, 51 Coordination using IEEE and IEC Curves Definite-time overcurrent 50, 51 Instantaneous overcurrent to detect catastrophic failure Current unbalance/ Phase loss/Phase reverse 46 Detects an open or high-impedance phase Ground fault 50G/N, 51G/N Inverse and definite time. Early insulation-failure detection. RTD temperature 38, 49 Optional protection (MPS-RTD module) for load-temperature monitoring Overvoltage 59 Limits stress to insulation Undervoltage 27 Detects a damaging brown-out condition Voltage unbalance 47 Detects unhealthy supply voltage Two setting groups Minimizes Arc-Flash hazards during maintenance Breaker control Allows local and remote operation; reduces component count Metering Displays the measured and calculated parameters Data logging On-board 64-event recorder helps with system diagnosis Communications Remotely view measured values, event records, & reset trips Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture FPS SERIES Feeder Protection System © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 89 5ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols For More Information… and to download our White Paper on Key Considerations for Selecting an Arc-Flash Relay or our Arc-Flash Energy Reduction Workbook, visit Littelfuse.com/ArcFlash ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Rapidly detects developing Arc-Flash incidents and sends a trip signal to interrupt power before significant damage occurs. D0920 Arc Detection Unit ........................................... 90 PGR-8800 Series Arc-Flash Relay................................................ 91 AF0500 Series Arc-Flash Relay................................................ 93 AF0100 Series Arc-Flash Relay................................................ 95 A0220 Series Light Sensor ..................................................... 96 PGA-1100 Diode Logic....................................................... 97 90 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/d0920 D0920 ARC DETECTION UNIT Arc Detection Unit Installation Diagram Description The D0920 Arc-Flash relay provides a simple and cost effective solution for Arc-Flash monitoring. Two light sensors can be connected directly to one relay. Light Sensors react to light and have a 180º detection zone. Sensors are supplied with 10 or 15 m of cable. 1-2 sensors are recommended per cubicle or drawer. Specifications Supply Voltage 230 V AC +15,-30% Thyristor Output 325 V DC from charged capacitor, nominal energy 3.5 J Sensitivity Adjustable 2 - 24 klux Number of Sensors Max. 2 Response Time Less than 1 ms Power Consumption 3.5 VA Ambient Temperature –25°C to 70°C Dimensions H 90 mm (3.5”); W 105 mm (4.1”); D 61 mm (2.4”) Certification CE, CCC ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION D0920.0060 230 V AC +15, -30%, remains powered on after trip, slide switch instead of key switch, electronic reset button instead of mechanical reset button, CCC approved Ordering Information FEATURES BENEFITS Compact module Fits into wide range of Arc-Flash applications Trip time <1 ms Limits Arc-Flash damage and risk of injury Two optical sensor cable lengths Point sensors with 10 or 15 m of cable Inputs for two sensors Single Arc-Flash relay can monitor 2 sensors Adjustable light sensitivity Allows operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments Service mode Allows relay and sensor test without tripping system Features & Benefits ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT A0033.0010 Detector cable 2 x 0.25 mm2 w/screen. 100 m Optional A0220.0010 Arc Detector V-Type; 10 m cable Required: At least one sensor A0220.0020 Arc Detector V-Type; 15 m cable per monitored zone PGA-1100/D1100 Diode Logic Unit Optional A0220 Light Sensors Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Available with 10 or 15 m cable. PGA-1100/D1100 Diode Logic Unit For tripping one circuit breaker with multiple D0920 Relays Accessories A Install sensors in line of sight to possible arc faults. Arc-Flash Monitoring © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 91 5ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/pgr-8800 Description The PGR-8800 Series is a microprocessor-based relay that limits arc-fault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly tripping. Phase-current-transformer inputs are provided for current-constrained arc-flash protection and, when so equipped, a programmable definite-time overcurrent function can be enabled. An optical sensor on the PGR-8800 and adjustable trip level reduce the chance of nuisance tripping by setting a threshold for ambient light. Sensors, inputs, and connections are monitored to ensure fail-safe operation. A secondary solid-state trip circuit provides a redundant trip path. A USB port is used for configuration and access to event logs and graphs. Optical Sensors The PGR-8800 accepts both PGA-LS10 and PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS30 optical sensors, designed to collect light over a wide angle and with high sensitivity. For fast fault location, front-panel and sensor LED’s indicate sensor health and which sensor detected an arc fault. Sensor Placement The PGR-8800 Arc-Flash Relay and sensors are easily installed in retrofit projects and new switchgear with little or no re-configuration. Even elaborate systems with multiple power sources take minutes to configure using the relay’s built-in USB interface software. Generally, it is recommended to mount 1 or 2 sensors per cubicle to cover all horizontal and vertical bus bars, breaker compartments, drawers, and anywhere that there is potential for an arc-fault. Threading a fiber-optic sensor through the cabinets and in areas where point-sensor coverage is uncertain results in complete coverage and an added level of redundancy. Even if policy is to only work on de-energized systems, all maintenance areas should be monitored to prevent potential damage and additional cost. At least one sensor should have visibility of an arc fault if a person blocks the other sensor(s). Simplified Circuit Diagram PGA-LS10 (Point Sensor) PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS30 (Fiber-Optic Sensor) PGA-1100 (Diode Logic Unit) (Optional) 24 Vdc Battery Backup (Optional) (Recommended) (Arc-Flash Protection Relay) PGR-8800 Trip 5-A-SECONDARY PHASE CT’s L2 L1 A B C A B PGR-8800 SERIES (D1000) Arc-Flash Relay C D *At least one sensor is required. However, the exact number of sensors for proper coverage depends on the application. D D D Local Circuit Breaker For detailed wiring diagram, see adjacent page. Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION PGR-8800-00 (UL, CE, CSA, RCM) Arc-Flash Relay PGR-8800-00-CC (UL, CE, CSA, RCM) Arc-Flash Relay, Conformally Coated ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGA-LS10 Required* PGA-LS20, PGA-LS30 Required* PGA-1100 Optional Current Transformer Recommended Arc-Flash Monitoring 92 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/pgr-8800 Wiring Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Arc-Flash trip time <1 ms Limits arc-flash damage and risk of injury Multiple sensors (up to 24) Single module can monitor 6 sensors. Up to 4 PGR-8800 units can be linked into one system Fail-safe system Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection Redundant trip circuit Solid-state backup arc-detection circuit adds a second layer of safety Adjustable light sensitivity Allows for operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments LED indication (on unit and each sensor) 18 LEDs provide at-a glance status for module and I/O state Current detection Phase-CT inputs provide overcurrent protection and prevent nuisance trips Optical detection Point and fiber-optic sensors provide wide detection area with sensor health trip indication Digital inputs (6) Two each: remote trip, inhibit, and reset inputs Service mode Allows for system test without tripping Trip coil contact Solid-state 24-300 Vdc/24-300 Vac IGBT Indication contacts Form C and status outputs USB interface Data logging and configuration software uses a USB interface with no drivers or software installation Built-in sensor Can be used in single-sensor systems, as a seventh sensor, and for calibration Universal power supply/Battery backup 100-240 Vac, 14-48 Vdc, or 110-250 Vdc supply accepted. Ability to charge and run off an external, user-supplied 24 Vdc battery Data logging On-board event recorder helps with system diagnostics Modbus Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips Upstream Tripping Ability to trip upstream device if the local breaker fails to clear the fault Features & Benefits PGR-8800 SERIES (D1000) 1 31 36 37 38 39 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 59 60 4 ........ 5 8 ........ 9 12 ........ 13 16 ........ 17 20 ........ 21 24 ........ ............. ..................... 25 26 27 28 29 30 STATUS STATUS STATUS SERVICE TRIPPED TRIP COIL LINK ONLINE + – CONTROL POWER and BATTERY DIGITAL INPUTS ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 SERIES ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 (optional) DIODE LOGIC UNIT PGA-1100 (optional) ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 (optional) ARC-FLASH RELAY PGR-8800 (optional) PHASE CT (recommended) PHASE CT (recommended) PHASE CT (recommended) PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 or PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 or PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 or PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 or PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 or PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR PGA-LS10 PGA-LS20 or PGA-LS30 OPTICAL SENSOR Littelfuse reserves the right to make product changes, without notice. Material in this document is as accurate as known at the time of publication. Visit Littelfuse.com for the most up-to-date information. NOTE (1) - Contact Littelfuse for trip coil voltages higher than 300 Vdc/Vac. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Overcurrent (50), Arc Flash (AFD) Input Voltage 100-240 Vac, 14-48 Vdc, and 110-250 Vdc Dimensions H 130 mm (5.1”); W 200 mm (7.9”); D 54 mm (2.1”) Optical Trip Settings 9-25 klux, 800 μs-20 s Current Trip Setting (A) Programmable Indication Contact Mode Fail-safe Trip Coil Voltage(1) 24-300 Vdc, 24-300 Vac Trip Coil Contact Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Redundant Trip Circuit Standard feature Input Monitoring Standard feature USB Interface Standard feature Trip, Reset, Service Buttons Standard feature Expandable System Link up to 4 PGR-8800 units Warranty 5 years Mounting Surface, DIN (with D0050 adapter clips) Approvals UL, CE, CSA, RCM, FCC, DNV type approval, ABS type approval PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Sensor health and trip indication. Dimensions: See PGR-8800 Manual PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor 360° light sensor for tricky installations with many shadows or to run along bus bars. Sensor health and trip indication. Dimensions: See PGR-8800 Manual PGA-1100 Diode Logic Unit This module allows multiple PGR-8800 relays to trip the same breaker, for example an upstream or a tie-breaker. Dimensions: H 80mm (3.15”); W 20mm (0.79”); D 70mm (2.76”) Current Transformers Eliminate nuisance arc-flash trips and use for overcurrent protection. Accessories A B D C Arc-Flash Monitoring © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 93 5ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/af0500 Description The AF0500 is a microprocessor-based arc-flash relay that limits arc-fault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly tripping the feeder breaker. The unit is well suited for switchgear, transformer and power converter applications. Sensors, inputs, and connections are health monitored to ensure fail-safe operation. A secondary solid-state trip circuit provides a redundant trip path. A USB port is used for configuration and access to event logs. AF0500 includes an Ethernet interface and supports Modbus® TCP communication. Zone tripping, upstream breaker tripping and tie breaker tripping applications can be easily configured. A number of control inputs allows interconnection of multiple AF0500 units to form a system. Optical Sensors The AF0500 accepts both PGA-LS10 point sensors and PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 fiber-optical sensors. Thus any combination of fiber or point sensors is supported. For fast fault location, front-panel and sensor LEDs indicate sensor health and which sensor detected an arc fault. Sensor Placement The AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay and sensors are easily installed in retrofit projects and new switchgear with little or no re-configuration. Simple applications work straight out of the box with no need of PC configuration. More complex systems with multiple power sources are configured using the relay’s built-in USB interface software. Generally, it is recommended to mount 1 or 2 sensors per cubicle to cover all horizontal and vertical bus bars, breaker compartments, drawers, and anywhere that there is a risk for an arc fault. Threading a fiber-optic sensor through the cabinets and in areas where point-sensor coverage is uncertain results in complete coverage and an added level of redundancy. Even if policy is to only work on de-energized systems, all maintenance areas should be monitored to prevent potential damage and additional cost. Ordering Information AF0500 SERIES Arc-Flash Relay ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION AF0500-00 Arc-Flash Relay AF0500-00-CC Arc-Flash Relay, Conformally Coated FEATURES BENEFITS 4 arc sensor inputs Supports both point and fiber sensors Arc-Flash trip time <1ms Limits arc-flash damage and risk of injury 2 IGBT high speed trip outputs Supports applications such as upstream breaker tripping or tie breaker tripping Universal Power Supply 100-240 Vac, 24-48 Vdc, or 110-250 Vdc supply Fail-safe system Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection LED indication (on unit and each sensor) Trip and sensor status indicated both on relay and sensors Discrete wire networking Multiple AF0500 units can be interconnected to form a system USB interface Data logging and configuration software uses a USB interface with no drivers or software installation Data logging On-board event recorder for system diagnostics (2048 log lines) Ethernet interface Modbus® TCP communication Features & Benefits Arc Flash Fiber-Optic Sensor Point Sensors ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT PGA-LS10 Required* PGA-LS20, PGA-LS30 Required* PGA-1100 Optional Arc-Flash Monitoring 94 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/af0500 AF0500 SERIES Applications Zone Tripping AF0500 can trip 2 separate zones. Sensors can be assigned to the zones individually through PC configuration. Upstream Breaker Tripping In case of failure of the local circuit breaker to open, another trip command is sent after a short delay to an upstream breaker to clear the fault. Upstream Breaker Local Breaker Incoming Feeder Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Includes Sensor health and trip indication. PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor 360° light sensor to run along bus bars. Sensor health and trip indication. PGA-1100 Diode Logic Unit This module allows multiple arc-flash relays to trip a common breaker, for example a tie-breaker. Accessories Specifications Power Supply Universal 100 to 240 Vac (+10%, -15%) 50/60 Hz, 20 VA, 110 to 250 Vdc (+10%, -20%) 8 W Low Voltage 24 to 48 Vdc (+10%, -20%), 4 W Sensor Inputs 4 light sensor inputs for PGA-LS10, PGA-LS20 and PGA-LS30 sensors Trip Outputs 2 IGBT switches UL Rating 120/240 Vac, 1800 VA, 0.75 A maximum continuous, 125/250 Vdc, 138 VA, 0.75 A maximum continuous Supplemental Rating Make/Carry 30 A for 0.2s Voltage Rating 24 to 300 Vac, 24 to 300 Vdc Current Rating 20 A for 2 s, 10 A for 5 s Communication Ethernet, 2 ports with internal Ethernet switch, Modbus® TCP Dimensions H 130 mm (5.1”); W 200 mm (7.9”); D 54 mm (2.1”) Shipping Weight 0.9 kg (2 lb) Operating Temp. –40°C to +70°C (–40°F to 158°F) Approvals UL Listed (UL508), CE, RCM, FCC, CSA Warranty 5 years Mounting Surface, DIN (with optional D0050 adapter clips) Zone 1 Zone 2 Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Tie Breaker Tripping In case of an arc in one section of the switchboard, the AF0500 can trip both the incoming feeder and the tie breaker simultaneously. Thus the affected part of the switchboard is isolated from the non-affected part. Incoming Feeder Incoming Feeder Bus Tie Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Arc-Flash Monitoring © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 95 5ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Arc-Flash Monitoring Description The AF0100 Series arc-flash relay is a cost-effective solution that reduces arc-fault damage by detecting the light from an arc flash and rapidly tripping. Two remote light sensors can be connected to one relay and multiple AF0100 and/or AF0500 relays can be connected to monitor additional sensors, providing complete coverage for a wide range of applications. The compact, DIN-rail or surface-mountable body makes this an ideal solution for equipment manufacturers. Two isolated Form-C contacts are provided for applications with multiple devices that must be tripped. This is especially useful for generator applications where the generator and breaker need to be tripped in case of an arc flash. The AF0100 accepts PGA-LS10 point sensors and PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS30 fiber-optic sensors in any combination. Sensor health is continuously monitored to ensure fail-safe operation. A solid-state redundant trip circuit provides an internal fail-safe mechanism and fast arc-flash response during power up. Front-panel and sensor LEDs indicate sensor health and fault location. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact Fits into a wide range of arc-flash applications Two optical sensor types Point sensors or fiber-optic sensors can be used in any combination for coverage flexibility Dual sensor inputs One relay can monitor two arc-flash sensors Adjustable light sensitivity Allows for operation in bright environments and maximum sensitivity in dark environments Discrete wire networking Multiple AF0100 or AF0500 units can be interconnected to form a system Fail-safe system Continuous monitoring of optical sensors and inputs ensures protection USB interface Configuration software is easy to use with no drivers or software installation Unit health Ensures continuous protection with self diagnostic and remote unit-healthy indication LED Indication Trip and sensor status indication both on relay and sensors Arc-Flash Relay Simplified Circuit Diagram PGA-LS10 (Point Sensor) PGA-LS20/ PGA-LS30 (Fiber-Optic Sensor) 24-48 Vdc Supply or 100-240 Vac/Vdc Supply Digital I/O Connection to other AF0100 or AF0500 (Arc-Flash Protection Relay) AF0100 Trip 1 Trip 2 Unit Healthy L2 L1 – + Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION AF0100-00 Arc-Flash Relay, Universal Supply AF0100-10 Arc-Flash Relay, 24-48 Vdc PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2-m half-sphere. Includes sensor health and trip indication. PGA-LS20/PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor 360° light sensor to run along bus bars. Includes sensor health and trip indication. Accessories Specifications Input Voltage AF0100-00 100-240 Vac/Vdc, 24-48 Vdc AF0100-10 24-48 Vdc Dimensions H 90 mm (3.5”); W 128 mm (5.0”); D 60 mm (2.4”) Trip, Error Relays Form C, 250 Vac/30 Vdc, 6 A resistive Sensitivity 10-25 klux programmable Mounting Surface, DIN rail Operating Temperature -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F) Shipping Weight 1.0 kg (2.2 lb) Certifications Contact factory Warranty 5 years A B A B AF0100 SERIES Littelfuse.com/af0100 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 510, Figure 11. 96 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 5 ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/a0220 Arc Detectors Description The A0220 Arc Detector is a photo electric sensor. It has a sensitive area of 180°. Sensor signal is a mA current signal of 0.5 mA/klux. The sensor includes 10 m of shielded two-wire electrical cable which can easily be shortened or extended to a maximum of 50 m. Use Belden 85240 or equivalent cable (2 x 0.50 mm2 ). The sensor is compatible with the D0920, D1000 and PGR-8800 Littelfuse Arc Flash Relays. A0220 Sensor Installation The sensors include an adhesivebacked drill template for easy surface or panel-mount installation. All dimensions are shown in millimetres. Affix the drill template where the sensor is to be mounted. Either M4 or M5 screws or pop rivets (4 mm or 5 mm) can be used. Mounting screws are M4 for the top holes. This template matches the mounting dimensions for the A1000 or PGA-LS10 sensor. The bottom mounting holes are either for 5mm self-drilling screws (3.5mm drill) or for M5 (4.2 mm drill). This template matches the mounting dimensions for the A0200 and A0300 sensors. For placement of sensors please refer to the relay manual. Specifications Sensitivity 0.5 mA/ klux Range for D0920 2 klux to 30 klux Range for PGR-8800 10 klux to 30 klux Ambient temperature -25˚C to +70˚C Degree of protection IP65 Type Selection Table: A0220 Arc Detector includes 10m cable A0220 SERIES Arc Detecting Point Sensor Detection range for a 3kA fault 2m 2m 2m SENSOR WIRE TERMINAL Red 1 Green 2 Screen 3 ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER A0220.0010 Arc Detector type V, 10 m A0220.0020 Arc Detector type V, 15 m A0220.0030 Arc Detector type V, 10 m, CCC approved A0220.0040 Arc Detector type V, 15 m, CCC approved Connection to D0920 relay Ordering Information SENSOR WIRE SENSOR 1 TERMINAL SENSOR 2 TERMINAL SENSOR 3 TERMINAL SENSOR 4 TERMINAL SENSOR 5 TERMINAL SENSOR 6 TERMINAL Green 4 8 12 16 20 24 Red 3 7 11 15 19 23 Screen Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Connection to PGR-8800 relay 4 x ø3.5 ø9 A0220 Drill guide © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 97 5ARC-FLASH PROTECTION Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/pga1100 Accessory for Arc-Flash Relays PGA-1100 (D1100) Diode Logic Description The PGA-1100 Diode Logic module is an optional accessory for the Littelfuse Arc-Flash Relays. It is used in installations with more than one breaker and more than one Arc-Flash Relay. Purpose of the unit is to separate the trip paths, so the breakers can be tripped independently from each other. Typical applications are a switchboards with two incoming feeders and one tie breaker or switchboards with several protected zones and tripping of a common upstream circuit breaker. The unit has three input diodes to handle the outputs of three Arc-Flash relays and three output diodes to handle the trip coils of three circuit breakers. If more than three relays/ circuit breakers are needed, more units can be added by connecting terminal 8 of one box to terminal 4 of the next one, thus increasing the number of inputs and outputs with multiples of three. For more application information please refer to the arc-flash relay manuals. Specifications Diodes 1000V reverse voltage, 3A continuous, 25A for 1 second Certification CE Dimensions H 70 mm (2.76”); W 20 mm (0.79”); D 80 mm (3.15”) Simplified Circuit Diagram 1 2 3 4 8 5 6 7 ORDERING NUMBER DESCRIPTION PGA-1100.0010 Diode logic unit Ordering Information 98 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 99 Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS Simple controls perform a specific function such as changing lamp intensity; vary the speed of a motor; or manage temperature of a heater. PHS Series Phase Control............................................................... 100 SIR Series Solid-State Relay - Isolated ........................................ 102 SLR Series Solid-State Relay - Non-Isolated ............................... 104 TCR9C Temperature Controller ............................................... 106 100 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Littelfuse.com/phs PHS SERIES Description The PHS Series is an ideal method of changing lamp intensity, varying the speed of a fan/motor, or controlling the temperature of a heater. The effective output voltage is adjusted with an accessory external potentiometer suitable for line voltage applications. Operation Upon application of input voltage, effective output voltage can be varied by changing the external resistance value. As the external resistance increases, the effective output voltage decreases. The inverse is also true. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS External adjustment - 230VAC rated potentiometer Allows control of heavy loads directly, solid state design will provide long life Up to 20A steady state - 200A inrush Allows control of heavy loads directly, solid state design will provide long life Single hole surface mounting Provides quick and easy installation Accessories P1004-174 (100kΩ 1W), P1004-175 (200kΩ 2W) Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE RATING PHS120A10 120VAC 10A PHS120A20 120VAC 20A PHS120A6 120VAC 6A PHS230A10 230VAC 10A PHS230A20 230VAC 20A PHS230A6 230VAC 6A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 Triac Output Device V = Voltage L = Load RT = External Adjustment Phase Control For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 101 Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Littelfuse.com/phs PHS SERIES Specifications Output Type Variable voltage phase angle control Rating Steady State (at 100% On) Inrush* 1A 10A 6A 60A 10A 100A 20A 200A Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.0V at rated current Input Voltage 120 or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Protection Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥100MΩ Mechanical Mounting * Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 1A: ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 6, 10, & 20A: ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) External Adjustment Potentiometer 120VAC 100KΩ rated at 1W 230VAC 200KΩ rated at 2W Must have insulation resistance suitable for line voltage applications. *Units rated ≥ 6A must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. Typical Output Waveform 102 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Littelfuse.com/sir SIR SERIES Solid-State Relay - Isolated Description The SIR Series is designed for industrial applications requiring rugged reliable operation. Provides an optically isolated, high capacity, solid-state output, with power switching capability up to 20A steady state, 200A inrush. Zero voltage switching SIR2 extends the life of an incandescent lamp up to 10 times. Random switching SIR1 is ideal for inductive loads. When fully insulated female terminals are used on the connection wires, the system meets the requirements for touch-proof connections. Operation The solid-state output is located between terminals 1 and 3, and is normally open or normally closed without control voltage applied to terminals 4 and 5. When control voltage is applied to terminals 4 and 5, the solid-state output opens or closes respectively. Reset: Removing control voltage resets the output. The unit is also reset if output voltage is removed. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where space is limited Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration and humidity Up to 20A, 200A inrush output rating Provides direct control of heavy inductive, incandescent or resistive loads Switching output is optically isolated from the control input Provides the ability to interface between 2 different electrical circuits SIR1 models provide random switching Designed for use with resistive and incandescent loads, extending lamp life up to 10 times SIR2 models provide zero voltage switching Perfect for resistive and incandescent loads Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Ordering Information MODEL SWITCHING CONTROL VOLTAGE RATING OUTPUT FORM OUTPUT VOLTAGE SIR1A1A4 Random 9 to 30VAC or DC 3A Normally open 120VAC SIR1A20A4 Random 9 to 30VAC or DC 20A Normally open 120VAC SIR1B6B4 Random 90 to 150VAC or DC 6A Normally closed 120VAC SIR1C20B6 Random 190 to 290VAC or DC 20A Normally closed 230VAC SIR2A20A4 Zero voltage 9 to 30VAC or DC 20A Normally open 120VAC SIR2B20A4 Zero voltage 90 to 150VAC or DC 20A Normally open 120VAC SIR2B20B4 Zero voltage 90 to 150VAC or DC 20A Normally closed 120VAC If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 Wiring Diagram V = Voltage CV = Control Voltage L = Load Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. Note: Normally open output is shown. Normally closed output is also available. For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 103 Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 SIR SERIES Specifications Output Type Optical isolation, totally solid state Form SPST, NO or NC Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% Ratings Steady State Inrush* Output Device 3A 30A Triac 6A 60A Triac 10A 100A Triac 20A 200A Triac Minimum Load Current ≅ 50mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.0V at rated current Leakage Current (Open State) ≅ 6mA Input Type Optical isolation LED/photo transistor Control Voltage 9 to 290VAC/DC in 3 ranges Power Consumption ≤ 0.5W Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting* Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -55° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) *Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Function Diagram V = Voltage CV = Control Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact R = Reset = Undefined Time Littelfuse.com/sir 104 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Littelfuse.com/slr SLR SERIES Solid-State Relay - Non-Isolated L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load Note: Normally open output is shown. Normally closed output is also available. Description The SLR Series has no isolation between the control switch input and the solid-state output. Select the SLR for applications where the control switch is the same voltage source as the load. Provides the noiseless, reliability and long life of a solid-state relay, without the cost of isolation circuitry. The SLR Series offers random switching and is normally used for inductive loads. When fully insulated female terminals are used on the connection wires, the system meets the requirements for touch-proof connections. Operation The solid-state output is located between terminals 1 and 2 and can be ordered as either normally open or normally closed, when voltage is applied and S1 is open. When S1 is closed, the solid-state output between terminals 1 and 2 closes (or opens). If S1 is opened, the solid-state output will open (or close). Reset: Opening S1 resets the output to its original state. Reset is also accomplished by removing input voltage. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where space is limited Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Up to 20A steady, 200A inrush output rating Provides direct control of heavy inductive, resistive, or incandescent loads Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL SWITCHING INPUT VOLTAGE OUTPUT RATING OUTPUT FORM SLR1420A Random 120VAC 20A Normally open SLR1610A Random 230VAC 10A Normally open If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 105 Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 SLR SERIES Specifications Output (Contact) Type Non-isolated solid state Form SPST, NO or NC Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% Ratings Steady State Inrush* Output Device 1A 10A SCR & Bridge Rectifier 6 A 60A Triac 10A 100A Triac 20A 200A Triac Minimum Load Current ≅ 50mA Voltage Drop (at Rated Current) ≅ 2.0V - 6, 10, & 20A units; ≅ 2.5V - 1A units Leakage Current (Open State) ≤ 5mA Initiate Switch Voltage Same as the output voltage Power Consumption ≤ 0.5W Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100MΩ Mechanical Mounting* Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 1A units: ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g); 6, 10, 20A units: ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) *Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. Function Diagram V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact R = Reset = Undefined Time Littelfuse.com/slr 106 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 Littelfuse.com/tcr9c Description The TCR9C of solid-state temperature control is a low cost modular approach to accurate control of temperature. The high power output is available in 20 amperes and provides setpoint temperature control. The efficient mounting surface allows for utilization of equipment as the heat sink. Designed for use with resistive loads. Operation Setpoint Control: TCR9C is a single setpoint temperature controller. When the thermistor resistance is high (above the setpoint), the solid-state output is ON. When the thermistor resistance decreases (temperature increases) to setpoint or below, the output turns OFF. It must be recognized that temperature differential (under and overshoot) is largely due to the system as a whole. The mass of the system, size of the heaters and sensor all play an important part. Single setpoint control is best when there is little or no lag time between heater and sensor, and when the heater is not oversized. Features & Benefits J NTC thermistor sensing for low cost setpoint control J Solid-state output to control resistive heaters J External adjustment of the setpoint J Small package, encapsulated, single-screw mounting J Metal mounting surface utilizes equipment as heat sink Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Specifications Control Type Single setpoint, negative temperature coefficient resistance sensing Sensor Type Thermistor, negative temperature coefficient (customer supplied) Electrically insulated for 1500V RMS min. Adjustment Temperature setpoint selected by means of an external resistance Accuracy ≤ ±5% of the setpoint resistance Add the tolerance of the NTC thermistor and the drift of the adj. pot over temp. range Setpoint vs. Ambient Temperature and Operating Voltage ±5% of setpoint resistance Reset Time ≤ 150ms Input Voltage 120 - 240VAC Tolerance ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz TCR9C Wiring Diagram Caution: NTC Thermistor must be electrically insulated, 1500 volts RMS minimum. NTC Thermistor RT Set Point Adjust 5 KΩ V = Voltage L = Load Caution: NTC Thermistor must be electrically insulated, 1500 volts RMS minimum. Temperature Controller For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 107 Protection Relays Switching Relays and Controls SWITCHING RELAYS & CONTROLS 6 TCR9C V = Voltage L = Load SP = Setpoint NTC = Negative Temperature Coefficient Thermistor Function Diagram 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RT (kOhms) NTC (kOhms) Load ON Load OFF Note: If R T value exceeds 13kOhms, the output will not energize. Adjustment vs. Thermistor Resistance Note: If RT value exceeds 13kOhms, the output will not energize. Littelfuse.com/tcr9c Output Type Solid state Form Non-isolated, single pole, zero voltage switching Rating Model Steady State Inrush* C 20A 200A* Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2V at rated current Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Dielectric Breakdown ≥2000 volts terminals to mounting surface Isolation Voltage ≥100mΩ Circuitry Encapsulated Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0 .8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40°to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2 .7 oz (77 g) * Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: non-repetitive for 16ms. 108 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 109 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION Prevent damage to motors caused by overloads, jams, phase loss or unbalance, heat from non-electric sources, heavy start-ups and excessive operational cycles. Dynamic thermal curves, as well as integrated protection, metering, and data-logging functions extend motor life and maximize process efficiency. PGR-6100 Series Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay.... 110 PGR-6101-120 Motor Ground-Fault & Insulation Relay.... 111 MPU-32 Series Motor Protection Unit................................ 112 MPS Series Motor Protection System .......................... 114 MPU-32-X69X Series Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit........... 116 MPS-469X Series Motor Protection Relay Retrofit Kit........... 116 111-Insider-P / 231-Insider-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor...................... 117 232-Insider Single-Phase Pump Monitor...................... 120 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 Series Single-Phase Pump Monitor...................... 122 234-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor ..................... 124 235P Single-Phase Pump Monitor...................... 126 MP8000 Series Bluetooth Current & Voltage Monitor....... 128 777 Series 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.......... 132 777 / 77C Series Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.. 134 777-KW/HP-P2 Series 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.......... 136 777-AccuPower 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.......... 139 77C-KW/HP Series Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor.. 140 SIO-RTD-02-00 Temperature Input Monitor ....................... 144 *Bluetooth is a trademark of its respective owner. For More Information… and to download our Motor Protection Brochure or White Paper, click on Technical Resources at Littelfuse.com/MotorProtection Protection Relays 110 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 L2 L1 A PGR-6100 SERIES GROUNDED SUPPLY CT B C (Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor) A Littelfuse.com/pgr-6100 PGR-6100 SERIES (GFR4000) Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor Description The PGR-6100 combines the features of a ground-fault protection relay and insulation monitor into one unit. It protects against ground faults by monitoring insulation resistance when the motor is de-energized and by monitoring ground-fault current when the motor is energized. The PGR-6100 features two separate analog outputs for optional current and ohm meters, and two separate alarm relays. It operates on one- or threephase solidly grounded, resistance-grounded and ungrounded systems up to 6 kV. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N), Ground detector (64), Alarm Relay (74) Input Voltage See ordering information Dimensions H 75 mm (3”); W 100 mm (3.9”); D 115 mm (4.5”) Response delay < 50 ms Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Test Button Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature CT-Loop Monitoring Standard feature Output Contacts Two Form C Analog Output 0-1 mA Approvals UL Listed (E183688) (1) Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface ORDERING NUMBER CONTROL POWER PGR-6100-120 120 Vac PGR-6100-240(1) 240 Vac (1) Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable GF pickup (10 mA-3 A) Trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Adjustable insulation pickup (250 kΩ-2 MΩ) Customizable insulation resistance setpoints for maximum protection Adjustable time delay (50 ms-1.0 s) Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Output contacts Two Form C output contacts for ground fault and insulation-resistance fault Analog outputs (0-1 mA) Two analog outputs indicate insulation resistance and ground-fault current CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Features & Benefits SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault CTs Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. Flux conditioner is included to prevent saturation. PGH Family High Tension Couplers Required (for systems >1,300 V) PGH Family hightension coupler must be connected between the phase conductor and the PGR-6100. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Optional panel-mounted meters display ground-fault current as a percentage of the set-point and insulation resistance. Accessories A B B ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS30 Series Required PGH Family Required >1300 V PGA-0500 Optional PGA-0510 Optional Ground-Fault Protection – Grounded AC Systems Note (1) - PGR-6100-240 ordering option is not UL Listed. For optional conformal coating please consult factory. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 111 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/pgr-6101-120 PGR-6101-120 (GFR4001) Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor Description The PGR-6101-120 combines the features of a ground-fault protection relay and insulation monitor into one unit. It protects against ground faults by monitoring insulation resistance when the motor is de-energized and by monitoring ground-fault current when the motor is energized. The PGR-6101-120 features two separate analog outputs for optional current and ohm meters, and two separate alarm relays. It operates on one- or threephase solidly grounded, resistance grounded and ungrounded systems up to 6 kV. Specifications IEEE Device Numbers Ground Fault (50G/N, 51G/N), Ground detector (64), Alarm Relay (74) Input Voltage 120 Vac Dimensions H 75 mm (3”); W 100 mm (3.9”); D 115 mm (4.5”) Response delay < 50 ms Contact Operating Mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe Harmonic Filtering Standard feature Test Button Standard feature Reset Button Standard feature CT-Loop Monitoring Standard feature Output Contacts Two Form C Analog Output 0-1 mA Approvals UL Listed (E183688) Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable GF pickup (30-200 mA) Trip setting provides a wide range of low-level protection and system coordination Adjustable insulation pickup (60-600 kΩ) Customizable insulation resistance setpoints for maximum protection Adjustable time delay (50-250 ms) Adjustable trip delay for quick protection and system coordination Output contacts Two Form C output contacts for ground fault and insulation-resistance fault Analog outputs (0-1 mA) Two analog outputs indicate insulation resistance and ground-fault current CT-Loop monitoring Alarms when CT is not connected Selectable contact operating mode Selectable fail-safe or non-fail-safe operating modes allows connection to shunt or undervoltage breaker coil Features & Benefits SE-CS30 Series Ground-Fault Transformers Required zero-sequence current transformer specifically designed for low level detection. Flux conditioner is included to prevent saturation. PGH Family High Tension Couplers Required (for systems >1,300 V) PGH Family hightension coupler must be connected between the phase conductor and the PGR-6101-120. PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Optional panel-mounted meters display ground-fault current as a percentage of the set-point and insulation resistance. Accessories A B ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT SE-CS30 Series Required PGH Family Required >1300 V PGA-0500 Optional PGA-0510 Optional For optional conformal coating please consult factory. L2 L1 A PGR-6101 SERIES GROUNDED SUPPLY CT B C (Ground-Fault & Insulation Monitor) A Ground-Fault Protection – Grounded AC Systems B Protection Relays 112 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/mpu-32 Motor Protection – Advanced MPU-32 SERIES (PGR-6200) Motor Protection Unit ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATION MPU-32-00-00 TIA-232 MPU-32-01-00 TIA-232 & TIA-485 MPU-32-02-00 TIA-232 & DeviceNet™ MPU-32-04-00 TIA-232 & EtherNet/IP™ & Modbus® TCP NOTE: One of the following is required: MPU-CIM-00-00 Current Input Module, or MPU-CTI-RT-00 Current Input Module with ring-tonque terminals. Ordering Information ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT Phase CTs Required MPS-RTD-01-00 Optional MPS-DIF-01-00 Optional MPU-32-SMK Optional CA-945 Optional MPU-16A-Y92A-96N Optional 1 2 Description The MPU-32 Motor Protection Unit is used to provide currentand temperature-based protection, metering, and data logging for three-phase low-voltage medium-horsepower induction motors. This relay is ideal for retrofitting and upgrading obsolete or aging motor protection using existing CTs. See the PMA Family of Panel Mount Adapter Kits to replace common obsolete relays. 1 Motor Protection Unit g Three ac-current inputs g Earth-leakage-CT input g Programmable digital input g 24-Vdc source for digital input g Programmable 4-20-mA analog output g On-board temperature-sensor input, g 100-Ω-Platinum RTD or PTC g Three programmable output relays g Local RS-232 communications, optional Network Communications g PC-interface software (SE-Comm-RIS) g 4 line x 20 character backlit LCD display g Keypad for programming and display selection g 4 LEDs; 1 user programmable 2 Current Input Module (MPU-CIM) The MPU-CIM Current Input Module is the interface between the MPU-32 relay and the 5-A-secondary, 1-A-secondary, and sensitive current transformers. The MPU-CIM is ordered separately from the MPU-32 and can be surface or DIN-rail mounted. Wire-clamping terminals are standard, but the MPU-CTI is available for those who require ring-tongue terminals. Simplified Circuit Diagram PHASE CT PHASE CT GF CT PHASE CT MPU-CIM MPS-RTD RTD x 8 L2 L1 MPU-32 M (Current Input Module) (Motor Protection Relay) PHASE CT PHASE CT PHASE CT GF CT L2 MPS-CTU L1 M MPS-RTD MPS-OPI RTD x 8 (Control Unit) (Temperature Input Module) (Temperature Input Module) (Operator Interface) D Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. For upgrade applications, existing CTs can be used. Ground-Fault Current Transformer Optional zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. MPS-DIF Differential Current Module Optional motor differential protection, compatible with core balance and summation current transformer connections. B C Accessories A 1 2 B C A Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 113 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/mpu-32 Motor Protection – Advanced FEATURES IEEE # BENEFITS Overload 49, 51 Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires Dynamic thermal model Provides protection through starting, running, and cooling cycles Communications Remotely view measured values and event records, reset trips, and access setpoints Ground fault 50G/N, 51G/N Prevents catastrophic failures and fires Current unbalance/ Phase loss/Phase reverse 46 Prevents overheating due to unbalanced phases RTD temperature 38, 49 RTD temperature protection (MPS-RTD module) for high-ambient or loss-of-ventilation protection Phase loss/Phase reverse (current) 46 Detects unhealthy supply conditions Overcurrent 50, 51 Prevents catastrophic failures and fires; extends motor life Jam Prevents motor damage by detecting mechanical jams or excessive loading Undercurrent 37 Detects low level or no-load conditions PTC overtemperature 49 Overtemperature (PTC) protection for high-ambient or loss-of-ventilation detection Starts per hour 66 Limits the motor starts per hour to prevent overheating Differential 87 Optional MPS-DIF module for sensitive winding-fault protection Reduced overcurrent mode Minimizes arc-flash hazards during maintenance Metering View measured and calculated parameters with on-board display MPU-CIM Separate current input module to reduce risk of open-CT hazard and for convenient installation Analog output Provides means for metering selectable parameters Data logging On-board 100-event recorder for data logging Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture Features & Benefits Wiring Diagram Specifications Protective Functions (IEEE Device Numbers) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 Vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 100 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50, 60 Hz or ASD Output Contacts Three Form C programmables Communications TIA-232 (standard); TIA-485, DeviceNet™, Ethernet (optional) Analog Output 4-20 mA, programmable Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting (Control Unit) Panel (standard) Surface (with MPU-32-SMK converter kit) (Current Input Module) DIN, Surface Approvals CSA certified, CE (European Union), UL Recognized, C-Tick (Australian) Overload (49, 51) Phase reverse (current) (46) Overcurrent (50, 51) Jam Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) PTC overtemperature (49 RTD temperature (38, 49) Unbalance (current) (46) Starts per hour (66) Differential (87) Phase loss (current) (46) Undercurrent (37) ...... + 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 25 21 22 23 24 27 31 PHASE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS GROUND-FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER (required) (recommended) MPS-RTD (optional) INPUT MODULE MPU-32 MOTOR PROTECTION UNIT TEMPERATURE INPUT 4-20 mA ANALOG OUTPUT CIM I/0 MODULE RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 1 CONTROL POWER DIG IN CURRENT INPUT MODULE MPU-CIM MPS-DIF DIFFERENTIAL MODULE (optional) A B C D 2 1 MPU-32 SERIES (PGR-6200) Protection Relays 114 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/mps PHASE CT PHASE CT GF CT PHASE CT MPU-CIM MPS-RTD RTD x 8 L2 L1 MPU-32 M (Current Input Module) (Motor Protection Relay) PHASE CT PHASE CT PHASE CT GF CT L2 MPS-CTU L1 M MPS-RTD MPS-OPI RTD x 8 (Control Unit) (Temperature Input Module) (Temperature Input Module) (Operator Interface) Motor Protection – Advanced MPS SERIES (PGR-6300) Motor Protection System 1 2 Description The MPS Motor Protection System monitors voltage, current, and temperature to provide a comprehensive package of 22 protective functions. The MPS is a modular system with integrated protection, motor control, metering, and data-logging functions. This system is typically used to provide protection for three-phase low- and medium-voltage, medium- to highhorsepower induction motors. 1 Operator Interface (MPS-OPI) g Large, bright, 4 x 20 vacuum-fluorescent display g Display metered values g Access set points g Powered by Control Unit g Panel mount or attach directly to Control Unit g Remote mounting (1.2 km or 4000 ft maximum loop length) g 1/2 DIN size g Hazardous-location certified 2 Control Unit (MPS-CTU) g Current inputs—5-A or 1-A secondary phase current transformers g Voltage inputs—up to 600 V without PTs g Earth-leakage input—5-A or 1-A secondary or sensitive transformer g Tachometer (high-speed pulse) input g 8 digital inputs, 5 relay outputs, 1 analog input and output g 24-Vdc supply for OPI and RTD modules, and for digital inputs g IRIG-B time-code input g 1/2 DIN size, surface mount g RS-485 network communications (Standard) g DeviceNet™, Profibus®, or Ethernet communications available Phase Current Transformers Phase CTs are required to detect phase currents. Ground-Fault Current Transformer Required zero-sequence current transformer detects ground-fault current. Available with 5-A and 30-A primary ratings for low-level pickup. MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Optional module provides 8 inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. MPS-DIF Differential Current Module Optional motor differential protection, compatible with core balance and summation current transformer connections. B C Accessories A ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENT MPS-OPI-01-00 Recommended Phase CTs Required Ground-Fault CT Recommended MPS-RTD-01-00 Optional MPS-DIF-01-00 Optional SE-IP65CVR-M Optional 1 2 ORDERING NUMBER COMMUNICATIONS MPS-CTU-01-00 RS-485 MPS-CTU-02-00 RS-485 & DeviceNet™ MPS-CTU-03-00 RS-485 & Profibus® MPS-CTU-04-00 RS-485 & EtherNet/IP™ & Modbus® TCP Ordering Information Simplified Circuit Diagram B C A D Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 115 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/mps Motor Protection – Advanced Wiring Diagram PHASE VOLTAGES MPS-CTU CONTROL UNIT RELAY OUTPUTS I/0 MODULE DIGITAL INPUTS 4-20 mA ANALOG INPUT + ANALOG OUTPUT 4-20 mA + 39 40 53 52 43 51 ...... 5 16 ...... 1 2 20 17 60 56 ...... 33 22 CONTROL POWER RS-485 35 37 ...... 30 29 27 26 23 22 PHASE CURRENT TRANFORMERS GROUND-FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER OPERATOR INTERFACE MPS-OPI (recommended) (required) (required) MPS-RTD RTD MODULE (optional) (optional) MPS-DIF DIFFERENTIAL MODULE A B C D 1 2 Specifications Protective Functions (IEEE Device Numbers) Input Voltage 65-265 Vac, 25 VA; 80-275 Vdc, 25 W Power-Up Time 800 ms at 120 Vac Ride-Through Time 100 ms minimum 24-Vdc Source 100 mA maximum AC Measurements True RMS and DFT, Peak, 16 samples/cycle, and positive and negative sequence of fundamental Frequency 50, 60 Hz or ASD Inputs Phase current, Earth-leakage current, Phase voltage, 7 digital, tachometer, 1 analog Output Contacts 5 contacts — See Product Manual Approvals CSA Certified, RCM (Australian), UL Recognized Communications Allen-Bradley® DFI and Modbus® RTU (Standard); DeviceNet™, Profibus®, Ethernet (Optional) Conformally Coated Standard feature Warranty 10 years Mounting (Control Unit) Surface (Operator Interface) Panel, Control-Unit mounted Overload (49, 51) Phase reverse (current) (46) Overfrequency (81) Overcurrent (50, 51) Jam Underfrequency (81) Ground fault (50G/N, 51G/N) Undercurrent (37) Unbalance (voltage) (47) Failure to accelerate RTD temperature (38, 49) Unbalance (current) (46) Underspeed (14) Starts per hour (66) Phase loss (voltage) (47) Overvoltage (59) Differential (87) Phase loss (current) (46) Undervoltage (27) Phase reverse (voltage) (47) Power factor (55) Features & Benefits FEATURES IEEE # BENEFITS Overload 49, 51 Extends motor life and prevents insulation failures and fires Current unbalance/ Phase loss/Phase reverse 46 Prevents overheating and extends motor life Overcurrent/Jam 50, 51 Prevents catastrophic failures and fires and extends motor life Undercurrent 37 Detects low-level or no-load conditions Ground fault 50g/N, 51G/N Prevents catastrophic failures and fires RTD temperature 38, 49 Optional RTD temperature protection (MPS-RTD module) for high ambient or loss of ventilation protection Overvoltage 59 Prevents stress to insulation Undervoltage 27 Prevents a start attempt when it will damage the motor Voltage unbalance 47 Detects unhealthy supply voltage Phase differential 87 Provides sensitive protection for high-resistance winding faults Dynamic thermal mode Provides protection through starting, running, overload, and cooling cycles Reduced overcurrent mode Minimizes Arc-Flash hazards during maintenance Starter control Simplifies the installation by reducing component count Metering Displays the measured and calculated motor parameters Data logging On-board 64-event recorder helps with system diagnosis Communications Remotely view measured values, event records & reset trips Conformal coating Internal circuits are conformally coated to protect against corrosion and moisture MPS SERIES (PGR-6300) Protection Relays 116 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/mpu-32-X69X, Littelfuse.com/mps-469X Motor Protection Relay Retrofits MPU-32-X69X (PGR-6210) SERIES / MPS-469X (PGR-6310) SERIES Motor Protection Retrofit Kits Description Littelfuse Startco retrofit kits are an excellent choice for upgrading motor protection, providing current- and temperature-based protection, metering, and data logging. 1 MPU-32-X69X The MPU-32-X69X Motor Protection Retrofit Kit is designed to replace GE Multilin 169, 269, and 369 relays. It includes the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay, MPU-CIM Current Input Module, and optional MPS-RTD Temperature Input Modules, which are pre-wired on a panel. The kit fits in the existing space and typically can utilize existing current transformers and wiring to simplify the upgrade procedure. 2 MPS-469X The MPS-469X Motor Protection Retrofit Kit replaces the GE Multilin 469 relay. It includes the MPS Motor Protection System and optional RTD and differential modules mounted on a panel that can be installed in the existing 469 cutout. Existing current transformer and wiring can be utilized, simplifying the upgrade procedure. Front Front MPU-32-X69X MPS-469X Back Back MPU-32-X69X Ordering Information RTD INPUTS MPU-32 COMMUNICATIONS GROUND-FAULT CT FUTURE OPTIONS MPU-32-X69X – X X X 00 0 = One Platinum 100 Ω 0 = TIA232 0 = Wired for Sensitive Ground-Fault CT (50 mA Secondary) 1 = One Platinum 100 Ω and 8-input MPS-RTD Module 1 = TIA232 & TIA485 1 = Wired for 1- or 5-A Secondary Ground-Fault CT 2 = TIA232 & DeviceNet 4 = TIA232 & Ethernet MPS-469X Ordering Information MODULE CONFIGURATION MPS COMMUNICATIONS FUTURE OPTIONS MPS-469X – X X 000 0 = None 1 = RS485 1 = One MPS-RTD Module 2 = RS485 & DeviceNet 2 = Two MPS-RTD Modules 3 = RS485 & Profibus 3 = One MPS-DIF Module 4 = RS485 & Ethernet 4 = One MPS-RTD Module and One MPS-DIF Module 1 2 FEATURES BENEFITS Mounting Fits in existing mounting holes and panel openings Quick installation Existing CTs and RTDs can be used to reduce installation time Factory tested 100% factory-tested, pre-assembled components ensure reliability Communications Add communications capability to older switchgear and improve system performance Microprocessor based No calibration required saves on maintenance cost Reduced overcurrent mode Maintenance mode setting to reduce the risk of Arc-Flash Hazards Conformal coating Protects circuit boards against corrosion and moisture Additional protection Additional protective functions, including dynamic thermal model and ability to match existing overcurrent curves Features & Benefits Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 117 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Motor and Pump Protection Description The Littelfuse 111-Insider-P single-phase products fit inside ¹⁄³ and ½, 115V control boxes and the 231-Insider-P fits inside ¹⁄³ ½, ¾, and 1 hp, 230V control boxes. Both models are designed to protect single-phase pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid-cycle, overvoltage, and undervoltage conditions. A calibration adjustment allows the Insider to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontroller-based voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the product deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The unit then begins its user-selectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the unit reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. By leaving the restart delay knob in the reset position, the unit will operate in manual reset mode. The Insider communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. An IR Kit-12 (12” fiber optic kit) is included with each Insider, allowing the Informer to access these parameters even when the Insider is enclosed in a control box. This is valuable for troubleshooting the pump while it is running. NOTE: The 111/231-Insider-P models have a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70-90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid cycling, and voltage faults Onboard sensitivity adjustment Allows user to adjust the current sensitivity for the dry-well / dead-head trip point from 70% - 90% of the full load. Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it’s running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting Wiring Diagrams See next page. Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Includes the Informer IR Kit-12 Informer IR Kit-12 12” infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Included with the Informer Ordering Information MODEL VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 111-Insider-P 115VAC ¹⁄³ - ½ hp, includes IR Kit-12 231-Insider-P 230VAC ¹⁄³ - 1 hp, includes IR Kit-12 111-INSIDER-P / 231-INSIDER-P Single-Phase Pump Monitor Littelfuse.com/111insiderp-231insiderp Protection Relays 118 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/111insiderp-231insiderp Specifications Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent 125% of calibration point Underload (dry-well) Adjustable (70 to 90% of calibrated run power) Overvoltage 111-Insider-P 132.5VAC 231-Insider-P 265VAC Undervoltage 111-Insider-P 95VAC 231-Insider-P 190VAC Number of restarts allowed in a 60-sec. period (rapid-cycling) 4 Trip Delay Times Overcurrent 5 seconds Dry-well 4 seconds Restart Delay Times Over/Undervoltage 2 seconds All other faults Manual, 2-225 minutes 111-INSIDER-P / 231-INSIDER-P MODEL 231/111 INSIDER-P BLUE FIGURE 5: Pentek® Control Box with the PumpSaver ® Plus Installed PENTEK® CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM FRANKLIN™ CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 111-Insider-P/231-Insider-P in Franklin™ Control Box SOLID-STATE SWITCH B(MAIN) Y(COMM) BLK RED ORANGE YEL R(START) L2 L1 BLUE 111/231 INSIDER-P Wiring Diagrams Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 111-Insider-P 115VAC 231-Insider-P 230VAC Load Range 111-Insider-P ¹⁄³ – ½ hp 231-Insider-P ¹⁄³ – 1 hp Frequency 50*/60Hz Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST 111-Insider-P ½hp@120VAC (17 amps max.) 231-Insider-P 1hp@ 240VAC (17 amps max.) General Characteristics Operating Temperature -40º to 60º C (-40º to 140º F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Safety Marks cUR** UL508, C22.2 No. 14 Weight 10 oz. Mounting Methods Inside a Pentek®, Franklin™, CentriPro™, Flint and Walling™, and Grundfos®*** control box *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% **The 111-Insider-P and 231-Insider-P are approved by UL for use in the Franklin™, Pentek®, and CentriPro™ type 3R control boxes when installed as described in the installation instructions. The 111-Insider-P and 231-Insider-P are not intended to provide overload protection, and should be used with thermally or impedance protected motors only. ***Grundfos control boxes manufactured after mid 2014. Motor and Pump Protection Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 119 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 111-INSIDER-P / 231-INSIDER-P FLINT AND WALLING™ CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM CAPACITOR ORANGE BLUE BLACK 5 YELLOW 231/111 INSIDER-P VOLTAGE RELAY 1 2 YELLOW RED B(MAIN) Y(COMM) R(START) L2 L1 FIGURE 9: Flint and Walling™ Control Box with the PumpSaver ® Plus Installed CENTRIPRO™ CONTROL BOX WIRING DIAGRAM VOLTAGE RELAY B(MAIN) Y(COMM) BLACK ORANGE R(START) L2 L1 BLUE 231/111 INSIDER-P RED YELLOW YELLOW FIGURE 7: CentriPro™ Control Box with the PumpSaver ® Plus Installed GRUNDFOS® CONTROL BOX* WIRING DIAGRAM Grundfos® Control Box with the PumpSaver ® Plus Installed CAPACITOR ORANGE BLUE BLACK 5 YELLOW VOLTAGE RELAY 1 2 YELLOW RED B(MAIN) Y(COMM) R(START) L2 L1 MODEL 231/111 INSIDER-P BLACK For installation instructions see the Fresh Water Pumping Catalog at www.Littelfuse.com/PumpProtection Motor and Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/111insiderp-231insiderp * For boxes manufactured in mid 2014 or later. See 232-INSIDER on next page for boxes manufactured prior to mid 2014. Protection Relays 120 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 232-INSIDER Single-Phase Pump Monitor Description The Model 232-Insider single-phase PumpSaver® fits inside ¹/3, 1/2, 3/4, and 1hp, 230V Grundfos control boxes manufactured prior to mid 2014. The PumpSaver® Model 232-Insider is a pump monitor designed to protect single-phase pumps from dry-well, deadhead, jammed impeller, overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. Typical applications include residential water wells, commercial water wells, irrigation wells, and golf course systems. A calibration adjustment allows the 232-Insider to be calibrated to your specific pumping application, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontrollerbased voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the 232-Insider deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The 232-Insider then begins its user-selectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the 232-Insider reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. By leaving the restart delay knob in the reset position, the 232-Insider will operate in manual reset mode. The Insider communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. This is valuable for troubleshooting the pump while it is running. Note: The use of flow restrictors or unusually high head pressures at the time of calibration may interfere with the detection of dead-head conditions. Contact Littelfuse for information on a product to fit these applications. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, and voltage faults Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it’s running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Wiring Diagram BLK BLK ORANGE YEL CAPACITOR RED YEL RELAY L1 L2* Y R B *Note: Move short yellow wire from the 90° terminal on L2 to the 45° terminal on L2. 232-Insider 1/3 to 1hp @ 230VAC RESTART DELAY/CAL. (MINS.) 800-843-8848 MADE INUSA E68520 MODEL 232-INSIDER 232-INSIDER CONNECTIONS IN GRUNDFOS® CONTROL BOX For installation instructions see the Install Bulletin. Motor and Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/232insider Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 121 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/232insider 232-INSIDER Specifications Functional Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent 125% of calibration point Underload (dry-well) Approx. 80% of calibration point Underload (dry well) with high sensitivity jumper removed Approx. 87% of calibration point Overvoltage 265VAC Undervoltage 190VAC Trip Delay Times Overcurrent 5 seconds Dry-well 4 seconds Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage 2 seconds All other faults (dry-well recovery timer) Manual, 2-225 minutes Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 230VAC Load Range ¹⁄3 – 1 hp Frequency 50*/60Hz Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST 1hp@240VAC (17 amps max.) General Characteristics Operating Temperature -40º to 60º C (-40º to 140º F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Safety Marks UL UL508 CSA C22.2 No. 14 Weight 10 oz. Mounting Methods Grundfos® Control Box manufactured prior to mid 2014 *Note: 50 Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% Motor and Pump Protection Protection Relays 122 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/111p-233p Motor and Pump Protection 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 SERIES Single-Phase PumpSaver® Description The Littelfuse Models 111P (115 volt, ¹⁄³ to 1hp); 233P-1.5 (230 volt, ¹⁄³ to 1.5hp); and 233P (230 volt, ¹⁄³ to 3hp) protect pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, overvoltage/ undervoltage conditions and now rapid-cycle protection whether the pressure switch is mounted before or after our unit. A calibration adjustment allows the unit to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontroller-based voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the unit deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The unit then begins its user-selectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the unit reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. The infrared LED communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. Special considerations for pump cables larger than #10 AWG: In some cases where larger motors are installed with deep set pumps, pump cables are used that exceed the relay’s terminal size. In these conditions, a short splice of #10 AWG or #12 AWG may be a solution at the control box. Note: All local, state and national electric codes should be followed when applying this solution. NOTE: The 111P/233P/233P-1.5 models have a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70-90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage, power factor, current for reliable pump protection Onboard calibration process Calibrates unit to your specific individual pumping application and reduces nuisance tripping Onboard sensitivity adjustment User adjustable sensitivity knob makes the unit more adaptable to varying pumping applications Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 111P 115VAC Load Range: ¹⁄³ - 1hp 111P-ENCL 115VAC 111P with NEMA3R enclosure 233P 230VAC Load Range: ¹⁄³ - 3hp 233P-ENCL 230VAC 233P with NEMA3R enclosure 233P-1.5 230VAC Load Range: ¹⁄³ - 1.5hp 233P-1.5-ENCL 230VAC 233P-1.5 with NEMA3R enclosure For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 511, Figure 15. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 123 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 111P / 233P / 233P-1.5 SERIES Specifications Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent 125% of calibration point Underload (dry-well) Adjustable (70 to 90% of calibrated run power) Overvoltage 111P 132.5VAC 233P, 233P-1.5 265VAC Undervoltage 111P 95VAC 233P, 233P-1.5 190VAC Number of restarts allowed in a 60-sec. period (rapid-cycling) 4 Trip Delay Times Overcurrent 5 seconds Dry-well 4 seconds Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage 2 seconds All other faults Manual, 2-225 Minutes Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 111P 115VAC 233P-1.5, 233P 230VAC Load Range: 111P ¹⁄³ – 1 hp 233P-1.5 ¹⁄³ – 1.5 hp 233P ¹⁄³ – 3 hp Frequency 50*/60Hz Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST 111P 1hp@120VAC (16 amps max.) 233P-1.5 1.5hp@240VAC (10 amps max.) 233P 3hp@240VAC (17 amps max.) General Characteristics Operating Temperature -40º to 60º C (-40º to 140º F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Wire Gauge Solid or Stranded 10 - 22AWG Terminal Torque 13 in.-lbs. Safety Marks cUL Listed UL508, C22.2 No. 14 Dimensions H 73.66 mm (2.9”); W 133.35 mm (5.25”); D 73.99 mm (2.913”) Weight 14 oz. Mounting Methods #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% Motor and Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/111p-233p Protection Relays 124 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 234-P Description The PumpSaver® Model 234-P is designed to be mounted inside a Grundfos® control box to protect ¹/3 – 3hp, 2- or 3-wire, 230V pumps. The Model 234-P protects single-phase pumps from dry-well, dead-head, rapid-cycle, jammed-impeller, and over/undervoltage conditions. Typical applications include residential waterwells, commercial waterwells, irrigation wells, and golf course and other sprinkler systems. A calibration adjustment allows the 234-P to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontrollerbased voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations, overcurrent, and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the 234-P deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The 234-P then begins its userselectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the 234-P reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. By leaving the restart delay knob in the reset position, the 234-P will operate in manual reset mode. The 234-P communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. An IR Kit-12 (12” fiber optic kit) allows the Informer to access these parameters even when the 234-P is enclosed in a control box. This is valuable for troubleshooting the pump while it is running. NOTE: The PumpSaver® models have a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70- 90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. The Model 234-P is not recommended for use with the Grundfos® Deluxe Control Box. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid cycling, and voltage faults Onboard sensitivity adjustment Allows user to adjust the current sensitivity for the dry-well / dead-head trip point from 70% - 90% of the full load. Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it’s running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting Wiring Diagram START CAPACITOR RUN CAPACITOR RELAY YELLOW RED ORANGE BLACK BLACK BLK BLUE SW L1 L2 YEL RED BLK RESTART DELAY/ 1.5 to 3hp at 230VAC _ + IR LINK YELLOW 234-P CONNECTIONS IN GRUNDFOS® CONTROL BOX For installation instructions see the Install Bulletin. Single-Phase Pump Monitor Motor and Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/234p Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 125 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/234p 234-P Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Includes the Informer IR Kit-12 Informer IR Kit-12 12” infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Included with the Informer Specifications Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent 125% of calibration point Underload (dry-well) Adjustable (70 - 90% of calibrated run power) Overvoltage 265VAC Undervoltage 190VAC Number of restarts allowed in a 60-second period (rapid-cycling) 4 Trip Delay Times Overcurrent 5 seconds Dry-well 4 seconds Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage 2 seconds All other faults (dry-well recovery timer) Manual, 2-225 Minutes Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 230VAC Load Range ¹⁄3 – 3 hp Frequency 50*/60Hz Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPST) 3 hp @ 240VAC (17 amps max.) General Characteristics Operating Temperature -40º to 60º C (-40º to 140º F) Maximum Input Power 5W Dimensions Fitted to Grundfos® Control Box Weight 14 oz. Mounting Methods Grundfos® Control Box Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 2, 4kV contact, 6kV air *Note: 50 Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% Motor and Pump Protection Protection Relays 126 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/235p 235P Wiring Diagram Description The Littelfuse 235P is designed to protect 5-15hp, 230V, single-phase pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller and overvoltage and undervoltage conditions. A calibration adjustment allows the 235P to be calibrated to your specific pumping applications, thereby reducing the possibility of false or nuisance tripping. A unique microcontrollerbased voltage and current-sensing circuit constantly monitors the incoming power for fluctuations causing overcurrent and undercurrent. When an abnormality, such as loss of suction is detected, the 235P deactivates its output relay and directly disconnects the pump motor. The unit then begins its userselectable restart delay (dry-well recovery) timer. When the timer counts to zero or power is removed and reapplied, the unit reactivates its output relay and turns the pump back on. The 235P communicates with a hand-held diagnostics tool called the Informer (sold separately). The Informer displays parameters including calibration points, trip points, run time and last faults. An external current transformer is required for operation (sold separately). Special considerations for pump cables larger than #10 AWG: In some cases where larger motors are installed with deep set pumps, pump cables are used that exceed the relay’s terminal size. In these conditions, a short splice of #10 AWG or #12 AWG may be a solution at the control box. Note: All local, state and national electric codes should be followed when applying this solution. NOTE: The 235P model has a sensitivity adjustment for the dry-well trip point. After calibration is done, you can adjust the sensitivity for the dry-well/dead-head trip point from 70-90% of the full load. This makes the unit even more adaptable to varying pumping applications. If you have a very low producing well, you increase the sensitivity closer to the 90% mark, or if you have a very heavy producing well, you would decrease the sensitivity around the 70% mark. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage and current protects pumps from dry-well, dead-head, jammed impeller, rapid cycling, and voltage faults Onboard sensitivity adjustment Allows user to adjust the current sensitivity for the dry-well / dead-head trip point from 70% - 90% of the full load. Adjustable restart delay Allows user to select well recovery time delay after a dry-well condition occurs, or to select manual reset Built in IR communications link Used with the Informer, allows user to see stored faults, run time, and also troubleshoot the pump while it’s running LED indication Provides status and diagnostics for troubleshooting MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 235P 230VAC 5 - 15hp 235P-ENCL 230VAC 233P with NEMA3R enclosure Ordering Information PART* SIZE CURRENT (A) CT CURRENT RATIO CT-0050-D10 5 - 7.5hp 27.5 - 42.1 50:5 CT-0075-D10 10hp 51 75:5 CT-0100-D10 15hp 75 100:5 * Current transformer sold separately Model 235P Shows Internal Connection Single-Phase Pump Monitor Motor and Pump Protection For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 511, Figure 15. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 127 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 235P Accessories Informer A hand-held diagnostic tool that uses an infrared receiver to access information which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Includes the Informer IR Kit-12 Specifications Functional Specifications Adjustments/Settings Overcurrent 125% of calibration point Underload (dry-well) Adjustable (70 to 90% of calibrated run power) Overvoltage 265VAC Undervoltage 190VAC Number of restarts allowed in a 60-sec. period (rapid-cycling) 4 Trip Delay Times Overcurrent 5 seconds Dry-well 4 seconds Restart Delay Times Over/undervoltage 2 seconds All other faults Manual, 2-225 Minutes Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 230VAC Load Range 5 - 15 hp Frequency 50*/60Hz Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating-SPST A300, 720A @240VAC (10 amps max.) General Characteristics Operating Temperature -40º to 60º C (-40º to 140º F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Wire Gauge Solid or Stranded 10 - 22AWG Terminal Torque 13 in.-lbs. Safety Marks cUL Listed UL508, C22.2 No. 14 Dimensions H 73.66 mm (2.9”); W 133.35 mm (5.25”); D 73.99 mm (2.913”) Weight 14 oz. Mounting Methods #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%) Dimensions H 73.66 mm (2.9”); W 133.35 mm (5.25”); D 73.99 mm (2.913”) Weight 14 oz. Mounting Methods #8 screws Motor and Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/235p Protection Relays 128 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Motor and Pump Protection – Single and 3-Phase Littelfuse.com/MP8000 MP8000 Bluetooth Overload Relay Wiring Diagram NO (15) C (13) I.2. I.1 MP8000 PTC (OPTIONAL) RESET FROM A2 PE C (95) L1 L2 L3 A2/L Z1 Z2 T1 T2 PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C AUX VOLTAGE SUPPLY ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENT TRANSFORMER (OPTIONAL) A B C NO (96) NC (14) C PILOT START C STOP HAND AUTO OFF FROM A1 M A1/N 85 – 264 VAC 120 – 375 VDC 90 - 690 VAC 0.5 - 100A (100A+ using external CTs) Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION MP8000 90-690VAC (use of external potential transformers can extend upper voltage range above 690VAC) 0.5-1,000A+ (external CTs required above 100A) Provides remote wired communication via Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 3-PHASE Patent Pending Accessories ZSCT Series Current Transformer Used with Littelfuse relays to detect low levels of earth-leakage current. Description The MP8000 is an advanced motor protection electronic overload relay that is fully programmable via Bluetooth* using the Littelfuse app on an Android* or iPhone* mobile device. It is easy to use and arc-flash safety is increased because the app allows settings to be modified and real-time operational information viewed. Viewing operational information and faults on the app does not require the user to open the control panel. The MP8000 protects any motor drawing 0.5-1,000 full load Amps (external CTs are required above 100 amperes). It is designed for single or 3-phase systems with operating voltages of 90-690 VAC (use of external potential transformers can extend upper voltage range above 690 VAC). Common applications include conveyor systems, HVAC equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors, and almost any pumping application. Protection is unsurpassed by combining overload, voltage, phase loss and reversal, voltage and current unbalance, power monitoring, and underload in one package. For standalone applications, the Bluetooth interface can be used when paired with a smartphone or tablet. The units also feature an Ethernet communications port that can be used to form an Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP network or Ethernet/IP. Units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software or other software program using the MP8000 memory map. This capability allows for a simple cost-effective way to further enhance arc-flash safety. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Bluetooth interface Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault information (date and time stamped) Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 4 programmable delay timers Program separate delay times for power up, rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and underload restarting Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on panel, remotely via the network Network communications capability Compatible with Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP and Ethernet/IP For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 516, Figure 50. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 129 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/MP8000 MP8000 Advanced Features ■ Overload/Overpower (49) ■ Underload/Underpower (37P) ■ Overcurrent (51)/Jam ■ Undercurrent (37) ■ Current Unbalance/Phase Loss (46) ■ Phase Reversal (47) ■ Overvoltage (59) ■ Undervoltage (27) ■ Voltage Unbalance (47) ■ Rapid Cycling/Jog ■ Contactor Failure ■ Zero-Sequence Ground Fault (50Ns) ■ PTC Motor Overtemperature (49) Specifications Functional Characteristics Frequency 50/60Hz TC- Overcurrent Trip Class Trip class 02-60 or linear Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Control relay SPST - Form A Auxiliary relay SPDT - Form C Pilot Duty Rating B300 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 85°C (-40° to 185°F) Accuracy Voltage ±1% of reading ±0.5 V Current ±2% (2 to 100 amperes direct) Timing +/-0.5% of setting +/- 1second GF Current ±5% Repeatability Voltage ±0.5% Current ±1% (2 to 100 amps direct) Power Consumption <5 W Pollution Degree 3 (conformal coating standard) Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque (depluggable terminal blocks) 5.5 in.-lbs. Terminal Torque (Earth Ground) 7.9 in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power Surge IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground FCC Rating Part 15.107 for emissions, Part 15.247 for intentional radiators Short Circuit Withstand Rating 100kA symmetrical at 690VAC Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) Safety Marks cULus UL60947, UL1053, C22.2 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Edition 5.2, IEC 60947-8 Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) 0.63” Dimensions H 74.42 mm (2.93”); W 103.63 mm (4.08”); D 121.67 mm (4.79”) Weight 0.85 lbs (13.6 oz, 385.6 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN-rail mount Littelfuse Mobile App Real Time Configuration Fault MP8000 Littelfuse App icon Motor and Pump Protection – Single and 3-Phase Protection Relays 130 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Motor Protection 777 SERIES Description The 777 is a fully programmable electronic overload relay designed to protect any motor drawing 2-800 full load amps (external CTs are required above 90 amps). The 777 (family of products) is for 3-phase 200-480VAC applications, with several specialized units for other voltage ranges and unique applications. Common applications include conveyor systems, HVAC equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors, and almost any pumping application. Some unique applications include use with a Subtrol® equipped Franklin submersible motor to detect high motor temperatures and applications where a fast linear trip is required. All of the overload relays provide unsurpassed protection by combining overload, voltage, phase loss and reversal, voltage and current unbalance, power monitoring, and underload based on current in one package. For standalone applications, the units incorporate a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming, providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition. The units also feature a communications port that can be used with communication modules listed in the 777 accessories section to form a Modbus, DeviceNet™, Profibus, or Ethernet network. Up to 99 units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, PLC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software. This capability allows for a simple, cost-effective way to meet new requirements for arc-flash safety. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault code Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on relay or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus, DeviceNet™, Profibus, or Ethernet using optional communications module 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Wiring DiagramTYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777 (20 TO 90 amps) LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs WITH TERMINALS TO SIMPLIFY INSTALLATION. 12 - 16 AWG STRANDED WIRE Ordering Information See next page. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777 (2 to 90 amps) CURRENT TRANSFORMER WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777 (80 to 800 amps) Littelfuse.com/com/777 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 131 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777 Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 777-P2 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777-LR-P2 200-480VAC 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Protects low range motors when wired directly or with 10-800 FLA with use of external CTs 777-HVR-P2 340-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Required when a control power transformer (CPT) is not used with a 480V system 777-HVR-LR-P2 340-480VAC 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Required when a control power transformer (CPT) is not used with a 480V system 777-575-P2 500-600VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common 777-575-LR-P2 500-600VAC 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common 777-MV-P2 100-240VAC 10-800A with external CTs Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Designed for Medium Voltage applications where both PTs and CTs are used. Has built in multipliers for 25.5, 50.5, 100.5 CTs. The voltage unbalance, single-phase and reverse phase protection can be disabled for applications where only the PTs are used 777-HRG-P2 200-480VAC 2-90A only Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CT that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-LR-HRG-P2 200-480VAC 10-800A (external CTs required, external Overload relays designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CTs that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-575-HRG-P2 500-600VAC 2-90A only Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common. Designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CT that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-575-LR-HRG-P2 500-600VAC 10-800A with external CTs Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common. Designed for high resistance grounding systems that incorporate an external zero-sequence CT that correspond with the built in multipliers to detect ground faults 777-FT 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides linear overcurrent trip and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Also known as shock relay, it is designed for fast linear trip applications. Overcurrent trip delay can be set ranging from less than 500ms - 70 seconds. Low trip delay is ideal in chain drive and drive linkage applications to prevent breaking in overload or jam situations. Other applications include sewage clarifiers, mixers, augers, and conveyors. Longer trip delay is ideal for motor test panels in rewind shops. Also includes adjustable motor acceleration time and overcurrent trip delay time when the faster linear trip mode is used 777-TS 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with Subtrol® equipped Franklin submersible motors to detect high motor temperatures 777-LR-TS 200-480VAC 1-9A only Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with Subtrol® equipped Franklin submersible motors to detect high motor temperatures 777-575-TS 500-600VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with Subtrol® equipped Franklin submersible motors with nominal 500-600VAC range to detect high motor temperatures 777VA-02 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Has restart delay 1 setpoints of 2-500 minutes and undercurrent trip delay setpoints of 2-60 minutes. 777VA-03 200-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides low and high power trip*, linear overcurrent trip, and 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For use with static and rotary single to 3-phase converters. High and low voltage trip feature only applies to the utility supplied power. Works well with unloaded phase converters because the relay ignores severely unbalanced voltages * Network programmable only 777 SERIES Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Motor Protection Protection Relays 132 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 777 SERIES Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Communication Module Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. CIO-DN-P/CIO-120-DN-P Communication Module DeviceNet™ interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNet™ network. CIO-777-PR Communication Module Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. CIO-EN (non-POE) Communication Module Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Communication Adapters • RS485-RS232–Converter with cable & plug • RS485-USB–Converter with cable & plug • RS232-USB–Converter Specifications match industry standard. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Specifications Functional Characteristics Frequency 50/60Hz TC- Overcurrent Trip Class (777 Plus Series units) 02-60, J02-J60, L00-L60 or Off TC- Overcurrent Trip Class (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 (J prefix enables jam protection feature) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty rating 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General purpose 10A @ 240VAC Pilot duty rating for HVR models 470VA @ 600VAC, B600 General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Accuracy Voltage ±1% Current ±3%(<100 amps direct) GF Current ±15% Timing (777 Plus Series units) ±0.5 second Timing (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) 5% +1 second Repeatability Voltage ±0.5% of nominal voltage Current ±1% (<100 amps direct) Maximum Input Power 10 W Pollution Degree 3 Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power Short Circuit 100kA Surge IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) Vibration IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis Shock IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Motor Protection Littelfuse.com/777 Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 133 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777 777 SERIES Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Motor Protection Safety Marks UL UL508, UL1053 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 CSA C22.2 No. 14 Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) through 777/77C 0.65” Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Weight 1.56 lbs. (24.96 oz., 707.6 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount Protection Relays 134 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777-77c 777 / 77C SERIES Description The 777/ 77C Series is a fully programmable electronic overload relay designed to protect any motor drawing 2-800 full load amps (external CTs are required above 90 amps). Common applications include conveyor systems, HVAC equipment, saws and grinders, fan motors, and almost any pumping application. All of the overload relays provide unsurpassed protection by combining overload, underload, and voltage in one package. For standalone applications, the units incorporate a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming, providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition. The units also feature a communications port that can be used with communication modules listed in the 777 accessories section to form a Modbus, DeviceNet™, Profibus, or Ethernet network. Up to 99 units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, PLC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software. This capability allows for a simple, cost-effective way to meet new requirements for arc-flash safety. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault code Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on relay or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus, DeviceNet™, Profibus, or Ethernet using optional communications module Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 77C 100-240VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 77C-LR 100-240VAC 1-9A only Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777- HVR-SP 340-480VAC 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. For systems with no control power transformer Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Wiring Diagram A B C LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs THAT HAVE TERMINALS TO AID CONVENIENCE WHEN INSTALLING CTs. NOTE: PHASES A & C ARE INACTIVE. USE PHASE B FOR ALL ACTIVE CURRENT MEASUREMENTS. CT SECONDARY MUST MAKE FIVE PASSES THROUGH THE PHASE B CONDUCTOR WINDOW. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C WITH MOTOR CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C WITH EXTERNAL CT Motor and Pump Protection – Single-Phase Motor Protection For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 135 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 777 / 77C SERIES Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. Communication Adapters • RS485-RS232–Converter with cable & plug • RS485-USB–Converter with cable & plug • RS232-USB–Converter Specifications match industry standard. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Specifications Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics TC- Overcurrent Trip Class (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 (J prefix enables jam protection feature) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty rating 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General purpose 10A @ 240VAC Pilot duty rating for HVR models 470VA @ 600VAC, B600 General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Accuracy Voltage ±1% Current ±3%(<100 amps direct) GF Current ±15% Timing (77C, 777 non-Plus Series units) 5% +1 second Repeatability Voltage ±0.5% of nominal voltage Current ±1% (<100 amps direct) Maximum Input Power 10 W Pollution Degree 3 Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power Short Circuit 100kA Surge IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) Vibration IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis Shock IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse Safety Marks UL UL508, UL1053 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 CSA C22.2 Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) through 777/77C 0.65” Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Weight 1.56 lbs. (24.96 oz., 707.6 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount Motor and Pump Protection – Single-Phase Motor Protection Littelfuse.com/777-77c Protection Relays 136 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777kwhpp2 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES Description The 777-KW/HP-P2 Series has the overload, voltage, phase loss and reversal, voltage and current unbalance, current and power monitoring*, and underload trip based on power in one package. The underpower trip feature is desirable anytime the current vs. load characteristic is non-linear or has little change. In general terms, smaller motors and slow-speed motors have little change in current over the normal load range. Larger motors that are running light loads will also show small current changes over the operating load range. For standalone applications, the units incorporate a 3-digit LED display that is used for programming, providing real-time operational information and displaying diagnostic codes to aid in troubleshooting a fault condition. No Load Power Current Full Load No Load Full Load Power is Linear, equal sensitivity at both low and high loads. Current is not linear, low sensitivity for low loads and high sensitivity for high loads. The units also feature a communications port that can be used with communication modules listed in the 777 accessories section to form a Modbus, DeviceNet™, Profibus, or Ethernet network. Up to 99 units can be remotely monitored and controlled from a PC, PLC, or SCADA system, and data logging through a PC with the optional Solutions software. * Low current trip and high power trip are network programmable only Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Low and High Power Protection Increases reliability for non-linear motors where the load characteristic has little change Built-in Display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage, current, kilowatts, or horsepower, and last fault code Programmable voltage and current settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 3 selectable restart options Choose from automatic, semi-automatic, or manual to best meet individual application needs 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Flexible reset Reset can be done through pushbutton on relay or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus, DeviceNet™, Profibus, or Ethernet using optional communications module 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Wiring Diagram Figure 1: Typical Wiring Diagram TO MOTOR CONTACTOR COIL CONTROL POWER START AUTO STOP 2 3 A C B M LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs WITH TERMINALS TO SIMPLIFY INSTALLATION. 12 - 16 AWG STRANDED WIRE All CTs must face the same direction, and all CT secondaries must be wired identically, i.e. all X1 terminals enter the main (round) window and return to H1 terminal after exiting the loop conductor window (rectangle). Every CT secondary must make 5 passes through the corresponding main conductor window. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES CURRENT TRANSFORMER WIRING DIAGRAM FOR 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Pump Protection For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 137 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Communication Module Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. CIO-DN-P/CIO-120-DN-P Communication Module DeviceNet™ interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNet™ network. CIO-777-PR Communication Module Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. CIO-EN (non-POE) Communication Module Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Communication Adapters • RS485-RS232–Converter with cable & plug • RS485-USB–Converter with cable & plug • RS232-USB–Converter Specifications match industry standard. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 777-KW/HP-P2 200-480VAC (3-phase) 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777-LR-KW/HP-P2 200-480VAC (3-phase) 1-800A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts 777-HVR-KW/HP-P2 340-480VAC (3-phase) 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 470VA @ 600VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Required when a CPT (control power transformer) is not used on a 480V system. Commonly used in pumping applications to save the cost and extra wiring associated with a CPT 777-575-KW/HP-P2 500-600VAC (3-phase) 2-800A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. Used in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common 777-MLR-KW/HP-P2 200-480VAC (3-phase) 0.5-21A and 40-740A with external CTs Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT relay contacts. It is wired directly without the need to loop conductors for 5-21 amps (under 5 amps requires looping of conductors), and can be used with external CTs for 40-740 amps Accessories Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/777kwhpp2 Protection Relays 138 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777kwhpp2 Specifications Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics TC-Overcurrent Trip Class 02-60, J02-J60, L00-L60 or OFF Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty rating 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General purpose 10A @ 240VAC Pilot duty rating for HVR model 470VA @ 600VAC, B600 General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Accuracy Voltage ±1% Current ±3% (<100 amps direct) Power ±4% (<100 amps direct) GF Current ±15% Timing ±0.5 second Repeatability Voltage ±0.5% of nominal voltage Current ±1% (<100 amps direct) Power ±2% Maximum Input Power 10 W Pollution Degree 3 Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power Short Circuit Rating 100kA 777-KW/HP-P2 SERIES Surge IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) Vibration IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis Shock IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse Safety Marks UL UL508, UL1053 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 CSA C22.2 No. 14 Maximum Conductor Size (with insulation) through 777 0.65” Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Weight 1.56 lbs. (24.96 oz., 707.6 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Pump Protection Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 139 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777accupower 777-ACCUPOWER Description The 777-AccuPower is a fully-programmable 3-phase motor and pump protection relay. It allows motor hp rating, full load amps, efficiency and power factor to be entered and will accurately calculate motor output power. This is most useful with mag-drive pumps or process applications where the process power is desired over the utility power. Voltage, current and power measurements can be displayed as well as fault information and setpoints. The built-in display simplifies troubleshooting and allows the user to easily and precisely configure setpoints. The 777-AccuPower can be used with the optional COM 4-20 output module to give an analog signal proportional to output shaft power, the RS485MS-2W (for limited Modbus capabilities, and for use with the RM1000/RM2000) remote displays listed in the 777 accessories section. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Motor output power measurement Allows use of process power over utility power 3 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection, motor cool down, and dry-well recovery Built-in Display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage or current, and last fault code Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of run-hour meter, last four fault codes, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Network communications capability Limited Modbus capabilities using RS485MS-2W communication module Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. COM 4-20 Output Communication Module This module allows communication to a PLC with an analog input and no Modbus input. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. 3-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Wiring Diagram Figure 1: Typical Wiring Diagram TO MOTOR CONTACTOR COIL CONTROL POWER START AUTO STOP 2 3 A C B M LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs WITH TERMINALS TO SIMPLIFY INSTALLATION. 12 - 16 AWG STRANDED WIRE All CTs must face the same direction, and all CT secondaries must be wired identically, i.e. all X1 terminals enter the main (round) window and return to H1 terminal after exiting the loop conductor window (rectangle). Every CT secondary must make 5 passes through the corresponding main conductor window. TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 777-ACCUPOWER CURRENT TRANSFORMER WIRING DIAGRAM OR MODEL 777-ACCUPOWER Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Pump Protection For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. Protection Relays 140 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/777accupower 777-ACCUPOWER Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 200-480VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Motor Full Load Amp Range 2-800A (external CTs required over 90A) Functional Characteristics TC- Overcurrent Trip Class 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 (J prefix enables jam protection feature) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - Form C) Pilot duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Accuracy Measured Horsepower/ Kilowatt Typical ±3%* Voltage ±1% Current ±3%(<100 amps direct) GF Current ±15% Timing 5% ±1 second Repeatability Voltage ±0.5% of nominal voltage Current ±1% (<100 amps direct) Maximum Input Power 10 W Pollution Degree 3 Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power Short Circuit Rating 100kA Surge IEC 61000-4-5 Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) Vibration IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hrs, 3 axis Shock IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse Safety Marks UL UL508, UL1053 CE IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 CSA C22.2 Max. Conductor Size through 777 0.65” with insulation Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Weight 1.3 lbs. (20.8 oz., 589.67 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount *On a well balanced system within recommended current range. Motor and Pump Protection – 3-Phase Pump Protection Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 141 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 77C-KW/HP SERIES Description The 77C-KW/HP and 77C-LR-KW/HP are fully programmable pump protection relays which will monitor the voltage and current for high or low voltage, overload and underload conditions based on power, in one package. The underpower trip feature is desirable anytime the current vs.load characteristic is non-linear or has little change. In general terms, smaller motors and slow-speed motors have little change in current over the normal load range. Larger motors that are running light loads will also show small current changes over the operating load range. Common uses include pumping applications where motors run slower than around 3400 rpm and usually have small current vs load changes; such as slow speed mixer or agitator motors up to 50 hp, and magdrive or can pumps. No Load Power Current Full Load No Load Full Load Power is Linear, equal sensitivity at both low and high loads. Current is not linear, low sensitivity for low loads and high sensitivity for high loads. The Littelfuse PumpSaver relay provides the high sensivity of a power monitor to protect pump motors from dry run and deadhead conditions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Underload protection Increases reliability for non-linear motors where the load characteristic has little change Built-in display Visual indication for programming, viewing real-time voltage, current, kilowatts or horsepower, and last fault code 15 programmable criteria settings Allows user flexibility to fine-tune the relay for maximum protection in any application. Last fault memory Provides instant troubleshooting diagnostics Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations. Flexible reset Reset options: automatic, manual using pushbutton on relay, or remotely with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit. Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus using optional communications module (RS485MS-2W) Single-Phase Current & Voltage Monitor Wiring Diagram CONTROL POWER NOTE: PHASES A & C ARE INACTIVE. 240 VAC OR LESS PILOT AUTO STOP M OFF START HAND CONTACTOR COIL A B C TO MOTOR L1 L2 A B C LITTELFUSE RECOMMENDS USING CTs THAT HAVE TERMINALS TO AID CONVENIENCE WHEN INSTALLING CTs. NOTE: PHASES A & C ARE INACTIVE. USE PHASE B FOR ALL ACTIVE CURRENT MEASUREMENTS. CT SECONDARY MUST MAKE FIVE PASSES THROUGH THE PHASE B CONDUCTOR WINDOW. NOTE: OTHER NECESSARY CONNECTIONS ARE NOT SHOWN A B 10 - 12 AWG STRANDED WIRE PILOT DUTY RATING 120-240VAC 1Ø 480VA AT 240VAC 50/60 HZ 1Ø MOTOR TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C-KW/HP WITH MOTOR CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 77C-KW/HP WITH EXTERNAL CT Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE MOTOR FULL AMP RANGE DESCRIPTION 77C-KW/HP 100-240VAC 2-90A (external CTs required above 90A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT (Form C) relay contacts 77C-LR-KW/HP 100-240VAC 1-9A (external CTs required above 9A) Provides 480VA @ 240VAC output SPDT (Form C) relay contacts Motor and Pump Protection – Single-Phase Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/77ckwhp For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. Protection Relays 142 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/77ckwhp 77C-KW/HP SERIES Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. Communication Adapters • RS485-RS232–Converter with cable & plug • RS485-USB–Converter with cable & plug • RS232-USB–Converter Specifications match industry standard. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Specifications Input Characteristics Supplt Voltage 100-240 VAC, 1Ø Frequency 50-60 Hz Motor Full Load Amp Range 77C-KW/HP 2-25 Amps (Loops Required) 26-90 Amps (Direct) 91-800 Amps (External CT’s) 77C-LR-KW/HP 1.0 Amps - 2.0 Amps (additional Loop) 2.0 Amps - 9.0 Amps (Direct) Short Circuit Withstand Rating 100kA per UL and CSA Power Consumption 5W (Maximum) Output Contact Rating SPDT (Form C) Pilot duty rating: 480 VA @ 240 VAC General purpose: 10A @ 240 VAC Expected Life Mechanical 1 x 106 operations Electrical 1 x 105 operations at rated load Accuracy at 25° C (77° F) Voltage ±1% Current ±3% (Direct, No External CTs) Timing 5% ± 1 second Repeatability Voltage ± 0.5% of nominal voltage Current ± 1% (Direct, No External CTs) Safety Marks UL UL508, UL1053 CE IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 CSA C22.2 No. 14 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V/m Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 min.) Vibration IEC 68-2-6, 10-55Hz, 1mm peak-to-peak, 2 hours, 3 axis Shock IEC 68-2-27, 30g, 3 axis, 11ms duration, half-sine pulse Mechanical Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Maximum conductor size through holes 0.65” (with insulation) Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Enclosure Material polycarbonate Weight 1.2 lbs Mounting Methods 35mm DIN rail or surface mount Motor and Pump Protection – Single-Phase Pump Protection Protection Relays © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 143 MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 77C-KW/HP SERIES Environmental Temperature Range Ambient Operating -20° - 70° C (-4° - 158°F) Ambient Storage -40° - 80° C (-40° - 176°F) Pollution Degree 3 Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Programmable Operating Points Range LV- Low Voltage Threshold 85V - HV Setting HV- High Voltage Threshold LV Setting - 264V MULT- # of Conductors or CT Ratio (XXX:5) 77C: 1-10 Conductors or 100-800 Ratio 77C-LR: 1 or 2 OC- Overcurrent Threshold (20-100A) ÷ MULT or 80-120% of CT Primary TC- Overcurrent Trip Class * 5, J5, 10, J10, 15, J15, 20, J20, 30, J30, or LIn (linear) RD1- Rapid Cycle Timer 0, 2 - 500 Seconds RD2- Restart Delay After All Faults Except Undercurrent (motor cool down timer)** 2 - 500 Minutes/Seconds RD3- Restart Delay After Undercurrent (dry well recovery timer) 2 - 500 Minutes/Seconds #RU- Number of Restarts After Undercurrent 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (Automatic) ADDR- RS485 Address A01- A99 #RO-Number of Restarts After Overcurrent 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, A (Automatic) LP/PWS (PWS = LP Range) 1 = 0.01 - 0.99 KW 5 = 0.01 - 1.30 HP 2 = 1.00 - 9.95 KW 6 = 1.34 - 13.3 HP 3 = 10.0 - 99.5 KW 8 = 13.4 - 133 HP 4 = 100 - 650 KW 9 = 134 - 871 HP * If J Prefix is displayed in trip class setting, jam protection is enabled. If programmed to Lln position, overcurrent trip delays are fixed linear-type delays set in OPT1 position. ** RD2 & RD3 can be changed from minutes to seconds under program position OPT2. SETTING RD2 RD3 SETTING RD2 RD3 0 Minutes Minutes 2 Seconds Minutes 1 Minutes Seconds 3 Seconds Seconds Motor and Pump Protection – Single-Phase Pump Protection Littelfuse.com/77ckwhp Protection Relays 144 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION 7 Littelfuse.com/sio-rtd SIO-RTD-02-00 Motor and Pump Protection – Temperature Monitoring Description The SIO-RTD is a microprocessor-based data-acquisition system for measuring temperatures accurately with resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) and for monitoring 4-20 mA analog-output devices in industrial environments. RTD inputs are noise-filtered and automatically calibrated for lead-length compensation, ambient temperature, and other factors providing accurate readings through the specified temperature range for several types of RTD devices. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS 8 inputs Single module can collect multiple data points CSA Class 1 Zone 2 Hazardous-location Certified Can be mounted in hazardous areas Individually-selectable input type Flexible; can be used with Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10 RTD or 4-20 mA inputs Conformal coating Protects circuit boards against corrosion and moisture Remote monitoring Up to 1.2 km away from network master Notch filter Rejects noise from motor monitoring applications Specifications Input Voltage 18 to 32 Vdc, 2W RTD Types Pt100 (default), Ni100, Ni120, Cu10 RTD Range -40 to 200˚ C with open and short detection Analog Range 4-20 mA Accuracy (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120) 1˚ C (Cu10) 3˚ C (4-20 mA) 0.1 mA Lead Compensation Up to 20 Ω Communications Modbus RTU® Conformally Coated Standard feature Approvals cCSAus Dimensions H 87 mm (3.43”); W 112.5 mm (4.43”); D 56 mm (2.2”) Warranty 5 years Mounting DIN, Surface Wiring Diagram Temperature Input Monitor 1234 5 6 OPEN 1234 5 6 OPEN R C D R C D R C D R C D R S P G D C R D C R D C R D C - + + 2 4 V 0 V S H S H S H S H INP1 INP8 INP 2 INP7 PWR COMM INP 3 INP6 INP 4 INP5 COMM SIO- RTD INPUT MODULE t O tO tO tO t O t O t O t O tO ALTERNATE 2-WIRE RTD CONNECTION S R D C H RTD ALTERNATE 4-20 mA CONNECTION S R D C H RTD 47.5 Ω 1% 4-20 mA ADDRESS SELECTION SWITCHES ADDRESS 01 SELECTED SEE TABLE 1 3-WIRE RTD CONNECTION RED GREEN WHITE BLACK TO NEXT SIO-RTD RED GREEN WHITE BLACK INTERCONNECT CABLE BELDEN 3124A SHOWN +24 VDC POWER SUPPLY + - + / B - / A TIA-485 MODBUS MASTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 2726 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 PWR For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 515, Figure 49. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 145 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays For More Information… and to download our Fresh Water Pumping Catalog, visit Littelfuse.com/PumpProtection PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS Protect and disable a pump if a hazardous condition arises. PumpSaver® offers a wide variety of controls for both single phase and three phase applications. Intrinsically safe relays are specifically designed to interface between hazardous and non-hazardous areas. ACBC-120 Series Alarm Controller/Battery Charging Unit.... 146 PC-102 Series Dual Channel Switch................................. 148 PC-105 5-Channel Pump Controller ....................... 149 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ Series Liquid Level Control Relays....................... 150 PC-XXX-LLC-GM Series Liquid Level Control Relays ...................... 150 201-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 152 460-15-100-LLS Single-Channel Liquid Level Sensor.......... 153 460-15-100-SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector .......... 155 LLC1 Series Open Board Liquid Level Control............... 157 LLC2 Series Open Board Liquid Level Control............... 159 LLC4 Series Octal Plug-In Liquid Level Control ............ 161 LLC5 Series Liquid Level Control .................................. 163 LLC6 Series Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 165 LLC8 Series Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Control ...... 167 Alternating Relays ALT Series 8-pin Plug-in Alternating Relays ............... 169 ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW Series Alternating Relays..................................... 171 ARP Series Alternating Relays..................................... 173 50R-400-ALT Alternating Relay....................................... 175 Intrinsically Safe Relays ISS-100 Intrinsically Safe Switch ........................... 176 ISS-101 Intrinsically Safe Switch ........................... 177 ISS-102 Series Two-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ..... 179 ISS-105 Series Five-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ..... 181 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 146 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Alarm Controller and Battery Charger for pump control panels ACBC-120 SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The ACBC-120 Series is a dual purpose alarm controller/battery charging unit. When there is a loss of 120VAC power, the ACBC-120’s primary function as an alarm controller activates. When this power loss occurs, input power is switched to a 12VDC, lead-acid, rechargeable backup battery and a 12VDC alarm consisting of a strobe light and/or a horn is activated. The horn follows a 2 second on/2 second off pattern with a “horn silence” option to turn the sound off. An LED indicator on the unit also signals that the device has entered the alarm mode. When 120VAC input is present the alarm circuit can be tested and the unit’s secondary function as a 12VDC backup battery charger is activated. In fast charge mode, the unit has the capability to source up to 100mA of charging current. However, the device normally charges at a current of 14mA in maintenance mode. The alarm circuit can be tested by pressing the “test” button located on the front of the unit or by activating an external switch via the “alarm contact” pin. The device has the ability to signal low battery voltage if the voltage drops below 10.5VDC. The device can also detect if no battery is present or if the battery is connected backwards. In either of these cases, the ACBC-120 will signal a battery error and will not attempt to charge. Must use Model SD12-PC socket for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the SD Series Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Controls 12VDC alarm circuit Activates strobe and/or horn when power loss occurs Selectable fast charge mode Unit sources higher charging current up to 100mA (normal mode is 14mA) Trip delay timer Prevents nuisance tripping Battery fault detection and reverse polarity protection Signals if battery voltage drops below 10.5VDC and can detect if no battery is present or if the battery is connected backwards LED indication Visual indication of unit status or trip Test button Preventative maintenance check of the alarm circuit by pressing the test button on the unit or externally through alarm contact connection Accessories SD12-PC 12-pin Rectangle Socket Rectangle Socket for the ACBC-120. 12-pin surface mountable. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION ACBC-120 120VAC Does not include SD12-PC socket for mounting ACBC-120-SD 120VAC Includes SD12-PC socket for mounting Littelfuse.com/acbc120 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 147 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage AC Input Voltage 120V +/-10% Frequency 50/60Hz AC Input Current 0.018A (max.) 0.003 (typical) AC Input Power 2.4W (max.) fast charge current 0.4W (typical) maint. charge current Functional Characteristics Battery Charging Characteristics Acceptable Battery Type 12V lead-acid rechargeable Fast Charge Current 100mA +/-10% Maintenance Charge Current 14mA +/-50% Low Battery Alert Level 10.5V Output Characteristics Strobe Light Alarm Output 12VDC@1A (max.) Horn Alarm Output 12VDC@1A (max.) General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 60°C (-40° to 140°F) ACBC-120 SERIES Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 4, 4kV input lines; 4kV signal lines Safety Marks UL (SD12-PC socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.325 mm (2.375”); D 104.775 mm (4.125”) (with socket) Weight 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method Surface mount with #8 or #10 screws (plug into SD12-PC socket) Socket Available Model SD12-PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted Littelfuse.com/acbc120 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 148 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/pc102 PC-102 SERIES Dual Seal-Leak Detector or Seal-Leak & Over-Temperature Detector Description The PC-102 is a dual-channel switch that provides dual protection against seal failures and over-temperature in submersible pumping applications. Both units have two form-C isolated output relays and two LEDs, which illuminate when each associated output relay is energized. The sensitivity adjustment (4.7k-100kOhms) allows you to define the input impedance at which the output relays will change state. The sensitivity for the over-temperature detector can be set to 4k Ohms with use of the DIP switches. This unit may not be compatible with Flygt pumps. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Finger-safe terminals Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation LED Status Indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Two input channels Flexibility for pump-up/pump-down or two-channel switch applications Specifications Input Characteristics Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc pulsed Sensitivity 4.7k-100kΩ Sensitivity (for temp) Selectable 4kΩ with DIP switches Input Logic Direct or inverted Debounce Time Delay 0.5 or 2 seconds Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating (2 Form C isolated) Pilot Duty 180VA @ 120VAC, C150 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F) Maximum Input Power 2 W Depluggable Connector Phoenix Contact-Series MSTB plugs Output Relay Status Indicators LEDs Terminal Torque 4.5 in.-lbs. Wire range 12-20 AWG Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power 2kV inputs/outputs Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.93 mm (2.08”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 0.9 lb. (14.4 oz., 408.23 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) Wiring Diagram PC-102CICI-DL PC-102CICI-LT Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION PC-102CICI-DL 120VAC nominal Dual seal-leak detector uses inputs to sense seal failures and energize the output relay. Input logic direct or inverted is DIP switch selectable PC-102CICI-LT 120VAC nominal Seal-leak and over-temperature detector uses one input to sense seal failures and the temperature input to detect motor overheating. Configurable to suit various probes. Seal input logic direct or inverted, plus over-temperature trip reset automatic or manual, is DIP switch selectable PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 149 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/pc105 Pump controller with duplex, triplex or quadplex functionality or 5-channel relay PC-105 Wiring Diagram Description The PC-105 is a 5-channel pump controller designed to handle multiple pump applications. Alternatively, it can operate as a 5-channel switch. The PC-105’s control functions support all of the popular industrystandard multi-pump, pump-up and pump-down configurations. It can indicate low, high and out-of-sequence alarms and use alternating and non-alternating pump control. The non-alternating pump can be used as a jockey pump or emergency pump. Using the built-in DIP switches, individual pumps can be disabled when taken out of service for repair or maintenance. Features g Compact design g Low, high and out-of-sequence alarms g Variable time delay/lag pump delay from 2-255 seconds g Duplex SPS (separate pump stop) pump control g Duplex, triplex or quadplex pump control g Pump-up or pump-down functions g External silence, reset and alternation configuration g Five-channel relay configuration g DIN rail or surface mountable Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 120VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc continuous Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating: Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 7A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F) Maximum Input Power 4 W Wire range 12 to 20 AWG Terminal Torque 4.5 in.-lbs. (max.) Pump In-rush delay 2 seconds Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power 2kV inputs/outputs Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 94.06 mm (3.703”); W 127.64 mm (5.025”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Mounting Method 35 mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 IC #1 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT COMMON TIME DELAY OUTPUT #2 #3 #4 #5 INPUT Load 1 Load 3 120 VAC Load 2 Load 4 Load 5 1-800-843-8848 www.pumpsaver.com Figure 11: Typical Wiring for 5-channel Relay – Mode 0 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 12. 150 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/pcxxxllccz-pcxxxllcgm PC-XXX-LLC-CZ / PC-XXX-LLC-GM SERIES Liquid Level Control Wiring Diagram Description The PC-xxx-LLC-CZ and PC-xxx-LLC-GM Series are liquid level control relays used to control conductive liquid pumping operations in a pump-up or pump-down application. The units come in two different voltage ranges (see specs below). The units have an adjustable sensitivity knob (4.7k to 100k ohms) that is set according to the resistance level at which you want the probes (sold separately) to sense the conductive liquid. The units have a built-in debounce time delay that prevents the relay from energizing if the probe resistance momentarily goes above or below the sensitivity setpoint (due to liquid splashing in the tank). The units operate their internal relay based on inputs from a high and low probe and a common reference (when a conductive tank is used) or common probe (when a non-conductive tank is used). PC-xxx-LLC-CZ g Compatible with Crouzet’s PNR & PNRU series liquid level control PC-xxx-LLC-GM g Compatible with Gems’ Series 16M general purpose control Must use Model OT08PC or P1011-6 socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Debounce time delay (2 seconds) Prevents rapid cycling of the pump due to turbulance in the tank Adjustable sensitivity (4.7 to 100Kohms) Allows user to fine tune the sensing resistance to prevent false tripping due to foam or debris Dual probe design (plus a common) Allows user the ability to set the level differential required TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PC-XXX-LLC-CZ TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR PC-XXX-LLC-GM Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION PC-100-LLC-CZ 95-120VAC Compatible with Crouzet's PNR & PNRU Series liquid level control PC-200-LLC-CZ 190-240VAC Compatible with Crouzet's PNR & PNRU Series liquid level control PC-100-LLC-GM 95-120VAC Compatible with Gems' Series 16M liquid level control PC-200-LLC-GM 190-240VAC Compatible with Gems' Series 16M liquid level control PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 151 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage PC-100-LLC-CZ 95-120VAC PC-100-LLC-GM 95-120VAC PC-200-LLC-CZ 190-240VAC PC-200-LLC-GM 190-240VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5VDC pulsed Debounce Time Delay 2 seconds Probe Sensitivity 4.7k to 100k Adjustable Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @240VAC PC-XXX-LLC-CZ / PC-XXX-LLC-GM SERIES General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Sandards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 2kV input power and controls Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC60947-6-2 Dimensions (when installed in socket base) H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.375”); D 104.78 mm (4.125”) Weight 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) Socket Available Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Littelfuse.com/pcxxxllccz-pcxxxllcgm PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 152 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/201100SLD Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector Description The model 201-100-SLD is an 8-pin plug-in style seal-leak detector to sense seal failures on submersible pumps. A microcontroller-based relay that monitors the shaft seal of a submersible pump motor. A resistive probe is installed in the seal cavity. If water leaks into the pump, the resistance measured by the probe decreases. When the resistance drops below the sensitivity setpoint, the unit will trip and the relay contacts will change state. The unit will automatically reset when a fault is cleared. Features & Benefits J LED status indicator J Compact plug-in design J DIN rail or surface mountable via octal base Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Specifications Control Voltage 110/120VAC nominal Frequency 50/60Hz Sensitivity 4.7k-100kΩ Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc pulsed Output contact Rating SPDT Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC Operating Temperature -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) UL* UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.325 mm (2.375”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.125”) Weight 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) Socket Available Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) Approvals UL, CE *Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. 201-100-SLD Wiring Diagram * UL listed when used in combination with OT08PC socket only. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 153 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/46015100LLS Description The 460-15-100-LLS is a liquid level sensor to detect the presence of conductive liquids. A probe is mounted at the desired tank level and connected to the PumpSaver®. When the probe is submersed, the relay’s output contacts will change state as soon as the debounce time expires. The adjustable debounce timer is intended to prevent nuisance actuating due to waves or splashing in the tank. Relay logic can be inverted so the relay’s output contacts change state when the probe is no longer submersed. This makes the unit versatile for use in pump-up and pump-down applications. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Unique Probe Protection Probes are protected from scale build up through pulsed DC signal between the probes Invertible relay logic Allows flexibility to be used in pump-up and pump-down applications Adjustable debounce timer Prevents nuisance actuating caused by waves or splashing in the tank LED status indicators Provides visual indication of the relay status Specifications Input Characteristics Control Voltage 110/120VAC nominal Frequency 50/60Hz (Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%) Sensitivity 100kΩ Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc pulsed Debounce Time Delay 2-60 seconds Output Characteristics Output contact Rating – (Two Form A - SPST) Pilot Duty 360VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 8A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 2 W Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 4.5 in.-lbs. Wire 12-20 AWG Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10 V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Single-Channel Liquid Level Sensor 460-15-100-LLS Wiring Diagram PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. 154 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/46015100LLS Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000 V for 1 min.) Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.93 mm (2.08”); D 59.69mm (2.35”) Weight 1 lb. (16 oz., 453.59 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) 460-15-100-LLS PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 155 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/46015100SLD Description The 460-15-100-SLD is a seal-leak detector to sense seal failures on submersible pumps. A microcontroller-based relay monitors the shaft seal of a submersible pump motor. A resistive probe is installed in the seal cavity. If water leaks into the pump, the resistance measured by the probe decreases. When the resistance drops below the sensitivity setpoint, the unit will trip and the relay contacts will change state. Output relay logic can be reversed by removing an external jumper. The unit will automatically reset when a fault is cleared. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Unique probe protection logic Probes are protected from scale build up through pulsed DC signal between the probes Invertible relay logic Allows flexibility to be used in pump-up and pump-down applications LED status indicators Provides visual indication of the relay status 2 relay contacts Control independent loads on different circuits Specifications Input Characteristics Control Voltage 110/120VAC nominal Frequency 50/60Hz (Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%) Functional Characteristics Sensitivity 4.7k-100kΩ Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc pulsed Output Characteristics Output contact Rating – (Two Form A - SPST) Pilot Duty 360VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 8A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 2 W Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 4.5 in.-lbs. Wire AWG 12-20 AWG Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10 V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Single-Channel Seal-Leak Detector 460-15-100-SLD Wiring Diagram PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. 156 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/46015100SLD Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000 V for 1 min.) Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.93 mm (2.08”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 1 lb. (16 oz., 453.59 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) 460-15-100-SLD PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 157 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC1 SERIES Description The LLC1 Series is a single probe conductive liquid level control designed for OEM equipment and commercial appliances. This unit may be ordered with fixed fill or fixed drain operation. A time delay (1-60s) prevents rapid cycling of the output relay. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment allows accurate level sensing while ignoring foaming agents and floating debris. Isolated AC voltage is provided at the probe to prevent electrolysis. A trickle current of less than 1mA determines the presence or absence of liquid between the probe and common. The LLC1 Series printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the probe, a fixed time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level falls below the probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid again touches the probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the probe, a fixed time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level rises and touches the probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the probe. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated AC voltage on probe Prevents scale buildup on the probe Open PCB design Cost effective design for OEM equipment and commercial appliances Conformally coated PCB Protects against moisture and corrosion Sensitivity adjustment Provides accurate level sensing while ignoring foam or floating debris Wiring Diagram Open Board Liquid Level Controls L1 N/L2 Metal Tank or use additional Probe C P = Probe L = Load V = Voltage ∆S = Sensitivity Adjustment Contacts A, B & C are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank or an additional probe as required. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TIME DELAY SENSE RESISTANCE MOUNTING LLC14A1AX 120VAC Drain 1s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14A5AX 120VAC Drain 5s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14B15AX 120VAC Fill 15s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14B1AX 120VAC Fill 1s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC14B60AX 120VAC Fill 60s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC16A25AX 230VAC Drain 25s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) LLC16A3AX 230VAC Drain 3s Adjustable 0.5 in nylon standoffs (3) If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Littelfuse.com/LLC1 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 40. 158 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/LLC1 LLC1 SERIES Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400° F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24”) Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24” (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Specifications Control Type ON/OFF (single level) resistance sensor with built-in time delay to prevent rapid cycling Sense Voltage Low voltage AC between probe & common. Isolated from input & output. Sense Resistance Fixed or adjustable to 250KΩ Sense Resistance Tolerance Adjustable - guaranteed range Factory fixed ±10% Time Delay Range Fixed 1 - 60s in 1s increments Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Non-isolated, SPST & Isolated, SPDT contacts Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS between input, output & probe Mechanical Mounting Surface mount to probe common with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws or 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) nylon standoffs with three #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws (use Terminal 5 for probe common) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Dimensions (Open Board) H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 69.9 mm (2.75”); D 50.8 mm (2.0”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 55°C/-40° to 80°C Coating Printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion Weight ≅ 8.7 oz (247 g) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 159 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC2 SERIES Description The LLC2 Series is a dual-probe conductive liquid level control designed for OEM equipment and commercial appliance applications. Models are available for fill or drain operation. Transformer isolated 12VAC is provided at the probes to prevent electrolysis. A trickle current of less than 1mA determines the presence or absence of liquid between the probes and common. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment allows accurate level sensing while ignoring foaming agents and floating debris. The LLC2 Series printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the high probe, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level falls below the low probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid again touches the high probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the low probe, the output relay energizes and remains energized until the liquid level rises and touches the high probe. The output relay then de-energizes and remains de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the low probe. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC probes Prevents scale buildup on the probes Open PCB design Cost effective design for OEM equipment and commercial appliances Conformally coated PCB Protects against moisture and corrosion Sensitivity adjustment Provides accurate level sensing while ignoring foam or floating debris Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400° F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24”) Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24” (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Open Board Liquid Level Controls Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TERMINATION SENSE RESISTANCE LLC24A2AN 120VAC Drain Terminal block Adjustable to 100kΩ LLC24A2F50N 120VAC Drain Terminal block Fixed 50kΩ LLC24B1AC 120VAC Fill 0.25” Quick connect Adjustable to 100kΩ LLC24B1F26C 120VAC Fill 0.25” Quick connect Fixed 26kΩ LLC24B2F50N 120VAC Fill Terminal block Fixed 50kΩ LLC26A1F25C 230VAC Drain 0.25” Quick connect Fixed 25kΩ If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Metal Tank or use additional Probe V = Voltage L = Low Probe H = High Probe C = Probe Common P = Probe ∆S = Sensitivity Adjustment NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. Littelfuse.com/LLC2 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 41. 160 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/LLC2 LLC2 SERIES Specifications Control Type Resistance sensing for high & low level detection of conductive liquids Sense Voltage 12VAC at probe terminals Sense Resistance Fixed or adjustable to 100KΩ Sense Resistance Tolerance Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS between input, output, & probe Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two or four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) duplex male quick connect terminals. Terminal blocks for up to #14 AWG 2.5 mm2 ) wire Dimensions (Open Board) H 101.6 mm (4.0”); W 76.2 mm (3.0”); D 50.8 mm (2.0”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 55°C / -40° to 80°C Coating Printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture and corrosion Weight ≅ 9 oz (255 g) Mounting Dimensions 4.0 (101.6) 0.5 (12.7) 2.0 (50.8) 0.163 (4.14) 3.0 (76.2) 0.44 (11.35) 0.25 (6.35) 3.62 (91.9) 3.5 (88.9) 2.12 (53.8) 2.5 (63.5) 0.19 (4.83) 0.25 (6.35) DIAGRAM KEY MODEL NUMBERS ENDING IN: N C W 0.440” (11.176 mm) 0.250” (6.350 mm) X 3.620” (91.948 mm) 3.500” (88.900 mm) Y 2.120” (53.848 mm) 2.500” (63.500 mm) Z 0.190” (4.826 mm) 0.250” (6.350 mm) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 161 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC4 SERIES Description The LLC4 combines resistance sensing circuitry with solid-state timing to provide single probe level maintenance. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment allows accurate level sensing while ignoring foaming agents and floating debris. Isolated 12VAC is provided at the probe to prevent electrolysis. A trickle current of less than 1mA determines the presence or absence of conductive liquid between the probe and common. The LLC4 Series can be used with many types of low voltage (resistance changing) transducers to perform other control functions like temperature limit control, photo limit control, condensation sensing, and ice sensing. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the probe, the time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energize and remain energized until the liquid level falls below the probe level. The output relay de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid rises and touches the probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the probe, the time delay begins. This time delay prevents rapid cycling of the output relay and its load. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energize and remain energized until the liquid level rises and touches the probe. The output relay then de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the probe level. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC probes Prevents scale buildup on probe Industry standard 8-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Sensitivity adjustment Provides accurate level sensing while ignoring foam or floating debris Wiring Diagram Octal Plug-In Liquid Level Controls L1 N/L2 Metal Tank or use additional Probe P = Probe C = Probe Common V = Voltage Relay contacts are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TIME DELAY SENSE RESISTANCE MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE OPERATION TIME DELAY SENSE RESISTANCE LLC42A10A 24VAC Drain 10s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B1A 24VAC Fill Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC42A1A 24VAC Drain 1s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44A60A 120VAC Drain 60s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC42B15A 24VAC Fill 15s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B20A 120VAC Fill 20s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44A10A 120VAC Drain 10s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B2A 120VAC Fill 2s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44A15A 120VAC Drain 15s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B30A 120VAC Fill 30s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44A1A 120VAC Drain 1s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B4A 120VAC Fill 4s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44A2A 120VAC Drain 2s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B5A 120VAC Fill 5s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44A4A 120VAC Drain 4s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ LLC44B5F100 120VAC Fill 5s Fixed 100kΩ LLC44A5A 120VAC Drain 5s Adjustable 1 - 250kΩ If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/LLC4 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 33. 162 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/LLC4 LLC4 SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 holddown clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400° F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24”) Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24” (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Specifications Control Type ON/OFF (single level) resistance sensor with built-in time delay to prevent rapid cycling Sensing Voltage 12VAC Sensing Resistance Fixed or adjustable to 250KΩ Sensing Resistance Tolerance Adjustable: 1K ±500Ω at low end; 250K ±25% at high end Factory fixed: ±10% or 500Ω, whichever is greater Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15%, +20% 120 & 230VAC -20%, +10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 4A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/10 hp @ 240VAC Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS between input, output & probe Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Dimensions H 73.9 mm (2.91”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C/-40° to 80°C Weight ≅ 6 oz (170 g) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 163 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Liquid Level Controls Description The LLC5 provides dual probe conductive liquid level control in a convenient octal plug-in package. Models are available for fixed fill or drain operation. Isolated, pulsed DC voltage on the probes prevents electrolytic plating. Less than 1 mA of current is used to sense the presence of conductive liquid between the probes and common. On adjustable units, the sensitivity adjustment eliminates false tripping caused by floating debris and foaming agents. Operation Drain (Pump-Down Mode): When the liquid level rises and touches the high level probe, the output relay and LED energize and remain energized until the liquid level falls below the low level probe. The output relay and LED de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid rises and touches the high level probe. Fill (Pump-Up Mode): When the liquid level falls below the low level probe, the output relay and LED energize and remain energized until the liquid level rises and touches the high level probe. The output relay and LED de-energize and remain de-energized until the liquid level again falls below the low level probe. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Unique Probe Protection logic Probes are protected from scale build up through pulsed DC signal between the probes. LED status indicatior Visual indication of relay engagement in pump-up or pump-down activity Isolated 5A SPDT contacts Allows control of loads for AC voltage Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. Note: use of the PSC8 clips partley covers the LED window of the LLC5 unit. Use of alternative socket base P1011-6 with its corresponding hold down clips PSCRB8 do not cover up the LED window, but the socket base is not DIN rail mountable. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION LLC52AA 24VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC52BA 24VAC For Fill (pump-up) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC54AA 120VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC54AAS 120VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance and reverse connection (#8 low, #6 high) LLC54AF10 120VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with fixed sense resistance of 10 kΩ LLC54BA 120VAC For Fill (pump-up) operation with adjustable sense resistance LLC54BAS 120VAC For Fill (pump-up) operation with adjustable sense resistance and reverse connection (#8 low, #6 high) LLC56AA 230 VAC For Drain (pump-down) operation with adjustable sense resistance If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Metal Tank or use additional Probe HP = HIGH LEVEL PROBE LP = LOW LEVEL PROBE C = PROBE COMMON V = VOLTAGE Relay contacts are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for nonconductive or insulated tanks. LLC5 SERIES 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/LLC5 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 43. 164 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/LLC5 Accessories PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400° F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24”) Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24” (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Specifications Control Type Resistance sensing for high & low level detection of conductive liquids Sensing Voltage Pulsed DC at probe terminals Sensing Resistance Factory fixed or adjustable to 100KΩ Sensing Resistance Tolerance Adjustable: 1K ±500Ω at low end; 100KΩ ±25%, 0% at high end Factory fixed: ±10% or 500Ω whichever is greater Response Time Debounce time delay <1s Input Tolerance 24VAC -15%, +20% 120 & 230VAC -20%, +10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 5A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/10 hp @ 240VAC Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS between input, output, & probe Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 60.7 mm (2.39”); W 45.2 mm (1.78”); D 76.5 mm (3.01”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 80°C Weight 6 oz (170 g) approx. LLC5 SERIES PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 165 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC6 SERIES Description The LLC6 Series is a plug-in, single-probe conductive liquid level control designed for low liquid level cutoff protection. It offers a factory fixed time delay of 1 - 60s and is available in input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC. LED indicator illuminates whenever the LLC6’s 10A, SPDT output relay is energized. Available with automatic/manual reset or a special manual reset with power outage feature, which auto resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable. 24VAC and 120VAC units are recognized as limit switches under UL353 (230VAC units are UL508) and CSA certified under Standard 14. Operation Automatic Reset (Reset terminals not connected): When liquid rises to the low level cutoff probe, the output relay and the LED indicator energize. When the liquid falls below low level cutoff probe, the output relay and the LED indicator de-energize after a fixed time delay. Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): When the liquid level falls below the low level probe, the output relay and LED de-energize after a fixed time delay. When the liquid level rises to the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the manual reset switch is opened; then they energize immediately. Power Outage Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): A power outage causes the output relay and LED indicator to de-energize. Upon restoration of power, if the liquid level is above the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator will re-energize. If the liquid level is below the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the Normally Closed (NC) reset switch is opened. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC on probe Prevents electrolysis Industry standard 11-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED indication Visual indication output relay is energized Power outage protection (see ordering table for models) Automatically resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable Wiring Diagram Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Controls Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY (FIXED) SENSE RESISTANCE RESET LLC6210F10M 24VAC 10s 10kΩ Manual/Automatic LLC6410F10M 120VAC 10s 10kΩ Manual/Automatic LLC643F26M 120VAC 3s 26kΩ Manual/Automatic LLC6610F5P 230VAC 10s 5kΩ Power Outage Manual Reset If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 Metal Tank or use additional Probe PC = Probe Common P = Probe V = Voltage R = Optional NC Reset Switch Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. 11-PIN Littelfuse.com/LLC6 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 33. 166 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/LLC6 LLC6 SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 holddown clips. PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400° F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24”) Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24” (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Specifications Control Type ON/OFF (single level) resistance sensor with built-in time delay to prevent rapid cycling Sense Voltage 12VAC nominal at probe terminals Sense Resistance Fixed 5K - 250KΩ Sense Resistance Tolerance Fixed ±10% Time Delay Range 1 - 60s in 1s increments Tolerance ±20% Repeat Accuracy ±10% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±10% Power Outage Reset Delay ≤ 1s Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC +20% to -15% 120 or 230VAC +10% to -20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Non-isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS between input & output terminals Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Termination 11-pin relay type Dimensions H 73.9 mm (2.91”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 80°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 7.3 oz (207 g) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 167 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls LLC8 SERIES Description The LLC8 Series is a low cost, single-probe conductive liquid level control designed for low liquid level cutoff protection. It offers a factory fixed time delay of 1 - 60s and is available for input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC. LED indicator illuminates whenever the LLC8’s isolated, 10A, SPDT output relay is energized. Sense resistance is fixed from 5K - 250KΩ. Available with manual/automatic reset or a special manual reset with a power outage feature that auto resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable. 24 and 120VAC units are UL recognized as limit switches under UL353 (230VAC units are UL 508) and CSA certified under Standard 14. Operation Automatic Reset (Reset switch not connected): When liquid rises to low level cutoff probe, output relay and LED indicator energize. When liquid falls below the low level cutoff probe, the output relay and LED indicator de-energize after a fixed time delay. Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): When the liquid level falls below low level probe, the output relay and LED de-energize after a fixed time delay. When the liquid level rises to low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the NC manual reset switch is opened; then they energize immediately. Power Outage Manual Reset (Reset switch connected): A power outage causes the output relay and LED indicator to de-energize. Upon restoration of power, if the liquid is touching the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator will re-energize. If the liquid level is below the low level probe, the output relay and LED indicator remain de-energized until the NC reset switch is opened. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Isolated 12VAC probes Prevents scale buildup on probe Open PCB design Cost effective design for OEM low liquid level cutoff protection Conformally coated PCB Protects against moisture and corrosion LED indication Visual indication output relay is energized Power outage protection (see ordering table for models) Automatically resets the unit when power is restored and the water level is acceptable 24VAC & 120VAC models meet UL353 Required for use as a low level limit switch Wiring Diagram Low Level Cutoff Liquid Level Controls Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY (FIXED) SENSE RESISTANCE RESET LLC825F5M 24VAC 5s 5kΩ Manual/automatic LLC842F103M 120VAC 2s 10kΩ Manual/automatic LLC843F10M 120VAC 3s 10kΩ Manual/automatic LLC843F10P 120VAC 3s 10kΩ Power outage manual reset LLC843F26M 120VAC 3s 26kΩ Manual/automatic LLC843F26P 120VAC 3s 26kΩ Power outage manual reset LLC845F25P 120VAC 5s 25kΩ Power outage manual reset LLC8430F250P 120VAC 30s 250kΩ Power outage manual reset LLC8430F26P 120VAC 30s 26kΩ Power outage manual reset LLC8610F12M 230VAC 10s 12kΩ Manual/automatic LLC863F26P 230VAC 3s 26kΩ Power outage manual reset If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Metal Tank or use additional Probe V = Voltage LLCO = Low Level Probe G, CP = Ground or Common (Reference) Probe R = Optional NC Reset Switch (not included) NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common or Transfer Contact Relay contacts are isolated. Connect common to conductive tank. Additional probe is necessary for non-conductive or insulated tanks. Littelfuse.com/LLC8 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 42. 168 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls Littelfuse.com/LLC8 LLC8 SERIES Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. PHST-38QTN Electrode Designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400° F. UL353 Recognized. LLP-24 Threaded Probe (24”) Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24” (61 cm) long. For use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. Specifications Control Type Resistance sensing for conductive liquids with time delay Sense Voltage 12VAC nominal at probe terminals Sense Resistance Fixed 5K - 250KΩ Sense Resistance Tolerance ±10% Time Delay Tolerance ±20% Repeat Accuracy ±10% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±10% Power Outage Reset Delay ≤1s Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15% - 20% 120 or 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output terminals Mechanical Mounting 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) x .187 (4.76 mm) dia. nylon standoffs (3) Termination Dimensions H 63.5 mm (2.5”); W 55.6 mm (2.19”); D 47.8 mm (1.88”) Electrical 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Reset Switch & Probe(s) 0.187 x 0.03 in. (4.75 x 0.76 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 80°C Coating Printed circuit board is conformal coated to resist moisture & corrosion Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 5 oz (141.7 g) PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 169 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/alt Accessories OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. ALT SERIES 8-pin Plug-in Alternating Relay Description The ALT alternating relays are used to alternate between two loads. The ALT is commonly used in duplex pumping applications to balance the runtime of both pumps. The ALT-S is used in single high-level float applications. When the float switch opens, the alternating relay changes state, forcing the other pump to run the next time the float closes. All ALT relays have a built-in debounce feature that prevents the relay from changing state if the switch or float contact bounces momentarily. The ALT-X has an internal cross-connected relay and is used in dual high-level float applications. These floats are commonly referred to as lead and lag floats. The pumps alternate as in the ALT-S version but the crossconnected relay configuration allows both pumps to run simultaneously when both the lead and lag floats are closed. These relays are also available with a built-in switch (SW option) that is used to manually force one of the pumps to run every time the float switch is closed. This is helpful when a pump has been removed for repair or for test purposes. In the case of the ALT-X-SW, the switch essentially forces one pump to be the lead pump, while still allowing the second to run when both floats are closed. Must use the OT08PC socket for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Debounce time delay Prevents nuisance actuating causes by waves or spashing in the tank Built-in manual/ auto switch Force lead pump operation when a pump is removed for repair or testing (on select models) Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION ALT024-S† 20-26VAC or VDC For single high-level float applications ALT024-S-SW† 20-26VAC or VDC For single high-level float applications with built in manual switch ALT115-S 95-125VAC For single high-level float applications ALT115-S-SW 95-125VAC For single high-level float applications with built in manual switch ALT115-X 95-125VAC For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications ALT115-X-SW 95-125VAC For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications with built in manual switch ALT230-S 195-250VAC For single high-level float applications ALT230-S-SW 195-250VAC For single high-level float applications with built in manual switch ALT230-X 195-250VAC For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications ALT230-X-SW 195-250VAC For dual high-level (lead and lag) float applications with built in manual switch TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE ALT-S Wiring Diagram PUMP #1 PUMP #2 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS F3 F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F3 - F6: SIZE FOR INDIVIDUAL PUMP APPLICATION F1 - F2: 1-2A TYPICAL SIZE FOR CONTACTOR COILS L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 ALTERNATING RELAY 8 5 1 4 2 3 7 6 S1 S2 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR THE ALT-X (CROSS CONNECTED) † ALT024-S and ALT024-S-SW are not UL Listed PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. 170 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/alt ALT SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Current 40mA Functional Characteristics Debounce Time Delay 0.5 second Control Input Impedance (min) 24 10kΩ 115 56kΩ 230 100kΩ Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating 480VA @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 50°C (-40° to 122°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) Dimensions (with socket) H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.375”); D 104.78 mm (4.125”) Weight 0.38 lb. (6.08 oz., 172.67 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) Socket Available OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Disclaimer Notice – Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, users should independently evaluate the suitability of and test each product selected for their own applications. Littelfuse products are not designed for, and may not be used in, all applications. Read complete Disclaimer Notice at www.littelfuse.com/product-disclaimer. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 171 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/altxxx1sw-altxxx3sw Alternating Relay ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The ALT-xxx-1-SW/ALT-xxx-3-SW Series are used to alternate between two loads and are commonly used in duplex pump-up and pump-down applications to balance the runtime of both pumps. The ALT relays have a built-in debounce time delay that prevents the relay from changing state if the float momentarily bounces, and they have a built-in switch to manually force a specific load (pump) to operate each time the input float closes. This is helpful when performing periodic maintenance or pump repair. Must use the OT08PC socket for the 8-pin models, and the OT11PC socket for the 11-pin models, for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Debounce time delay Prevents rapid cycling caused by waves or splashing in the tank LED indicators Visual indication of load operation in duplex application Built-in manual switch to force load operation Helpful to control load operation when performing periodic maintenance or pump repair ALT-xxx-3-SW offers duplexing Allows lag pump to energize if lead pump can’t handle current demand Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. OT11PC 11-pin Magnal Socket 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 300VAC TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR ALT-XXX-1-SW TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR ALT-XXX-3-SW Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE MOUNTING DESCRIPTION ALT-100-1-SW 95-120VAC 11-pin magnal Single float input, two isolated Form C relays (DPDT), 2 LEDs for load indication ALT-100-3-SW 95-120VAC 8-pin octal Three float inputs (lead, lag, stop floats), actuating latching relays on lead/lag floats, 2 LEDs for load indication ALT-200-3-SW 190-240VAC 8-pin octal Three float inputs (lead, lag, stop floats), actuating latching relays on lead/lag floats, 2 LEDs for load indication PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. 172 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/altxxx1sw-altxxx3sw Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage ALT-100-1-SW, ALT-100-3-SW 95-120VAC ALT-200-3-SW 190-240VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Debounce Time Delay ALT-100-1-SW, 1 second ALT-100-3-SW, ALT-200-3-SW 5 seconds Output Characteristics Output Relay (DPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W ALT-XXX-1-SW / ALT-XXX-3-SW SERIES Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Safety Marks UL (OT08PC or OT11PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.375”); D 104.78 mm (4.125”) (with socket) Weight 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC or OT11PC socket) Sockets Available Model OT08PC UL Rating 600V Model OT11PC UL Rating 300V The sockets can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 173 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/arp Description The ARP Series is used in systems where equal run time for two motors is desirable. The selector switch allows selection of alternation or for continuous operation of either load. LED’s indicate the status of the output relay. This versatile series may be front panel mounted (BZ1 accessory required) or 35 mm DIN rail mounted with an accessory socket. Operation Alternating: When the rotary switch is in the “alternate” position, alternating operation of Load A and Load B occurs upon the opening of the control switch S1. To terminate alternating operation and cause only the selected load to operate, rotate the switch to position “A” to lock Load A or position “B” to lock Load B. The LEDs indicate the status of the internal relay and which load is selected to operate. Note: Input voltage must be applied at all times for proper alternation. The use of a solid-state control switch for S1 may not initiate alternation correctly. S1 voltage must be from the same supply as the unit’s input voltage (see connection diagrams). Loss of input voltage resets the unit; Load A becomes the lead load for the next operation. Duplexing (Cross-Wired): Duplexing models operate the same as alternating relays and when both the Control (S1) and Lag Load (S2) Switches are closed, Load A and Load B energize simultaneously. The DPDT 8-pin, cross-wired option, allows extra system load capacity through simultaneous operation of both motors when needed. Relay contacts are not isolated. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Alternating or electrically locked operation Flexibility to run unit alternating between the two loads as normal or lock the relay to one specific load. Low profile selector switch Prevents accidental actuation LED status indication Visual indication of which load is engaged Industry standard base connection Flexibility to use in many applications ARP SERIES Alternating Relay Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = VOLTAGE LA = LOAD A LB = LOAD B S1 = PRIMARY CONTROL SWITCH S2 = LAG LOAD SWITCH Relay contacts in above are isolated. SPDT 8-PIN DPDT 11-PIN DPDT 8-PIN CROSS WIRED Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE OUTPUT FORM DESCRIPTION AR120A-3095 120VAC SPDT 8-pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP23S 24VAC DPDT 8-pin cross-wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP41 120VAC SPDT 8-pin for alternating applications. ARP41S 120VAC SPDT 8-pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP42S 120VAC DPDT 11-pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP43 120VAC DPDT 8-pin cross-wired for duplexing applications. ARP43S 120VAC DPDT 8-pin cross-wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP61S 230VAC SPDT 8-pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP62S 230VAC DPDT 11-pin for alternating applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. ARP63S 230VAC DPDT 8-pin cross-wired for duplexing applications. Rotary switch allows user to lock internal relay to one specific load. If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 8-PIN 11-PIN PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 46. 174 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/arp Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 1-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. ARP SERIES Specifications Input Tolerance 24VAC -15% to 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% to 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, DPDT, or cross-wired DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28 VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Maximum Voltage 250VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 60.7 mm (2.39”); W 45.2 mm (1.78”); D 81.3 mm (3.2”) Termination Octal 8-pin or magnal 11-pin Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -30° to 85°C Weight 5.6 oz (159 g) approx. NOTE: Unit does not have debounce time delay. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 175 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Alternating Relays Littelfuse.com/50r400alt 480VAC Application, Panel Mount 50R-400-ALT Wiring Diagram Description The 50R-400-ALT alternating relays are used to alternate between two loads, most commonly in duplex pumping and compressor applications to balance the runtime of both loads. When used in single float applications, the alternating relay changes state after the float switch opens*, forcing the other pump to run the next time the float closes. When used in dual float applications, the alternating relay will allow both pumps to run simultaneously when the lead and lag floats are both closed. An adjustment knob provides the option to force one pump to run every time the float switch is closed. This is helpful when one pump has been removed for repair or for test purposes. A built-in debounce feature prevents the alternating relay from changing state if the float contact bounces momentarily. *The alternating relay will not switch states while current is flowing. Switching will only occur after current has been sensed, followed by loss of current for the duration of the debounce time delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Debounce time delay Prevents rapid cycling caused by waves or splashing in the tank LED indicators Visual indication of load operation in duplex application Built-in manual switch to force load operation Helpful to control load operation when performing periodic maintenance or pump repair Operates from 380 - 480VAC No transformer required to provide 120 - 240V for control circuit Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 380-480VAC Supply Current 40mA Functional Characteristics Control Input Impedance (min) 1MΩ Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty 470VA @ 600VAC General Purpose 10A Debounce Time Delay 1 second General Characteristics Maximum Input Power 5 W Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 0.98 lb. (15.68 oz., 444.52 g) Mounting Method #8 screws PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 6. 176 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss100 ISS-100 Description The ISS-100 switches are UL 913 listed as an associated apparatus for interfacing between hazardous and non-hazardous areas. These units must be installed in a non-hazardous area. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Finger-safe terminals Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation LED Status Indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Isolated output relay Allows connection to PLC or control voltage Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 90-120VAC Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc continuous Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty 180VA @120VAC, C300 General Purpose 8A @120VAC Relay Contact Life (Electrical) 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) 10,000,000 cycles General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F) Maximum Input Power 1.5 W Wire range 12 to 20 AWG Terminal Torque 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; and Class III Entity Parameters Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 La = 100mH Ca= 0.39uF Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Safety Mark UL UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.93 mm (2.08”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) Single-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch Wiring Diagram 115 VAC INPUT ISS-100 OUTPUT ENERGIZED LOAD See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 1. Maximum distance between unit and switch contact is 10,000 feet. 2. All non-intrinsically safe wiring shall be separated from intrinsically safe wiring. Description of special wiring methods can be found in the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 504 Intrinsically Safe Systems. Check your state and local codes for additional requirements. 3. All switch contacts shall be non-energy storing, containing no inductance or capacitance. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 177 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss101 ISS-101 Description The ISS-101 switches are UL 913 listed as an associated apparatus for interfacing between hazardous and non-hazardous areas. These units must be installed in a non-hazardous area. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount via octal base Allows flexibility in panel installation LED status indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Isolated output relay Allows connection to PLC or control voltage Standard 8-pin socket Pop-in replacement for other manufacturers’ parts Accessories (included) OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 90-120VAC Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5VDC continuous Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty 180VA @120VAC, C300 General Purpose 8A @120VAC Relay Contact Life (Electrical) 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) 10,000,000 cycles General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F) Maximum Input Power 1.5 W Wire range 12 to 20 AWG Terminal Torque 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; and Class III Entity Parameters Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc I sc = 1.2mA 4 La = 100mH Ca= 0.39uF Single-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch Wiring Diagram 115 VAC INPUT See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 LOAD CONTROL DRAWING ISS-101 NOTES: 1. Maximum distance between unit and switch contact is 10,000 feet. 2. All non-intrinsically safe wiring shall be separated from intrinsically safe wiring. Description of special wiring methods can be found in the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 504 Intrinsically Safe Systems. Check your state and local codes for additional requirements. 3. All switch contacts shall be non-energy storing, containing no inductance or capacitance. See Install Bulletin for full instructions and Hazardous Location information. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. 178 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss101 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Safety Mark UL UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.375”); D 104.78 mm (4.125”) Weight 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug into OT08PC socket) ISS-101 PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 179 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss102 Two-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ISS-102 SERIES Description The ISS-102 is a two-channel, intrinsically-safe switch designed for multiple uses including a pump-up/pump-down (latching) controller or two-channel switch. LEDs indicate the state of the intrinsically-safe inputs and output relays and user-selectable options are available including a variable resistance threshold for float inputs. The ISS-102 enclosure is surface or DIN rail mountable. -LC Each input channel is active when the corresponding switch is closed. When the lag input (CH2) is activated, the output closes. Applying latching logic, the output contact remains closed until the lead (CH1) and the lag (CH2) inputs are deactivated. Sensitivity is fixed at 100kOhms with a debounce time delay of 2 seconds. -DCS This dual-channel switch has two Form A output relays. Two LEDs illuminate the output state of their respective Form A relay. Resistance probes or switches can be used on its inputs. Sensitivity is fixed at 100kOhms with a debounce time delay of 0.5 seconds. -MC By selecting the proper functionality through the DIP switches, you can define a pump-up or pump-down, single or dual channel non-latching switch. The sensitivity adjustment (4.7k-100kOhms) allows you to define the input impedance at which the output relays (one Form A & one Form C) will change state, with a debounce time delay of 0.5 or 2 seconds. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Finger-safe terminals Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Compact design for DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation LED status indicator Visual indication of relay engagement Two input channels Flexibility for pump up/pump down latching controller or two-channel switch applications Wiring Diagrams Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION ISS-102A-LC 120VAC Latching Controller ISS-102AA-DCS 120VAC Dual Channel Switch ISS-102ACI-MC 120VAC Multi-function Controller ISS-102C-M-LC 120VAC MSHA* evaluated ISS-102CCI-M-MC 120VAC MSHA* evaluated * Mine Safety and Health Administration ISS-102A See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 120VAC LOAD CH1 Com CH2 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 120VAC ISS-102AA See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 FORM A FORM A CH1 Com CH2 LOAD 1 LOAD 2 1 9 2 3 4 5 7 6 For more wiring diagrams and notes, see next page. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. 180 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss102 Specifications Functional Characteristics Debounce Time 0.5 or 2 seconds Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc pulsed Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty 180VA @120VAC, C150 General Purpose 5A @120VAC Relay Contact Life (Electrical) 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) 10,000,000 cycles Output Relay Type ISS-102A-LC One Form A ISS-102AA-DCS Two Form A ISS-102ACI-MC One Form A & One isolated Form C ISS-102C-M-LC One Form C ISS-102CCI-M-MC Two Form C (one isolated) General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 55°C (-4° to 131°F) Maximum Input Power 2 W Wire Range 12 to 20 AWG Terminal Torque 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; Class III Entity Parameters Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 La = 100mH Ca = 0.39uF Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Safety Mark UL UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) (except Models ISS-102C-M-LC & ISS-102CCI-M-MC which have been evaluated by MSHA) Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.93 mm (2.08”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) ISS-102 SERIES ISS-102ACI See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 FORM A FORM C CH1 Com CH2 120VAC 120VAC MAX LOAD 1 LOAD 2 LOAD 3 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 10 11 12 120VAC ISS-102C-M LOAD 1 LOAD 2 See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 FORM C 1 8 2 3 4 5 7 6 ISS-102CCI-M LOAD 1 LOAD 2 See Notes 1 & 2 See Note 3 FORM C FORM C 120VAC 10 11 12 1 8 2 3 4 5 7 6 120VAC MAX. LOAD 3 LOAD 4 Wiring Diagrams (continued) NOTES: 1. Maximum distance between unit and switch contact is 10,000 feet. 2. All non-intrinsically-safe wiring shall be separated from intrinsically-safe wiring. Description of special wiring methods can be found in the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 504 Intrinsically-Safe Systems. Check your state and local codes for additional requirements. 3. All switch contacts shall be non-energy storing, containing no inductance or capacitance. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 181 Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss105 Five-Channel Intrinsically Safe Switch ISS-105 SERIES Description The ISS-105 is a “smart” five-channel intrinsically safe relay and pump controller. The ISS-105 can be configured for pump-up or pump-down applications or as a five-channel relay covering a wide variety of applications. The ISS-105 has a long list of features that are needed for multiple pump applications and can indicate low, high and out-of-sequence alarms. If an out-of-sequence alarm occurs, the skipped pump(s) will be started as intended. The Model ISS-105 can be set-up to do non-alternating control, alternating control and alternating control with one non-alternating pump. The non-alternating pump is intended for use with an emergency or jockey pump. The ISS-105 can start an emergency pump once every 50 cycles to keep it working freely. Using the built-in DIP switches, individual pumps can be disabled when taken out of service for repair or maintenance. Features & Benefits J 5 intrinsically-safe input channels meeting UL913 Sixth Edition J 4 normally open output relays and 1 SPDT output relay J Field selectable pump control options J Monitors float sequencing and sends signal to alarm if out-of-sequence condition occurs J High and/or low alarm options depending on the number of pumps and settings J Output contacts for audible alarm J Meets IEC EMC standards for Electrical Fast Transients (EFT), Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) and Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) J DIN rail or surface mountable allows flexibility in panel installation J User-selectable alternator/non-alternator option J Non-alternating pump option for emergency or jockey applications J Pump disable switches make it easy to disable individual pumps when they are out for service or repair J Adjustable lag pump delay for all pumping modes J Adjustable delay-on-make/break timer in five-channel relay mode J Finger-safe terminals meet IEC 61000 safety requirements Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION ISS-105 120VAC Intrinsically-Safe & Pump Controller ISS-105-ISO 120VAC Intrinsically-Safe Only ISS-105-ISO-3 120VAC 3-Channel Intrinsically-Safe Only ISS-105-ISO-4 120VAC 4-Channel Intrinsically-Safe Only ISS-105-ISO-F 120VAC ISO with Fast Trip Relays #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 C MODEL ISS-105 INTRINSICALLY SAFE INPUTS #1 PUMP #1 PUMP #2 LOW ALARM HIGH ALARM LOW ALARM HIGH OFF LEAD LAG1 ALARM COMMON AUDIBLE ALARM MODE 1 DUPLEXER PUMP DOWN #2 #3 #4 #5 INPUT 120 VAC IS Super Cell Low Alarm Float Stop Float Lead Float Lag 1 Float High Alarm Float 120 VAC Pump 1 Pump 2 Audible Alarm High Alarm Low Alarm PUMP Typical Application: Duplex Pump Down with High and Low Alarms. Many other configurations are possible. See users manual for more details. TYPICAL APPLICATION: Duplex Pump-Down with High and Low Alarms PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 12. 182 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Pump Controls and Liquid Level Controls – Intrinsically Safe Relays Littelfuse.com/iss105 Specifications Input Characteristics Supply Voltage 120VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Probe Sense Voltage 5vdc continuous Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 7A @ 240VAC Relay Contact Life (Electrical) 100,000 cycles min. @ rated load Relay Contact Life (Mechanical) 10,000,000 cycles General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 55°C (-40° to 131°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Wire range 12 to 20 AWG Recommended Terminal Torque 3.5 to 4.5 in.-lbs. (max. 4.5 in.-lbs.) Provides Intrinsically-Safe Circuits in the following locations: Division 1 and 2 Class I, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Groups E,F,G; and Class III Entity Parameters Voc = 16.8V Po=Voc*Isc Isc = 1.2mA 4 La = 100mH Ca = 0.39uF ISS-105 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air. Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI) IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10V/m Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power 2kV inputs/outputs Safety Marks UL UL913 Sixth Edition (File #E233355) Dimensions H 94.06 mm (3.703”); W 127.64 mm (5.025”); D 59.69 mm (2.350”) Weight 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Mounting Method 35 mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. PUMP CONTROLS & LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLS 8 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 183 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays For More Information… on common faults and how to fix them, visit Littelfuse.com/MotorProtection AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS Current monitors provide protection against both supply line and load side faults when the motor is running. They protect against single-phasing and current unbalance problems that can be caused by voltage supply problems, bad contactors, loose wiring, bad wires, or damaged motors. They also provide very reliable overload and underload protection. Littelfuse voltage monitors are microcontroller based and factory calibrated for highly accurate and precise voltage measurements providing high sensitivity while minimizing nuisance tripping. This precise operation can detect a single-phase condition or voltage unbalance even with regenerated voltages present. Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers CP5 Series Single-Phase Current Monitor................... 184 LSR-0 Load Sensor, Low Cost Relay ................... 185 LSR-XXX Series Load Sensors............................................. 186 LSRU Series Load Sensors............................................. 187 LSRX / LSRX-C Series Load Sensors, Low Cost Relays ................ 189 ECS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 191 ECSW Series Current Sensors ........................................ 194 TCS Series Current Sensors ........................................ 197 TCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 199 DCSA Series Current Transducers .................................. 201 LCS10T12 / LPM Series Current Indicators ..................................... 203 Voltage Monitoring Relays 50R Series.......................................................................................... 204 201-XXX-SP Series............................................................................. 206 201-XXX-SP-DPDT Series................................................................... 208 202-200-SP Series.............................................................................. 210 460-XXX-SP Series............................................................................. 212 102A Series........................................................................................ 214 201A Series........................................................................................ 216 201A-AU Series.................................................................................. 218 201-XXX-DPDT Series........................................................................ 220 202 Series.......................................................................................... 222 250A Series........................................................................................ 224 350 Series.......................................................................................... 226 355 Series.......................................................................................... 228 455 Series.......................................................................................... 230 460 Series.......................................................................................... 232 601 Series.......................................................................................... 234 601-CS-D-P1....................................................................................... 236 WVM Series....................................................................................... 238 DLMU Series...................................................................................... 240 HLMU Series...................................................................................... 243 PLMU11.............................................................................................. 245 PLM Series......................................................................................... 247 TVW Series........................................................................................ 249 TVM Series......................................................................................... 251 PLR Series.......................................................................................... 253 PLS Series.......................................................................................... 255 HLVA6I23............................................................................................ 257 KVM Series ....................................................................................... 259 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 184 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/cp5 Single-Phase Current Monitor Wiring Diagram Description The CP5 Series are undercurrent monitors designed to monitor one leg of a 3-phase system. It is commonly used as a tower monitor on center pivot irrigation systems to detect stalled or jammed towers to prevent over watering. The CP5 Series has both an adjustable trip level and an adjustable trip delay timer. When the current is sensed, the CP5 Series activates its output relay, thus starting the motor/pump. When the current in the monitored power line falls below the user-selectable trip point, the unit goes through a trip delay timer and then deactivates the output relay if the monitored current does not recover first. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Adjustable trip level (0-5A) Provides ability to precisely set the current trip point for any application Adjustable trip delay (0-10m) Prevents nuisance tripping due to power line fluctuations 600V rated relay contacts available on CP5-460 model Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit Specifications Input Characteristics Nominal Input Voltage CP5115 115VAC CP5460 460VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Operating Points Trip Level 0-5 Amps Trip Delay 0-10 minutes Restart 1 second Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty CP5115 480VA @ 240VAC CP5460 470VA @ 600VAC General Characteristics Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 1 lb. (16 oz., 453.59 g) Mounting Method #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE CP5115 115VAC CP5460 460VAC CP5 SERIES AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 185 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/lsr0 Description The LSR-0 is a self-powered load sensor intended for use as a proof relay. It is used to verify that current is flowing as intended. It has a guaranteed 15A pull-in current and 2.5A drop-out current. Proof relays are typically used to interlock fans, compressors, motors, heating elements and other devices. The LSR-0 is self-powered, that is, it draws its power from the wire being monitored so it does not require separate control power wiring. Features g Self-powered g Low cost proof relay g Can monitor up to 135A loads Specifications Max Current Ratings 135A continuous Functional Characteristics Turn-on Threshold Fixed, 15A (max.)* Turn-off Threshold 2.5A (min.) Power Induced from conductor Isolation 600VAC rms Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating: Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Wire Size #12-24AWG Hole Size 0.725” diameter Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Safety Marks CSA, CSA-NRTL/C (File #46510) CE Dimensions H 42.42 mm (1.67”); W 58.42 mm (2.3”); D 90.43 mm (3.56”) Weight 0.35 lb. (5.6 oz., 158.76 g) Mounting Method Four #6 screws 3/4” in length *Conductors may be looped for smaller motor applications. Caution: This product should not be relied upon solely for safety of life or safety applications. Self-Powered Load Sensor/Low-Cost Proof Relay LSR-0 Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR REFRIGERATION AND OIL FAILURE CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR BUILDING AUTOMATION AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 14. 186 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/lsrxxx LSR-XXX SERIES Load Sensor Description The LSR-xxx Series load sensors use current levels to determine feed rates, tool wear, loss of prime on pumps, mixer viscosity and all types of overload and underload conditions. They may also be used to stage pump motors, chillers and other machinery. These devices combine a current transformer (CT) with Form C (SPDT) relay contacts to switch alarm circuits, contactors or any resistive or inductive load. One simple screwdriver adjustment will calibrate the sensor for all singlephase or 3-phase applications up to 100hp. Features g Can monitor current of motors up to 100Hp g Fine adjustment with 20-turn pot g Status LEDs Specifications Functional Characteristics Isolation 600VAC rms Current Adjustment Range (Typical) 2-100A Current Adjustment Range (Min-Max) 0.5-135A Trip Setpoint Adjustable to ±1% range Input Characteristics Control Power: LSR-24 24VAC LSR-115 115VAC LSR-230 230VAC Max Current Ratings 135A max. continuous Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT): Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Wire Size #12-24AWG Hole Size 0.725” diameter Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Safety Marks CSA, CSA-NRTL/C (File #46510) CE IEC 60947 Dimensions H 42.42 mm (1.67”); W 58.42 mm (2.3”); D 90.43 mm (3.56”) Weight 0.4 lb. (6.4 oz., 181.44 g) Mounting Method Four #6 screws 3/4” in length Caution: This product should not be relied upon solely for safety of life or safety applications. Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR LOAD LOSS DETECTION TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR OVERLOAD DETECTION Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE LSR-24 24VAC LSR-115 115VAC LSR-230 230VAC AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 14. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 187 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/lsru LSRU SERIES Load Sensor Description The LSRU Series is a microcontroller-based family of load sensors. The LSRU family of products employ three basic types of control logic: motor control logic, alarm logic and feed control logic. Motor Control Logic Several combinations of functions are available in the LSRU, including overcurrent and undercurrent or either overcurrent or undercurrent with variable trip, restart or extended restart delay settings. These various versions of the LSRU trip on the respective fault and then automatically reset after the restart delay expires, in preparation for the next motor start. LSRUs do not trip on undercurrent when the load turns off, this is recognized as a normal condition. Alarm Logic The LSRU-AL simply indicates whether the current is between the setpoints or outside of the setpoints. This product is best used with a PLC or other controller where status indication is desired. Feed Control The LSRU-FC is a load monitor intended to control feeder mechanisms in a variety of applications. It stops the feeder when the grinder, chipper, saw, auger, etc. nears overload. When the load is reduced to a preset level, the feeder is restarted. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS LED indicator Visual indication of relay status Built in current sensor Eliminates the need for a stand alone current transformer and also provides isolation between the monitored and control circuits Adjustable current sensing range Provides ability to precisely set the current trip point for any application Wiring Diagram Ordering Information See next page. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 14. 188 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/lsru LSRU SERIES Specifications Functional Characteristics Isolation 600VAC rms Power 2 Watts Motor Acceleration Time 2 seconds When not selected as an option: Fixed Trip Delay 0.5 second (-AL, -FC) 1 second Fixed Restart Delay 1 second (-AL only) as soon as current is within limits (-FC only) 0.5 second Input Characteristics Control Power 24VAC or 115VAC Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Wire Size #12-24AWG Hole Size 0.725” diameter Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Safety Marks CSA, CSA-NRTL/C (File #46510) CE Dimensions H 42.42 mm (1.67”); W 58.42 mm (2.3”); D 90.43 mm (3.56”) Weight 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) Mounting Method Four #6 screws 3/4” in length Caution: This product should not be relied upon solely for safety of life or safety applications. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE CURRENT RANGE DESCRIPTION LSRU-024-AL-2 24VAC 5-25A Alarm logic LSRU-024-AL-3 24VAC 25-100A Alarm logic LSRU-115-AL-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Alarm logic LSRU-115-AL-2 115VAC 5-25A Alarm logic LSRU-115-AL-3 115VAC 25-100A Alarm logic LSRU-115-FC-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Feed control logic LSRU-115-OT-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-OT-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-OT-3 115VAC 25-100A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-OR-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj restart delay (0.5-300s, manual) LSRU-115-OR-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with overcurrent trip, adj restart delay (0.5-300s, manual) LSRU-115-UE-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj ext restart delay (2-300m, manual) LSRU-115-UT-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-UT-3 115VAC 25-100A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj trip delay (0.5-60s) LSRU-115-UR-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with undercurrent trip, adj restart delay (0.5-300s, manual) LSRU-115-OU-1.5 115VAC 0-10A Motor control logic with overcurrent and undercurrent trip LSRU-115-OU-2 115VAC 5-25A Motor control logic with overcurrent and undercurrent trip LSRU-115-OU-3 115VAC 25-100A Motor control logic with overcurrent and undercurrent trip PART # KEY O = Overcurrent Trip U = Undercurrent Trip T = Adj. Trip Delay (0.5-60 seconds) R = Adj. Restart Delay (0.5-300 seconds, Manual) E = Adj. Extended Restart Delay (2-300 minutes, Manual) 1.5 = 0-10 Amps 2 = 5-25 Amps 3 = 25-100 Amps AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 189 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers LSRX / LSRX-C SERIES Self-Powered Load Sensor, Low-Cost Proof Relay Wiring Diagram Description The LSRX/LSRX-C Series are AC current sensors designed to energize the output contact whenever 4.5 Amps or greater is present. The LSRX/LSRX-C Series is used commonly as an AC current proof relay to indicate if a motor is operating. It can also be used to interlock fans, compressors and motors; to indicate equipment status such as feed rates, tool wear, loss of prime on pumps, mixer viscosity and all types of current sensing conditions or to stage pump motors, chillers, or other machinery. This device combines a current transformer (CT), transducer and high current output relay together to switch alarm circuits, contactors and most resistive or inductive loads. The LSRX/ LSRX-C Series can perform the function of an auxiliary contact, yet has the advantages of universal application and isolation. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Self-powered Eliminates need for separate control voltage. Draws power from wire being monitored Quick-connect terminals Saves time at installation LED indication Visual indication of relay status Built in current sensor will monitor up to 200A loads Eliminates the need for a stand alone current transformer and also provides isolation between the monitored and control circuits Accessories Informer IR Kit-36 (36” infrared adapter cable) Attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Specifications Input Characteristics Operating Current 5-200A Continuous Minimum Pull-in Current 4.5A (typical), 7.0A (max)* Power Induced from AC conductor Output Characteristics Relay Output Rating (SPST - Form A) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC Electrical Life 1x105 Mechanical Life 1x107 Maximum Conductor Diameter 0.7 in. Output Terminals LSRX 0.25” quick-connect fast-ons LSRX-C depluggable screw terminals Torque Rating 3.0 in.-lbs. Figure 1: Typical Wiring Diagram CONTROL VOLTAGE MOTOR LSRX-C INDICATOR LIGHT L1 L2 L3 INPUT POWER Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION LSRX Fast-on terminal LSRX-C Depluggable screw terminals LSRX-OEM Fast-on terminals, 10 pack Littelfuse.com/lsrx-lsrxc AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 511, Figure 13. 190 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/lsrx-lsrxc General Characteristics Temperature Range: Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Hole Size 0.72” diameter Wire Size 12-26 AWG Output Relay Status Indicator LED Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 2, 4kV contact, 4kV air Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 2kV power, 1kV input/output Surge IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; 2kV line-to-ground Safety Marks UL UL508 Recognized (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Dimensions H 68.58 mm (2.7”); W 28.7 mm (1.13”); D 63.5 mm (2.5”) Weight 0.3 lb. (4.8 oz., 136.08 g) Mounting Method Surface Mount *Conductors may be looped for smaller motor applications. LSRX / LSRX-C SERIES AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 191 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECS SERIES Description The ECS Series of single-phase AC current sensors is a universal, overcurrent or undercurrent sensing control. Its built-in toroidal sensor eliminates the inconvenience of installing a stand-alone current transformer. Includes onboard adjustments for current sensing mode, trip point, and trip delay. Detects over or undercurrent events like locked rotor, loss of load, an open heater or lamp load, or proves an operation is taking place or has ended. Operation Input voltage must be supplied at all times for proper operation. When a fault is sensed throughout the trip delay, the output relay is energized. When the current returns to the normal run condition or zero, the output and the delay are reset. If a fault is sensed and then corrected before the trip delay is completed, the relay will not energize and the trip delay is reset to zero. Adjustment Select the desired function, over or under current sensing. Set the trip point and trip delay to approximate settings. Apply power to the ECS and the monitored load. Turn adjustment and watch the LED. LED will light; turn slightly in opposite direction until LED is off. Adjustment can be done while connected to the control circuitry if the trip delay is set at maximum. To increase sensitivity, multiple turns may be made through the ECS’s toroidal sensor. The appropriate trip point range is determined by multiplying the amperage load by the number of turns/passes through the toroidal sensor. When using an external CT, select a 2VA, 0-5A output CT rated for the current to be monitored. Select ECS adjustment range 0. Pass one secondary wire lead through the ECS toroid and connect the secondary leads together. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in toroidal current sensing Eliminates need to install stand-alone current transformer and provides isolation from monitored circuit Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Adjustable mode, trip point and trip delay Provides flexibility for use in many applications 10A, SPDT isolated relay output Allows control of AC voltage loads Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage I> = Overcurrent I< = Undercurrent W = Insulated Wire Carrying Monitored Current Relay contacts are isolated. Arrow on the toroid points toward the load. Current Sensors Ordering Information See next page. Littelfuse.com/ecs AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 34. 192 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/ecs ECS SERIES Ordering Information MODEL SENSING INPUT VOLTAGE TRIP POINT ADJUSTABLE TRIP DELAY SENSING DELAY ON STARTUP ECS20BC Selectable, over or undercurrent 24VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS21BC Selectable, over or undercurrent 24VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS2HBC Selectable, over or undercurrent 24VAC 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS30AC Selectable, over or undercurrent 24VDC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECS40A Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 0s ECS40AC Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECS40BC Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS41A Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 0s ECS41AC Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECS41BC Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS41BD Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 2s ECS41BH Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 6s ECS4HBC Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS4HBH Selectable, over or undercurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 6s ECS60AH Selectable, over or undercurrent 230VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 6s ECS60BC Selectable, over or undercurrent 230VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS61BC Selectable, over or undercurrent 230VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECS6HAH Selectable, over or undercurrent 230VAC 5 - 50A 0.150 - 7s 6s ECSH21F2.5C Overcurrent 24VAC 2 - 20A 2.5s 1s ECSH30AC Overcurrent 24VDC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECSH31AD Overcurrent 24VDC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSH31F.08D Overcurrent 24VDC 2 - 20A 0.08s 2s ECSH3HF0.08D Overcurrent 24VDC 5 - 50A 0.08s 2s ECSH34F.08C Overcurrent 24VDC 4A non-adjustable 0.08s 1s ECSH40A Overcurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 0s ECSH40AC Overcurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECSH40AD Overcurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSH41AC Overcurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECSH41AD Overcurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSH41BC Overcurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 1s ECSH41F.08D Overcurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.08s 2s ECSH4HAD Overcurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSH4HF.08D Overcurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.08s 2s ECSH61AD Overcurrent 230VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSL31A Undercurrent 24VDC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 0s ECSL40AC Undercurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECSL40B Undercurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 0s ECSL40BH Undercurrent 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 6s ECSL41A Undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 0s ECSL41AD Undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSH4HAD Overcurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.150 - 7s 2s ECSL41AH Undercurrent 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 6s ECSL4HAC Undercurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.150 - 7s 1s ECSL4HBH Undercurrent 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 6s ECSL61AH Undercurrent 230VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 6s ECSL6HAC Undercurrent 230VAC 5 - 50A 0.150 - 7s 1s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 193 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECS SERIES Specifications Sensor Type Toroidal through hole wiring Mode Over or undercurrent, switch selectable on the unit or factory fixed Trip Point Range 0.5 - 50A in 3 adjustable ranges or fixed Tolerance Adjustable Guaranteed range Fixed 0.5 - 25A: 0.5A or ±5% whichever is less; 26 - 50A: ±2.5% Maximum Allowable Current Steady – 50A turns; Inrush – 300A turns for 10s Trip Point Hysteresis ≅ ±5% Trip Point vs. Temperature ±5% Response Time ≤ 75ms Frequency 45/500 Hz Type of Detection Peak detection Trip Delay Type Analog Range Adjustable 0.150 - 7s; 0.5 - 50s (guaranteed ranges) Factory Fixed +/- 10% Delay vs. Temperature ±15% Sensing Delay on Startup Factory fixed 0 - 6s: +40%, -0% Input Voltage 24 , 120, or 230VAC; 12 or 24VDC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15 - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20 - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Life Mechanical – 1 x 106 ; Electrical – 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals (5) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 6.4 oz (181 g) Function Diagrams Littelfuse.com/ecs NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact A = Sensing Delay On Start Up TD = Trip Delay TP = Trip Point R = Reset OC = Monitored Current Overcurrent Sensing Undercurrent Sensing AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 194 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/ecsw ECSW SERIES Description The ECSW Series of single-phase, AC window, current sensors includes adjustable overcurrent and undercurrent trip points. Detects locked rotor, jam, loss of load, an open heater or lamp load, a broken belt, or loss of suction. LED’s aid in trip point adjustment and provide fault indication. The built-in toroidal sensor eliminates the need for an external current transformer. The output can be electrically latched after a fault, or automatically reset. Remote resetting of a latched output by removing input voltage. The unit includes switch selectable zero current detection and normally de-energized or energized output operation. Time delays are included to improve operation and eliminate nuisance tripping. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in toroidal current sensing Eliminates need to install stand alone current transformer and provides isolation from monitored circuit Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity LED indication Visual indication for trip point adjustment and fault indication Multiple switch selectable features User selectable zero current detection, latched, normally de-energized, or energized output adds application flexibility Adjustable trip delay Eliminates nuisance tripping and prevents rapid cycling Isolated 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Operation When the input voltage is applied, sensing delay on startup begins and the output transfers (if normally energized is selected). Upon completion of the startup delay, sensing of the monitored current begins. As long as current is above undercurrent trip point and below the overcurrent trip point (inside the window), the output relay remains in its normal operating condition and both red LED’s are OFF. The green LED glows when the output is energized. If current varies outside the window, the associated red LED glows, and the trip delay begins. If the current remains outside the window for the full Wiring Diagram Current Sensors L1 N/L2 MC = Motor Contactor M = Motor F = Fuses OL = Overload RSW = Reset Switch FSW = Fan or Float Contacts CR = Control Relay CS = Current Sensor MCC = Motor Contactor Coil V = Voltage I> = Adjustable Overcurrent I< = Adjustable Undercurrent W = Monitored Wire ∆T - Adjustable Trip Delay Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TRIP POINT ADJUST. TRIP DELAY SENSING DELAY ON STARTUP CONNECT. ECSW3LABT 24VDC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 0.1s Terminal blocks ECSW4HBHT 120VAC 5 - 50A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks ECSW4LADT 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.150 - 7s 2s Terminal blocks ECSW4LBHT 120VAC 0.5 - 5A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks ECSW4MACT 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.150 - 7s 1s Terminal blocks ECSW4MBHT 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks ECSW4MBGT 120VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 5s Terminal blocks ECSW6MBHT 230VAC 2 - 20A 0.5 - 50s 6s Terminal blocks If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 34. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 195 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers ECSW SERIES trip delay, the relay transfers to fault condition state. If the current returns to normal levels (inside the window) during the trip delay, the red LED goes OFF, the trip delay is reset, and the output remains in the normal condition. Reset: Remove input voltage or open latch switch. If zero current detection is selected, the unit will reset as soon as zero current is detected. Operation With Zero Current Detection Enabled: If the current decreases to zero within the trip delay period, then zero current is viewed as an acceptable current level. The unit’s output remains in its normal operating state. This allows the monitored load to cycle ON and OFF without nuisance tripping the ECSW. Zero current is defined as current flow of less than 250 milliamp-turns. Note: When zero current detect is selected, the latching operation of switch SW2 is canceled; the output will not latch after a fault trip. Notes on Operation 1. There is no hysteresis on the trip points. The overcurrent and undercurrent trip points should be adjusted to provide adequate protection against short cycling. 2. If the upper setpoint is set below the lower setpoint, both red LED’s will glow indicating a setting error. 3. If zero current detection is selected (SW2 ON), and the system is wired to disconnect the monitored load, the system may short cycle. After the unit trips, the load deenergizes, and zero current is detected. The ECSW resets, and the load energizes again immediately and may be short cycled. 4. The sensing delay on start up only occurs when input voltage is applied. When zero current detection is selected, the trip delay must be longer than the duration of the inrush current or the unit will trip on the inrush current. Typical Pump or Fan Protection Circuit Operation Window Current Sensing: With the ECSW connected as shown in the diagram, a load may be monitored and controlled for over and undercurrent. The ECSW Series’ on board CT (CS) may be placed on the line or load side of the contactor. The ECSW selection switches are set for zero current sensing (see Selector Switch SW2) and the output selection is normally deenergized (see Selector Switch SW3). The input voltage (V) is applied to the ECSW continually. As the control switch (FSW) is closed, the input voltage (V) is applied to the motor contactor coil (MCC), and the motor (M) energizes. As long as the current remains below the overcurrent and above the undercurrent trip points, the ECSW’s output contacts remain de-energized. If the load current should rise above or fall below a trip point, for the full trip delay, the normally open (NO) contact will close, energizing the control relay (CR) coil. The CR normally closed contact (CR1) opens and the MCC de-energizes and CR latches on through its normally open contacts (CR2). Reset is accomplished by momentarily opening the normally closed reset switch (RSW). Note: If the current falls to zero within the trip delay, the ECSW remains de-energized. The sensing delay on startup occurs when input voltage is applied therefore trip delay must be longer than the duration of the motor’s inrush current. The external latching relay CR2 is required in this system to prevent rapid cycling. A timer can be added to provide an automatic reset. Selector Switch Not Used Latched Zero I Output - Normally Energized ON OFF SW1 SW2 SW3 Mode Selection Switches SW1 = Latched or Auto reset selector OFF - Automatic reset after a fault ON - Output relay latches after a fault trips the unit SW2 = Zero current detection (below 250 mA) OFF - Zero current detection disabled ON - Zero current detection enabled SW3 = Output during normal operation OFF - Output relay de-energized ON - Output relay energized Littelfuse.com/ecsw AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 196 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/ecsw ECSW SERIES Specifications Sensor Type Toroid, through hole wiring for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2 ) THHN wire Mode Over & undercurrent trip points (window current sensing) Trip Point Range 0.5 - 50A in 3 adjustable ranges Tolerance Guaranteed range Maximum Allowable Current Steady - 50A turns; Inrush - 300A turns for 10s Time Point vs Temp. & Voltage ±5% Response Time ≤ 75ms Frequency 45/500 Hz Type of Detection Peak detection Zero Current Detection < 250mA turns typical Time Delay Range 0.15 - 50s in 2 adjustable ranges or 0.1 - 50s fixed Tolerance Adjustable: guaranteed range; Fixed: ±10% Sensing Delay On Start Up Fixed ≅ 0.1 - 6s in 1s increments Tolerance +40% -0% Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage ±15% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC; 12 or 24VDC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Mode: Switch Selectable ON Energized during normal operation, de-energized after a fault OFF De-energized during normal operation, energizes during a fault Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Latch Type Electrical Reset Remove input voltage Function Switch selectable latching function Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination 0.197 in. (5 mm) terminal blocks for up to #12 (3.2 mm2 ) AWG wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60° C/-40° to 85° C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 6.4 oz (181 g) AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 197 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers TCS SERIES Description The TCS Series is a low cost method of go/no go current detection. It includes a solid-state output to sink or source current when connected directly to a standard PLC digital input module. Its normally open or normally closed output can also be used to control relays, lamps, valves, and small heaters rated up to 1A steady, 10A inrush. The TCS is self-powered (no external power required to operate the unit) and available with an adjustable actuation range of 2 - 20A or factory fixed actuation points from 2 - 45A. Operation Normally Open: When a current equal to or greater than the actuate current is passed through the toroidal sensor, the output closes. When the current is reduced to 95% of the actuate current or less, the output opens. Normally Closed: When the current through the toroid is equal to or greater than the actuate current, the output opens. When the current is reduced below 95% of the actuate current, the output closes. To increase sensitivity, multiple turns may be made through the TCS’s toroidal sensor. The trip point range is divided by the number of turns through the toroidal sensor to create a new range. When using an external CT, select a 2VA, 0-20A output CT rated for the current to be monitored. Select TCS adjustment range 0. Pass one secondary wire lead through the TCS’ toroid and connect the secondary leads together. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Self powered No control voltage is required to operate the unit Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Can connect directly to PLC Solid state output to sink or source current can be connected directly to a standard PLC digital input module 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Complete isolation between sensed current and control circuit Allows you to monitor a load in a separate lectrical system Current Sensor Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACTUATE CURRENT OUTPUT FORM MODEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE ACTUATE CURRENT OUTPUT FORM TCSG2A 3 to 50VDC Fixed, 2A Normally open TCSH2B 24 to 240VAC Fixed, 2A Normally closed TCSGAA 3 to 50VDC 2-20A adjustable Normally open TCSH5B 24 to 240VAC Fixed, 5A Normally closed TCSGAB 3 to 50VDC 2-20A adjustable Normally closed TCSHAA 24 to 240VAC 2-20A adjustable Normally open TCSH2A 24 to 240VAC Fixed, 2A Normally open TCSHAB 24 to 240VAC 2-20A adjustable Normally closed If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Monitored AC conductor must be insulated. L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L = Load V = Voltage PS = Power Supply PLC = PLC Digital Input Module POSITIVE SWITCHING SINKING SOURCING NEGATIVE SWITCHING L1 N/L2 Littelfuse.com/tcs AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 35. 198 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/tcs TCS SERIES Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Function Diagram Specifications Sensor Type Toroid, through hole wiring, alternating current, monitored wire must be properly insulated Current to Actuate Adjustable: - 2 - 20A, guaranteed range Fixed: - 2 - 45A, +0/-20% Reset Current ≅ 95% of the actuate current Maximum Allowable Current Steady - 50A turns Inrush - 300A turns for 10s Actuate Current vs. Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Response Times Overcurrent - ≤ 200ms Undercurrent - ≤ 1s Burden < 0.5VA Output Type Solid state Form NO or NC Rating 1A steady, 10A inrush Voltage AC - 24 to 240VAC +10/-20% DC - 3 to 50VDC Voltage Drop AC NO & NC - ≅ 2.5V DC NO & NC - ≅ 1.2V Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals (2) Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2) THHN wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) TP = Trip Point OC = Monitored Current NO = Normally Open Output NC = Normally Closed Output R = Reset AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 199 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers TCSA SERIES Description The TCSA Series is a loop-powered, linear output current transducer that provides an output that is directly proportional to the RMS AC current passing through the onboard toroid. The TCSA provides a 4 - 20mA output over a power supply range of 10 - 30VDC. Each unit is factory calibrated for monitoring in one of four ranges; 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, or 0-50A. The 0 - 5A range allows the use of external current transformers so loads up to 1200AC amps can be monitored. Operation The TCSA varies the effective resistance of its output in direct proportion to the current flowing in the monitored conductor. The unit is factory calibrated so that 0 amps provides a 4mA output and full span provides a 20mA output. Zero and span adjustments are provided for minor calibration adjustments in the field (if required). Using an External Current Transformer (CT) Select a 2VA, 0 to 5A output CT, rated for the current to be monitored. Select TCSA5. Pass one of the CT’s secondary wire leads through the TCSA’s toroid. Connect the CT’s secondary leads together. 1 2 4 10 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 4 8 20 3 6 12 30 4 8 16 40 5 10 20 50 0 Features J Monitors 0 - 50A in 4 ranges J Loop powered from 10 to 30VDC J Linear output from 4 - 20mA J Zero & span adjustments J Complete isolation between sensed current & control circuit Wiring Diagram Current Transducers PS PS = Power Supply Z = Zero Adjust S = Span Adjust W = Insulated Wire Carrying Monitored Current PLC = PLC Analog Input or Meter Input Ordering Information MODEL CURRENT RANGE TCSA5 0-5A TCSA10 0-10A TCSA20 0-20A TCSA50 0-50A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Littelfuse.com/tcsa AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 35. 200 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/tcsa TCSA SERIES Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Specifications Sensor Type Toroid, through hole wiring, alternating current, monitored conductor must be properly insulated Monitored AC Current 0 - 50A Ranges 4 Factory Calibrated Ranges 0 - 5A, 0 - 10A, 0 - 20A, or 0 - 50A Factory Calibration ≤±2% of full scale Maximum Allowable Current Steady – 50A turns; Inrush – 300A turns for 10s Repeat Accuracy ≤±0.25% of full scale under fixed conditions Response Time ≅ 300ms Burden ≤ 0.5VA AC Line Frequency 0 - 20A / 21 - 50A 20 - 100Hz / 30 - 100Hz Temperature Coefficient ±0.05%/°C Output Type: Series Connection Current directly proportional to monitored current Range 4 - 20mA Sensor Supply Voltage* 10 to 30VDC Momentary Voltage 40VDC for 1m Zero Adjust ≅ 3.75 - 4.25mA Span Adjust 18mA - 22mA Adjustment Mini-screw, 25-turn potentiometer Protection Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity Units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2 ) THHN wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -30° to 60°C/-40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) *Minimum loop-power supply voltage equals the minimum sensor voltage 10VDC plus the voltage drop developed across all the other loop devices at 20mA. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 201 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Current measuring device Voltage measuring device LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Connection for 4-20mA Loop To LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Jumper used when current source is not LCSC10T12 Connection for Analog Voltage Output Connect One: VDA = 1 to 5VDC VDB = 2 to 10VDC C D A B 249Ω 249Ω DCSA AD = Instrument, meter or PLC input PS = Power Supply LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Connect One: A = 1 to 5VDC B = 2 to 10VDC DCSA50 AD = Instrument, Meter, or PLC Input PS = Power Supply DCSA SERIES Description The DCSA Series is a loop-powered, linear output current transducer that provides an output that is directly proportional to the RMS AC current passing through the LCSC10T12 sensor. The DCSA Series provides either an analog current or voltage: 4-20 mA, 1 to 5VDC, or 2 to 10VDC. Each unit is factory calibrated for monitoring (with the LCSC10T12 connected) in one of four ranges; 0-5, 0-10, 0-20, or 0-50A. Zero and span adjustments allow field calibration if needed. The DCSA Series mounts on both DIN 1 and DIN 3 rails. Operation The DCSA Series varies the effective resistance of its output in direct proportion to the current flowing in the conductor monitored by the LCSC10T12. Connecting the power supply to terminals C & D provides a 4 to 20mA DC current. Connect the power supply to terminals C & A to get 1 to 5VDC at terminal D. Connect the power supply to terminals C & B to get 2 to 10VDC at terminal D. Features J Mounts on DIN 1 or DIN 3 rail J 0-50A in 4 ranges using LCSC10T12 sensor J Loop powered from 10 to 30VDC J Linear output from 4-20mA, 1-10VDC J Zero & span adjustments J Separate sensor & control unit Accessories LCSC10T12 Toroidal Current Sensor Remote monitoring of currents up to 50A. Wiring Diagram Current Transducers CONNECTION FOR 4 - 20 MA LOOP To LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Current measuring device Voltage measuring device LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Connection for 4-20mA Loop To LCSC10T12 Current Sensor Jumper used when current source is not LCSC10T12 Connection for Analog Voltage Output Connect One: VDA = 1 to 5VDC VDB = 2 to 10VDC C D A B 249Ω 249Ω DCSA AD = Instrument, meter or PLC input PS = Power Supply Connect One: A = 1 to 5VDC B = 2 to 10VDC Jumper used when current source is not LCSC10T12 CONNECTION FOR ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUT DCSA50 AD = Instrument, Meter, or PLC Input PS = Power Supply Ordering Information MODEL CURRENT RANGE WITH LCSC10T12 INPUT RANGE (F TO E) DCSA5 0-5A 0-5mA AC DCSA20 0-20A 0-20mA AC DCSA50 0-50A 0-50mA AC If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Littelfuse.com/dcsa AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 36. 202 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/dcsa DCSA SERIES Specifications Input Ranges (without LCSC10T12 connected) 4 factory calibrated ranges in mA AC 0 - 5mA, 0 - 10mA, 0 - 20mA, or 0 - 50mA AC Factory calibration ±0.5% of full scale Repeat Accuracy ±0.25% of full scale under fixed conditions Response Time ≅ 300ms Temperature Coefficient ±0.05%/°C Input to Output Not isolated Output Type Analog Current directly proportional to input current Range 4 - 20mA, or 1 to 5VDC or 2 to 10VDC Supply Voltage* 10 to 30VDC Momentary Voltage 40VDC for 1m Zero Adjust ≅ 3.75 - 4.25mA Span Adjust 18mA - 22mA Adjustment Mini-screw, multi-turn potentiometer Protection Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2500V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity Units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting DIN 1 & DIN 3 rail mounting Termination Wire clamp For 22 - 14AWG (.336 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2 ) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -30° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 1.6 oz (45.4 g) Accessory - LCSC10T12 Toroidal Sensor Number of Turns 1000 Nominal Output Current Full Range 0 - 50 mA Maximum Allowable Current Steady 50A turns; Inrush 300A turns for 10s Burden ≤ 0.5 VA Frequency 0 - 20A / 21 - 50A 20/100 Hz / 30/100 Hz Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2 ) THHN wire Weight ≅ 1 oz (28.3 g) *Minimum loop-power supply voltage equals the minimum sensor voltage 10VDC plus the voltage drop developed across all the other loop devices at 20mA. Monitored Current Amps Diagram mA 4 12 20 A 50, 20, 10, 5 25, 10, 5, 2.5 0 Monitored Current Amps 2 1 6 3 10 5 VDC Output AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 203 Protection Relays Current Monitoring Relays and Transducers Littelfuse.com/lcs-lpm LCS10T12 / LPM SERIES Description The LCS10T12 connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 indicator is a low cost, easy to use, go/no-go indication system for the remote monitoring of current flow. The LCS10T12 is installed on an adequately insulated wire of the monitored load. Its 12in. (30.4cm) leads are connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 panel mount indicator directly or via customer supplied wires up to 500 feet (152.4m) long. Operation When the monitored current is 5A turns, the panel mount LPM indicator will glow. The LCS10T12 is designed to maximize the light output of the panel mount indicator. It can be used to monitor current flow of less than 5A by passing the monitored conductor 2 or more times through the sensor. CAUTION: The LCS10T12 must be connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 before current flows to prevent damage or a shock hazard. Monitored wires must be properly insulated. Panel mount indicator designed to match the output of the LCS10T12. The LPM12 and LPMG12 come with 12 in. (30.4 cm) wires and a one piece mounting clip. Both devices install quickly in a 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) hole in panels from 0.031 - 0.062 in. (0.79 - 1.6 mm) thick. Features J Low cost go/no go indication J May be connected to wires up to 500 feet (152.4 m) long J Remote monitoring of currents up to 50A J Green or red LED indicator available Specifications Monitored Current Current Range 2 - 50A AC Wire Passes Min. Current Max. Current Max. Inrush Max. Wire Dia. 1 5A 50A 120A 0.355 in. (9.0 mm) 2 2.5A 25A 60A 0.187 in. (4.7 mm) 3 1.7A 16.6A 40A 0.15 in. (3.8 mm) 4 1.3A 12.5A 30A 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) 5 5/X 50/X 120/X Maximum Current 50A turns continuous AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz DC Resistance of Current Limiter 65 Ω Mechanical Sensor Hole 0.36 in. (9.14 mm) for up to #4 AWG (21.1 mm2 ) THHN wire Termination 12 in. (30.4 cm) wire leads Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C/-40° to 85°C Weight LCS: ≅ 0.8 oz (23 g) LPM: ≅ 0.2 oz (6 g) Wiring Diagram Current Indicators Wire Length: 500 ft. (152.4m) max. (Customer Supplied) CAUTION: The LCS10T12 must be connected to the LPM12 or LPMG12 before current flows to prevent damage or shock hazard. Monitored wires must be properly insulated. Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION LCS10T12 AC Current Sensor LPM12 Red LED Indicator LPMG12 Green LED Indicator If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 37 and 38. 204 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/50r Description The 50R Series single-phase voltage monitor has a voltagesensing circuit which constantly monitors the single-phase power for a low voltage condition. Single-phase motors on fans, compressors, air conditioners, heat pumps, well pumps, sump pumps and small conveyor motors are all applicable to the 50R Series. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary voltage sensing circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase power for a low voltage condition Adjustable trip delay (-3 models) and restart delay (-2 models) settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions and allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition High voltage detection (-9 models) Trips and resets at a fixed percentage of the setpoint: trip 110%, reset 107%. 600V rated relay contacts available on some models Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit Single-Phase Voltage Monitor 50R SERIES Wiring Diagram 50R Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 50R-100 95-120VAC Fixed trip and restart delay 50R-100-2 95-120VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 50R200 190-240VAC Fixed trip and restart delay 50R2002 190-240VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 50R2003 190-240VAC Fixed restart and variable trip delay (2-30s) 50R20029 190-240VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) plus high voltage detection 50R400 380-480VAC Fixed trip and restart delay 50R4002 380-480VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 50R4003 380-480VAC Fixed restart and variable trip delay (2-30s) 50R40029 380-480VAC Fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) plus high voltage detection AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 205 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 50R-100 95-120VAC 50R200 190-240VAC 50R400 380-480VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage: Trip (% of setpoint) 90% Reset (% of setpoint) 93% Delay Time (Nominal) Trip 4 seconds Restart (low voltage) 2 seconds Restart (complete power loss) 2 seconds Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - 1 Form C) 50R-100, 50R200 Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC 50R400 Pilot Duty 470VA @ 600VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Transient Protection (Internal) IEC 61000-4-5; 1995 ±6kV Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 0.98 lb. (15.68 oz., 444.52 g) Mounting Method #8 screws 50R SERIES Special Options Opt. 2: Variable Restart Delay Manual, 2-300 seconds Opt. 3: Variable Trip Delay 2-30 seconds Opt. 9: High Voltage Detection Operating Points Trip (% of Setpoint) 110% Reset (% of Setpoint) 107% *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% Littelfuse.com/50r AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 206 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/201xxxsp Description The 201-xxx-SP Series is an 8-pin octal-base, plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect single-phase motors regardless of size. The 201-100-SP is used on 95-120VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by low voltage. The 201-200-SP is used on 190-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors. The 201-200-SP-T-9 is a pin-forpin replacement for a Time Mark® #260 Series voltage monitor. High voltage protection is included in the 201-200-SP-T-9. The unique microcontroller-based voltage and voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before the motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Compact design for 8-pin; DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexibility in panel installation Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 201-XXX-SP SERIES Wiring Diagram PIN-OUT 1 (201-XXX-SP) (view of socket) PIN-OUT 2 (201-200-SP-T-9) (view of socket) TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201-SP WITH MOTOR CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 201-100-SP 95-120VAC SPDT, protects single phase motors 201-200-SP 190-240VAC SPDT, protects single phase motors 201-200-SP-T-9 190-240VAC SPDT, direct replacement for Time Mark® #260 series AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 207 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage: 201-100-SP 95-120VAC 201-200-SP, 201-200-SP-T-9 190-240VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% Reset 93% For 201-200-SP-T-9 only: High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% Reset 107% Trip Delay Time: High/Low Voltage Fault 4 seconds Restart Delay Time: After a Fault 2 seconds After a Complete Power Loss 2 seconds Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC 201-XXX-SP SERIES General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Transient Protection (Internal) 2500V for 10 ms Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.325 mm (2.375”); D 104.775 mm (4.125”) (with socket) Weight 0.8 lb. (12.8 oz., 362.87 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Socket Available Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Littelfuse.com/201xxxsp AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 208 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/201xxxspdpdt Description The 201-xxx-SP-DPDT Series is an 8-pin octal-base, plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect single-phase motors regardless of size. The 201-100-SP-DPDT is used on 95-120VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by low voltage. The 201-200-SP-DPDT is used on 190-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors. The units feature two isolated sets of contacts that are ideal for use with two control circuits with different voltages. The unique microcontroller-based voltage and voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relays are deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relays reactivate after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before the motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Compact design for 8-pin; DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexibility in panel installation Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 600VAC. Single-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 201-XXX-SP-DPDT SERIES Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 201-100-SP-DPDT 95-120VAC Two isolated Form C relays 201-200-SP-DPDT 190-240VAC Two isolated Form C relays AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 209 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage: 201-100-SP-DPDT 95-120VAC 201-200-SP-DPDT 190-240VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint): Trip 90% +/-1% Reset 93% +/-1% Trip Delay Times: Low Voltage 4 seconds Restart Delay Times: After a Fault or Complete Power Loss 2 seconds Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (DPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range: Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 201-XXX-SP-DPDT SERIES Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.325 mm (2.375”); D 104.775 mm (4.125”) (with socket) Weight 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Socket Available Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail Littelfuse.com/201xxxspdpdt AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 210 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/202200sp Description The 202-200-SP Series voltage monitor is designed to protect single-phase motors regardless of size. It can be used with 190V-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by incoming power problems. A unique microcontroller-based voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before a motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Adjustable restart delay (Manual, 2-300s) Allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status One screw mounting and standard 1/4” quick connect terminals Fast installation and compact size perfect for panel assembly or OEM applications Single-Phase Voltage Monitor 202-200-SP SERIES Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 202-200-SP WITH MOTOR CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 202-200-SP WITH ALARM CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 202-200-SP 190-240VAC SPDT, high and low voltage protection 202-200-SP-NHV 190-240VAC SPDT, low voltage protection only AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 7. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 211 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/202200sp Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage: 202-200-SP, 202-200-SP-NHV 190-240VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% Reset 93% High Voltage (% of setpoint) (not available on -NHV model) Trip 110% Reset 107% Trip Delay Time: High and Low Voltage 4 seconds Restart Delay Time: After a Fault or Complete Power Loss Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC 202-200-SP SERIES General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Repeatability ±0.5% Input to Output Dielectric 1480 Vrms (min.) Termination 0.25” male quick connect Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 95%, non-condensing Transient Protection IEC 61000-4-5, ±4kV Safety Marks UL, UL Recognized UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 63.5 mm (2.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 35.56 mm (1.4”) Weight 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) Mounting Method 1/4” socket head cap screw (customer supplied) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 212 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/460xxxsp Description The 460-100-SP is used on 95-120VAC, 50*/60Hz single-phase motors and the 460-200-SP is used on 190-240VAC, 50*/60Hz single-phase motors to protect them from damaging high and low voltage conditions. An adjustment knob allows the user to set a 1-500 second restart delay. The variable restart delay is also a power-up delay and can be utilized to stagger-start motors on the same system. A unique microcontroller-based, voltage-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of voltage to detect harmful power line conditions, even before a motor starts Fixed trip delay 4s Prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Adjustable restart delay (1-500s) Allows staggered start up of multiple motors on the same system to prevent a low voltage condition Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status DIN rail or surface mountable Allows flexibility for panel assembly Single-Phase Voltage Monitor 460-XXX-SP SERIES Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE 460-100-SP 95-120VAC 460-200-SP 190-240VAC AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 213 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 460-100-SP 95-120VAC 460-200-SP 190-240VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint): Trip 90% ±1% Reset 93% ±1% High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% ±1% Reset 107% ±1% Trip Delay Time Low or High Voltage 4 seconds fixed Restart Delay Time After a Fault 1-500 seconds adjustable After a Complete Power Loss 1-500 seconds adjustable Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (1 Form C) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 6 W Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 4.5 in.-lbs. Wire Type Stranded or solid 12-20 AWG, one per terminal 460-XXX-SP SERIES Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5 kV input power and controls Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 min) Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.93 mm (2.084”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 0.9 lb. (14.4 oz., 408.23 g) Mounting Method 35mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) *Note: 50 Hz will increase all delay timers by 20% Littelfuse.com/460xxxsp AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 214 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/102a Description The 102A is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. A unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels. The Model 102A includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage (102A-9), voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, power-up restart delay, reverse-phase trip, unbalance/ single-phase trip, high or low voltage trip Adjustable trip delay (102A2) Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 102A 190-480VAC Fixed low voltage trip delay (4 sec), fixed restart delay (2 sec) 102A2 190-480VAC Has variable restart delay (manual or adjustable 2-300 seconds) 102A3 190-480VAC Has adjustable trip delay at 2-30 seconds (unbalance and phasing trip delays remain at 2 seconds). 102A-9 190-480VAC Has high voltage protection. High Voltage Trip is 110% of setpoint, Reset is 107% of setpoint. 102600 475-600VAC Fixed low voltage trip delay (4 sec), fixed restart delay (2 sec) 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 102A SERIES Wiring Diagram 102 WITH MOTOR CONTROL 102 WITH ALARM CONTROL AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 215 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% Reset 93% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 6% Reset 4.5% Trip Delay Time Low/High Voltage 4 seconds (standard) Unbalance & Phasing Faults 2 seconds Restart Delay Time After a Fault 2 seconds (standard) After a Complete Power Loss 2 seconds (standard) Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT - 1 Form C) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC 102A SERIES General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Maximum Input Power 5 W Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input, 2kV input/output Transient Protection (Internal) IEC 61000-4-5; 1995 ±6kV Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA 22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 1.05 lbs. (16.8 oz., 476.27 g) Mounting Method #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. Littelfuse.com/102a AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 216 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/201a Description The 201A is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. The 201A includes advanced single LED diagnostics, where color and light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the 201A’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels for a specified restart delay time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. High voltage monitoring optional. Compact design for 8-pin; DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, power-up restart delay, reverse-phase trip, unbalance/ single-phase trip, high/low voltage trip Accessories OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 201A SERIES Wiring Diagram 201A WITH MOTOR CONTROL 201A WITH ALARM CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 201A 190-480VAC DIN rail or surface mountable 201A-9 190-480VAC Includes high voltage detection. DIN rail or surface mountable AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 217 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% ±1% Reset 93% ±1% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 6% Reset 4.5% Optional High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% ±1% Reset 107% ±1% Trip Delay Time High/Low Voltage Fault 4 seconds Unbalance & Phasing Faults 2 seconds Restart Delay Time After a Fault 2 seconds After a Complete Power Loss 2 seconds Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 12 in.-lbs. (for OT08-PC socket) Wire Gauge 12-22 AWG solid or stranded Transient Protection (Internal) 2500V for 10 ms 201A SERIES Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity (RFI), Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power & controls Surge Immunity IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Weight 0.7 lbs. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Socket Available Model OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Littelfuse.com/201a AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 218 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/201aau Description The 201A-AU is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. Additional adjustment knobs allow the user to set a 1-30 second trip delay, a manual restart or 1-500 second restart delay and a 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point. The Model 201A-AU includes advanced single LED diagnostics, where color and light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the 201A-AU’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels for a specified amount or restart delay time (or manual reset). Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of loss of any phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, rapid cycling, harmful power line conditions Compact design for 8-pin; DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexiblility in panel installation Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. Adjustable voltage unbalance trip setting Allows compatibility with a variety of motors and reduces nuisance tripping. Adjustable trip & restart delay settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Accessories OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 201A-AU 190-480VAC DIN rail or surface mountable 201575-AU 475-600VAC DIN rail or surface mountable 201A-AU-OT 190-480VAC Sold with OT08PC socket 201-575-AU-OT 475-600VAC Sold with OT08PC socket 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 201A-AU SERIES Wiring Diagram 201A-AU WITH MOTOR CONTROL 201A-AU WITH ALARM CONTROL L2 L1 L3 L2 L1 L3 LIGHT HORN TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU WITH MOTOR CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU WITH ALARM CONTROL L2 L1 L3 L2 L1 L3 LIGHT HORN TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU WITH MOTOR CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 201A-AU WITH ALARM CONTROL AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 219 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% ±1% Reset 93% ±1% High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% ±1% Reset 107% ±1% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 2-8% adjustable Reset Trip Setting Minus 1% (5-8%) Trip Setting Minus 0.5% (2-4%) Trip Delay Time High, Low and Unbalanced Voltage 1-30 seconds adjustable Single-Phasing Faults 1 second fixed Restart Delay Time After a Fault Manual, 1-500 seconds adj. After a Complete Power Loss Manual, 1-500 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (1-Form C) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 12 in.-lbs. (for OT08-PC socket) Wire Gauge 12-22 AWG solid or stranded 201A-AU SERIES Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 min.) Safety Marks UL (OT08PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.325 mm (2.375”); D 104.775 mm (4.125”) (with socket) Weight 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT08PC socket) Socket Available OT08PC (UL Rating 600V) The 600V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Must use Model OT08PC socket for UL Rating! Littelfuse.com/201aau AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 220 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/201xxxdpdt Description The 201-xxx-DPDT Series is an 11-pin octal base plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect 3-phase motors regardless of size. The 201-100-DPDT is used on 95-120VAC, 50/60Hz motors and the 201-200-DPDT is used on 190-240VAC, 50/60Hz motors to prevent damage caused by incoming voltage problems. The units feature two isolated sets of contacts that are ideal for use with two control circuits with different voltages. The unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the voltages to detect harmful power line conditions When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relays are deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relays reactivate after power line conditions return to an acceptable level and a specified amount of time has elapsed (restart delay). The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. This unit is also available with a shorter trip delay and faster restart delay. The 201-xxx-DPDT-60mS has a trip delay of 0.5 seconds and a restart delay of 60 milliseconds. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constantly monitors 3 phase voltage to protect against harmful line conditions, even before the motor is started Compact design for 11-pin; DIN rail or surface mount Allows flexibility in panel installation Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Two isolated Form C relays (DPDT) Ideal for use in systems which have two control circuits with different voltages Accessories OT11PC Octal Socket 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10A @ 300VAC 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 201-XXX-DPDT SERIES Wiring Diagram STOP 4 4 1 1 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 5 5 3 3 2 2 6 6 7 7 INPUT POWER L3 L2 L1 LIGHT CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER HORN Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 201-100-DPDT 95-120VAC Fixed unbalance, trip delay 4s for low voltage fault and 2s for unbalance and phase loss, restart delay 2s 201-200-DPDT 190-240VAC Fixed unbalance, trip delay 4s for low voltage fault and 2s for unbalance and phase loss, restart delay 2s 201-100-DPDT-60mS 95-120VAC Fixed unbalance, trip delay 0.5s, restart delay 60mS AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 8. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 221 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 201-100-DPDT, 201-100-DPDT-60mS 95-120VAC 201-200-DPDT, 201-200-DPDT-60mS 190-240VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% +/-1% Reset 93% +/-1% Voltage Unbalance Trip 6% Reset. 4.5% Trip Delay Times Low Voltage 4 seconds Unbalance, Phasing Faults 2 seconds Models with -60ms option 0.5 second Restart Delay Times After a Fault or Complete Power Loss 2 seconds Models with -60mS option 60 milliseconds Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (DPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC 201-XXX-DPDT SERIES General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Maximum Input Power 5 W Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 2.5kV input power Safety Marks UL (OT11PC octal socket required) UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D 104.78 mm (4.125”) Weight 0.65 lb. (10.4 oz., 294.84 g) Mounting Method DIN rail or surface mount (plug in to OT11PC socket) Socket Available Model OT11PC (UL Rated 300V) The 300V socket can be surface mounted or installed on DIN Rail. Must use Model OT11PC socket for UL Rating! *Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the RB Series and OT Series Octal Sockets is 12 in.-lbs. Littelfuse.com/201xxxdpdt AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 222 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/202 Description The 202 Series is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50*/60Hz motors regardless of size. The 202-RP (and the 202-575-RP for 475-600VAC) monitors the phase rotation of 3-phase systems and trips on reverse-phase only. Critical applications include fan motors, scroll compressors, grinders, conveyor systems, elevators and escalators. Both products provide a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and automatically select between the 200V and 400V range. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver’s output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels for a specified amount of restart delay time (or a manual reset). The 202 Series includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. The status light turns green and the relay is activated when rotation is correct. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, quick mounting design 1-screw mounting saves time and space. Small footprint ideal for assembly into panels. Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. Auto-sensing wide voltage range (202 & 202-RP Automatically senses system voltage between 90 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, restart delay, reverse-phase trip, fault Adjustable trip delay (202) Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 202 190-480VAC Standard protection with low/high voltage trip, voltage unbalance 202-RP 190-480VAC Trips on reverse-phase only 202-575-RP 475-600VAC Designed for higher voltage systems and trips on reverse-phase only 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 202 SERIES Wiring Diagram L1 L1 MOTOR ALARM ALARM POWER 240 VAC MAX. INPUT POWER L2 L2 L3 L3 NC NO COM 202 OL OL OL M M M L1 L1 MOTOR START HAND OFF AUTO CONTROL VOLTAGE STOP 240 VAC MAX. INPUT POWER L2 L2 L3 L3 NC NO COM 202 OL OL OL M M M OL M M 202 WITH ALARM CIRCUIT 202 WITH MOTOR CONTROL AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 509, Figure 7. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 223 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Phase Sequence ABC Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% Reset 93% High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% Reset 107% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 6% Reset 4.5% Trip Delay Time High and Low Voltage 4 seconds Unbalance & Phasing Faults 2 seconds Restart Delay Time After a Fault Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. After a Complete Power Loss Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. 202 SERIES Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Repeatability ±0.5% Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity 95%, non-condensing Transient Protection IEC 61000-4-5, ±4kV Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2x rated V+1000V for 1 minute) Termination 0.25” male quick connect Safety Marks UL Recognized UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 63.5 mm (2.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 35.56 mm (1.4”) Weight 0.5 lb. (8 oz., 226.8 g) Mounting Method 1/4” socket head cap screw (customer supplied) *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. CE Pending Littelfuse.com/202 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 224 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/250a Description The 250A is a 3-phase, auto-ranging, dual-range voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size from low and high voltage, unbalance/single-phase, and reversephase. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range. The 250A also features adjustable or manual restart delay. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to acceptable levels. The Model 250A includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish between faults and normal conditions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal, harmful power line conditions. Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC. Saves setup time. Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, power-up restart delay, reverse-phase trip, unbalance/ single-phase trip, high or low voltage trip DPDT relay output Allows for versitility to meet wide application needs Manual Reset Allows for inspection of equipment before system is re-energized 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 250A SERIES Wiring Diagram MODEL 250 Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE % OF SETPOINT LOW DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TRIP LOW VOLTAGE RESET HIGH VOLTAGE TRIP HIGH VOLTAGE RESET 250A 190-480VAC 90% 93% 110% 107% Provides high and low voltage protection at fixed percentage of nominal voltage. 250600 475-600VAC 90% 93% 110% 107% Provides high and low voltage protection at fixed percentage of nominal voltage. 250A-MET 190-480VAC 85% 88% N/A N/A Designed for use with Fire Control Panels. Has 2 Form C contacts that operate independently. Left Form C energizes when voltage conditions are good and de-energize when a fault condition is detected. Right Form C only energizes during a reverse-phase condition. No high voltage protection. 250-100-MET 95-120VAC 85% 88% N/A N/A Designed for use with Fire Control Panels. Has 2 Form C contacts that operate independently. Left Form C energizes when voltage conditions are good and de-energize when a fault condition is detected. Right Form C only energizes during a reverse-phase condition. No high voltage protection. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 225 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Frequency 50*/60Hz Low Voltage Functional Characteristics Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 6% Reset 4.5% Trip Delay Time Low Voltage, High Voltage 4 seconds Unbalance, Phasing Faults 2 seconds Restart Delay Time After a Fault or Complete Power Loss Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (DPDT - 2 Form C) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC Temperature Range -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Maximum Input Power 5 W Relative Humidity Up to 95% non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Transient Protection (Internal) IEC 61000-4-5;1995 ±6kV Approvals UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA CSA 22.2 No. 14 (File#46510) CE CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 1.02 lb. (16.32 oz., 462.66 g) Mounting Method #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. 250A SERIES Littelfuse.com/250a AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 226 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/350 Description The 350 Series is a heavy-duty voltage monitor. This product should be used when high current relays or dual contacts are required, or 480V controls are used. Since the 350 Series uses heavy-duty relays, it comes in fixed voltage range models rather than a dual auto-ranging version like the Model 250. The 350200 has a 15A general purpose contact. The 350400 provides a SPDT (Form C) relay rated to switch up to 600V, allowing the use of 480V controls, eliminating the need for a control power transformer to step the voltage down to 120-240V. Several DPDT (two Form C contacts) relay models are also available. The 350 microcontroller-based family of products are low cost yet highly advanced solutions to heavy-duty problems. The 350 includes advanced single LED diagnostics. Five different light patterns distinguish faults and normal operating conditions. Other options such as high voltage trip and adjustable restart delay are available. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constantly monitors 3 phase voltage to protect against harmful line conditions, even before the motor is started Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Adjustable restart delay (-2 models) settings Allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition 600V rated relay contacts available on some models Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 350 SERIES Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 350200 190-240VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay 35040026 380-480VAC DPDT, 2 relays (1)10a. (1) 15A; fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 3502002 190-240VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35040028** 380-480VAC DPDT, 2 relays 15A; variable restart delay (no manual reset) 35020026 190-240VAC DPDT, 2 relays (1)10a. (1) 15A; fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35040029 380-480VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s), plus high voltage detection 35020028** 190-240VAC DPDT, 2 relays 15A; variable restart delay (no manual reset) 350600 475-600VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay 35020029 190-240VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s), plus high voltage detection 3506002 475-600VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 350400 380-480VAC SPDT, fixed trip and restart delay 35060026 475-600VAC DPDT, 2 relays (1)10a. (1) 15A; fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 3504002 380-480VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35060028** 475-600VAC DPDT, 2 relays 15A; variable restart delay (no manual reset) 35040025 380-480VAC DPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s) 35060029 475-600VAC SPDT, fixed trip and variable restart delay (manual, 2-300s), plus high voltage detection ** These units are not equipped with Manual Reset. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 227 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 350200 190-240VAC 350400 380-480VAC 350600 475-600VAC Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% Reset 93% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 6% Reset 4.5% Trip Delay Time: Low Voltage 4 seconds Unbalance & Phasing Faults 2 seconds Restart Delay Time After a Fault 2 seconds After a Complete Power Loss 2 seconds Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating SPDT (350200) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 15A SPDT (350-400, 350-600) 470VA @ 600VAC DPDT (-6 Option) 1-10A General Purpose 480VA @ 240VAC Pilot Duty 1-15A General Purpose 480VA @ 240VAC Pilot Duty 1hp @ 240VAC DPDT (-8 Option) 2-15A General Purpose 480VA @ 240VAC Pilot Duty 1hp @ 240VAC 350 SERIES General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Trip & Reset Accuracy ±1% Maximum Input Power 5 W Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Transient Protection (Internal) IEC 61000-4-5;1995 ±6kV Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA 22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 74.42 mm (2.93”); W 133.86 mm (5.27”); D 74.93 mm (2.95”) Weight 1.05 lbs. (16.8 oz., 476.27 g) Mounting Method #8 screws Special Options Opt. 2: Variable Restart Delay Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Opt. 5: DPDT Relay Opt. 6: 2 Relays (1) 10A, (1) 15A Opt. 8: 2 Relays (2) 15A Opt. 9: High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% Reset 107% *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. Littelfuse.com/350 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 228 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/355 Description The 355 Series is a 3-phase voltage monitor with adjustable trip and restart delay, adjustable voltage unbalance and multiple diagnostic lights. It is perfect for heavy-duty applications that need both protection and simple user-friendly diagnostics. Applications include pump panels, commercial HVAC, oil rigs and others. The 355 Series uses microcontroller technology to monitor incoming voltage and de-energize its output relay if power problems exist. The 355 Series can protect motors from damage caused by single-phasing, high and low voltage, phase reversal and voltage unbalance. It has four diagnostic LEDs that clearly show overvoltage, undervoltage, voltage unbalance, reversephase and normal conditions. The 355200 is equipped with a heavy-duty 10A general purpose SPDT relay. The 355400 and 355600 are equipped with a 470VA @ 600VAC pilot duty SPDT relay. A high voltage (600V) DPDT relay output option is available with the 400V model. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constantly monitors 3 phase voltage to protect against harmful line conditions, even before the motor is started Advanced LED indication Provides diagnostics which can be used for troubleshooting and to determine relay status Adjustable trip and restart delay settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions and allows staggered start up of multiple motors, after a fault, to prevent a low voltage condition Combines protection and diagnostics Perfect for heavy duty applications: pump panels, commercial HVAC, and oil rigs 600V rated relay contacts available on some models Eliminates the need for a control transformer to step voltage down to 120 - 240V for a control circuit 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor 355 SERIES Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 355 WITH ALARM CONTROL TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 355 WITH MOTOR CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE DESCRIPTION 355200 190-240VAC SPDT 355400 380-480VAC SPDT 3554005 380-480VAC DPDT 355600 475-600VAC SPDT AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 229 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 355200 190-240VAC 355400 380-480VAC 355600 475-600VAC (Specify voltage range) Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% ±1% Reset 93% ±1% High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% ±1% Reset 107% ±1% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 2-8% adjustable Reset Trip setting minus 1% Trip Delay Time: Low & High Voltage and Unbalance 2-30 seconds adjustable Single-phasing Faults (>25% UB) 2 seconds Restart Delay Time After a Fault or Power Loss Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating SPDT (355200) Pilot Duty 480VA at 240VAC General Purpose 10A SPDT (355400, 355600) Pilot Duty 470VA @ 600VAC DPDT (-5 Option) Pilot Duty 470VA @ 600VAC 355 SERIES General Characteristics Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Repeat Accuracy Fixed Conditions ±0.1% Maximum Input Power 6 W Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Transient Protection (Internal) 2500V for 10 ms Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 74.42 mm (2.93”); W 133.86 mm (5.27”); D 74.93 mm (2.95”) Weight 0.94 lb. (15.04 oz., 426.38 g) Mounting Method #8 screws Special Options Option 5 - DPDT Relay *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay times by 20%. Littelfuse.com/355 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 230 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/455 455 SERIES 3-Phase Voltage/Phase Monitor Description The 455 Series are 3-phase voltage monitors that combine load and line side monitoring to offer complete protection. Monitoring the load side will alert the user of contactor failure or impending contactor failure. Line side monitoring will also protect the motor from damaging fault conditions that may be present prior to the motor starting. With other line/load side monitors, the motor must be started before a voltage fault is detected. With the 455, your motor is fully protected at all times. The 455 Series are 3-phase, dual range voltage monitors that protect 190-480VAC, 50*/60Hz motors, regardless of their size. It automatically selects between the 200V and 400V range when the user selects the nominal voltage setpoint. Other adjustments include a 2-30 second trip delay, a 2-300 second restart delay (and manual restart) and a voltage unbalance trip point of 2-8%. The voltage monitor’s circuitry is powered through the line side connections, so there is no need for separate control power, making it easy to install. Equipped with an infrared LED, the 455 Sereies can communicate to the optional hand-held diagnostic tool, Informer-MS to obtain valuable information such as real-time voltage, voltage unbalance on both line and load sides, motor run hours, last 20 faults, last 32 motor starts, high and low voltage trip points, voltage unbalance trip point, restart and trip delay settings, LED status and more. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Load side monitoring of contactor Protects motor from contactor failure or worn contacts. Monitors contactor or starter Prevents rapid cycling Infrared LED Capable Increases personnel safety line of sight monitoring using optional Informer-MS Accessories Informer-MS A hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with Littelfuse® 455 equipped with an infrared LED transmitter Informer IR Kit-36 36” infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 455 190-480VAC Universal line and load side monitor 455480R 380-480VAC Used in high voltage applications with pilot duty 470VA @ 600VAC 455575 475-600VAC For use in Canada or NE USA where 575V utility power services are common. Wiring Diagram MODEL 455 WITH MOTOR CONTROL USING A 3-POLE CONTACTOR MODEL 455 WITH MOTOR CONTROL USING A 2-POLE CONTACTOR AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 231 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 455 SERIES Specifications Frequency 50*/60Hz Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% ±1% Reset 93% ±1% High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% ±1% Reset 107% ±1% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 2-8% adjustable Reset Trip setting minus 1% Trip Delay Time Low & High Voltage and Unbalance 2-30 seconds adjustable Single-phasing Faults (>25% UB) 2 seconds fixed Restart Delay Time After a Fault Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. After a Complete Power Loss Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. After a Motor Shut-down Manual, 2-300 seconds adj. Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A High Voltage Relay (-480R) Pilot Duty 470VA @ 600VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Repeat Accuracy Fixed Conditions ±0.1% Maximum Input Power 6 W Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Transient Protection (Internal) IEC 61000-4-5;1995 ±6kV Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 1.1 lbs. (17.6 oz., 498.95 g) Mounting Method #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay times by 20%. Littelfuse.com/455 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 232 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/460 3-Phase Voltage Monitor 460 SERIES Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MODEL 460 WITH MOTOR CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 460 190-480VAC Automatically senses line voltage, adjustable 1-30 second trip delay, 1-500 second restart delay, and 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point 460-L 190-480VAC Fixed 4 second trip delay and 1 second for single-phase faults, and fixed 6% voltage unbalance trip point 460-14 190-480VAC Equipped with 2 sets of contacts: Form A (NO) and Form B (NC). Used for applications requiring 2 different voltages such as 5VDC for a PLC input and 115VAC for an alarm 460-575 475-600VAC Commonly used in Eastern Canada and on generator units that generate 600 VAC power 460-575-14 475-600VAC Commonly used in Eastern Canada and on generator units that generate 600 VAC power. Equipped with 2 sets of contacts: Form A and Form B 460-15 190-480VAC Equipped with 2 sets of Form A (NO) contacts. Used on applications where two different units are to be controlled at once such as a unit that has separate contacts for a compressor and a fan 460-MR 190-480VAC Equipped with a 2-prong connection for a normally open push button mounted outside the panel. Used in applications requiring an external manual reset button 460-VBM 190-480VAC Fixed 6% voltage unbalance trip point. User adjustable low and high voltage trip points 460-400HZ 190-480VAC For use with 400Hz power supply 460-OEM 190-480VAC Bulk package of 460, 20 units 460L-OEM 190-480VAC Bulk package of 460-L, 20 units Description The 460 is a 3-phase voltage monitor that protects 190-480VAC or 475-600V, 50/60Hz motors regardless of size. The product provides a user selectable nominal voltage setpoint and the voltage monitor automatically senses line voltage. This unique microcontroller-based voltage and phase-sensing device constantly monitors the 3-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions such as low, high, and unbalanced voltage, loss of any phase, and phase reversal. When a harmful condition is detected, the MotorSaver® output relay is deactivated after a specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for a specified amount of time (restart delay). The trip and restart delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions. All 460 models feature adjustable 1-30 second trip delay, 1-500 second restart delay, 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point, and one form C contact except where noted below. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Auto-sensing wide voltage range Automatically senses system voltage between 190 - 480VAC or 475-600VAC. Saves set-up time Adjustable trip & restart delay settings Prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly fluctuating power line conditions Microcontroller based circuitry Improved accuracy and higher reliability Advanced LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip and relay status Adjustable voltage unbalance trip setting Provides reliable protection when regenerative voltage is present AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 10. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 233 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 6 W Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 4.5 in.-lbs. Wire Type Stranded or solid 12-20 AWG, one per terminal Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air RFI, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power and controls Surge IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 4kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line Hi-potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 52.9 mm (2.08”); D 59.69 mm (2.35”) Weight 0.7 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) Mounting Method 35 mm DIN rail or Surface Mount (#6 or #8 screws) 460-MR (manual reset) External NO pushbutton required. Specifications Frequency 50/60Hz Low Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 90% ±1% Reset 93% ±1% High Voltage (% of setpoint) Trip 110% ±1% Reset 107% ±1% Voltage Unbalance (NEMA) Trip 2-8% adjustable Reset Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%) Trip setting minus 0.5% (2-4%) 460L 6% UB fixed (4.5% reset) Trip Delay Time Low, High and Unbalanced Voltage 1-30 seconds adjustable 460L 4 seconds fixed Single-Phase Faults (>15% UB) 1 second fixed Restart Delay Time After a Fault 1-500 seconds adjustable After a Complete Power Loss 1-500 seconds adjustable Output Contact Rating Form C Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC Form A & Form B Pilot Duty 360VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 8A @ 240VAC 460 SERIES Littelfuse.com/460 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 234 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/601 Description The Model 601 is a fully-programmable voltage monitor designed to protect 3-phase motors from loss of any phase (single-phasing), phase reversal, low or high voltage, voltage unbalance, low or high frequency, and rapid cycling. It can be used as a stand-alone product or networked with an RM1000, RM2000, PLC, computer or SCADA system. When a harmful condition is detected, the 601’s output relay is deactivated after the specified trip delay. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for the programmed restart delay (RD2). Eleven (11) setpoints are viewable with the 3-digit LED display or from a networked device: J low voltage J high voltage J voltage unbalance J low frequency J high frequency J RS485 address J trip delay for voltage/ frequency faults J trip delay for single-phase faults J rapid-cycle timer (RD1) J restart delay after all faults (RD2) J type of restart after all faults (manual or automatic) Six (6) parameters are viewable while the motor is running: J L1-L2 voltage J L2-L3 voltage J L1-L3 voltage J average voltage J voltage unbalance (%) J frequency When used with the RS485MS-2W communications module, the 601 can communicate with most Modbus RTU master devices. Voltage conditions can be monitored and setpoints can be changed remotely using Solutions software, an RM1000, RM2000 or other device. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Provides real time information and diagnostics to help with troubleshooting Programmable voltage and frequency settings Allows usage on wide range of systems 2 programmable restart delay timers Program separate restart delay time for rapid cycle protection and motor cool down 2 programmable trip delay timers 1 trip delay specifically for Phase Loss/Single-Phase fault condition, 1 trip delay for all other fault conditions Programmable restart control Choose between an adjustable automatic or manual restart to best meet individual application needs Flexible reset Reset options include pushbutton on relay or remote reset with optional 777-MRSW or OL-RESET remote reset kit Remote display compatibility Increases safety through remote display of real-time data and fault history, without the need to open the cabinet. Aids with arc flash safety regulations Network communications capability Compatible with RS-485 Modbus communications module 3-Phase Voltage & Frequency Monitor 601 SERIES Wiring Diagram MODEL 601 WITH MOTOR CONTROL Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION 601 190-480VAC Universal 3-Phase Voltage & Frequency Monitor 601575 500-600VAC Used primarily in Canada and NE USA where 575V utility power services are common AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 235 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Accessories RS485MS-2W Communication Module (for limited Modbus capabilities) Required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77X-type products. RM1000 Remote Monitor The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring for up to 16 devices. RM2000 Remote Monitor The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring with event storage and real-time clock for date and time stamp. 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. OL-RESET Manual Remote Reset Kit Allows the 777 line of MotorSaver® and PumpSaver® products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. 601 SERIES Specifications Input Characteristics Frequency 50/60Hz Functional Characteristics Programmable Operating Points LV - Low Voltage Threshold 170V (450V*) - HV Setting HV- High Voltage Threshold LV Setting - 528V (660V*) VUB - Voltage Unbalance Threshold 2-15% or off LF - Low Frequency Threshold 35Hz - HF Setting HF - High Frequency Threshold LF Setting - 75Hz TD1 - Trip Delay for Voltage/Unbalance/ Frequency Faults 1-50 seconds TD2 - Trip Delay for Single-Phase Faults 1-50 seconds RD1 - Rapid-Cycle Timer 0, 2-500 seconds RD2 - Restart Delay After All Faults 2-500 seconds #RF - Type of Restart Manual or Automatic ADDR - RS-485 Address A01-A99 Fixed Reset Points Overvoltage Reset 97% of HV Setting Low Voltage Reset 103% of LV Setting Voltage Unbalance Reset UB Setting -1% Low Frequency Reset LF Setting +0.6Hz High Frequency Reset HF Setting -0.6Hz Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Accuracy Voltage ±1% Timing 5% ±1 second Repeatability Voltage ±0.5% Maximum Input Power 5 W Transient Protection (Internal) 2500 V for 10 ms Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Weight 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount The 601 can be preprogrammed prior to installation by applying at least 120V to the L1 and L2 terminals. *575V Model Littelfuse.com/601 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 236 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/601csdp1 601-CS-D-P1 Description The 601-CS-D-P1 3-phase power monitor is a fully programmable electronic power monitor designed to monitor 3-phase systems. The 601-CS-D-P1 has a single relay that can be configured as a general purpose network output or to trip on ground faults. The 601-CS-D-P1 monitors ground fault current, phase currents, phase voltages, power factor and frequency. The RS485MS-2W communications module allows the 601-CS-D-P1 to communicate using the Modbus RTU protocol. The Modbus connection can be used to monitor power parameters, setup the device or control the fault relay. A DeviceNet™ communications I/O module (CIO-601CS-DN-P1) is available as well. This CIO module only works with the 601-CS-D-P1 unit. It is used for sending the information from the 601-CS-D-P1 over a DeviceNet™ network. It also provides I/O capabilities and the ability to set the parameters of the 601-CS-D-P1. Note: This product must be used with an external Zero-Sequence CT for proper operation (not included). Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Built-in display Visual indication for programming and viewing real-time parameters for nominal voltage, voltage unbalance, current, current unbalance, ground fault warning, ground fault trip, and ground fault motor acceleration 15 Programmable parameters to control the device operation Allows the user to customize the protection required for their system 2 programmable trip delay timers Program separate trip delay time for motor acceleration and ground fault Network communications capability Compatible with Modbus RTU and DeviceNet™ protocols with the use of separate communications module Accessories CIO-601CS-DN-P1 Module Convenient, cost-effective DeviceNet™ interface device capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNet™ network. 3-Phase Power Monitor Wiring Diagram AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 507, Figure 1. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 237 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays 601-CS-D-P1 Specifications Input Characteristics Line Voltage 200-480VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Motor Full Load Amp Range 0.5-175A (direct) 176-800A (CTs required) Input Ground Fault Current 0.5-10A Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC General Purpose 10A @ 240VAC Expected Life Mechanical 1 x 106 operations Electrical 1 x 105 operations at rated load General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Accuracy at 25° C (77° F) Voltage +/-1% Current +/-3% (<175A direct) GF Current +/-3% Repeatability Voltage +/-0.5% of nominal voltage Current +/-1% (<175A direct) Maximum Input Power 10 W Pollution Degree 3 Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Terminal Torque 7in.-lbs. Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Conducted IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3 10V Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3, 10 V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 3.5kV input power Short Circuit Rating 100kA rms, SYM, 600VAC max. Surge Immunity IEC IEC 61000-4-5, Level 3, 2kV line-to-line; Level 4, 4kV line-to-ground ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Surge and Ring Wave Compliance to a level of 6kV line-to-line High Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V +1000V for 1 minute) Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1 Max Conductor Size (with insulation) 0.65” Dimensions H 77.47 mm (3.05”); W 97.79 mm (3.85”); D 128.27 mm (5.05”) Weight 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Mounting Method Surface mount (4 - #8 screws) or DIN rail mount Littelfuse.com/601csdp1 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 238 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/wvm WVM SERIES Description The WVM Series provides protection against premature equipment (motor) failure caused by voltage faults on the 3-phase line. The WVM’s microcontroller design provides reliable protection even if regenerated voltages are present. It combines dependable fault sensing with a 10 fault memory and a 6 LED status display. Part instrument, part control, the WVM protects your equipment when you’re not there and displays what happened when you return. The WVM is fully adjustable and includes time delays to prevent nuisance tripping and improve system operation. Time delays include a 0.25 to 30s adjustable trip delay, an adjustable 0.25 to 64m (in 3 ranges) restart delay, plus a unique 3 to 15s true random start delay. The random start delay prevents voltage sags caused by simultaneous restarting of numerous motor loads after a power outage. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal, over voltage, under voltage, unbalance, and short cycling Fault memory Stores the 10 most recent faults, which provides diagnostics for troubleshooting LED indication Provides visual indictation of existing relay/fault status or faults stored in memory. Switch selectable automatic restart, delayed automatic restart, and manual reset Allows user adjustment to handle unique application requirements Random start delay Prevents voltage sags caused by simultaneous restarting of multiple motor loads after a power outage Operation The output relay is energized when all conditions are acceptable and the WVM is reset. A restart and/or random start delay may occur before the output relay is energized. Field Adjustment: Select the line voltage listed on the motor’s name plate. This automatically sets the over and undervoltage trip points. No further adjustment should be required to achieve maximum equipment protection. Wiring Diagram F = Fuses NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed RS = Optional Remote Reset Switch Relay contacts are isolated. CAUTION: 2 amp max fast acting fuses must be installed externally in series with each input. (3) Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY SWITCH SELECTABLE RESET METHOD RESTART DELAY WVM011AL 500 to 600VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64s WVM611AH 200 to 240VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64m WVM611AL 200 to 240VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64s WVM611RL 200 to 240VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault correction 0.25 - 64s WVM811AH 355 to 425VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64m WVM811RL 355 to 425VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault correction 0.25 - 64s WVM911AH 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64m WVM911AL 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64s WVM911AL-60 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 0.25 - 64s, no random start delay WVM911AN 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault trip 6 - 300s WVM911RH 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault correction 0.25 - 64m WVM911RL 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault correction 0.25 - 64s WVM911RN-60 400 to 480VAC 2 - 10% 0.25 - 30s Auto restart upon fault correction 6 - 300s, no random start delay If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 29. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 239 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays WVM SERIES Read Memory: Fault(s) stored in the memory are indicated when the yellow LED is flashing, up to 10 faults are noted. Memory Reset: To clear the memory of all faults stored, rotate selector to Clear Memory for 5 seconds. The yellow LED will turn off. Memory Overload: Only the 10 most recent faults are retained. Random Start Delay: A new 3 to 15s random start delay is selected by the microcontroller when a fault is corrected and when the operating voltage (L1, L2, L3) is applied to the WVM. A random start delay does not occur when the reset is manual. Automatic Restart: Upon fault correction, the output will re-energize after a random start delay. Automatic Restart Upon Fault Trip: When a fault is sensed for the full trip delay, the output de- energizes and a restart delay is initiated. This delay locks out the output for the delay period. Should the fault be corrected by the end of the restart delay, the output will re-energize after a random start delay. A restart delay will also occur when operating voltage (L1, L2, L3) is applied to the WVM. Manual Reset: After a fault condition is corrected, the WVM can be manually reset. There are two methods; a customer supplied remote switch, or the onboard selector switch. Manual Reset (Onboard): Rotate selector switch from the Manual Reset position to Auto Restart w/Delay then back again to Manual Reset within 3 seconds. The output will immediately energize. Remote Reset: Reset (Restart) is accomplished by a momentary contact closure across terminals 1 & 2. The output will immediately energize. Remote switch requirements are ≥10mA @ 20VDC and the reset terminals are not isolated from line voltage. A resistance of ≤20KΩ across terminals 1 & 2 will cause immediate automatic restart. Automatic Restart Upon Fault Correction: (P/N includes an R) When a fault is sensed for the full trip delay, the output relay de-energizes. Upon correction of the fault, a restart delay begins. At the end of this delay, the output will re-energize after a random start delay. If a fault occurs during restart timing, the restart time delay will be reset to zero, and the output will not energize until the restart delay is completed. Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Operating Voltage Model Adj. Line Voltage Range 240 200-240VAC 380 355-425VAC 480 400-480VAC 600 500-600VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage Trip Point 109-113% of adjusted voltage Reset Voltage -2% of trip point Undervoltage Trip Point 88-92% of adjusted voltage Reset Voltage +2% of trip point Voltage Unbalance Adjustable from 2-10%* Trip Delay Adjustable from 0.25 - 30s ±15% Phase Loss ≥ 15% unbalance Response Time ≤ 200 ms Random Start Delay Range 3 - 15s Reset (Restart) Delay Low Range 0.25-64s ±15% Normal Range 6-300s ±15% High Range 0.25-64m ±15% Fault Memory Type Nonvolatile RAM Capacity Stores last 10 faults Status Indicators 6 LEDs provide existing status & memory readout Note: 50% of operating line voltage must be applied to L1 & L2 for operation of status indicators Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 250VAC; 6A inductive (0.4 PF) @ 250VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE 62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Surface with 2 or 4 #8 (M4 x 0.7) screws Dimensions H 175.3 mm (6.9”); W 111.8 mm (4.4”); D 61.0 mm (2.4”) Termination Screw terminals with captive wire clamps for up to #12 AWG ( 3.2 mm2 ) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 65°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 25 oz ( 709 g) * Unbalance reset is 90% of the unbalance setting (i.e. VUB at 5% reset is 4.5%) Littelfuse.com/wvm AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 240 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/dlmu DLMU SERIES Description The DLMU Series is a universal voltage, 3-phase voltage monitor. It continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases with microcontroller accuracy and compares the value to preset trip points. It separately senses phase reversal and loss; over, under and unbalanced voltages; and over or under frequency. Protection is assured during periods of large average voltage fluctuations or when regenerated voltages are present. The unit trips within 200ms when phase loss is detected. Adjustable time delays are included to prevent nuisance tripping and short cycling of sensitive equipment. The isolated, 10A, SPDT and 2A alarm output relay contacts trip when a phase voltage exceeds the trip limits for the trip delay. Nominal line voltage, voltage unbalance, and time delays are knob adjustable. The phase loss setpoint and the acceptable frequency range are fixed. Both delta and wye systems can be monitored; no connection to neutral is required. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal, over voltage, under voltage, unbalance, short cycling and over/under frequency Universal line voltage range Flexibility to work in 200 to 480VAC or 500 to 600VAC applications DIN rail (35mm) or surface mounting Installation flexibility LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status User adjustable time delays Prevents nuisance tripping and short cycling of sensitive equipment Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE OUTPUT RESTART FUNCTION VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY DLMHBRAAA 500 to 600VAC SPDT & NO Staggered restart Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s Adjustable 0.6 - 300S DLMUBLAAA 200 to 480VAC SPDT & NO Lockout, min off time Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s Adjustable 0.6 - 300S DLMUBNAAN 200 to 480VAC SPDT & NO No restart delay Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s None DLMUBRAAA 200 to 480VAC SPDT & NO Staggered restart Adjustable 2 - 10% Adjustable 1 - 30s Adjustable 0.6 - 300S If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram ! L1, L2, L3 = Line Voltage Input NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact C = Common, Transfer Contact CAUTION: 2 amp max. fast acting fuses are recommended to protect the equipment‘s wiring. They are not required to protect the DLMU. ! = Select alarm contact connection as N.O. or N.C. when ordering; N.O. Shown. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 30. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 241 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays DLMU SERIES Operation Upon application of line voltage, the output is de-energized and the restart delay begins. If all the 3-phase voltages are within the acceptable range, the output energizes at the end of the restart delay. The microcontroller circuitry automatically senses the voltage range, and selects the correct operating frequency (50 or 60Hz). The over and undervoltage trip points are set automatically. When the measured value of any phase voltage exceeds the acceptable range limits (lower or upper) the trip delay begins. At the end of the trip delay the output relay de-energizes. If the phase voltage returns to an acceptable value before the trip delay expires, the trip delay is reset and the output remains energized. Under, over, and unbalanced voltages plus over or under frequency must be sensed for the complete trip delay before the unit trips. The unit trips in 200ms when phase loss or reversal are sensed. The unit will not energize if a fault is sensed as the line voltage is applied. Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of the voltage or frequency fault or phase sequence. Restart Delay Options L = Lockout or minimum OFF time. The restart delay begins when the output trips. The unit cannot be re-energized until the restart delay is complete. This provides a minimum off time or lockout time to allow equipment sensitive to short cycling, time to reset. If the fault is corrected after the restart delay is complete the output energizes immediately. The restart delay also occurs when line voltage is applied/reapplied. R = Restart Delay on fault correction. The restart delay begins when line voltage is reapplied or when a voltage fault is corrected. This option is normally selected when staggered restarting of multiple motors on a power system is required. N = No Restart Delay. 0.6 second initialization delay on application of line voltage applies. Restart Notes: All restart options remain reset when the following conditions are detected: 1. Phase loss (phase unbalance greater than 25%) 2. Average line voltage less than 120VAC 3. Phase reversal The restart delay begins when the condition is corrected. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. If a fault is sensed during the restart delay, the LED will glow red during that portion or the full restart delay. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Operating Voltage 200-480VAC Voltage Line Line Voltage Range Adj.Range Frequency Max. 240 200-240VAC 50/60Hz 380 340-420VAC 50Hz 480 400-480VAC 60Hz 550VAC 600VAC 600 500-600VAC 50/60Hz 600VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz automatically detected Phase Loss ≥ 25% unbalance Response Time ≤200ms Undervoltage & Voltage Unbalance Type Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset Overvoltage TripVoltage 109 - 113% of the adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ -3% of the trip voltage Undervoltage Trip Voltage 88 - 92% of the adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ +3% of the trip voltage Voltage Unbalance Adjustable 2 - 10% or specify fixed unbalance of 2 - 10% in 1% increments Reset on balance ≅ -0.7% unbalance Trip Delay Active On Over/undervoltage, voltage unbalance, over/ under frequency Range Adjustable from 1 - 30s or specify fixed delay 1 - 30s in 1s increments Tolerance ± 15% Restart Delay Range Adjustable from 0.6 - 300s; if no restart delay is selected a 0.6s initialization delay applies Tolerance ± 15% Over/Under Frequency ±4%; Reset ±3%; 50/60 Hz Phase Sequence A, B, C, L1, L2, L3 Response Time -Phase Reversal & Phase Loss ≤200 ms Reset Automatic Output Type Isolated Electromechanical Relay Form C Isolated, SPDT Form C Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 8A resistive @ 277VAC; NO-1/4 hp @ 120VAC; 1/3 hp @ 240VAC Form A Isolated, NO, SPST Form A Rating 2A @ 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 303 Littelfuse.com/dlmu AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 242 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/dlmu Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with 2 #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw or snap on 35mm DIN Rail Note: 0.25 in.(6.35 mm) spacing between units or other devices is required Dimensions H 110 mm (4.33”); W 75 mm (2.95”); D 50 mm (1.97”) Termination Screw terminals with captive wire clamps for up to #14 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) wire Terminal Torque 4.4 in.-lbs. Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 8.6 oz (244 g) DLMU SERIES AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 243 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays HLMU SERIES Description The HLMU Series is a universal voltage, encapsulated, 3-phase voltage monitor. It continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases with microcontroller accuracy and compares the value to preset trip points. It separately senses phase reversal and loss; over, under and unbalanced voltages; and over or under frequency. Protection is assured during periods of large average voltage fluctuations, or when regenerated voltages are present. The unit trips within 200ms when phase loss is detected. Adjustable time delays are included to prevent nuisance tripping and short cycling of sensitive equipment. The isolated, 10A, DPDT relay contacts trip when a phase voltage exceeds the trip limits for the trip delay. Nominal line voltage, voltage unbalance, and time delays are knob adjustable. The phase loss setpoint and the acceptable frequency range are fixed. Both delta and wye systems can be monitored; no connection to neutral is required. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal; over, under, and unbalanced voltage; over and under frequency Universal line voltage range Flexibility to work in 200 to 480VAC applications DIN rail (35mm) or surface mounting Installation flexibility LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Finger-safe terminal blocks Meets IEC 61000 safety requirements Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 VAC/500 VDC C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT RESTART FUNCTION VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY HLMUDLAAA DPDT Lockout, min off time Adjust. 2 - 10% Adjust. 1 - 30s Adjust. 0.6 - 300s HLMUDN0405N DPDT No restart delay Fixed, 4% Fixed, 5s None HLMUDNAAN DPDT No restart delay Adjust. 2 - 10% Adjust. 1 - 30s None HLMUDRAAA DPDT Staggered restart Adjust. 2 - 10% Adjust. 1 - 30s Adjust. 0.6 - 300s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram L1, L2, L3 = Line Voltage Input NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact C = Common, Transfer Contact CAUTION: 2 amp max. fast acting fuses are recommended to protect the equipment‘s wiring. They are not required to protect the HLMU. NOTE: Relay contacts are isolated, 277VAC max. Littelfuse.com/hlmu AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 31. 244 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/hlmu HLMU SERIES Operation Upon application of line voltage, the output is de-energized and the restart delay begins. If all the three-phase voltages are within the acceptable range, the output energizes at the end of the restart delay. The microcontroller circuitry automatically senses the voltage range, and selects the correct operating frequency (50 or 60Hz). The over and under voltage trip points are set at ± 10% of the adjusted line voltage. When the measured value of any phase voltage exceeds the acceptable range limits (lower or upper) the trip delay begins. At the end of the trip delay the output relay de-energizes. If the phase voltage returns to an acceptable value before the trip delay expires, the trip delay is reset and the output remains energized. Under, over, and unbalanced voltages plus over or under frequency must be sensed for the complete trip delay before the unit trips. The unit trips in 200ms when phase loss or reversal are sensed. The unit will not energize if a fault is sensed as the line voltage is applied. Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of the voltage or frequency fault or phase sequence. Restart Delay Options L = Lockout or minimum OFF time. The restart delay begins when the output trips. The unit cannot be re-energized until the restart delay is complete. This provides a minimum off time or lockout time to allow equipment sensitive to short cycling, time to reset. If the fault is corrected after the restart delay is complete, the output energizes immediately. The restart delay also occurs when line voltage is applied/reapplied. R = Restart Delay on fault correction. The restart delay begins when line voltage is reapplied or when a voltage fault is corrected. This option is normally selected when staggered restarting of multiple motors on a power system is required. N = No Restart Delay. 0.6 second initialization delay on application of line voltage applies. Restart Notes: All restart options remain reset when the following conditions are detected: 1. Phase loss (phase unbalance greater than 25%) 2. Average line voltage less than 120VAC 3. Phase reversal The restart delay begins when the condition is corrected. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. If a fault is sensed during the restart delay, the LED will glow red during that portion or the full restart delay. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Operating Voltage 200 - 480VAC Range Voltage Adj. Range Frequency 240 200-240VAC 50 or 60Hz 380 340-420VAC 50Hz 480 400-480VAC 60Hz Line Voltage Max. 550VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz automatically detected Phase Loss ≥ 25% unbalance Response Time ≤200ms Undervoltage & Voltage Unbalance Type Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset Overvoltage Trip Voltage 109 - 113% of the adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ -3% of the trip voltage Undervoltage Trip Voltage 88 - 92% of the adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ +3% of the trip voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Setpoint Adjustable 2 - 10% or specify fixed unbalance of 2 - 10% in 1% increments Reset on Balance ≅ -0.7% unbalance Trip Delay Active On Over/undervoltage, voltage unbalance, over/under frequency Range Adjustable from 1 - 30s or specify fixed delay 1 - 30s in 1s increments Tolerance ± 15% Restart Delay Range Adjustable from 0.6 - 300s; if no restart delay is selected a 0.6s initialization delay applies Tolerance ± 15% Over/Under Frequency ±4%; Reset ±3%; 50/60 Hz Phase Sequence A, B, C, L1, L2, L3 Response Time-Phase Reversal & Phase Loss ≤200 ms Reset Automatic Output Type Isolated Electromechanical Relay Form DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 8A resistive @ 277VAC; NO-1/4 hp @ 120VAC; 1/3 hp @ 240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 Electrical (at 10A) - DPDT - 1 x 303 Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Circuitry Encapsulated Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.7) screw Note: 0.25 in.(6.35 mm) spacing between units or other devices is required Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 41.7 mm (1.64”) Termination Screw terminal connection up to 12 AWG (3.3 mm2 ) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 245 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLMU11 Voltage Monitor Description The PLMU11 continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases to provide protection for 3-phase motors and sensitive loads. Its microcontroller senses under and overvoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, and phase reversal. Protection is provided even when regenerated voltages are present. Universal voltage operation and standard base connection allows the PLMU11 to replace hundreds of competitive part numbers. Operation Upon application of power, a 0.6s random start delay begins and the PLMU11 measures the voltage levels and line frequency and selects the voltage range. The output relay is energized and the LED glows green when all voltages are acceptable and the phase sequence is correct. LED flashes green during trip delay, glows red when output de-energizes. Undervoltage, overvoltage, and voltage unbalance must be sensed for continuous trip delay before the relay de-energizes. Re-energization is automatic upon fault correction. The output relay will not energize if a fault condition is sensed as 3-phase input voltage is applied. The LED alternately flashes red/green when phase reversal is sensed. Line voltage is selected with the knob, setting the over and under voltage trip points. Voltage range is automatically selected by the microcontroller. LED Indicator Steady Green Energized Steady Red De-engergized (tripped on fault) Flashing Green Trip Delay Alternate Flashing Red/Green Phase Reversal Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Quick octal 8-pin mounting Small footprint with universal mounting: ideal replacement for hundreds of competitive part numbers. Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal. LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for cause of trip. LED indications include: normal operation, trip delay, phase reversal, fault Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC voltages Simple 3-wire connection for delta or wye systems Allows flexibility across wide range of systems ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Complies with safety codes for elevators, escalators, moving walkways NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Complies with safety codes for motors and generators IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Complies with safety codes for surge and voltage protection Wiring Diagram F = Fuses ØA = Phase A = L1 ØB = Phase B = L2 ØC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). Relay contacts are isolated 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/plmu11 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 32. 246 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/plmu11 PLMU11 Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Line Voltage 200 to 480VAC ±15%, 50/60 Hz ±2 Hz Adjustable Voltage Ranges (Automatic Range Selection) 200 to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz 340 to 420VAC, 50 Hz 400 to 480VAC, 60 Hz Maximum Voltage 552VAC Phase Sequence ABC Power Consumption ≤ 5W Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Type Voltage detection with delayed trip and automatic reset Overvoltage & Undervoltage Undervoltage Trip Point 88 - 92% of adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage +2% of trip voltage Overvoltage Trip Point 109 - 113% of adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage -2% of trip voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Point Adjustable from 2 - 10% Reset on Balance (%) Selected Unbalance 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Reset 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.3 7.2 8.1 9 Trip Delay Range Adjustable from 0.25 - 30s Severe Unbalance - 2X Selected Unbalance 0.25 - 2s; disabled when the trip delay is less than 2s Random Start Delay ≅ 0.6s Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Trip Time ≤ 150ms Phase Loss Setpoint ≥ 15% unbalance Reset Type Automatic Output Type Energized when voltages are acceptable Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/3 hp @ 250VAC; max. 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting* Plug-in socket rated 600VAC Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Dimensions H 77.0 mm (3.03”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 8.6 oz (244 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 247 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLM SERIES Voltage Monitor Description The PLM Series is a 3-phase voltage monitor that continuously monitors each of the three phases. Monitors both delta and wye systems and no connection to neutral is required. The microcontroller circuit design protects against undervoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss and phase reversal. Protection is assured when regenerated voltages are present. Operation The output relay is energized and the LED glows green when all voltages are acceptable and the phase sequence is correct. Under and unbalanced voltages must be sensed for a continuous trip delay period before the relay de-energizes. Reset is automatic upon correction of the fault condition. The output relay will not energize if a fault condition is sensed as power is applied. The LED flashes red during the trip delay, then glows red when the output de-energizes. The LED flashes green/red if phase reversal is sensed. Field Adjustment Set voltage adjustment knob at the desired operating line voltage for the equipment. This adjustment automatically sets the undervoltage trip point. Apply power. If the PLM fails to energize, (LED glows red) check wiring of all three phases, voltage, and phase sequence. If phase sequence is incorrect, the LED flashes green/red. To correct this, swap any two line voltage connections at the mounting socket. No further adjustment should be required. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Quick octal 8-pin mounting Small footprint with universal mounting: ideal replacement for hundreds of competitive part numbers. Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring of single-phase, low voltage, high voltage, voltage unbalance, phase reversal. LED diagnostics Quick visual indicator for trip versus normal operation. Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC voltages Adjustable nominal voltage set point Allows setting for specific application voltage to optimize protection Simple 3-wire connection for delta or wye systems Allows flexibility across wide range of systems ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Complies with safety codes for elevators, escalators, moving walkways NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Complies with safety codes for motors and generators IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Complies with safety codes for surge and voltage protection Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE (FIXED) TRIP DELAY (FIXED) PLM6405 240VAC 4% 5 sec PLM6502 240VAC 5% 2 sec PLM6805 240VAC 8% 5 sec PLM8405 380VAC 4% 5 sec PLM9405 480VAC 4% 5 sec PLM9502 480VAC 5% 2 sec PLM9805 480VAC 8% 5 sec If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram F = Fuses ØA = Phase A = L1 ØB = Phase B = L2 ØC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). Relay contacts are isolated 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/plm AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. 248 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/plm PLM SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- pin or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Operating Voltage Model Adj. Line Voltage Range Line Voltage Max 240 200-240VAC 270VAC 380 360-430VAC 480VAC 480 400-480VAC 530VAC AC Line Frequency 50/100 Hz Phase Sequence ABC Power Consumption ≅ 2W for 240V units ≅ 3W for 380 - 480V units Low Voltage & Voltage Unbalance Type Voltage detection with delayed trip & automatic reset Low Voltage Trip 88 - 92% of adjusted line voltage Reset Voltage Plus 3% of trip voltage Voltage Unbalance Trip Factory fixed from 4 - 8% Reset on Balance -0.7% unbalance typical Trip Delay Range Factory fixed from 2 - 20s Tolerance ±15% Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Response Time ≤ 200ms Phase Loss > 35% unbalance Reset Automatic Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 240VAC, 277VAC max; 1/2 Hp @ 240VAC; 1/4 Hp @ 120VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting* 8-pin plug-in socket rated 600VAC Dimensions H 81.3 mm (3.2”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 4.4 oz (125 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 249 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays TVW SERIES Description The TVW Series Provides protection for motors and other sensitive loads. Continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases using a microcontroller circuit design that senses under and overvoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, and phase reversal. Protection is provided even when regenerated voltages are present. Includes a trip delay to prevent nuisance tripping and a restart delay to prevent short cycling after a momentary power outage. Operation Upon application of line voltage, the restart delay begins. The output is de-energized during restart delay. Under normal conditions, the output energizes after the restart delay. Undervoltage, overvoltage, and voltage unbalance must be sensed for the complete trip delay period before the output de-energizes. The restart delay begins as soon as the output de-energizes. If the restart delay is completed when a fault is corrected, the output energizes immediately. The output will not energize if a fault is sensed as the input voltage is applied. If the voltage selector is set between two voltage marks (i.e. between 220 and 230V), the LED will flash red rapidly. The TVW provides fault protection at the lower of the two line voltages (i.e. 220V). Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of a fault. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. If the voltage selector knob is between settings, it rapidly flashes red. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal; over, under, and unbalanced voltage; short cycling Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where cost, size and ease of installation are important LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY TVW5103S5S 208 to 240VAC Selectable Fixed, 10% Fixed, 3s Fixed, 5s TVW575S1M 208 to 240VAC Selectable Fixed, 7% Fixed, 5s Fixed, 1m TVW6510S0.4S 208, 220, 230, 240VAC Fixed, 5% Fixed, 10s Fixed, 0.4s TVW8510S0.4S 380, 400 & 415VAC Fixed, 5% Fixed, 10s Fixed, 0.4s TVW9510S0.4S 430, 440, 460, 480VAC Fixed, 5% Fixed, 10s Fixed, 0.4s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram L1 = Phase A L2 = Phase B L3 = Phase C NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common, Transfer Contact Relay contacts are isolated. F = 2A Fast acting fuses are recommended, but not required Littelfuse.com/tvw AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 44. 250 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/tvw TVW SERIES Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VRM6048 Voltage Reduction Module Allows the voltage monitor to monitor a 3-phase 550 to 600VAC Line. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Input Voltage/Tolerance 208 to 480VAC in 4 ranges/-30% - 20% AC Line Frequency 50 - 100 Hz Phase Sequence ABC Power Consumption Approx. 2W for 240V units Approx. 3W for 480V units Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage & Undervoltage Voltage detection with delay trip & automatic reset Undervoltage Trip Point 88 - 92% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ +3% of trip voltage Overvoltage Trip Point 109 - 113% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ -3% of trip voltage Trip Variation vs Temperature ≤ ±2% Voltage Unbalance Factory fixed, from 4 - 10% Reset On Balance ≅ -0.7% unbalance Trip Delay Range Fixed from 0.2 - 100s ±15% or ±0.1s, whichever is greater Restart Delay Range Fixed from 0.4s - 999m ±15% or ±0.2s, whichever is greater Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Response ≤ 200ms; automatic reset Phase Loss ≥ 25% unbalance Output Type Isolated, SPDT Rating 208 to 240VAC (55°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC, 5A @ 250VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 380 to 480VAC 10A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC, 1/3 hp @ 250VAC, max. voltage 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Dielectric Breakdown 208 to 240VAC ≥ 1500V RMS input to output terminals 380 to 480VAC ≥ 2500V RMS input to output terminals Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 31.75 mm (1.25”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 55°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.8 oz (79 g) AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 251 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays TVM SERIES Description The TVM Series Provides protection for motors and other sensitive loads. Continuously measures the voltage of each of the three phases using a microcomputer circuit design that senses under and overvoltage, voltage unbalance, phase loss, and phase reversal. Protection is provided even when regenerated voltages are present. Includes a trip delay to prevent nuisance tripping and a restart delay to prevent short cycling after a momentary power outage. Operation Upon application of line voltage, the restart delay begins. The output relay is de-energized during restart delay. Under normal conditions, the output energizes after restart delay. Undervoltage, overvoltage, and voltage unbalance must be sensed for continuous trip delay period before the output is de-energized. The output will not de-energize if a fault is corrected during the trip delay. The restart delay begins as soon as the output relay de-energizes. If the restart delay is completed when the fault is corrected, the output relay will energize immediately. The output relay will not energize if a fault or phase reversal is sensed as 3-phase input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset is automatic upon correction of a fault. LED Operation The LED flashes green during the restart delay, then glows green when the output energizes. It flashes red during the trip delay then glows red when the output de-energizes. It flashes red/green if phase reversal is sensed. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Proprietary microcontroller based circuitry Constant monitoring to protect against phase loss, phase reversal; over, under, and unbalanced voltage; short cycling Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where cost, size and ease of installation are important LED indication Provides diagnostics of relay, fault and time delay status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE UNBALANCE TRIP DELAY RESTART DELAY TVM208A100.5S3S 208VAC 10% 0.5s 3s TVM230A101S1S 230VAC 10% 1s 1s TVM460A41S5M 460VAC 4% 1s 5m TVM460A75S2M 460VAC 7% 5s 2m TVM480A45S5S 480VAC 4% 5s 5s TVM480A100.5S3S 480VAC 10% 0.5s 3s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram L1 = Phase A L2 = Phase B L3 = Phase C NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common, Transfer Contact Relay contacts are isolated. F = 2A Fast acting fuses are recommended, but not required Littelfuse.com/tvm AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 44. 252 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/tvm TVM SERIES Accessories LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VRM6048 Voltage Reduction Module Allows the voltage monitor to monitor a 3-phase 550 to 600VAC Line. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Input Voltage 208 to 480VAC AC Line Frequency 50 - 100 Hz Phase Sequence ABC Power Consumption Approx. 2W for 240V units Approx. 3W for 480V units Overvoltage, Undervoltage, & Voltage Unbalance Overvoltage & Undervoltage Voltage detection with delay trip & automatic reset Undervoltage Trip Point 88 - 92% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ +3% of trip voltage Overvoltage Trip Point 109 - 113% of the selected line voltage Reset Voltage ≅ -3% of trip voltage Trip Variation vs Temperature ≤ ±2% Voltage Unbalance Factory fixed from 4 - 10% Reset On Balance ≅ -0.7% unbalance Trip Delay Range Fixed from 0.2 - 100s ±15% or ±0.1s, whichever is greater Restart Delay Range Fixed from 0.5s - 999m ±15% or ±0.2s, whichever is greater Phase Reversal & Phase Loss Response ≤ 200ms; automatic reset Phase Loss ≥ 25% unbalance Output Type Isolated SPDT relay contacts Rating 208 to 240VAC (55°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC, 5A @ 250VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 380 to 480VAC 10A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125VAC, 1/3 hp @ 250VAC, max. voltage 277VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Dielectric Breakdown 208 to 240VAC ≥ 1500V RMS input to output terminals 380 to 480VAC ≥ 2500V RMS input to output terminals Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 31.75 mm (1.25”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 55°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.8 oz (79 g) AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 253 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLR SERIES Description The PLR Series provides a cost effective means of preventing 3-phase motor startup during adverse voltage conditions. Proper A-B-C sequence must occur in order for the PLR’s output contacts to energize. In addition, the relay will not energize when an undervoltage or phase loss condition is present. The PLR Series protects a motor against undervoltage operation. The adjustment knob sets the undervoltage trip point. Operation The output relay is energized and the LED glows when all voltages are acceptable and the phase sequence is correct. Undervoltage must be sensed for a continuous dropout delay period before the relay de-energizes. Reset is automatic upon correction of the fault condition. The output relay will not energize if a fault condition is sensed as power is applied. Field Adjustment: Turn the adjustment knob fully counterclockwise and apply three-phase power. The LED should be ON. Increase adjustment until the LED goes OFF. Decrease adjustment until LED glows again. If nuisance tripping occurs, decrease the adjustment slightly. NOTE: When properly adjusted and operating in an average system, a voltage unbalance of 10% or more is required for phase loss detection. When a phase is lost while the motor is running, a voltage will be induced into the open phase nearly equal in magnitude to the normal phase-tophase voltage. This condition is known as regeneration. When regenerated voltages are present, the voltage unbalance during single phasing may not exceed 10% for some motors. The PLR Series may not provide protection under this condition. For systems that require superior phase loss protection, select the PLMU Series. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous monitoring Prevents 3-phase motor startup when undervoltage or phase loss condition is present Industry standard 8-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED indication Quick visual indication of output status and correct phase sequence Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE PLR120A 95 to 140VAC PLR240A 190 to 270VAC PLR380A 340 to 450VAC PLR480A 380 to 500VAC If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram F = Fuses ØA = Phase A = L1 ØB = Phase B = L2 ØC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed Relay contacts are isolated 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/plr AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. 254 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/plr PLR SERIES Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. OT08PC Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 600VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Nominal Voltage Undervoltage Dropout Adj. Range Line Voltage Max. 120VAC 85 to 130VAC 143VAC 240VAC 170 to 240VAC 270VAC 380VAC 310 to 410VAC 480VAC 480VAC 350 to 480VAC 530VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Phase Sequence ABC Response Times Pull-in ≤ 400ms Drop-out ≤ 100ms Hysterisis Pull-in/Drop-out ≅ 2% Output Type Electromechanical relay, energized when all voltages are acceptable Form SPDT Rating 5A resistive @ 240VAC, 1/4 Hp @ 120VAC Maximum Voltage 250VAC Protection Phase Reversal/Failure ASME A17.1 Rule 210.6 Motors and Generators NEMA MG1 14:30, 14:35 Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level B Isolation Voltage 120 & 240VAC ≥ 1500V RMS input to output 380 & 480VAC ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Dimensions H 81.3 mm (3.2”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Mounting* Plug-in socket Termination Octal 8-pin, plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature 0° to 55°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 6 oz (170 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 255 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays PLS SERIES Description The PLS Series is a low cost phase sensitive control that provides an isolated contact closure when the proper A-B-C phase sequence is applied. Protects sensitive 3-phase equipment and equipment operators from reverse rotation. Designed to be compatible with motor overloads or other 3-phase equipment protection devices. Protection for equipment control centers where frequent reconnection or electrical code makes reverse rotation protection essential. Examples include: mobile refrigerated containers, construction equipment, hoists, pumps, conveyors, elevators and escalators. Operation The internal relay and LED are energized when the phase sequence is correct. The output relay will not energize if the phases are reversed. Reset is automatic upon correction of the fault. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous monitoring Cost effective protection of 3-phase equipment and operators from reverse rotation. Meets reverse rotation protection code requirements. Universal motor compatibility Designed to be compatible with motor overloads or other 3-phase equipment protection devices Industry standard 8-pin octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Factory calibrated Easy to install. No field adjustment needed LED indicator Provides visual indication of relay status Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 6 00VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. LPSM003ZXID (Indicating), LPSM003Z (Non-indicating) Fuse Holders Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 VAC/DC 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 Vac/500 Vdc C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE PLS120A 120VAC PLS240A 208/240VAC PLS480A 440/480VAC If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram F = Fuses ØA = Phase A = L1 ØB = Phase B = L2 ØC = Phase C = L3 NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed Relay contacts are isolated 2A fast acting fuses recommended for safety (not required). 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/pls AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 33. 256 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/pls PLS SERIES Specifications Line Voltage Type 3-phase delta or wye with no connection to neutral Nominal Minimum Maximum Voltage Voltage Voltage 120VAC 95VAC 135VAC 208/240VAC 175VAC 255VAC 380/415VAC 310VAC 430VAC 440/480VAC 380VAC 500VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Phase Sequence ABC Response Times Pull-in ≤ 300ms Drop-out ≤ 50ms Output Type Electromechanical relay, energized when the phase sequence is correct Form Isolated SPDT Rating 120 & 240VAC 10A resistive @ 240VAC 380 & 480VAC 8A resistive @ 240VAC Maximum Voltage 250VAC Protection Isolation Voltage 120 & 240VAC ≥ 1500V RMS input to output 380 & 480VAC ≥ 2500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting* Plug-in socket Dimensions H 81.3 mm (3.2”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40°to 55°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 6 oz (170 g) *CAUTION: Select an octal socket rated for 600VAC operation. AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 257 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays HLVA6I23 Single-Phase Monitor Description The HLVA6I23 is a single-phase undervoltage monitor designed to protect sensitive equipment from brownout or undervoltage conditions. Time delays are included to prevent nuisance tripping and short cycling. The 30A, 1hp rated, SPDT relay contacts allow direct control of motors, solenoids and valves. The output relay can be ordered with isolated SPDT contact to allow monitoring of one voltage and switching a separate voltage. Two undervoltage trip point ranges allow monitoring of 110 to 120VAC or 208 to 240VAC systems. Operation Upon application of input voltage the output relay remains de-energized. When the input voltage value is above the pull-in voltage, the restart delay begins. At the end of the restart delay, the output relay energizes. When the input voltage falls below the trip point, the trip delay begins. If the input voltage remains below the pull-in voltage for the entire trip delay the relay deenergizes. If the input voltage returns to a value above the pull-in voltage, during the trip delay, the trip delay is reset and the relay remains energized. If the input voltage falls below the trip point voltage during the restart delay, the delay is reset and the relay remains de-energized. Reset is automatic upon correction of an undervoltage fault. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output relay and the time delays. Features J 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts J 100 to 240VAC input voltage J 70 to 220VAC adjustable undervoltage trip point in 2 ranges J Restart delays from 3 - 300s J Trip delay 1 - 20s fixed J Isolated or non-isolated relay contacts Wiring Diagram V = Voltage NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common T1 = Undervoltage Trip Point T2 = Restart Delay L1 N/L2 Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Littelfuse.com/hlva6i23 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. 258 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/hlva6i23 HLVA6I23 Specifications Input Min & Max RMS Voltage 70 to 264VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA Undervoltage Sensing Type Peak voltage sensing Ranges (4) 70 to 120VAC (6) 170 to 220VAC Pull-In Voltage 105% or trip point voltage Trip Point Accuracy ± 3% of trip point Time Delay Restart Delays 3 - 300s adjustable Trip Delay 1 - 20s fixed in 1s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x104 , **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output; isolated units Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 51.3 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) tr = Restart Delay td = Trip Delay PI = Pull-in 105% or trip point TP = Trip Point V = Monitored Voltage IV = Input voltage C-NO = Normally Open Contacts C-NC = Normally Closed Contacts PI TP V C-NO C-NC IV Function Diagram AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 259 Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays Littelfuse.com/kvm KVM SERIES Description The KVM Series is a single-phase undervoltage monitor designed to protect sensitive equipment against brownout undervoltage conditions. The compact design and encapsulated construction make the KVM Series an excellent choice for OEM equipment. Operation The output relay is energized and the LED glows green when the input voltage is above the reset voltage threshold. If the input voltage drops below the undervoltage setpoint, the output relay and LED will de-energize. The output relay will remain de-energized as long as the input voltage is below the reset voltage. Reset is automatic when the input voltage returns to a normal range. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Continuous monitoring Low cost single-phase undervoltage (brownout) protection Compact design measures 2 in. (50.8mm) square Perfect for OEM applications where, cost, size and ease of installation are important LED indication Quick visual indication of output status Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = LED S = Undervoltage Setpoint NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common, Transfer Contact Ordering Information MODEL MAXIMUM LINE VOLTAGE UNDERVOLTAGE SETPOINT KVM4 132VAC Adjustable, 78 to 99VAC KVM6 264VAC Adjustable, 156 to 199VAC If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 260 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Voltage Monitoring Relays KVM SERIES Specifications Line Voltage Type Single phase Input Voltage 110 to 120VAC or 220 to 240VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption 2.5W @ 132VAC; 4.5W @ 264VAC Power Off Reset Time ≤ 150ms Undervoltage Detection Undervoltage Setpoint KVM4 78 to 99VAC KVM6 156 to 199VAC Undervoltage Reset Point KVM4 Fixed at 104VAC KVM6 Fixed at 209VAC Repeatability ± 0.5% under fixed conditions ±1% over temperature range Voltage Sensing Accuracy ±2% at 25°C Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT Rating 8A resistive @ 120VAC, 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1x105 LED Indicator Glows green when output is energized Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ minimum Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating /Storage Temperature -25 to 55°C / -40 to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram TP = Undervoltage Setpoint R = Reset Point Littelfuse.com/kvm AC SYSTEM MONITORS/LOAD SENSORS 9 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 261 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Protection Relays REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING Improve safety for service and operations personnel by allowing control and monitoring of the relay without opening the electrical cabinet. RM1000 Series Remote Monitor ................................................. 262 RM2000 Series Remote Monitor ................................................. 264 Informer Remote Diagnostics Tool.................................... 266 Informer-MS Remote Diagnostics Tool.................................... 268 262 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 Littelfuse.com/rm1000 RM1000 SERIES Description The RM1000 Series is a motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products and the 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring. The RM1000 Series can monitor up to 16 MotorSaver® and/or PumpSaver® units through an RS-485 network using Modbus RTU protocol. A second communication port allows monitoring and control of up to 99 MotorSaver® and/or PumpSaver® units from a computer, PLC, DCS or SCADA system and can be accessed from the host computer or PLC with the RM1000 acting as a repeater for any of its motor protectors. In addition to the monitoring functions, the RM1000 can be used to reset a tripped MotorSaver® or PumpSaver®. The RM1000 Series is easily mounted remotely and improves safety for service and operations personnel by allowing them to control and monitor the device without opening the electrical cabinet. Using the RM1000 is a simple, cost-effective method for aiding compliance with arc flash safety regulations. The enclosure and keypad assembly is water and ultraviolet light resistant. The enclosure is NEMA 3R or NEMA 4X (optional) rated. The RM1000 and RM1000 NEMA 4 also carry a UL Type 12 rating, whereas the RM1000-3R does not carry the UL Type 12 rating due to added weep holes. The added weep holes in the RM1000-3R make it suitable for applications subjected to condensing moisture/humidity. Remote Monitor Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION RM1000 NEMA 3R and/or UL Type 12 RM1000-3R NEMA 3R RM1000 NEMA 4 NEMA 4X For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 508, Figure 4. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 263 Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 RM1000 SERIES Features Displays: J Individual line currents and average current J Current and voltage unbalance J Individual phase voltages and average voltage J Displays last four faults, trip reason, and restart timer status J MotorSaver® and/or PumpSaver® setpoints J Run-hours on each motor J Warning of pending (imminent) faults Controls: J Reset run-hour meter J Reset MotorSaver® or PumpSaver® J Change setpoints from the RM1000 Convenience: J Power from RS485MS-2W communications module J Monitor up to 16 777s with one display J NEMA 3R outdoor rated J Secondary steel enclosure available Accessories RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RM1000 ENCL Steel enclosure for protecting the RM1000 remote communications monitor from adverse affects of weather and vandalism, while allowing normal communications connections to the RM1000 unit. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. Specifications Input Characteristics Control Power 12-24VDC (Supplied by RS485MS-2W) Functional Characteristics Communication Port #1 for 777(s) Port #2 for PC, PLC, etc. Baud Rate 1200-28800 1200-28800 Setup None, Odd, or None, Odd, or Even Parity Even Parity 1 or 2 Stop Bits 1 or 2 Stop Bits Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Serial Interface RS-485 RS-485 Available Addresses 1-99 addresses Responds to all port #1 (max 16 per RM1000) Mechanical Life 100,000 actuations Overlay Material Polyester UV Exposure w/o degradation 2000 hrs Terminal Torque (depluggable terminal block) 3 in.-lbs. Panel Thickness 0.03” min, 0.12” max General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Maximum Input Power 100mA Class of Protection RM1000, RM1000 NEMA 4 NEMA 3R and/or UL Type12, NEMA 4X (optional) RM1000-3R NEMA 3R only Relative Humidity Up to 85%, non-condensing Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA 22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Material Black polycarbonate Display Liquid Crystal with extended temp. range Size 2 rows x 16 characters Keypad Six 0.5” stainless steel dome buttons for tactile feedback Dimensions H 91.92 mm (3.62”); W 115.42 mm (4.54”); D 22.86 mm (0.9”) Weight 1.5 lbs. (24 oz., 680.39 g) Mounting Method Surface mountable on backplane using 4 screws Littelfuse.com/rm1000 264 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 Littelfuse.com/rm2000 RM2000 SERIES Description The RM2000 Series is a motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products and the Model 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, userfriendly, motor monitoring. The RM2000 has membrane keypad controls which allow both monitoring and control of a 777 MotorSaver® through an RS-485 network using Modbus RTU protocol. A second communication port allows monitoring and control of up to 99 RM2000 devices from a PLC, DCS, or SCADA system or a PC with Solutions software installed. The RM2000 will act as a repeater for its motor protector when accessed from the host computer or PLC. In addition to the monitoring functions, the RM2000 can be used to reset a tripped MotorSaver® or PumpSaver®. The RM2000 is easily mounted remotely and improves safety for service and operations personnel by allowing them to control and monitor the device without opening the electrical cabinet. Using the RM2000 is a simple, cost-effective method for aiding compliance with arc flash safety regulations. The enclosure and keypad assembly is water and ultraviolet light resistant. Remote Monitor Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL DESCRIPTION RM2000 Remote display monitor for 777 family relays RM2000-CBM+ Coal Bed Methane Special. Optimizes gas production from coal bed methane wells while protecting submersible pump RM2000-RTDW Includes additional input for ground-fault module For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 508, Figure 5. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 265 Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 RM2000 SERIES Features Displays: J Average current, individual line currents and current unbalance J Current to ground J Average voltage, line-line voltages and voltage unbalance J Instantaneous power J Power factor J Last four faults J All parameters programmed into 777 MotorSaver® J Remaining restart delay times Controls: J Start and stop buttons J Key lock input to prevent setpoint changes J Change 777 setpoints from keypad The RM2000 is also equipped with a real-time clock, which allows access to the following motor management information (most readings can be reset): J Total motor run-time J Time and date of last four faults, along with voltage and current at time of trip J Time and date of last 10 motor starts J Total number of motor restarts J Minimum time between any two starts with time and date J Run-time since last start J kWh consumed J kVARs consumed Accessories RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. Solutions Software: Solutions-M Software features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. Specifications Input Characteristics Control Voltage 115VAC ±10%; 50/60Hz Transient Protection (Internal) 2500V for 10ms Functional Characteristics Communication Port #1 for 777 Port #2 for PC, PLC, etc. Baud Rate 1200-28800 1200-28800 Setup Even Parity None, Odd, or Even Parity 1 Stop Bit 1 or 2 Stop Bits Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Serial Interface RS-485 RS-485 Available Addresses 01 A01-A99 Real-time Clock Battery Back-up Life 10 years @ 25°C without external power Last fault memory Stores up to 4 faults with time and date stamp, includes voltages and currents at time of trip Configuration Two independent electro-mechanical Form C (SPDT) Contact Material Silver/Tin Oxide Output Characteristics (RM2000-RTDW version only) Pilot Duty Rating 240VA @ 120VAC General Purpose Rating 5A @ 120VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -30° to 70°C (-22° to 158°F) Maximum Input Power 3 W Class of Protection NEMA 3R and/or UL Type 12 Relative Humidity Up to 85%, non-condensing Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Material Black polycarbonate Display Liquid crystal with extended temp. range Size 2 rows x 20 characters Lighting LED Backlight Keypad Eight 0.5” stainless steel dome buttons for tactile feedback Mechanical Life 100,000 actuations Overlay Material Polyester UV Exposure w/o degradation 2000 hrs. Terminal Torque (depluggable terminal block) 3 in.-lbs. Dimensions H 162.56 mm (6.4”); W 154.94 mm (6.1”); D 27.94mm (1.1”) Weight 1.2 lbs. (19.2 oz., 544.31 g) Mounting Method Surface mountable on backplane using 4 screws Littelfuse.com/rm2000 266 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 Littelfuse.com/informer INFORMER Description The Informer is a hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with single-phase models equipped with infrared LED transmitters (111-Insider-P; 231-Insider-P; 232-Insider; 111P; 233P; 233P-1.5; 234-P and 235P). The Informer uses an infrared receiver to access information sent from the relay which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Each Littelfuse single-phase model listed above is equipped with an infrared LED that transmits valuable information from the device. To retrieve this information, the Informer’s receiver must be directed toward the unit’s LED transmitter and be within 8 feet of the unit. The green COMM STATUS light indicates when the Informer is receiving data from the unit. If communication is lost, the Informer will display the last values it received. The Informer will automatically shut off after 2 minutes of non-use. An infrared adapter (IR Kit-12) is included with all new and updated Informers. This adapter allows communication with the unit without opening the panel door (for select models). Features & Benefits The Informer displays: J Model number J Real-time voltage, current, and power J Drywell and overload trip points J Calibration voltage J Restart delay setpoint and restart delay time remaining J CT size (if applicable) J Number of pump starts J Total run-time J Fault history for last 20, most recent, faults J Voltage, current, power, and run-time for each fault at time of the fault J Highest and lowest voltage and current since last calibration Accessories Informer IR Kit-12 12” infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Included with the Informer Remote Diagnostic Tool for use with Single-Phase Pump Relays For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 9. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 267 Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 INFORMER Specifications Functional Characteristics Power Input 9 Volts DC (requires one 9-volt alkaline battery) Auto Shut-off 2 minutes Communication Signal Infrared Range 1-8 ft. (approx. 0.25 ft. when using IR Kit) Data Update 4 seconds General Characteristics Temperature Range 0 to 60°C (32° to 140°F) Accuracy Voltage ±2% Current ±2% Power ±4% Maximum Input 0.25 W Resolution Voltage 1.0VAC Display Liquid crystal Size 2 rows x 16 characters Keypad Three 0.5” diameter buttons Mechanical Life 100,000 actuations min. Overlay Material Polyester Enclosure Dimensions H 139.70 mm (5.50”); W 91.44 mm (3.60”); D 28.70 mm (1.13”) Weight 0.375 lb. (6 oz., 170.10 g) (w/out battery); 0.70 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) (total package) Material Black ABS 94HB Littelfuse.com/informer 268 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Remote Indication and Monitoring REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING 10 Littelfuse.com/informerms INFORMER-MS Remote Diagnostic Tool for use with the 455 3-Phase, Dual-Range Voltage Monitor Description The Informer-MS is a hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with the Littelfuse 455.* The Informer-MS uses an infrared receiver to read valuable information transmitted from the 455*, which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. A green communication status light indicates the Informer-MS is receiving data from the 455. If communication is lost, the Informer-MS will display the last values it received. *Model 455s manufactured after 03/01/06 are equipped with the infrared LED transmitter. Models manufactured prior to this date are not compatible with the Informer-MS. An infrared adapter (IR Kit-36) can be purchased to allow communication with the Model 455 without opening the panel door. Features The Informer-MS displays: J Real-time, line and load side voltage J Real-time, line and load side voltage unbalance J Motor run hours J Last 20 faults J Last 32 motor starts J High and low voltage trip points J Voltage unbalance trip point J Restart and trip delay settings J Voltage at last fault J Communication status LED J Auto shut off J Last fault with trip conditions Accessories Informer IR Kit-36 36” infrared adapter cable attaches to the face of the model 455 to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. Specifications Functional Characteristics Power Input 9 Volts DC (requires one 9-volt alkaline battery) Consumption 0.25 Watt (max.) Auto Shut-off 2 minutes Communication Signal Infrared Range 1-8 ft. (approx. 0.25 ft. when using IR Kit) Data Update 4 seconds General Characteristics Temperature Range 0 to 60°C (32° to 140°F) Accuracy Voltage ±2% Maximum Input 0.25 W Resolution Voltage 1.0VAC Voltage Unbalance 1% Time 1 minute increments Trip Delay 2 second increments Restart Delay 2 second increments Display (liquid crystal) Size 2 rows x 16 characters Keypad (three 0.5” dia. buttons) Mechanical Life 100,000 actuations min. Overlay Material Polyester Enclosure Dimensions H 139.70 mm (5.50”); W 91.44 mm (3.60”); D 28.70 mm (1.13”) Weight 0.375 lb. (6 oz., 170.10 g) (w/out battery); 0.70 lb. (11.2 oz., 317.51 g) (total package) Material Black ABS 94HB For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 510, Figure 9. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 269 Protection Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols COMMUNICATION MODULES RS485MS-2W Communication Module................................. 270 CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Communication Module................................. 271 CIO-DN-P/ CIO-120-DN-P Devicenet™ Interface .................................... 273 CIO-777-PR Profibus Interface........................................... 275 CIO-EN Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU Interface...... 276 COM 4-20 Output Module for use with Model 777-AccuPower .................................. 277 COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 270 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/rs485ms2w RS485MS-2W Description The RS485MS-2W is required to enable the Modbus communications function on Model 77x-type products. This module is required when the RM1000, RM2000 or other Modbus capable device is used with 77x-type products. Features J Optical isolation from line potentials J Powered by the 77x product J RS-485 compliant bus drive capability J Remote reset input connection J Power connection for the Model RM1000 Accessories RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. Provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and DC power supply connections. Pre-wired. Communication Module Wiring Diagram Up to a Max Distance of 4000 ft, use 18 - 24 AWG Shielded Twisted Pair 9-Pin SUB-D Connector Modbus Master with RS-485 Port Model 777, 77C, 601 Model 777, 77C, 601 Model 777, 77C, 601 RS485MS-2W Module RS485MS-2W Module RS485MS-2W Module Figure 1: Typical RS-485 Network 120 Ohm 100 Ohm 120 Ohm A B S A B S A B A B S A B S Typical RS-485 Network TYPICAL RS485 NETWORK Refer to the manual for basic and extended network diagrams. Specifications Functional Specifications Remote Reset (for optional use with 777 Series) Normally open pushbutton rated 24VDC, 10mA (min.) General Characteristics Ambient Operating Temperature -20° to 50°C (-4° to 122°F) Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque 3 in.-lbs. (max.) Wire AWG 12-20 AWG Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) Surge Input Power IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 Inputs/Data Lines IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 52.83 mm (2.08”); W 73.66 mm (2.9”); D 19.56 mm (.77”) Weight 0.26 lb. (4.16oz., 117.93 g) Mounting Method 9-pin D-Sub connector on the side of a 777-Series COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 2. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 271 Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/ciomb-cio120mb CIO-MB / CIO-120-MB Description The CIO-MB/CIO-120-MB Modules are convenient and cost-effective Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact size 3.46” H x 1.0” W x 5.0” D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Unpluggable terminal block connections Allows user to wire terminal blocks before installing the module and reduces field wiring Specifications Functional Specifications Remote Reset (for use with optional 777 Series) Normally open pushbutton rated 24VDC, 10mA (min.) Power Requirements: Voltage 24VDC +10% Current 95mA (max.) 70mA (typical) Power 2.28 W (max.) 1.7 W (typical) Ethernet Controller IEEE 802.3 Capability 10Base-T Input Characteristics General Purpose (4) Voltage Range: CIO-MB 12-24VDC CIO-120-MB 90-130VAC Current 2mA (typical) Output Characteristics SPDT (1), SPST (1) Pilot Duty 480VA & 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Operating Temperature -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque 3 in.-lbs. (max.) Wire AWG 12-20 AWG Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE CIO-MB 12 to 24VDC CIO-120-MB 90 to 130VAC FIGURE 1: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-MB) FIGURE 2: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-120-MB) Wiring Diagram TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-MB TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-120-MB COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. 272 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/ciomb-cio120mb CIO-MB / CIO-120-MB Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) Surge Input Power IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 Inputs/Data Lines IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 86.36 mm (3.40”); W 25.40 mm (1.00”); D 138.68 mm (5.46”) (w/depluggable connectors) Weight 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) Mounting Methods DIN Rail or surface mount (w/two #8 screws) COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 273 Protection Relays Communication Modules CIO-DN-P / CIO-120-DN-P Description The CIO-DN-P/CIO-120-DN-P are convenient and cost-effective Devicenet™ interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Devicenet™ network. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact size 3.4” H x 1.0” W x 5.46” D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Unpluggable terminal block connections Allows user to wire terminal blocks before installing the module and reduces field wiring Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE CIO-DN-P 12 to 24VAC CIO-120-DN-P 90 to 130VAC TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-120-DN-P FIGURE 2: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-120-DN-Px) IND. CONT. EQ. LISTED 784X ® DEVICENET MODULE/NETWORK STATUS OVERLOAD COMM. STATUS R R C I1 I2 I3 I4 1 2 3 4 5 PILOT DUTY RATING 480VA @ 240 VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC GENERAL PURPOSE SCREW TORQUE RATING 0.5 Nm (5 in-lbs.) DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCKS 115VAC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B REMOTE RESET DEVICENET NETWORK V + CAN H SHEILD CAN L VREMOTE RESET OUTPUT A OUTPUT B INPUTS 1-4 115VAC AC COMMON TYPICAL WIRING FOR CIO-DN-P FIGURE 1: Typical Wiring Diagram (CIO-DN-Px, CIO-601CS-DN-P1) DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCKS DIGITAL INPUTS OUTPUT A OUTPUT B REMOTE RESET DEVICENET NETWORK V+ CAN H SHEILD CAN L VLISTED 784X ® REMOTE RESET DEVICENET MODULE/NETWORK STATUS OVERLOAD COMM. STATUS R R C I1 I2 I3 I4 1 234 5 CIO-DN DeviceNet Communication and I/O PILOT D UTY RATING 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 5A @ 240VAC GENERAL PURPOSE DIGITAL INPUTS OUTPUT A OUTPUT B SCREW TORQUE RATING 0.5 Nm (5 in.-lbs.) IND. CONT. EQ. Littelfuse.com/ciodnp-cio120dnp COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. 274 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/ciodnp-cio120dnp CIO-DN-P / CIO-120-DN-P Specifications Input Characteristics Power Requirements Voltage (nominal) 24VDC Current 137mA (max.) Power 3.28 W (max.) Digital Inputs Voltage Range CIO-DN-P 12-24 VAC CIO-120-DN-P 90-130VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Maximum Current 2mA (typical) Remote Reset 24VDC, 10mA (min.), NO pushbutton Output Characteristics Form A & Form C Contactors Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing Wire Gauge Solid or stranded, 12-20 AWG Terminal Torque 3 in.-lbs. Hi-Potential Test (relays to other circuits) (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 minute) EMC Standards Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Safety Marks UL, ULC Listed, CSA UL508 (File #E68520), C22.2 (File #46510) Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 86.36 mm (3.4”); W 25.4 mm (1.0”); D 138.68 mm (5.46”) (w/depluggable connectors) Weight 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) (w/depluggable connectors) Mounting Methods DIN Rail or surface mount (w/two #8 screws) COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 275 Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/cio777pr CIO-777-PR Description The CIO-777-PR Module is a convenient and cost-effective Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact size 3.4” H x 1.0” W x 5.46” D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Built in sub-D connector Provides a quick and easy connection to a network and reduces field wiring Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems FIGURE 1: Typical Wiring Diagram DEPLUGGABLE TERMINAL BLOCK PROFIBUS SUB-D CONNECTOR PROFIBUS NETWORK VA SHIELD B V+ IN D. COT. NE Q. LI STE D 784X ¨ PROFIBUS NETWORK S TATUS OVERLOAD COMM. S TATUS CIO-E777-PR PROFIBUS Communication SCREW TORQUERATING 0.5 Nm (5.0 in.-lbs.) Wiring Diagram Specifications Input Characteristics Power Requirements Voltage (nominal) 12-24VDC Current 150mA (max.) Power 3.6 W (max.) Digital Inputs Voltage Range 12-24VAC Maximum Current 2mA (typical) Remote Reset 24VDC, 10mA, (min.), NO pushbutton Output Characteristics Form A & Form C Contactors Pilot Duty 480VA @ 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Temperature Range Operating -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Storage -40° to 80°C (-40° to 176°F) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Wire Gauge Solid or stranded, 12-20 AWG Terminal Torque 3 in.-lbs. Hi-Potential Test (relays to other circuits) Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min.) EMC Standards Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Safety Marks UL, ULC Listed UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 (File #46510) Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 86.36 mm (3.4”); W 25.4 mm (1.0”); D 138.68 mm (5.46”) (w/depluggable connectors) Weight 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) (w/depluggable connectors) Mounting Methods DIN Rail or surface mount (w/ two #8 screws) COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. 276 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/cioen CIO-EN Description The CIO-EN Module (non-POE) is a convenient and costeffective Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact size 3.4” H x 1.0” W x 5.46” D Easily adapts to existing as well as new applications Flexible addressing standard allows function as stand-alone interface or in conjunction with 777 series overload relay Provides flexibility for control and monitoring Remote reset option Additional remote reset input allows user to reset 777 series relays without opening the panel DIN rail or surface mountable Allows installation flexibility Built in Ethernet jack Reduces field wiring Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Wiring Diagram Specifications Input Characteristics Power Requirements: Voltage 24VDC +10% Current 95mA (max.) 70mA (typical) Power 2.28 W (max.) 1.7 W (typical) Digital Inputs General Purpose (4) Voltage Range 12-24VDC Current 2mA (typical) Functional Specifications Remote Reset (for use with optional 777 Series) Normally open pushbutton rated 24VDC, 10mA (min.) Ethernet Controller IEEE 802.3 Capability 10Base-T Output Characteristics SPDT (1), SPST (1) Pilot Duty 480VA & 240VAC, B300 General Purpose 5A @ 240VAC General Characteristics Ambient Operating Temperature -20° to 70°C (-4° to 158°F) Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque 3 in.-lbs. (max.) Wire AWG 12-20 AWG Class of Protection IP20, NEMA 1 (finger safe) Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) Surge Input Power IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 Inputs/Data Lines IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CSA C22.2 (File #46510) CE IEC 60947-6-2 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 86.36 mm (3.4”); W 25.4 mm (1.0”); D 138.68 mm (5.46”) Weight 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) Mounting Methods DIN Rail or surface mount (w/two #8 screws) COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 3. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 277 Protection Relays Communication Modules Littelfuse.com/com420 COM 4-20 Description The COM 4-20 Output Module is intended for use with ONLY the Model 777-AccuPower output power monitor. The module will send a 4-20mA signal proportional to the output power. It can also be used to send the input power by setting the efficiency setting on the 777-AccuPower monitor to one. This module allows communication to a PLC with an analog input and no Modbus input. Features J Powered by the 777-AccuPower J Scalable 4-20mA output proportional to Hp or kW J Signal can be used for displays, controllers, or PLCs Communication Link to PLC/SCADA/ Monitoring Systems Figure 6. 4-20mA Output Module Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram 4-20mA OUTPUT MODULE Specifications Output Characteristics Current 4-20mA General Characteristics Temperature Range -20° to 50°C (-4° to 122°F) Terminal (depluggable terminal block) Torque 3 in.-lbs. (max.) Wire AWG 12-20 AWG Class of Protection IP20 Relative Humidity 10-95%, non-condensing per IEC 68-2-3 Standards Passed Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Level 3, 6kV contact, 8kV air Radio Frequency Immunity, Radiated 150 MHz, 10V/m Fast Transient Burst IEC 61000-4-4, Level 3, 4kV input power Hi-Potential Test Meets UL508 (2 x rated V + 1000V for 1 min) Surge Input Power IEC 61000-4-5, Level 1 Inputs/Data Lines IEC 61000-4-5, Level 2 Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) CE IEC 60947 Enclosure Polycarbonate Dimensions H 52.83 mm (2.08”); W 73.66 mm (2.9”); D 19.56 mm (0.77”) Weight 0.25 lb. (4 oz., 113.4 g) Mounting Method #8 screws; mount to side of 777-AccuPower unit COMMUNICATION MODULES 11 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 507, Figure 2. 278 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Timer Function Guide ......................................................................... 280 Multifunction TRDU Series....................................................................................... 281 TRU Series.......................................................................................... 283 ASQU / ASTU Series.......................................................................... 286 DSQU / DSTU Series.......................................................................... 288 Dedicated On Delay T10 SERIES......................................................................................... 290 Delay-on-Make ERDM Series...................................................................................... 291 HRDM Series...................................................................................... 293 KRDM Series...................................................................................... 295 KRPS Series........................................................................................ 297 KSD1 Series....................................................................................... 300 KSDU Series....................................................................................... 302 KSPS Series........................................................................................ 304 MSM Series....................................................................................... 307 ORM Series........................................................................................ 309 PRLM Series....................................................................................... 311 TDM / TDMH / TDML Series............................................................. 313 TDU / TDUH / TDUL Series................................................................ 315 TH1 Series.......................................................................................... 317 THD1B410.5S..................................................................................... 319 TMV8000 / TSU2000 Series.............................................................. 321 TRM Series......................................................................................... 323 TS1 Series.......................................................................................... 325 TSD1 Series........................................................................................ 327 Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed TS441165 ........................................................................................... 329 Delay-on-Break HRDB Series....................................................................................... 331 HRPS / HRIS Series............................................................................ 333 KRDB Series....................................................................................... 335 KSDB Series....................................................................................... 337 ORB Series......................................................................................... 339 TDB / TDBH / TDBL Series................................................................. 341 TDUB Series....................................................................................... 343 THDB Series....................................................................................... 345 TRB Series.......................................................................................... 347 TSB Series.......................................................................................... 349 TSDB Series....................................................................................... 351 Single Shot HRDS Series....................................................................................... 353 HSPZA22SL........................................................................................ 355 KRDS Series....................................................................................... 357 KSDS Series....................................................................................... 359 ORS Series......................................................................................... 361 PRS65................................................................................................. 363 TDS / TDSH / TDSL Series................................................................. 365 TDUS Series....................................................................................... 366 THC / THS Series............................................................................... 368 THDS Series....................................................................................... 370 TRS Series.......................................................................................... 372 TSDS Series....................................................................................... 374 TSS Series.......................................................................................... 376 TIME DELAY RELAYS The largest selection of time delay relays known since 1968 for its reliable designs that provide long service lives with low maintenance costs. Versatile multifunction time delay relays give you the option of choosing among functions and time delay ranges to ensure that you receive the perfect timer to fit your needs. Electromechanical relay-output time delay relays are available with a number of different functions and assure isolation between input and output, as well as no voltage drop across output contact. Solid-state time delay relays have no moving parts to arc and wear out over time, giving them a lifespan of up to 100x that of a relay-output timer. In addition, all solid state time delay relays are fully encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, humidity, etc. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 279 Time Delay Relays Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols For More Information… and to download our HVAC Timer Application Guide, visit Littelfuse.com/timedelayrelays Interval ERDI Series......................................................................................... 378 HRDI Series........................................................................................ 380 KRDI Series........................................................................................ 382 KSD2 Series....................................................................................... 384 KSPU Series....................................................................................... 386 TDI / TDIH / TDIL Series..................................................................... 388 TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL Series............................................................. 390 THD2 Series....................................................................................... 392 THD7 Series....................................................................................... 394 TS2 / TS6 Series................................................................................ 396 TSD2 Series........................................................................................ 398 TSD6 Series........................................................................................ 400 TSD7 Series........................................................................................ 402 Retriggerable Single Shot KRD9 Series....................................................................................... 404 TSD94110SB ...................................................................................... 406 Recyle ERD3425A .......................................................................................... 407 ESDR Series....................................................................................... 409 HRDR Series....................................................................................... 412 KRD3 Series....................................................................................... 414 KRDR Series....................................................................................... 416 KSD3 Series....................................................................................... 418 KSDR Series....................................................................................... 420 KSPD Series....................................................................................... 422 RS Series............................................................................................ 424 TDR Series.......................................................................................... 426 THD3C42A0........................................................................................ 428 TSD3411S........................................................................................... 430 TSDR Series....................................................................................... 432 Percentage PTHF4900DK....................................................................................... 434 Dual Function TDMB Series...................................................................................... 436 ESD52233........................................................................................... 438 KRPD Series....................................................................................... 440 HVAC CT Series............................................................................................ 442 T2D120A15M..................................................................................... 444 TA Series............................................................................................ 446 TAC1 Series........................................................................................ 448 TL Series............................................................................................. 450 TSA141300......................................................................................... 452 Coin Vending HRV Series......................................................................................... 453 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Relays Function Selection Guide Selection Questions 1) The timing starts when the initiate (starting) contacts are: A) Closed B) Opened 2) What is the status of the output (or load) during timing? A) On B) Off C) On/Off 3) Will the load de-energize (or remain de-energized) if the initiate (starting) contacts are opened during timing? A) Yes B) No THE FIVE MOST USED FUNCTIONS Understanding Time Diagrams Time diagrams are used to show the relative operation of switches, controls, and loads as time progresses. Time begins at the first vertical boundary. There may be a line indicating the start of the operation or it may just begin with the transition of the device that starts the operation. Each row in the time diagram represents a separate component. These rows will be labeled with the name of the device or its terminal connection numbers. In a bistable or digital system, the switches, controls, or loads can only be ON or OFF. The time lines are drawn to represent these two possible conditions. Vertical lines are used to define important starting or ending points in the operation. The example to the right is the most common type of time diagram in use in North America. It shows the energizing of loads, and the closing of switches and contacts by an ascending vertical transition of the time line. Opening switches or contacts or de-energizing loads are represented by descending vertical transitions. TIME DIAGRAM Example: Input Applied Off Initiate Switch Closed Open Output (Normally Open) Energized De-energized DELAY-ON-BREAK (RELEASE) V = Voltage R = Reset S1 = Initiate Switch TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay L = Load = Undefined Time International Timing Function Symbols = Delay-on-Make; ON-delay = Delay-on-Break; OFF-delay = Delay-on-Make and Break; ON and OFF-delay = Interval; Impulse-ON = Trailing Edge Interval; Impulse-OFF = Single Shot; Pulse Former = Flasher - ON Time First; Recycling Equal Times - ON First = Flasher - OFF Time First; Recycling Equal Times - OFF First = Recycling - Unequal Times; Pulse Generator = Recycling - Unequal Times Starting with ON or OFF = Delay-on-Make and Interval; Single Pulse Generator Selecting a Timer’s Function Selecting one of the five most common timing functions can be as easy as answering three questions on the chart below. If you have trouble answering these questions, try drawing a connection diagram that shows how the timer and load are connected. Time diagrams and written descriptions of the five most popular functions, plus other common functions. Instantaneous contacts, accumulation, pause timing functions, and flashing LED’s are included in some units to expand the versatility of the timer. These expanded operations are explained on the product’s catalog page. Time diagrams are used on these pages along with text and international symbols for functions. TIMER FUNCTION GUIDE 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSLittelfuse.com/relayscontrols 280 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Relays Multifunction © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 281 Littelfuse.com/trdu TRDU SERIES Description The TRDU Series is a versatile universal time delay relay with 21 selectable single and dual functions. The dual functions replace up to three timers required to accomplish the same function. Both the function and the timing range are selectable with switches located on the face of the unit. Two LED’s indicate input voltage and output status. This device offers full 10A isolated relay output contacts in either SPDT or DPDT. The TRDU replaces hundreds of part numbers, thereby, reducing your stock inventory requirements. 21 Functions Five switches are provided to set one of 10 single or 11 dual modes of operation. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS : 21 timing functions Replace hundreds of parts and reduce stocking requirements Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% User selectable time delay Timing settings are switch selectable 0.1s - 1,705h in eight ranges for added flexibility Isolated 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages LED indicators Provides visual indication of input voltage and relay status Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch 8-PIN DPDT 8-PIN SPDT 11-PIN DPDT Wiring Diagram 8-PIN 11-PIN Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE BASE CONNECTION TRDU120A1 120VAC 8-pin, DPDT* TRDU120A2 120VAC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU120A3 120VAC 11-pin, DPDT TRDU12D1 12VDC 8-pin, DPDT* TRDU12D2 12VDC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU230A2 230VAC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU24A1 24VAC/DC 8-pin, DPDT* TRDU24A2 24VAC/DC 8-pin, SPDT TRDU24A3 24VAC/DC 11-pin, DPDT If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 *Limited to 9 operating functions in 8-pin DPDT units. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 20. Time Delay Relays Multifunction 282 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. TRDU SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller Range: Switch Selectable** Single Functions: 0.1s - 1,705h in 8 ranges Dual Functions: 0.1s - 3,100m each in 8 ranges Adjustments Multiplier: 3 position DIP switches select 0.1, 1, 10, or 100 in s or m Setting Accuracy ±1% or 50ms, whichever is greater Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Timing Functions Five switches are provided to set one of twenty-one single or dual functions Reset Time ≤ 50ms Initiate Time 120VAC: 75ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±1% Indication Two LEDs indicate 1) Input voltage applied 2) Output relay status Input Voltage 12VDC, 24VAC/DC, 120VAC, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VAC/DC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Power Consumption 24 to 230V ≤ 3W; 12VDC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT or DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28 VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical – 1 x 107 ; Electrical – 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3.1”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in or magnal 11-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 5.8 oz (164 g) **For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Function Diagrams DELAY-ON-BREAK RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST, EQUAL DELAYS) DELAY-ON-MAKE/DELAY-ON-BREAK DELAY-ON-MAKE/INTERVAL DELAY-ON-MAKE / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) Single Functions Dual Functions DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time SINGLE SHOT DELAY-ON-MAKE / SINGLE SHOT * * * 12 * TIME DELAY RELAYSLittelfuse.com/trdu Time Delay Relays Multifunction © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 283 TRDU SERIES TRAILING EDGE SINGLE SHOT (IMPULSE-OFF) INVERTED DELAY-ON-BREAK INVERTED SINGLE SHOT DELAY-ON-BREAK / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) SINGLE SHOT / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) US Single Functions Dual Functions * 9 Functions included in the 8 pin DPDT models 5 Switches for Function Selection 3 Switches for Time Delay Range V = Voltage R = Reset S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD,TD1,TD2 = Complete Time Delay t = Partial Time Delay DOM = Delay-on-Make DOB = Delay-on-Break REC = Recycle SS = Single Shot INT = Interval M = Minutes S = Seconds = Undefined time NOTE: The time delay range is the same for both functions when dual functions are selected. ACCUMULATIVE DELAY-ON-MAKE RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset ACCUMULATIVE DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL KEY LEGEND Both Times Adjustable Both Times Adjustable INTERVAL* INTERVAL / RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST) * RECYCLE (ON TIME FIRST)* RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open CoNC = Normally Closed CTD1, TD2 = TimR = Reset * INTERVAL / DELAY-ON-MAKE* Littelfuse.com/trdu 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Relays Multifunction 284 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Description The TRU Series is a multifunction, knob adjustable, Universal Time Delay Relay. It includes six of the most popular timing functions selected by a slide switch. The time delay is knob adjustable and the time delay range is switch selectable. The repeat accuracy is + 0.1%. Both function and time range can be selected on the top face of the unit. In addition to multifunctioning and multiple time ranges, the TRU Series features universal input voltage; 19 to 264VAC and 19 to 30VDC and full 10A output relay. The TRU Series can directly replace up to 1000 competitive time delay relay models. Operation A six position slide switch selects delay-on-make, interval, single shot, recycling (ON time first, equal recycle delays), delay-on-break, and retriggerable single shot. 8-pin DPDT base wiring is limited to delay-on-make, interval, and recycling functions. All six functions are available in the 8-pin SPDT and 11-pin DPDT versions. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% or + / - 20ms, whichever is greater 6 time ranges (0.1s to 1,000m) Broad range will satisfy most requirements Knob adjustable time delay Allows user to fine tune time delay based on application needs Universal input voltage Makes it versatile for use in most applications Multifunction Provides the most common standard timing functions LED Indicators Provide visual indication of input voltage and relay status 10A isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages TRU SERIES Knob Adjustable Universal Time Delay Relay Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE BASE WIRING FUNCTIONS TRU1 19 to 264VAC; 19 to 30VDC 8-pin DPDT 3 TRU2 19 to 264VAC; 19 to 30VDC 8-pin SPDT 6 TRU3 19 to 264VAC; 19 to 30VDC 11-pin DPDT 6 If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-PIN SPDT Delay-on-Make Interval Single Shot Recycling (ON Time First, Equal Recycle Delays) Delay-on-Break Retriggerable Single Shot 11-PIN DPDT Delay-on-Make Interval Single Shot Recycling (ON Time First, Equal Recycle Delays) Delay-on-Break Retriggerable Single Shot 8-PIN DPDT Delay-on-Make Interval Recycling V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated 8-PIN 11-PIN 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSLittelfuse.com/tru For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 21. Time Delay Relays Multifunction © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 285 Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in pairs. Function Diagram RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range Switch Selectable 0.1s - 1000m in 6 ranges: 1) 0.1 - 10s 2) 1 - 100s 3) 10 - 1000s 4) 0.1 - 10m 5) 1 - 100m 6) 10 - 1000m Adjustments Multiplier 4 position DIP switch selects x0.1, x1, x10, and sec. or min. Time Setting Onboard knob adjustment with 1 - 100 reference dial Two LEDs indicate 1) Input voltage applied 2) Output relay status Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or ±20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 300ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% Input Voltage - Universal Input Range 19 to 264VAC and 19 to 30VDC AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT or DPDT, isolated Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Transient 38 joules Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Polarity DC units are reversed polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 87.3 mm (3.44”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in or magnal 11-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C / -30° to 85°C Weight ≅ 6 oz (170 g) TRU SERIES Littelfuse.com/tru 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Relays Multifunction 286 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. ASQU ASTU Description The ASQU and ASTU Series of 17.5 mm, knob adjustable, universal solid-state timers offer multiple functions, voltages, and time delay ranges. Choose one of 5 functions and 4 time delay ranges via 4 selection switches located on face of the unit. Adjustment through the time range is accomplished by an onboard knob. The ASQU Series has quick connect terminals and the ASTU Series has terminal blocks. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Universal AC or DC voltage Choose from 24 to 240VAC or 9 to 110VDC models Compact 17.5mm size Allows for high rail density Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -1% Multifunction: 5 timing functions Reduce stocking requirements Knob Adjustable Time Delay Field adjustable delay ranging from 0.1s - 100m 0.7A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Mounting fasteners Iincluded Each unit ships with both surface and DIN rail quick mount adapters Watchdog circuitry Self monitoring and self correcting for improved performance Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P0500-178 Surface Mount Adapter P0500-179 DIN Rail Mount Adapter For use with the ASxx/DSxx Series timers. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION ASQUA3 24 to 240VAC Quick Connects ASQUD3 9 to 110VDC Quick Connects ASTUA3 24 to 240VAC Terminal Blocks ASTUD3 9 to 110VDC Terminal Blocks If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 0.1-10s 1-100s 10-1000s 1-100m X100s X10s X1s X10m R M S D C D C D C D C F E F E F E F E R = Range M = Multiplier S = Setting L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load J= Wire Required for Interval Operation S1= Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load DELAY-ON-MAKE & RECYCLING SINGLE SHOT, INTERVAL & DELAY-ON-BREAK DOM SS R DOB A A A A B B B B ADJUSTMENTS DOM = Delay-on-Make SS = Single Shot/Interval R = Recycling DOB = Delay-on-Break Wiring & Adjustment Diagrams L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 ASQU / ASTU SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSLittelfuse.com/asqu-astu For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 22. Time Delay Relays Multifunction © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 287 Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller based with ceramic resonator and watchdog circuitry Adjustment Knob with dial; 2 switches select 1 of 4 multipliers Range* 0.1 - 10s, 1 - 100s, 10 - 1000s, 1 - 100m Repeat Accuracy ±1% or ±50ms, whicheer is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±2% or ±50ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 300ms Initiate Time Single Shot & Delay-on-Break: ≤ 32ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2%, or ±50ms, whichever is greater Input Voltage AC: 24 to 240VAC; -20% - 10% DC: 9 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -25°C 9.4 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -40°C AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / ≤ 10% Output Type Solid state Form NO Rating 0.7A steady state, 10A inrush Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 0.7A; DC ≅ 1.5V @ 0.7A Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Two base adaptors are available DIN Rail Snap on to 32 mm DIN 1 & 35 mm DIN 3 rail Surface Two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws or quick mount fasteners Dimensions H 76.2 mm (3.0”); W 17.52 mm (0.69”); D 61.2 mm (2.41”) Termination ASQU 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals ASTU 0.197 in. (5 mm) push-on terminal blocks for up to #14 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. DIN Rail Mount Inches (Millimeters) SurfaceQuick MoFastner(2[Drill . 18diameter35mm DIN 3 32MM DIN 1 .815 (20.70) .640 (16.26) .38 (9.65 3.00 (76.2) .23(5P0500-178 SURFACE MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) P0500-179 DIN RAIL MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) Mounting Diagrams DIN Rail Mount Inches (Millimeters) Surface Mount Quick Mount Fastner(2) [Drill . 187 (4.75) diameter hole] 35mm DIN 3 32MM DIN 1 .815 (20.70) .640 (16.26) .38 (9.65 .185 (4.70) 3.00 (76.2) 2.41 (61.2) .235 DIA (5.97) .69 (17.52) ASQU / ASTU SERIES Littelfuse.com/asqu-astu 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time Delay Relays Multifunction 288 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. DSQU DSTU 1 2 4 8 16 32 ON Add switches in ON position TD = 2+8+16=26 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load J= Wire Required for Interval Operation S1= Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load DOM SS R DOB A A A A B B B B 0.1s 1s 10s 1m X10s X1s X0.1s X1m R M S I D C D C D C D C F E F E F E F E 0.1-6.3s 1-63s 10-630s 1-63m R = Range M = Multiplier S = Setting I = Increments of time DOM = Delay-on-Make SS = Single Shot/Interval R = Recycling DOB = Delay-on-Break Wiring & Adjustment Diagrams L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 DELAY-ON-MAKE & RECYCLING SINGLE SHOT, INTERVAL & DELAY-ON-BREAK ADJUSTMENTS Description The DSQU and DSTU Series of 17.5 mm, DIP switch adjustable, universal solid-state timers offer multiple functions, voltages, and time delay ranges. Choose one of 5 functions and 4 time delay ranges via 4 selection switches located on face of the unit. Six switches adjust the time delay through the selected range. The DSQU Series has quick connect terminals and the DSTU Series has terminal blocks. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Universal AC or DC voltage Choose from 24 to 240VAC or 9 to 110VDC models Compact 17.5mm size Allows for high rail density Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -1% Multifunction: 5 timing functions Reduce stocking requirements DIP switch adjustable time delay Field adjustable delay ranging from 0.1s - 63m 0.7A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Mounting fasteners included Each unit ships with both surface and DIN rail quick mount adapters Watchdog circuitry Self monitoring and self correcting for improved performance Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P0500-178 Surface Mount Adapter P0500-179 DIN Rail Mount Adapter For use with the ASxx/DSxx Series timers. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION DSQUA3 24 - 240VAC Quick Connects DSQUD3 9 - 110VDC Quick Connects DSTUA3 24 - 240VAC Terminal Blocks DSTUD3 9 - 110VDC Terminal Blocks If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 DSQU / DSTU SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSLittelfuse.com/dsqu-dstu For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 22. Time Delay Relays Multifunction © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 289 Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller based with ceramic resonator and watchdog circuitry Adjustment 6 switches adjust the time delay; 2 switches select 1 of 4 multipliers Range* x0.1s = 0.1 - 6.3s in 0.1s increments x1s = 1 - 63s in 1s increments x10s = 10 - 630s in 10s increments x1m = 1 - 63m in 1m increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or ±20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ±2% or ±50ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 300ms Initiate Time Single Shot & Delay-on-Break: ≤ 32ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% or ±50ms, whichever is greater Input Voltage AC: 24 to 240VAC; -20% - 10% DC: 9 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -25°C 9.4 to 110VDC; -0% - 20% @ -40°C AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / ≤ 10% Output Type Solid state Form NO Rating 0.7A steady state, 10A inrush Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 0.7A; DC ≅ 1.5V @ 0.7A Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Two base adaptors are available DIN Rail Snap on to 32 mm DIN 1 & 35 mm DIN 3 rail Surface Two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws or quick mount fasteners Dimensions H 76.2 mm (3.0”); W 17.52 mm (0.69”); D 61.2 mm (2.41”) Termination DSQU 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals DSTU 0.197 in. (5 mm) push-on terminal blocks for up to #14 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 4.2 oz (119 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. DIN Rail Mount Inches (Millimeters) SurfaceQuick MoFastner(2[Drill . 18diameter35mm DIN 3 32MM DIN 1 .815 (20.70) .640 (16.26) .38 (9.65 3.00 (76.2) .23(5P0500-178 SURFACE MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) P0500-179 DIN RAIL MOUNT Inches (Millimeters) Mounting Diagrams DIN Rail Mount Inches (Millimeters) Surface Mount Quick Mount Fastner(2) [Drill . 187 (4.75) diameter hole] 35mm DIN 3 32MM DIN 1 .815 (20.70) .640 (16.26) .38 (9.65 .185 (4.70) 3.00 (76.2) 2.41 (61.2) .235 DIA (5.97) .69 (17.52) DSQU / DSTU SERIES Littelfuse.com/dsqu-dstu 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 290 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — On Delay Littelfuse.com/t10 T10 SERIES Solid-State On-Delay Timer Description The T10 Series on-delay timer is a solid-state electronic device that provides accurate and reliable timing for control circuits up to 460VAC. The T10 features a user-selectable time delay from 6 seconds to 10 minutes (0.5 to 12 seconds on the T10S400 model) and SPDT output contacts. When power is applied to the T10, it immediately begins its timing cycle. During this time, the indicator LED alternates between red and green and the output contacts remain inactive. When the timing cycle is complete, the indicator LED turns solid green and the output contacts are activated. The output contacts will remain activated until power is removed from the T10. The SPDT contact ratings are 480V @ 240VAC on the 115V and 230V models, and 470VA @ 600VAC on the 460V model. Features & Benefits g Status LED g 600V control relay on 460V models Specifications Input Characteristics Frequency 50*/60Hz Functional Characteristics Timing Range T10100, T10200, T10400 6 seconds to 10 minutes T10S400 0.5 seconds to 12 seconds Repeat Accuracy Fixed Condition ±1% Output Characteristics Output Contact Rating (SPDT) Pilot Duty T10100, T10200 480VA @ 240VAC T10400, T10S400 470VA @ 600VAC General Characteristics Maximum Input Power 5 W Terminal Torque 7 in.-lbs. Wire Size 12-18AWG Safety Marks UL UL508 (File #E68520) Dimensions H 74.4 mm (2.93”); W 133.9 mm (5.27”); D 74.9 mm (2.95”) Weight 0.94 lb. (15.04 oz., 426.38 g) Mounting Method #8 screws *Note: 50Hz will increase all delay timers by 20%. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION T10120 115VAC 0.1 to 10 minute range, 240 VAC rated output contacts T10200 230VAC 0.1 to 10 minute range, 240 VAC rated output contacts T10400 460VAC 0.1 to 10 minute range, 600 VAC rated output contacts T10S400 460VAC 0.5 to 12 second range, 600 VAC rated output contacts 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix page 509, Figure 6. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 291 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/erdm ERDM SERIES L1 N/L2 V = Voltage A knob, or terminals 9 & 10 are only included on adjustable units. Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Description The ERDM Series is a combination of digital electronics and a reliable electromechanical relay. These devices offer a DPDT relay output for relay logic circuits, and isolation of input to output voltages. Cost effective for OEM applications, such as random starting, sequencing ON, switch de-bouncing, anti-short cycling, and other common delay-on-make applications. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Isolated 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-16, P1004-16-XVersa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY ERDM123 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s ERDM422 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 5s ERDM126 12VDC Onboard knob 0.6 - 60s ERDM423 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s ERDM128 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10m ERDM425 120VAC Onboard knob 0.3 - 30s ERDM222 24VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 5s ERDM427 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 5m ERDM4130S 120VAC Fixed 30s ERDM429 120VAC Onboard knob 0.2 - 15m ERDM4210 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. 292 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/erdm Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1s - 500m in 11 adjustable ranges or 0.1s - 1000m fixed Adjustment Fixed, onboard or external adjust Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12, 24, or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120VAC/DC & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Full Load - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 43.2 mm (1.7”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 65°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 5.7 oz (162 g) Selection Guides ERDM SERIES Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 293 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/hrdm HRDM SERIES L1 N/L2 Delay-on-Make Timer Wiring Diagram NO = Normally Open L = Load C = Common, Transfer Contact NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are not isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY HRDM120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s HRDM3112S 24VDC Fixed 12s HRDM413M 120VAC Fixed 3m HRDM415M 120VAC Fixed 5m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Description The HRDM Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five ranges and factory fixed, onboard, or external adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of ±0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. 294 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/hrdm External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time HRDM SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±1%, ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Non-isolated, SPDT Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x 104 , **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions 3 x 2 x 1.5 in. (76.7 x 51.3 x 38.1mm) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 295 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/krdm KRDM SERIES Description The KRDM Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDM Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDM1110S 12VDC Fixed 10s KRDM4110M 120VAC Fixed 10m KRDM1130S 12VDC Fixed 30s KRDM4110S 120VAC Fixed 10s KRDM120 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDM4145S 120VAC Fixed 45s KRDM121 12VDC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDM420 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDM2110M 24VAC/DC Fixed 10m KRDM421 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDM215M 24VAC/DC Fixed 5m KRDM424 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100m KRDM220 24VAC/DC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDM430 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s KRDM221 24VAC/DC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDM433 120VAC External 0.1 - 10m KRDM223 24VAC/DC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10m KRDM6115M 230VAC Fixed 15m KRDM310.2S 24VDC Fixed 0.2s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. Relay contacts are isolated. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 296 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/krdm Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Output Current/Ambient Temperature Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VAC/DC -15% - 20% 110VDC 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time KRDM SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 297 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/krps KRPS SERIES Description The KRPS Series is a factory programmed time delay relay available with 1 of 15 functions and measures only 2 inches square. The KRPS offers a wide range of fixed, onboard, or externally adjustable time delays. The output relay contacts offer a full 10A rating with complete isolation. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRPS Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, accuracy, and long life. Special time ranges and functions are available. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, SPDT, 10A output Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs. time delay chart. The untimed load is optional. S1 is not used for some functions. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUST. TIME DELAY FUNCTION KRPS4160MM 120VAC Fixed 60m Delay-on-Make KRPS913MB 230VAC Fixed 3m Delay-on-Break KRPSA10.1SFT 24 - 240VAC/DC Fixed 0.1s Alternating KRPSA21RE 24 - 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Recycling, On Time First KRPSA22B 24 - 240VAC/DC Onboard 1 - 100s Delay-on-Break KRPSA24M 24 - 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10m Delay-on-Make KRPSD10.1SF 12 to 48VDC Fixed 0.1s Leading Edge Flip-Flop KRPSD21B 12 to 48VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Delay-on-Break KRPSD21M 12 to 48VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Delay-on-Make KRPSD22M 12 to 48VDC Onboard 1 - 100s Delay-on-Make KRPSD22S 12 to 48VDC Onboard 1 - 100s Single Shot KRPSD25S 12 to 48VDC Onboard 1 - 100m Single Shot If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 298 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/krps Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±2% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 40ms; ≤ 750 operations per minute Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 to 48VDC; 24 to 240VAC/DC Tolerance 12 to 48VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 240VAC/DC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 KRPS SERIES Timer Functions Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of the input voltage, the dime delay begins. The output relay is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the put energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Re-closing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Recycling) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output deenergizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) Output Current/Ambient Temperature RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 299 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/krps Operation (Alternating) Input voltage must be applied at all times for proper operation. The operation begins with the output relay de-energized. Closing S1 enables the next alternating operation. When S1 opens (trailing edge triggered), the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until S1 is (re-closed and) re-opened. Then the output relay de-energizes and remains until S1 opens again. Each time S1 opens the time delay occurs and the output transfers. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delay. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output (relay or solid state) energizes and the time delay begins. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or re-closing the initiate switch during timing has no effect on the time delay. Note (for most single shot timers): If the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied, the output energizes and the time delay begins. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Retriggerable Single Shot, Motion Detector) Input voltage must be applied prior to and during timing. The output relay is de-energized. When the initiate switch S1 closes momentarily or maintained, the output energizes and the time delay begins. Upon completion of the delay, the output de-energizes. Reset: Re-closing S1 resets the time delay and restarts timing. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Trailing Edge Single Shot, Impulse-OFF) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. When the initiate switch S1 opens, the output relay energizes. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. Re-closing and opening S1 during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if S1 is open when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and S1 is closed. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. KRPS SERIES ALTERNATING RELAY (TRAILING EDGE FLIP-FLOP) SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed ContacTD = Time Delay R = Reset RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open ContactNC = Normally Closed Contact = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset TRAILING EDGE SINGLE SHOT (IMPULSE-OFF) LEGEND V = Voltage R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD, TD1, TD2 = Time Delay C = Count P = Pulse Duration = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 300 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksd1 KSD1 SERIES L1 N/L2 Delay-on-Make Timer Description The KSD1 Series features two-terminal, series-connection with the load. The KSD1 Series is an ideal choice for delay-onmake timing applications. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltages. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -5% time delay accuracy Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Wiring Diagram Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KSD11120S 12VDC Fixed 20s KSD1123 12VDC External 0.1 - 10m KSD1230 24VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KSD1320 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s KSD1412S 120VAC Fixed 2s KSD14130S 120VAC Fixed 30s KSD1420 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s KSD16130S 230VAC Fixed 30s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 301 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksd1 Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time KSD1 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC; 12 or 24VDC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Minimum Holding Current ≤ 40mA OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 7mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 302 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksdu KSDU SERIES Description The KSDU Series are encapsulated solid-state, delay-on-make timers that combine digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. The KSDU Series is factory fixed from 0.1s to 10,230s and does not include the DIP switch. These series are excellent choices for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Universal Voltage 24 to 240VAC/DC in 2 ranges Digital Integrated Circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 5% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 2 terminal design Provides series connection for easy installation Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KSDU8120 24 to 120VAC/DC Fixed 20s KSDU811200 24 to 120VAC/DC Fixed 1200s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. KSDU is fixed. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 303 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksdu Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range* Fixed Fixed from 0.1s - 10230s Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±10% Recycle Time ≤150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±5% Input Voltage 24 to 120VAC/DC; 100 to 240VAC/DC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Tolerance ±20% Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Minimum Holding Current 40mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) * For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. KSDU SERIES Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 304 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksps KSPS SERIES Description The KSPS Series is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 14 standard functions. The KSPS Series offers a single, fixed, externally or onboard adjustable time delay. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KSPS Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size and solid state reliability. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L = Load UTL = Untimed Load V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY FUNCTION KSPS2180SB 24VAC Fixed 80s Delay-on-Break KSPSA21FT 24 - 240VAC, positive switching Onboard 0.1 - 10s Recycling, On Time First KSPSN13MI 12 - 120VDC, negative switching Fixed 3m Interval KSPSN21B 12 - 120VDC, negative switching Onboard 0.1 - 10s Delay-on-Break KSPSP145SM 12 - 120VDC, positive switching Fixed 45s Delay-on-Make KSPSP22B 12 - 120VDC, positive switching Onboard 1 - 100s Delay-on-Break KSPSP35PSD 12 - 120VDC, positive switching External 1 - 100m Retriggerable Single Shot If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 305 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksps Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±2% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms; ≤ 1500 operations per minute Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 to 120VDC; 24 to 240VAC Tolerance ≤ ±15% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid-state output Rating 1A steady, 10A inrush for 16ms Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 240VAC, DC≅ 1mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) KSPS SERIES Timer Functions Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of the input voltage, the dime delay begins. The output relay is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the put energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Re-closing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Recycling) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open ContactNC = Normally Closed ContaTD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed ContacTD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 306 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ksps Operation (Alternating) Input voltage must be applied at all times for proper operation. The operation begins with the output relay de-energized. Closing S1 enables the next alternating operation. When S1 opens (trailing edge triggered), the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until S1 is (re-closed and) re-opened. Then the output relay de-energizes and remains until S1 opens again. Each time S1 opens the time delay occurs and the output transfers. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delay. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output (relay or solid state) energizes and the time delay begins. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or re-closing the initiate switch during timing has no effect on the time delay. Note (for most single shot timers): If the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied, the output energizes and the time delay begins. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Trailing Edge Single Shot, Impulse-OFF) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. When the initiate switch S1 opens, the output relay energizes. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. Re-closing and opening S1 during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if S1 is open when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and S1 is closed. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Inverted Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch S1, the output relay de-energizes. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes. Opening or re-closing S1 during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will remain de-energized if S1 is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and S1 is open. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output (relay or solid state) energizes during the time delay. At the end of time delay the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. KSPS SERIES LEGEND V = Voltage R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time S1 =Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD, TD1, TD2 = Time Delay C = Count P = Pulse Duration = Undefined Time ALTERNATING RELAY (TRAILING EDGE FLIP-FLOP) SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset TRAILING EDGE SINGLE SHOT (IMPULSE-OFF) INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time INVERTED SINGLE SHOT 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 307 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/msm MSM SERIES Description The MSM Series replaces bi-metal type timing with reliable solid-state circuitry. There are no moving parts to arc or wear. It is a cost effective solution for OEM designers. It is available for printed circuit board mounting or surface mounting with a removable bracket and wire leads. The MSM Series offers immediate reset on removal of power. Operation (Delay-on-Make) The time delay begins upon application of input voltage. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 5%, Factory calibration + / - 15% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Long life No moving parts to arc or wear PCB or wire harness Offers design and installation flexibility Immediate reset Occurs on removal of power Totally Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load R = Red Wire B = Black Wire Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY WIRE TYPE WIRE LENGTH inches (mm) MSM10.5W6 12VDC Fixed 0.5s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM10.7W6 12VDC Fixed 0.7s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM11W6 12VDC Fixed 1s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM110W6 12VDC Fixed 10s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM130W9 12VDC Fixed 30s Standard Lead 9.0 (228.6) MSM190W6 12VDC Fixed 90s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM20.15W9 24VAC Fixed 0.15s Standard Lead 9.0 (228.6) MSM210P3 24VAC Fixed 10s PC Mount 0.5 (12.7) MSM25W9 24VAC Fixed 5s Standard Lead 9.0 (228.6) MSM30.7W6 24VDC Fixed 0.7s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM42W6 120VAC Fixed 2s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM43W6 120VAC Fixed 3s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM420W6 120VAC Fixed 20s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) MSM450W6 120VAC Fixed 50s Standard Lead 6.0 (152.4) If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 MSM10.5W6 MSM210P3 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 39. 308 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/msm Specifications Time Delay Type Analog Circuitry Range 0.05 - 180s fixed Repeat Accuracy ±5% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±15% Recycle Time ≤ 75ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±15% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid State Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 0.5A steady state 25°C; 0.25A steady state 60°C Minimum Holding Current 40mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 0.5A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS input to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting A.) PC mount 14 AWG (2.087mm2 ) wires (Can be inserted in AMP Miniature Spring Socket #645980-1) B.) Stranded 18 AWG wire leads (0.933 mm2 ) with mounting bracket Environmental Operation/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -30° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight P: ≅ 1.1 oz (31.2 g) W: ≅ 1.2 oz (34 g) MSM SERIES Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 309 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/orm ORM SERIES Description The ORM Series features open PC board construction for reduced cost. It has isolated, 10A, DPDT relay contacts and all connections are 0.25 in (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. The time delay may be ordered as factory fixed, onboard knob, or external adjustment. Time delays from 0.05 - 300 seconds. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Isolated 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Open PCB contruction Reduces cost for OEM applications Accessories P1004-12, P1004-12-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY ORM120A17 120VAC Fixed 7s ORM120A25 120VAC Onboard knob 3 - 300s ORM230A17 230VAC Fixed 7s ORM24D13.5 24VDC/28VDC Fixed 3.5s ORM24D22 24VDC Onboard knob 0.5 - 30s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are isolated. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 26. 310 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/orm Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 0.05 - 300s in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: ±10% Recycle Time After timing - ≤ 16ms; During timing - 0.1% of max. time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110 to 230VAC/DC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption 2.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form DPDT, Isolated Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1x107 ; Electrical - 1x106 Protection Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Isolation Voltage ≥1500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 53.8 mm (2.12”); W 93.7 mm (3.69”); D 47.8 mm (1.88”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C / -30° to 85°C Weight ≅ 2.7 oz (77 g) Selection Guide ORM SERIES Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 311 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/prlm PRLM SERIES L1 N/L2 8-pin octal DPDT Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY PRLM41180 120 V ac Fixed 180 s PRLM423 120 V ac Adjustable 1–60 s Description The PRLM series is designed for use in non-critical timing applications. It offers low cost, knob adjustable timing control, full 10 A relay output, and onboard LED indication. The knob adjustment provides a guaranteed time range of up to 10 minutes in 6 ranges. The onboard LED indicates whether or not the unit is timing (flashing LED) as well as the status of the output. Operation (Delay-on-Make) The time delay is initiated when input voltage is applied. LED flashes during timing. At the end of the delay period, the output contacts energize. LED is on steady after the unit times out. Reset: Reset is accomplished by removal of input voltage. There is no false output when reset during timing. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Electronic circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy + / - 2 % Knob adjustable time delay Guaranteed time range of up to 10 mins in 6 ranges Isolated 10 A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages LED indication Provides relay status both during and after timing Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rate 10 A @ 600 V ac. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix B, page 512, Figure 24 312 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/prlm PRLM SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Digital circuitry Range See "Ordering Information" table Repeat Accuracy ±2 % Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy +/- 5 % Reset Time ≤ 50 ms Recycle Time After timing: ≤ 20 ms During timing: 0.1% of max. time delay or 75 ms, whichever is greater Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ± 5 % Input Voltage 120 V ac Tolerance 120 V ac -20 %–10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 240 V ac; 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1x107 ; Electrical - 1x106 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Indication Type LED Operation During timing - flashing Output energized - on steady Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65 °C / -30° to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC or RB08-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT series sockets is 12 in-lbs. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 313 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tdm-tdmh-tdml TDM / TDMH / TDML SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer L1 N/L2 Wiring Diagram Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY RANGE TDM120AL 120 V ac 1–1023 s in 1 s increments TDM12DL 12 V dc 1–1023 s in 1 s increments TDM230AL 230 V ac 1–1023 s in 1 s increments TDM24AL 24 V ac 1–1023 s in 1 s increments TDM24DL 24 V dc/28 V dc 1–1023 s in 1 s increments TDMH120AL 120 V ac 10 –10230 s in 10 s increments TDMH24AL 24 V ac 10 –10230 s in 10 s increments TDML110DL 110 V dc 0.1 –102.3 s in 0.1 s increments TDML120AL 120 V ac 0.1 –102.3 s in 0.1 s increments TDML12DL 12 V dc 0.1 –102.3 s in 0.1 s increments TDML24DL 24 V dc/28 V dc 0.1 –102.3 s in 0.1 s increments Description The TDM/TDMH/TDML series is a delay-on-make timer that combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, DPDT relay contacts in an industry standard 8-pin plug-in package. DIP switch adjustment allows precise selection of the time delay over the full time delay range. The TDM/TDMH/TDML series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Wide delay range (0.1 s to 2.8 h) User selectable via DIP switches for fine tuning to individual applications. Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy +/- 0.1 % Dip switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy of +/- 2 % Setting accuracy +/- 2 % Provides flexibility for use in most applications LED indication Provides visual indication of time delay status Isolated 10 A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or cc voltages Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10 A @ 600 V ac. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. 314 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tdm-tdmh-tdml TDM / TDMH / TDML SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1–102.3 s in 0.1 s increments 1–1023 s in 1 s increments 10–10,230 s in 10 s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1 % Setting Accuracy ±2 % Reset Time ≤ 150 ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ±5 % Indicator LED glows during timing; relay is de-energized Input Voltage 12, 24, or 110 V dc; 24, 120, or 230 V ac Tolerance 12 V dc & 24 Vdc/ac -15 %–20 % 110 V ac/dc to 230 V ac -20 %–10 % Ac Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac; 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C / -30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC or RB08-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series sockets is 12 in-lbs. Binary Switch Operation Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 315 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tdu-tduh-tdul TDU / TDUH / TDUL SERIES Encapsulated Solid-State, Delay-on-Make Timers Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME RANGE (SEC) TDUL3000A 24 to 120VAC/DC 0.1-102.3 TDUL3001A 100 to 240VAC/DC 0.1-102.3 TDU3000A 24 to 120VAC/DC 1-1023 TDU3001A 100 to 240VAC/DC 1-1023 TDU3003A 120 to 277VC/DC 1-1023 TDUH3000A 24 to 120VAC/DC 10-10230 TDUH3001A 100 to 240VAC/DC 10-10230 If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Description The TDU Series are encapsulated solid-state, delay-on-make timers that combine digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. The TDU offers DIP switch adjustment allowing accurate selection of the time delay over the full time delay range. This series is an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Universal input voltage Meets wide application needs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy +/- 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time, and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 3 time ranges available (0.1s to 2.8h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. L1 N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 316 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tdu-tduh-tdul TDU / TDUH / TDUL SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range* 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1,023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±10% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±5% Input Voltage 24 to 120VAC/DC; 100 to 240VAC/DC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Tolerance ±20% Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Minimum Holding Current 40mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Binary Switch Operation *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 317 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/th1 TH1 SERIES Description The TH1 Series is a solid-state relay and timer combined into one compact, easy-to-use control. This highly reliable device eliminates the need for a separate solid-state relay. When mounted to a metal surface, it can switch load currents up to 20A steady state, and 200A inrush. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer for high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT RATING INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TH1B633 10A 230VAC Onboard 2 - 180s TH1C415 20A 120VAC Fixed 5s TH1C621 20A 230VAC External 0.1 - 3s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. 318 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/th1 Selection Guide Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Currents Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V at rated current OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. TH1 SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 319 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/thd1b4105s THD1B410.5S Description The THD1B410.5S combines accurate timing circuitry with high power solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, timers. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer for high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. 320 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/thd1b4105s Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ rated current OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. THD1B410.5S External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 321 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tmv8000-tsu2000 TMV8000 / TSU2000 SERIES Description The TMV and TSU Series are universal voltage delay-on-make timers. Two models cover all the popular voltages and time delays. Available with knob or external adjust time delay. Its simple two terminals can easily be connected in series with a relay coil, contactor coil, solenoid, lamps, small motor, etc., to delay their energization, prevent short cycling or to sequence on various loads. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Universal AC/DC operating voltage Provides flexibility for use in all systems Totally solid-state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Two terminal series connection with the load Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing systems 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. TMV has knob adjustment. TSU has external adjustment terminals 4 & 5. L1 N/L2 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TMV8000 24 to 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 8m TSU2000 24 to 240VAC/DC External 5 - 480s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Universal Voltage Delay-on-Make Timer TMV8000 TSU2000 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 322 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tmv8000-tsu2000 TMV8000 / TSU2000 SERIES Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Selection Guide Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 5 - 480s (TSU2000) 0.1 - 8m (TMV8000) Repeat Accuracy ±2% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Reset Time ≤ 100ms Input Voltage 24 to 240VAC/DC ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid State Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 55°C Minimum Holding Current ≤ 40mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 70°C / -30° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 323 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/trm TRM SERIES * Description The TRM series is a combination of digital electronic circuitry and electromechanical relay output. It provides input to output isolation with a wide variety of input voltages and time ranges. Standard plug-in base wiring, fast reset, rugged enclosure, and good repeat accuracy make the TRM a select choice in any OEM application. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output relay energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Electronic circuitry with electromechanical relay Repeat Accuracy +/- 2 % Isolated 10 A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages. L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-pin octal DPDT 8-pin octal SPDT V = Voltage RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are isolated. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OUTPUT TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY TRM120A2X30 120 V ac Knob Octal, DPDT +/- 20% 1–30 s TRM120A2Y120 120 V ac Knob Octal, DPDT +/- 10% 2–120 s TRM120A2Y180 120 V ac Knob Octal, DPDT +/- 10% 2–180 s TRM24A8Y5 24 V ac External Octal, SPDT without potentiometer +/- 10% 0.1–5 s TRM24D1X10 24 V dc/28 V dc Fixed Octal, DPDT +/- 20% 10 s TRM24D1X2 24 V dc/28 V dc Fixed Octal, DPDT +/- 20% 2 s 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. 324 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/trm TRM SERIES OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac. OT11PC Octal Socket for UL listing* 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 300 V ac P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10 A @ 600 V ac. P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Selection Guides Function Diagram Specifications Time Delay Type Digital circuitry Range See "Ordering Information" table Repeat Accuracy ± 2 % Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy ± 5, 10, or 20 % Reset Time ≤ 50 ms Recycle Time After timing: ≤ 20 ms During timing: 0.1 % of max. time delay or 75 ms, whichever is greater Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤± 5 % Indicator LED glows after time delay; relay is energized Input Voltage 24 V dc; 24, 120 V ac Tolerance 24 V dc/ac -15 %–20 % 120 V ac -20 %–10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated DPDT or SPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac; 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS between input & output terminals Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Termination Octal 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C / -30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC, RB08-PC, OT11-PC, or RB11-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT series sockets is 12 in-lbs. Accessories External RT P/N Selection Table VALUE PART NUMBER* 100K ohm 100K ohm P1004-95 P1004-95-X *Externally adjustable potentiometers. Numbers with additional "-X" include two pre-soldered 8" wire leads with 1/4" female quick-connect terminals (for clockwise increase). DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 325 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ts1 TS1 SERIES Delay-on-Make Timer Description The TS1 Series offers proven reliability and performance with years of use in OEM equipment and commercial applications. This encapsulated general use timing module is capable of controlling load currents ranging from 5mA to 1A. May be connected in series with contactors, relays, valves, solenoids, small motors, and lamps. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Fixed or external adjustable time delay External time delay settings are adjustable from 0.05s - 10m in 8 ranges for added flexibility 5mA to 1A load current range Minimum holding current of 5mA ensures proper operation with the lightest of loads Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Two terminal series load connections Allows connection in series with contactors, relays, valves, solenoids, small motors and lamps. Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing systems Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TS1211.5 24VAC Fixed 1.5s TS1412 120VAC Fixed 2s TS121150 24VAC Fixed 150s TS14120 120VAC Fixed 20s TS12130 24VAC Fixed 30s TS14130 120VAC Fixed 30s TS1214 24VAC Fixed 4s TS1415 120VAC Fixed 5s TS12190 24VAC Fixed 90s TS1416 120VAC Fixed 6s TS1221 24VAC External 0.05 - 3s TS1421 120VAC External 0.05 - 3s TS1222 24VAC External 0.5 - 60s TS1422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s TS1224 24VAC External 5 - 600S TS1423 120VAC External 2 - 180s TS13115 24VDC Fixed 15s TS1424 120VAC External 5 - 600s TS1321 24VDC External 0.05 - 3s TS1612 230VAC Fixed 2s TS1410.25 120VAC Fixed 0.25s TS1615 230VAC Fixed 5s TS14110 120VAC Fixed 10s TS1621 230VAC External 0.05 - 3s TS141180 120VAC Fixed 180s TS1622 230VAC External 0.5 - 60s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 326 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/ts1 Accessories P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55°C. Available in resistance values from 5KΩ to 5MΩ. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory All Other Voltages 12VDC Time Delay VTP P/N Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 0.05-3s 2 - 0.5-60s 3 - 2-180s 4 - 5-600s VTP4B VTP4F VTP4J VTP5N 1 - 0.05-1s 2 - 0.5-20s 3 - 2-60s 4 - 5-120s VTP2A VTP2E VTP2F VTP2H Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 12VDC 0.05 - 120s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed (1 MΩ max. RT ) Other Voltages 0.05 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Recycle Time After timing – ≤ 16ms During timing – 0.1% of time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Minimum Holding Current 5mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 80°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Selection Chart TS1 SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 327 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tsd1 TSD1 SERIES L1 N/L2 Delay-on-Make Timer Description The TSD1 Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD1 Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75°C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSD1311.2S 24VDC Fixed 1.2s TSD1321 24VDC External 1 - 100s TSD1424 120VAC External 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 328 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make Littelfuse.com/tsd1 Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±1% Input Voltage 12, 24, 120VDC; 24, 120, 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Minimum Holding Current ≤ 40mA Off State Leakage Current ≅ 7mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) TSD1 SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 329 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed Littelfuse.com/ts441165 TS441165 Description The TS441165 is an analog delay-on-make timer with a normally closed solid-state output. Unlike an interval timer, the load is energized prior to and during the time delay period. It can be used as a faster starting interval time delay when S1 is closed upon application of input voltage. Operation (Delay-on-Make NC) Upon application of input voltage, the load is energized immediately. When the initiate switch is closed, the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the load de-energizes. Reset: When the initiate switch is reopened, the load again energizes and the time delay is reset. Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 2% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Load energized prior to and during time delay Faster operation Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Normally closed output Can be used as a faster starting interval time delay Accessories P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. 12 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. TIME DELAY RELAYS 330 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Make, Normally Closed Littelfuse.com/ts441165 Accessories P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55°C. Available in resistance values from 5KΩ to 5MΩ. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 0.05-3s 2 - 0.5-60s 3 - 2-180s 4 - 5-600s VTP4B VTP4F VTP4J VTP5N Selection Guide Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (NORMALLY CLOSED) TS441165 Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 165s Adjustment Fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater; under fixed conditions Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Input Voltage 120VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NC, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) V = Voltage S1 =Initiate Switch L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 331 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/hrdb HRDB SERIES Delay-on-Break Timer Description The HRDB Series combines an electromechanical, relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. The HRDB offers 12 to 230V operation in five options and factory fixed, external, or onboard adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of ±0.5%. The isolated output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. The HRDB is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load UTL = Untimed Load (optional) NO = Normally Open C = Common, Transfer Contact NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are isolated. Dashed lines are internal connections. The untimed load is optional. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY HRDB1110M 12VDC Fixed + / -5% 10m HRDB223 24VAC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10m HRDB117S 12VDC Fixed + / -5% 7s HRDB321 24VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100s HRDB120 12VDC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10s HRDB324 24VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100m HRDB121 12VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100s HRDB423 120VAC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10m HRDB124 12VDC Onboard + / -5% 1 - 100m HRDB623 230VAC Onboard + / -5% 0.1 - 10m HRDB21A65M 24VAC Fixed + / -1% 65m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. 332 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/hrdb HRDB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±1%, ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x 104 , **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 333 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/hrdb HRPS / HRIS SERIES Description The HRPS/HRIS Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 13 standard functions. It offers 12 to 240V operation in two universal ranges and factory fixed, onboard, or external adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of ±0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. The HRPS has non-isolated SPDT relay contacts, and the HRIS has isolated SPDT relay contacts. Both offer the most popular timer functions in the industry. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output (relay or solid state) energizes during the time delay. At the end of time delay the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% , factory calibration +/- 2% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 30A, SPDT, Normally Open output contacts Allows for direct operation of heavy loads Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity L1 N/L2 HRPS Relay contacts are non-isolated. L1 N/L2 HRIS Relay contacts are isolated. S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load (optional) NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load (optional) NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed C = Common A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUST. TIME DELAY FUNCTION HRISW21FT 24 - 240VAC/24 - 110VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Alternating HRISW27I 24 - 240VAC/24 - 110VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10h Interval HRPSD12HI 12 - 48VDC Fixed 2h Interval HRISW25B 24 - 240VAC/24 - 110VDC Onboard 1 - 100m Delay on break If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. 334 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/hrps-hris Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-13 (AWG 10/12) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time ALTERNATING RELAY (TRAILING EDGE FLIP-FLOP) Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±2% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% Input Voltage 12 to 48VDC; 24 to 240VAC/24 to 110VDC Tolerance 12 to 48VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 110VDC/240VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x 104 , **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output; isolated units Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.2 mm (3.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) HRPS / HRIS SERIES V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 335 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/krdb KRDB SERIES Description The KRDB Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDB Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated To protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed UTL = Untimed Load (optional) A knob is supplied for adjustable units. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDB110.1S 12VDC Fixed 0.1s KRDB31120S 24VDC Fixed 20s KRDB112.5S 12VDC Fixed 2.5s KRDB415S 120VAC Fixed 5s KRDB1120M 12VDC Fixed 20m KRDB4160S 120VAC Fixed 60s KRDB115M 12VDC Fixed 5m KRDB420 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDB120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDB421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s KRDB124 12VDC Onboard 1 - 100m KRDB422 120VAC Onboard 10 - 1000s KRDB21180S 24VAC/DC Fixed 180s KRDB423 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m KRDB217S 24VAC/DC Fixed 7s KRDB424 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 336 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/krdb Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Output Current/Ambient Temperature KRDB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller with watchdog circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 40ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24, 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110VDC, 120 or 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 337 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/ksdb KSDB SERIES Description The KSDB Series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltages. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output energizes if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Wiring Diagram V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE KSDB1110MP 12VDC Fixed 10m Positive KSDB314SP 24VDC Fixed 4s Positive KSDB1115SP 12VDC Fixed 15s Positive KSDB315SP 24VDC Fixed 5s Positive KSDB1120SP 12VDC Fixed 20s Positive KSDB324N 24VDC External 1 - 100m Negative KSDB113MP 12VDC Fixed 3m Positive KSDB330N 24VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Negative KSDB113SP 12VDC Fixed 3s Positive KSDB4120M 120VAC Fixed 20m n/a KSDB120P 12VDC External 0.1 - 10s Positive KSDB4160S 120VAC Fixed 60s n/a KSDB134P 12VDC Onboard 1 - 100m Positive KSDB4190M 120VAC Fixed 90m n/a KSDB2115S 24VAC Fixed 15s n/a KSDB431 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a KSDB220 24VAC External 0.1 - 10s n/a KSDB61150S 230VAC Fixed 150s n/a KSDB231 24VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a KSDB631 230VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 338 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/ksdb Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. KSDB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 12, 24, or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10 % Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed before & during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current AC≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A DC Operation Positive or negative switching Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 80°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 339 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/orb ORB SERIES Description The ORB Series’ open PCB construction offers the user good economy without sacrificing performance and reliability. The output relay is available in isolated, 10A, DPDT or SPDT forms. The time delay may be ordered as factory fixed, onboard knob, or external adjustment. All connections are 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Open PCB construction Reduces cost for OEM applications Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Line voltage initiation Separate control voltage is not required for operation Accessories P1004-12, P1004-12-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 SPDT DPDT V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT FORM ORB120A160 120VAC Fixed 60s SPDT ORB120A25 120VAC Onboard 3 - 300s SPDT ORB24A11D 24VAC Fixed 1s DPDT ORB24A21D 24VAC Onboard 0.05 - 3s DPDT ORB24A25 24VAC Onboard 3 - 300s SPDT If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 26. 340 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/orb Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 0.05 - 300s in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: ±10% Reset Time ≤ 50ms Initiate Time ≤ 70ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption 2.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT or DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1x107 ; Electrical - 1x106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥1500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 53.8 mm (2.12”); W 93.7 mm (3.69”); D 47.8 mm (1.88”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C / -30°to 85°C Weight ≅ 2.7 oz (77 g) ORB SERIES Selection Guides Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 341 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tdb-tdbh-tdbl TDB / TDBH / TDBL SERIES Relay Output, Delay-on-Break Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated 11-PIN DPDT Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY RANGE (SEC) LED TYPE PLUG/OUTPUT FORM TDB120AL 120 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB120ALD 120 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDB12D 12 V dc 1–1023 in 1 s increments Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB230AL 230 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB24AL 24 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDB24DL 24 V dc/ 28 V dc 1–1023 in 1s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDBH120AL 120 V ac 10–10230 in 10 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDBH120ALD 120 V ac 10–10230 in 10 s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDBL120AL 120 V ac 0.1–102.3 in 0.1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDBL120ALD 120 V ac 0.1–102.3 in 0.1 s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDBL24DL 24 V dc/ 28 V dc 0.1–102.3 in 0.1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT Description The TDB series combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, 10 A, DPDT or SPDT contacts in an 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in package. The TDB series features DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1–10,230 seconds in three ranges. The TDB series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied to the input before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay is energized. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output deenergizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS 3 time ranges available (0.1 s to 2.8 h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1 % or 20 ms, whichever is greater; Setting Accuracy + / - 2 % or 50 ms, whichever is greater LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of relay status DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. 342 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tdb-tdbh-tdbl TDB / TDBH / TDBL SERIES Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac. OT11PC Octal Socket for UL listing* 11-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 300 V ac P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10 A @ 600 V ac. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1–102.3 s in 0.1 s increments 1–1023 s in 1 s increments 10–10,230 s in 10 s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1 % Setting Accuracy ±2 % Reset Time ≤ 150 ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±5 % Indicator LED indicates relay is energized Initiate Time ≤ 60 ms Input Voltage 12, 24/28 V dc; 24, 120, or 230 V ac Tolerance 12 V dc & 24 V dc/ac -15 %–20 % 120 to 230 V ac/dc -20 %–10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT or DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac; 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS input to output Polarity Dc units reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C / -30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC or RB08-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT series sockets is 12 in-lbs. DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Function Diagram 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 343 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tdub TDUB SERIES L1 N/L2 Description The TDUB Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. Voltages of 24 to 240VAC and 12 to 24VDC are available in three ranges. The TDUB Series offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges. Its 1A rated output, ability to operate on multiple voltages, and wide range of switch selectable time delays make the TDUB Series an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS DIP switch timing adjustment Provides setting accuracy of +/-2% User selectable time delay Timing settings are switch selectable 0.1s - 102.3m in three ranges for added flexibility 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load Delay-on-Break Timer Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE RANGE TIME RANGE TDUB3000A 24 to 120VAC 1-1023s TDUB3002A 12 to 24VDC 1-1023s TDUBH3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1-102.3m TDUBH3001A 100 to 240VAC 0.1-102.3m TDUBL3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1-102.3s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 344 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tdub Specifications Time Delay Range* 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage/Tolerance 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 24VDC /±20% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed before and during timing Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A Off State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C /-40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. TDUB SERIES Add the value of switches in the ON position for the total time delay. Adjustment Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 345 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/thdb THDB SERIES Description The THDB Series combines accurate timing circuitry with high power, solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, timers. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output energizes if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and components costs Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING THDB421A 120VAC External 1 - 100s 6A THDB434C 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m 20A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. 346 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/thdb Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed before & during timing Maximum Load Current Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ rated current Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Minimum Load Current 100mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time THDB SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 347 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/trb TRB SERIES * *8-pin models UL listed when used in combination with P1011-6 socket only. Description The TRB series combines an isolated, 10 A electromechanical relay output with digital timing circuitry. False trigger of the TRB by a transient is unlikely because of the complete isolation of the circuit from the line prior to initiation. The initiate contact is common to one side of the line and may be utilized to operate other loads. Installation is easy due to the TRB’s industry standard 8- or 11-pin plug-in base wiring. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened (trailing edge triggered). The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Complete isolation of circuit from line No false trip due to transients Industry standard 8 or 11-pin connection Provides easy installation and field replacement Isolated, 10 A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages Digital circuitry Repeat accuracy +/- 2 % Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-pin octal SPDT 11-pin DPDT Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OUTPUT FORM TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY TRB120A2Y30 120 V ac Onboard Octal, SPDT +/- 10 % 1–30 s TRB120A3X600 120 V ac Lock shaft Octal, SPDT +/- 20 % 7–600 s TRB120A4Y120 120 V ac Onboard 11-pin, DPDT +/- 10 % 2–120 s TRB24D10Y10 24 V dc/28 V dc Fixed 11-pin, DPDT +/- 10 % 10 s L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. 348 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break TRB SERIES Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac. OT11PC Octal Socket for UL listing* 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 300 V ac P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10 A @ 600 V ac. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Type Digital circuitry Range See "Ordering Information" table Repeat Accuracy ±2 % Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy ±5, 10, or 20 % Initiate Time ≤ 70 ms Reset Time ≤ 75 ms Recycle Time ≤ 250 ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤±5 % Input Voltage 24/28 V dc; 120 V ac Indicator LED indicates relay is energized Tolerance 24V dc/ac -15 %–20 % 120 V ac -20 %–10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated SPDT or DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS between input to output Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C / -30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC, RB08-PC, OT11-PC, or RB11-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT series sockets is 12 in-lbs. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 349 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tsb TSB SERIES Description The TSB Series is a totally solid-state, delay-on-break timing module. The TSB Series is available with a fixed, external, or onboard adjustable time delay. Time Delays from 0.05 to 600 seconds, in 4 standard ranges, cover over 90% of all OEM and commercial appliance timing applications. The repeat accuracy is ±2%. Operating voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC are available. The TSB’s 1A steady state, 10A rated, solid-state output is perfect for direct control of solenoids, contactors, relays, lamps, buzzers, and small heaters. The TSB Series can be surface mounted with a single screw, or snapped on a 35 mm DIN rail using the P1023-20 adaptor. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch opens. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the output and the time delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide time delay range Meets almost all OEM and commercial appliance timing applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSB2190 24VAC Fixed 90s TSB434 120VAC Onboard 5 - 600s TSB222 24VAC External 0.5 - 60s TSB632 230VAC Onboard 0.5 - 60s TSB41300 120VAC Fixed 300s TSB634 230VAC Onboard 5 - 600s TSB422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 350 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tsb Accessories P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Selection Guide Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TSB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.05s - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed before & during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 351 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tsdb TSDB SERIES Description The TSDB Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size, and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the time delay. The TSDB Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes. The time delay begins when the initiate switch is opened. The output remains energized during timing. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reclosing the initiate switch during timing resets the time delay. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide temperature range: -40° to 75°C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Accessories P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TSDB320P 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s Positive TSDB421 120VAC External 1 - 100s n/a TSDB431 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s n/a If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 352 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Delay-on-Break Littelfuse.com/tsdb Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-BREAK (OFF-DELAY) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay t = Incomplete Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TSDB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±15% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10 % Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed before & during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A DC Operation Positive or negative switching Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°F / -40° to 85°F Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 353 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/hrds HRDS SERIES Single Shot Timer Wiring Diagram Description The HRDS Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five options and factory fixed, onboard or external adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of ±0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load C = Common, Transfer Contact NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are not isolated. L1 N/L2 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY HRDS120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s HRDS313M 24VDC Fixed 3m HRDS321 24VDC Onboard 1 - 100s HRDS421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s HRDS430 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. 354 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/hrds HRDS SERIES Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±1%, ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, non-isolated Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x 104 , **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 51.3 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C/-40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 355 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/hspza22sl HSPZA22SL Description The HSPZA22SL is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 13 standard functions. The HSPZA22SL offers dual switch adjustable timer or counter functions. Switch adjustment allows accurate selection of the time delay or number of counts the first time and every time. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations, typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The HSPZA22SL is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, solid state reliability, and accurate switch adjustment. Operation (Single Shot Lockout) Upon application of input voltage and momentary or maintained closure of S1, the output relay energizes and TD1 single shot time delay begins. The output relay de-energizes at the end of TD1 and the TD2 lockout time delay begins. During TD2 (and TD1) closing switch S1 has no effect on the operation. After TD2 is complete, closing S1 starts another operation. If S1 is closed when input voltage is applied, the output energizes and the TD1 time delay begins. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delays and the output and returns the cycle to the first delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% User selectable time delay Timing settings are switch selectable 0.1s - 1023h in a dual switch timer function for added flexibility 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid-state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) L1 N/L2 S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load V = Voltage Wiring Diagram 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 18. 356 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/hspza22sl Switch Adjustment Function Diagrams SINGLE SHOT / LOCKOUT V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 1-1023s, m or h in 1s, m or h increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Count Range 1 - 1023 in 2 ranges Count Rate ≤ 25 counts per second Input Voltage 24 to 240VAC Tolerance ≤ ±15% AC Line Frequency/ DC Ripple 50/60Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid-state output Rating 1A steady, 10A inrush for 16ms Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 240VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Counter Output Output pulse width: 300ms ±20% Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.2 mm (3.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) HSPZA22SL 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 357 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols KRDS SERIES Single Shot Wiring Diagram Description The KRDS Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDS Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated To protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed UTL = Untimed Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. A knob is supplied for adjustable units. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDS1135M 12VDC Fixed 35m KRDS120 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDS221 24VAC/DC Onboard 1 - 100s KRDS420 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s KRDS421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s KRDS424 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m KRDS430 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s If desired part number is not listed, please call us to see if it is technically possible to build. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 358 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/krds KRDS SERIES Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Output Current/Ambient Temperature Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller with watchdog circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 40ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110VDC, 120VAC or 230VAC -20%- 10% AC Line Frequency /DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C/-40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 359 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/ksds KSDS SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The KSDS Series is ideal for applications that require momentary start interval timing including dispensing, exposure timing, or pulse shaping. This series is available for both AC and DC voltages. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration +/- 5% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE KSDS1115SP 12VDC Fixed 15s Positive KSDS230 24VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s n/a KSDS320P 24VAC External 0.1 - 10s Positive KSDS415M 120VAC Fixed 5m n/a KSDS420 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s n/a If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 360 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/ksds KSDS SERIES Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10 % Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A DC Operation Positive or negative switching Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 361 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/ors ORS SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The ORS Series’ open PCB construction offers the user good economy without sacrificing performance and reliability. The output relay is available in isolated, 10A, DPDT or SPDT forms. The time delay may be ordered as factory fixed, onboard knob, or external adjustment. All connections are 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Open PCB construction Reduces cost without sacrificing performance and reliability Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Line voltage initiation Separate control voltage is not required for operation Accessories P1004-12, P1004-12-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 SPDT DPDT V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT FORM ORS120A150SD 120VAC Fixed 50s DPDT ORS230A150SD 230VAC Fixed 50s DPDT If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 26. 362 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/ors ORS SERIES Selection Guide Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 0.05 - 300s in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) Adjustable: guaranteed range Fixed: ±10% Reset Time ≤ 50ms Initiate Time ≤ 70ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 24VAC -15% - 20% 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption 2.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT or DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1x107 ; Electrical - 1x106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥1500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with four #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 53.8 mm (2.12”); W 93.7 mm (3.69”); D 47.8 mm (1.88”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C / -30° to 85°C Weight ≅ 2.7 oz (77 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 363 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/prs65 PRS65 Single Shot Timer Wiring Diagram Description The PRS65 is a single shot time delay relay for use on noncritical timing applications. The knob adjustable time delay carries a guaranteed time range of up to 8 minutes. Operation Power must be applied to the input at all times prior to and during timing. Upon closure of the initiate switch (momentary or maintained) the output contacts transfer and the time delay is initiated. At the end of the delay interval, the output contacts revert to their original position. If the initiate switch is reclosed during timing, the time delay will not be affected. Features & Benefits J Electronic Circuit with Electromechanical Relay J Popular Operating Voltages J Octal Plug-in J Hold Down Clamps Available Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 holddown clips. 3 INITIATE INPUT VOLTAGE OCTAL, SPDT 4 5 6 7 1 8 2 Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 7 to 480 seconds Repeat Accuracy ±2% under fixed conditions Tolerance Knob adjustable: guaranteed range Reset Time 80ms max. Recycle Time After Timing 16ms max. During Timing 0.1% of max. time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater Time Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage 15% max. Input Voltage 230VAC, nominal Tolerance ±15% of nominal AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Relay Form Single Pole, Double Throw Rating 10 amperes resistive at 240VAC Protection Transient ±1500 volts for 150 microseconds Dielectric Breakdown ≥1500 V rms min. at 60 Hz between input and output terminals Mechanical Mounting Plug in (hold-down clips for panel mounting also available) Termination Standard Octal Plug-in Dimensions H 92.2 mm (3.63”); W 60.45 mm (2.38”); D 44.45 mm (1.75”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C / -30° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight Approx. 6 oz (170 g) 8-PIN 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 515, Figure 48. 364 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tds-tdsh-tdsl TDS / TDSH / TDSL SERIES Relay Output, Single Shot Time Delay Relay * Description The TDS series combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, 10 A rated, DPDT or SPDT relay contacts in an 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in package. The TDS series features DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1s to 10,230 s in three ranges. The TDS series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied to the input before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output relay energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS 3 time ranges available (0.1 s to 2.8 h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy +/- 0.1 % or 20 ms, whichever is greater; Setting Accuracy +/- 2 % or 50 ms, whichever is greater LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of relay status DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT 11-PIN DPDT S1 = Initiate Switch Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY RANGE (SEC) LED PLUG TYPE/OUTPUT FORM TDS120AL 120 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDS120ALD 120 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X 11-pin plug, DPDT TDS12D 12 V dc 1–1023 in 1 s increments Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDS230AL 230 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDS24AL 24 V ac 1–1023 in 1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDSH120AL 120 V ac 10–10230 in 10 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT TDSL120AL 120 V ac 0.1–102.3 in 0.1 s increments X Octal (8-pin) plug, SPDT 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 365 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tds-tdsh-tds TDS / TDSH / TDSL SERIES Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac. OT11PC Octal Socket for UL listing* 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 300 V ac P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10 A @ 600 V ac. Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1–102.3 s in 0.1 s increments 1–1023 s in 1 s increments 10–10,230 s in 10 s increments Repeat Accuracy ± 0.1 % Setting Accuracy ± 2 % Reset Time ≤ 150 ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ± 5 % Indicator LED glows during timing; relay is energized Initiate Time ≤ 60 ms Input Voltage 12 V dc; 24, 120, or 230 V ac Tolerance 12 V dc & 24 V dc/ac -15 %–20 % 110 to 230 V dc/ac -20 %–10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT or DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS input to output Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C/-30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC, RB08-PC, OT11-PC, or RB11-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series sockets is 12 in-lbs. SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Function Diagram 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 366 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tdus TDUS SERIES L1 N/L2 Single Shot Timer Description The TDUS Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. Voltages of 24 to 240VAC and 12 to 24VDC are available in three ranges. The TDUS Series offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges. Its 1A rated output, ability to operate on multiple voltages, and wide range of switch selectable time delays make the TDUS Series an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME RANGE TDUS3000A 24 to 120VAC 1 - 1023s TDUS3001A 100 to 240VAC 1 - 1023s TDUS3002A 12 to 24VDC 1 - 1023s TDUSH3001A 100 to 240VAC 0.1 - 102.3m TDUSL3000A 24 to 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 367 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tdus Specifications Time Delay Range* 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±2% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage/Tolerance 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 24VDC /±20% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A Off State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1 mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. TDUS SERIES Adjustment Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 368 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/thc-ths THC / THS SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The THC/THS Series is a solid-state relay and timer combined into one compact, easy-to-use control. When mounted to a metal surface, the THC/THS Series may be used to directly control lamp or heater loads of up to 20A steady, 200A inrush. Its single shot function can perform dispensing and pulse shaping operations. The initiate switch can be a momentary or maintained type of switch. Time delays can be selected from 0.1 - 600 seconds in 4 ranges. The THC/THS Series is used for coin vending applications where fast initiate response is required. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch opens. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING THC421C 120VAC External 0.1 - 3s 20A THS422B 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s 10A THS422C 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s 20A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 369 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/thc-ths THC / THS SERIES Selection Guide Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Currents Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V at rated current OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 370 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/thds THDS SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The THDS Series combines accurate timing circuitry with high power solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, timers. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output energizes if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration +/- 1% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Timed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING THDS410.25SA 120VAC Fixed 0.25s 6A THDS431C 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s 20A THDS610.25SA 230VAC Fixed 0.25s 6A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 371 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/thds THDS SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ rated current Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Minimum Load Current 100mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 372 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/trs TRS SERIES * Description The TRS series combines an isolated, 10 A electromechanical, relay output with digital timing circuitry. False trigger of the TRS series by a transient is unlikely because of the complete isolation of the circuit from the line prior to initiation. The initiate contact is common to one side of the line and may be utilized to operate other loads. Installation is easy due to the TRS’s industry standard 8 or 11-pin plug-in base wiring. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied to the input before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch (leading edge triggered), the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. Applying input voltage with the initiate switch closed will energize the load and begin the time delay. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Complete isolation of circuit from line No false trip due to transients Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Isolated, 10 A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages Digital circuitry Repeat accuracy +/- 2 % Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT 11-PIN SPDT Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT OUTPUT FORM TIME TOLERANCE TIME DELAY TRS120A2X300 120 V ac Knob 8-Pin, Octal, SPDT +/- 20 % 7–300s TRS120A2Y10 120 V ac Knob 8-Pin, Octal, SPDT +/- 10 % 0.1–10s TRS24D7Z10 24 V dc/28 V dc External 11-Pin, SPDT no potentiometer +/- 5 % 0.1–10s 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 373 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/trs TRS SERIES Accessories P1011-6 Octal Socket for UL listing* 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated 10 A @ 600 V ac. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac. OT11PC Octal Socket for UL listing* 11-pin surface & DIN rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 300 V ac C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Selection Guides * Externally adjustable potentiometers. Numbers with additional “-X” include two pre-soldered 8” wire leads with 1/4” female quick-connect terminals (for clockwise increase). External RT P/N Selection Table VALUE PART NUMBER* 100K ohm 100K ohm P1004-95 P1004-95-X Specifications Time Delay Type Digital circuitry Range See "Ordering Information" table Repeat Accuracy ± 2 % Fixed Time Tolerance & Setting Accuracy ± 5, 10, or 20 % Initiate Time ≤ 70 ms Reset Time ≤ 75 ms Recycle Time ≤ 250 ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤± 5 % Input Voltage 24/28 V dc; 24, 120 V ac Tolerance 24 V dc/ac -15 %–20 % 120 V ac -20 %–10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated SPDT or DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac & 28 V dc; 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS between input & output terminals Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in or 11-pin plug-in Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C/-30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* 4 oz (113 g) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC, RB08-PC, OT11-PC, or RB11-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer’s recommended screw terminal torque for the OT series sockets is 12 in-lbs. SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Function Diagram 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 374 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tsds TSDS SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The TSDS Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the time delay. The TSDS Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. This product is suitable for many applications, including dispensing, welding, and exposure timing. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will not energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% 1A Steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide temperature range: -40° to 75°C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. V = Voltage L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TSDS2110S 24VAC Fixed 10s n/a TSDS320N 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s Negative TSDS321P 24VDC External 1 - 100s Positive TSDS421 120VAC External 1 - 100s n/a If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 375 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tsds TSDS SERIES Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±15% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A Off State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA DC Operation Positive or negative switching Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 376 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tss TSS SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The TSS Series is a totally solid-state timing module. Its 1A rated, solid-state output provides an excellent method of time control for exposures, dispensing, or for increasing or decreasing a switch closure. Time delays from 0.05 to 600 seconds, in 4 ranges, cover 90% of all OEM applications. Factory calibration of fixed delays is ±5% and the repeat accuracy is ±2%. The TSS Series can be surface mounted with a single screw, or snapped on a 35mm DIN rail using the P1023-20 accessory adaptor. Operation (Single Shot) Voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of the initiate switch, the output energizes for a measured interval of time. At the end of the delay, the output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing the initiate switch during timing has no affect on the time delay. The output will energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when the time delay is complete and the initiate switch opens. Loss of input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Surface or DIN rail mounting Provides flexibility for installation Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSS410.5 120VAC Fixed 0.5s TSS421 120VAC External 0.05 - 3s TSS422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s TSS424 120VAC External 5 - 600s TSS622 230VAC External 0.5 - 60s TSS624 230VAC External 5 - 600s If desired part number is not listed, please call us to see if it is technically possible to build. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 377 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tss TSS SERIES Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Selection Guide Function Diagram SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.05s - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature - 40° to 75°C / - 40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 378 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/erdi ERDI SERIES Description Econo-Timers are a combination of digital electronics and an electromechanical relay. DPDT relay output for relay logic circuits, and isolation of input to output voltages. For applications, such as interval on, pulse shaping, minimum run time, etc. The ERD Series is encapsulated to protect the circuitry from shock, vibration and humidity. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, time delay begins, and output relay energizes. At the end of time delay, output de-energizes until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Operation (Single Shot) Input voltage must be applied before and during timing. Upon momentary or maintained closure of initiate switch, output relay energizes for time delay. At the end of the delay, output de-energizes. Opening or reclosing initiate switch during timing has no affect on time delay. Output will energize if initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Reset: Reset occurs when time delay is complete & initiate switch is opened. Loss of input voltage resets time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration +/ - 10% Isolated, 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-16, P1004-16-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY ERDI436 120VAC External 0.6 - 60s ERDI6210 230VAC Onboard 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram 2-3 & 7-6 are Normally Open Contacts (NO) 2-4 & 7-5 are Normally Closed Contacts (NC) L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 INTERVAL SINGLE SHOT L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 379 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/erdi Selection Guides Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time SINGLE SHOT (PULSE FORMER) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1s - 500m in 11 adjustable ranges, 0.1s - 1000m fixed Adjustment External adjust or onboard Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 120VAC or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120VDC/AC & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 43.2 mm (1.7”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 65°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 5.7 oz (162 g) ERDI SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 380 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/hrdi HRDI SERIES Description The HRDI Series combines an electromechanical relay output with microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five ranges and factory fixed, external, or onboard adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of ±0.5%. The output contact rating allows for direct operation of heavy loads, such as compressors, pumps, blower motors, heaters, etc. This series is ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output relay is energized during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy +/- 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. L1 N/L2 C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open L = Load NOTE: A knob, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. RT Tis used when external adjustment is ordered. Relay contacts are not isolated. Interval Timer Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY HRDI117S 12VDC Fixed 7s HRDI421 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s HRDI422 120VAC Onboard 10 - 1000s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 381 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/hrdi HRDI SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±1%, ±5% Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, non-isolated Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105, *3 x 104, **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 51.3 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 382 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/krdi KRDI SERIES Description The KRDI Series is a compact time-delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDI Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output relay energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KRDI120 12VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI121 12VDC Onboard knob 1 - 100s KRDI122 12VDC Onboard knob 10 - 1000s KRDI2110S 24VAC/VDC Fixed 10s KRDI2160S 24VAC/VDC Fixed 60s KRDI220 24VAC/VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI320 24VDC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI420 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s KRDI424 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. Relay contacts are isolated. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 383 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/krdi Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110VDC, 120VAC or 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) External Resistance vs. Time Delay Output Current/Ambient Temperature Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time KRDI SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 384 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/ksd2 KSD2 SERIES L1 N/L2 Interval Timer Description The KSD2 Series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for input voltages of 24, 120 or 230VAC. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. An excellent choice for most OEM pulse shaping, maximum run time, and other process control applications. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -5% time delay accuracy Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Wiring Diagram RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE VAC ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY KSD2221 24 External 1 - 100s KSD2413M 120 Fixed 3m KSD2420 120 External 0.1 - 10s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 385 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/ksd2 Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time KSD2 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 386 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/kspu KSPU SERIES L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Description The KSPU Series is a factory programmed module available in any 1 of 14 standard functions. The KSPU offers a single adjustable timer or counter function. Switch adjustment allows accurate selection of the time delay or number of counts the first time and every time. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations, typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KSPU Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, solid state reliability, and accurate switch adjustment. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load UTL = Untimed Load Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY/COUNTS FUNCTION KSPUA2I 24 to 240VAC 1 - 1023s Interval KSPUA8C 24 to 240VAC 1 - 1023 counts (binary) with pulsed output Counter with pulsed output If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 387 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/kspu Specifications Time Delay Range* 0.1 - 102.3s, m or h in 0.1s, m or h increments 1 - 1023s, m or h in 1s, m or h increments 1 - 63s or m in 1s or m increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±1% or 20 ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage/Tolerance 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 120VDC/≤ ±15% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz/≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state Form NO, SPST-NO Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush for 16ms Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A Off State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 240VAC; DC ≅ 1 mA Counter Output Output pulse width: 300ms ±20% Time Delay/Counts Variable 7 & 8 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. KSPU SERIES Adjustment Switch Operation * * for selecting time in minutes or seconds Adjustment Switch Operation Function Diagrams DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 388 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tdi-tdih-tdil TDI / TDIH / TDIL SERIES Wiring Diagram MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY LED TDI120AL 120 V ac 1–1023 s in 1 s increments Yes TDI12D 12 V dc 1–1023 s in 1 s increments No TDIH24AL 24 V ac 10–10,230 s in 10 s increments Yes TDIL120AL 120 V ac 0.1–102.3 s in 0.1 s increments Yes TDIL24DL 24 V dc/28 V dc 0.1–102.3 s in 0.1 s increments Yes L1 N/L2 Relay contacts are isolated. Description The TDI series is an interval timer that combines accurate digital circuitry with isolated, 10 A rated, DPDT relay contacts in an 8-pin plug-in package. The TDI series features DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 to 10,230 seconds in three ranges. The TDI series is the product of choice for custom control panel and OEM designers. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output relay is energized during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1 %, Setting accuracy + / - 2 % Isolated, 10 A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for ac or dc voltages DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of timing and output status Accessories OT08PC 8-pin Octal Socket for UL listing* Octal Socket for plug-in units. 8-pin surface & DIN-rail mountable. Rated for 10 A @ 600 V ac. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Ordering Information 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 389 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tdi-tdih-tdil TDI / TDIH / TDIL SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1–102.3 s in 0.1 s increments 1–1023 s in 1 s increments 10 – 10,230 s in 10 s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1 % Setting Accuracy ±2 % Reset Time ≤ 150 ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±5 % Indicator LED glows during timing; relay is energized Input Voltage 12, 24 V dc; 24, 120 V ac Tolerance 12 V dc & 24 V dc/Ac -15 %–+20 % 120 V ac -20 %–+10 % AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form DPDT Rating 10 A resistive @ 120/240 V ac; 1/3 hp @ 120/240 V ac Life Mechanical - 1 x107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Polarity Dc units are reverse polarity protected Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500 V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 44.45 mm (1.75”); W 60.33 mm (2.38”); D (with socket) 104.78 mm (4.13”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20 °C to 65 °C / -30 °C to 85 °C Weight ≅ 4 oz (113 g) Safety Marks UL (socket required)* UL 508 (E57310) *UL Listed when used with Part Number OT08-PC or RB08-PC manufactured by Custom Connector Corp. Note: Manufacturer's recommended screw terminal torque for the OT Series sockets is 12 in-lbs. Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 390 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tdui-tduih-tduil TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL SERIES Description The TDUI Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation. Voltages of 24 to 240VAC and 12 to 24VDC are available in three ranges. The TDUI Series offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges. Its 1A rated output, ability to operate on multiple voltages, and wide range of switch selectable time delays make the TDUI Series an excellent choice for process control systems and OEM equipment. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide voltage ranges Flexibility to handle multiple voltages found in control systems and OEM applications DIP switch Adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY TDUI3000A 24 to 120VAC 1 - 1023s TDUIH3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1 - 102.3m TDUIL3001A 100 to 240VAC 0.1 - 102.3s TDUIL3002A 12 to 24VDC 0.1 - 102.3s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 391 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tdui-tduih-tduil Specifications Time Delay Range* 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 24 to 240VAC, 12 to 24VDC ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W DC Ripple ≤ 10% Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC≅ 1mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. TDUI / TDUIH / TDUIL SERIES Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 392 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/thd2 THD2 SERIES Description The THD2 Series combines accurate timing circuitry with high power solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, Digi-Power timers. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct control of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and components costs Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL OUTPUT RATING INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY THD2C420 20A 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s THD2C423 20A 120VAC External 0.1 - 10m THD2C433 20A 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m THD2C620 20A 230VAC External 0.1 - 10s THD2C633 20A 230VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 393 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/thd2 External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time THD2 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V at rated current OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 394 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/thd7 THD7 SERIES Description The THD7 Series utilizes only two terminals connected in series with the load. Interval timing mode is achieved by using a small portion of the AC sine wave allowing sufficient voltage for circuit operation. The THD7 Series can be used for interval or delay-onbreak timing. It is designed to operate large loads directly, such as motors, heater elements, and motor starters. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the time delay begins. The output remains energized throughout the time delay. At the end of the time delay the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until power is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Upon closure of SW1, the load energizes and the timer is reset (zero voltage across its input terminals). Opening SW1 re-applies input voltage to the timer, the load remains energized and the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay the output de-energizes. If SW1 is open when power is applied, the load will energize for the time delay then de-energize. Reset: Reclosing SW1 resets the timer. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs Accessories P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OUTPUT RATING THD7421A 120VAC External 1 - 100s 6A THD7621C 230VAC External 1 - 100s 20A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. INTERVAL DELAY-ON-BREAK 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 395 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/thd7 Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55°C. Available in resistance values from 5KΩ to 5MΩ. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 1-100s 2 - 10-1000s 3 - 0.1-10m 4 - 1-100m 5 - 10-1000m VTP5G VTP5K VTP5N VTP5P VTP5R Selection Guide THD7 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 1s - 1000m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Recycle Time After timing: ≤150ms; During timing: ≤ 350ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Rating Output Steady State Inrush** A 6A 60A B 10A 100A C 20A 200A Effective Voltage Drop (VLine-VLoad) Input Effective Drop 24VAC ≤ 3V 120VAC ≤ 3V 230VAC ≤ 5V Minimum Load Current 100mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-BREAK L S1 = Initiate Switch O = Output L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Function Diagrams 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 396 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/ts2-ts6 TS2 / TS6 SERIES Description The TS2 Series is designed for 24, 120 or 230VAC and the TS6 Series is designed for 12 or 24VDC. These series are capable of controlling load currents of up to 1A steady state, 10A inrush. Encapsulated circuitry and the reliability of a ±2% repeat accuracy make the TS2 and TS6 ideal for cost sensitive applications. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Rated for operation up to 75°C Can be used in the harshest environments Accessories A B P1004-XX (fig. A), P1004-XX-X (fig. B) Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Note: TS6 is not reverse polarity protected. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TS22120 24VAC Fixed 20s n/a TS2424 120VAC External 5 - 600s n/a TS2223 24VAC External 2 - 180s n/a TS6116P 12VDC Fixed 6s Positive TS2412 120VAC Fixed 2s n/a TS6122P 12VDC External 0.5 - 20s Positive TS24130 120VAC Fixed 30s n/a TS6123P 12VDC External 2 - 60s Positive TS2421 120VAC External 0.05 - 3s n/a TS6321P 24VDC External 0.05 - 3s Positive TS2422 120VAC External 0.5 - 60s n/a TS6323P 24VDC External 2 - 180s Positive TS2423 120VAC External 2 - 180s n/a If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 TS2 TS6 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 397 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/ts2-ts6 Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55°C. Available in resistance values from 5KΩ to 5MΩ. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory TS6 12VDC Time Delay VTP P/N Versa-Pot (potentiometer) Fig. A P/N Fig. B P/N 1 - 0.05-1s 2 - 0.5-20s 3 - 2-60s 4 - 5-120s VTP2A VTP2E VTP2F VTP2H P1004-16 P1004-16 P1004-16 P1004-16 P1004-16-X P1004-16-X P1004-16-X P1004-16-X TS2 & TS6 All Other Voltages Time Delay VTP P/N Versa-Pot (potentiometer) Fig. A P/N Fig. B P/N 1 - 0.05-3s 2 - 0.5-60s 3 - 2-180s 4 - 5-600s VTP4B VTP4F VTP4J VTP5N P1004-12 P1004-12 P1004-12 P1004-13 P1004-12-X P1004-12-X P1004-12-X P1004-13-X Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TS2 / TS6 SERIES Selection Guide Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 12VDC 0.05 - 120s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed (1 MΩ max. RT ) Other Voltages 0.05 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24 or20VAC Tolerance ±15% DC Ripple 10% Power Consumption DC ≤ 1W; AC ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop DC ≅ 1.0V @ 1A; AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Polarity TS6 is not reverse polarity protected Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 398 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tsd2 TSD2 SERIES L1 N/L2 Interval Timer Description The TSD2 Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is energized during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75°C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSD2411S 120VAC Fixed 1s TSD24145S 120VAC Fixed 45s TSD241600S 120VAC Fixed 600s TSD2434 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 399 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tsd2 Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagaram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TSD2 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±1% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 400 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tsd6 TSD6 SERIES (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Interval Timer Description The TSD6 Series offers total solid-state, interval timing for 12 or 24VDC applications. This series provides either negative or positive switching. The TSD6 Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD6 Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output energizes during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75°C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Wiring Diagram RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY SWITCHING MODE TSD6113SP 12VDC Fixed 3s Positive TSD61115SP 12VDC Fixed 15s Positive TSD6113SN 12VDC Fixed 3s Negative TSD6310.8SN 24VDC Fixed 0.8s Negative TSD631380SP 24VDC Fixed 380s Positive TSD6320P 24VDC External 0.1 - 10s Positive If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 401 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tsd6 Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TSD6 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±1% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC Tolerance ±15% DC Ripple ±10% Power Consumption ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state, positive or negative switching Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop ≅ 1.0V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity Units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 402 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tsd7 TSD7 SERIES L1 N/L2 Interval/Delay-on-Break Timer Description The TSD7 Series utilizes only two terminals connected in series with the load. Interval timing mode period is achieved by using a small portion of the AC sine wave allowing sufficient voltage for circuit operation. It can be used as an interval timer to control or pulse shape the operation of contactors, solenoids, relays, and lamp loads. The TSD7 Series can be wired to delay on the break of a switch for energy saving fan delays. Operation (Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the time delay begins. The output remains energized throughout the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes and remains de-energized until power is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and the output. Operation (Delay-on-Break) Upon closure of SW1, the load is energized and the timer is reset (zero volts across its input terminals). Opening SW1 reapplies input voltage to the timer, the load remains energized and the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output de-energizes. If SW1 is open when power is applied, the load will energize for the time delay then de-energize. Reset: Reclosing SW1 resets the timer. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75°C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Two terminal series load connections Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing systems Wiring Diagram V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Interval Delay-on- Break Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TSD7412S 120VAC Fixed 2s TSD761120S 230VAC Fixed 120s TSD7414M 120VAC Fixed 4m TSD761180S 230VAC Fixed 180s TSD7421 120VAC External 1 - 100s TSD7611S 230VAC Fixed 1s TSD7423 120VAC External 0.1 - 10m TSD7621 230VAC External 1 - 100s TSD7424 120VAC External 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 403 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Interval Littelfuse.com/tsd7 Accessories P1004-13, P1004-13-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting Bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55°C. Available in resistance values from 5KΩ to 5MΩ. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 1-100s 2 - 10-1000s 3 - 0.1-10m VTP5G VTP5K VTP5N 4 - 1-100m 5 - 10-1000m VTP5P VTP5R Selection Guide Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 1s - 1000m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Recycle Time ≤ 400ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, closed during timing Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 45°C Minimum Load Current 40mA Effective Voltage Drop (VLine-VLoad) Input Effective Drop 24VAC 3V 120VAC 4V 230VAC 6V Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagrams INTERVAL (IMPULSE-ON) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-BREAK L S1 = Initiate Switch O = Output L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time TSD7 SERIES V = Voltage S1 =Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact O = Output L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 404 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Retriggerable Single Shot Littelfuse.com/krd9 KRD9 SERIES Wiring Diagram Description The KRD9 Series microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Retriggerable Single Shot) Function Type A (Output Initially De-energized): Input voltage must be applied prior to and during timing. When the initiate switch is closed, (momentary or maintained) the output energizes and the time delay starts. On completion of the delay, the output de-energizes. The unit will time out if S1 remains in the open or closed position for the full time delay. Reclosing the initiate switch resets the time delay and restarts timing; the output remains energized. The output will not energize if the initiate switch is closed when input voltage is applied. Function Type B (Output Initially Energized): Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the time delay starts. At the end of the time delay, the load de-energizes. The unit will time out if S1 remains in the open or closed position for the full time delay. Closing (re-closing) the initiate switch resets the time delay and restarts timing; the output remains energized. Reset: The time delay and the output are reset when input voltage is removed. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated circuitry Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact UTL = Untimed Load (optional) A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY FUNCTION TYPE KRD9120B 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Energized KRD92115MA 24VAC/DC Fixed 15m De-energized KRD92115MB 24VAC/DC Fixed 15m Energized KRD9220B 24VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Energized KRD93115MA 24VDC Fixed 15m De-energized KRD9423B 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m Energized If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 405 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Retriggerable Single Shot Littelfuse.com/krd9 KRD9 SERIES Accessories P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Output Current/Ambient Temperature Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller based with watchdog circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 40ms; ≤ 750 operations per minute Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - +20% 110VDC, 120 or 230VAC -20% - +10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reversed polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2.0”); W 50.8 mm (2.0”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40°to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) Function Diagram RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSD) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 406 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Retriggerable Single Shot Littelfuse.com/tsd94110sb TSD94110SB Retriggerable Single-Shot Timer Wiring Diagram Description The TSD94110SB retriggerable single-shot timer is designed for a variety of appllcations. Its digital circuit provides long or short delays with accuracy and stability over a wide voltage and temperature range. It is the ideal timer for pulse-train monitoring of programmable controllers, or any system requiring motion detection. Operation A Type Power must be applied to input at all times prior to and during timing. Upon closure of initiate switch (momentary or maintained) the load is energized and the time delay is started. On completion of the delay period the load is de-energized. Should the initiate switch be reclosed during timing, the delay will be reset to zero and restarted. Operation B Type Upon application of input power, the load is energized and a time delay is started. At the end of the time delay, the load is de-energized. Should the initiate switch be closed or reclosed during timing, the delay is reset to zero and restarted. Features & Benefits J Excellent Pulse Train Monitor J Totally Solid State and Encapsulated J Microcontroller Circuitry J Fast Reset to Zero During Timing J Excellent Accuracy and Reliability J DC Units are Reverse Polarity Protected Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range Factory fixed 10s Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±1% Recycle Time 300ms max. Time Delay vs. Temp. & Voltage ±2% Initiate Timing 16ms max. AC Input Operating Voltage 120 volts AC Tolerance ±15% Output Type Solid State Form Normally open Rating 1 ampere steady state, 10 amperes inrush at 55°C Voltage Drop AC 2.5 volts typical at 1 ampere Protection Transient Protected Dielectric 1500 volts RMS Insulation Resistance 100 megohms minimum 4.4 Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 or #1O screw Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Package Molded housing with encapsulated circuitry Dimensions H 50.80 mm (2.00”); W 50.80 mm (2.00”); D 30.70 mm (1.21”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40°C to 60°C / -40°C to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight Approx. 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagram RETRIGGERABLE SINGLE SHOT (MOTION DETECTOR) (PSE) V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact t = Incomplete Time Delay TD = Time Delay R = Reset V = Voltage L = Timed Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. L1 N/L2 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 407 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/erd3425A ERD3425A L1 N/L2 A knob, or terminals 9 &10 are only included on adjustable units. Relay contacts are isolated. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Description Econo-Timers are a combination of digital electronics and a reliable electromechanical relay. DPDT relay output for relay logic circuits, and isolation of input to output voltages. Cost effective for OEM applications, such as duty cycling, drying, washing, signaling, and flashing. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital integrated circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 10% Isolated, 10A, DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-16, P1004-16-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. 408 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/erd3425A ERD3425A Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range 0.1s - 500m in 11 adjustable ranges 0.1s - 1000m fixed Adjustment Knob, external adjust, or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±10% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12, 24, or 120VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120VAC/DC & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 43.2 mm (1.7”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 65°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 5.7 oz (162 g) Selection Guides Function Diagram RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 409 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/esdr ESDR SERIES Description The ESDR Series offers independent time adjustment of both delay periods. Adjustment options include fixed, onboard or external adjust. The ESDR is recommended for air drying, automatic oiling, life testing, chemical metering and automatic duty cycling. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is <±5%. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for input voltages of 12VDC to 230VAC in five ranges. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in six ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.1%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity ON/OFF recycling with independent adjustment of both time periods Separate on and off timing settings are knob adjustable for added flexibility Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Ordering Information See next page. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. A knob is supplied for adjustment on the unit; terminals for external adjustment. L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. 410 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/esdr ESDR SERIES Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT T1 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T2 OFF TIME SWITCHING MODE ESDR120A0P 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s Positive ESDR120B3P 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Off time 0.1 - 10m Positive ESDR123B4P 12VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10m Off time 1 - 100m Positive ESDR125A5P 12VDC Onboard 10 - 1000m On time 10 - 1000m Positive ESDR221A2 24VAC Onboard 1 - 100s On time 10 - 1000s n/a ESDR320A0P 24VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s Postitive ESDR320A3P 24VDC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10m Positive ESDR420A0 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s n/a ESDR420A1 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR420A4 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s On time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR420B1 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Off time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR420B4 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Off time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR421A1 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR421A4 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR423A3 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m On time 0.1 - 10m n/a ESDR423A4 120VAC Onboard 0.1 - 10m On time 1 - 100m n/a ESDR424A1 120VAC Onboard 1 - 100m On time 1 - 100s n/a ESDR450A1 120VAC External 0.1 - 10s On time 1 - 100s n/a If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 411 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/esdr ESDR SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Current 1A steady state , 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 412 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/hrdr HRDR SERIES L1 N/L2 Recycling Timer Description The HRDR Series combines an electromechanical relay and microcontroller timing circuitry. It offers 12 to 230V operation in five ranges and factory fixed, onboard or externally adjustable time delays with a repeat accuracy of ±0.5%. The high switching capacity of the output contacts allow for direct control of heavy loads like compressors, pumps, motors, heaters and lighting. A bypass/reset switch option allows operator to interrupt normal recycling sequence and energize output relay. An excellent choice for OEM applications. Operation (Recycling with Reset Switch) Upon application of input voltage, the ON time T1 begins and output relay energizes. At the end of the ON time, the output relay de-energizes and the OFF time T2 begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Some recycling timers have the OFF time as the first delay. Reset: Removing input voltage resets output and time delays, and returns sequence to the first delay. Bypass/Reset Switch: Closing the normally open bypass/reset switch energizes the output relay and resets the time delays. Opening the switch restarts recycling operation with the first delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 30A, SPDT, NO output contacts Allows direct operation of heavy loads: compressors, pumps, blower moters, heaters. Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Independent adjustment of On and Off delays Provides greater flexibility of timing options Bypass/Reset switch option Allows operator to interrupt the timing sequence and energize the output relay Wiring Diagram NO = Normally Open S1 = Reset Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact L = Load Terminals 4 & 5 and/or 7 & 8 are only included on externally adjustable units. Relay contacts are non-isolated. RT is included when external adjustment is ordered. Terminal 6 is included when Bypass/Reset is selected. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE EXTERNAL ADJUSTMENT T1 ON TIME OPERATING SEQUENCE T2 OFF TIME BYPASS / RESET OPTION HRDR121A4R 12VDC Both time onboard adj 1 - 100s On time first 1 - 100m Yes HRDR321A4R 24VDC Both time onboard adj 1 - 100s On time first 1 - 100m Yes HRDR322B2R 24VDC Both time onboard adj 10 - 1000S Off time first 10 - 1000S Yes HRDR330A0R 24VDC Both time external adj 0.1 - 10s On time first 0.1 - 10s Yes HRDR331A1 24VDC Both time external adj 1 - 100s On time first 1 - 100s No HRDR411SB30MR 120VAC Both times fixed 1s Off time first 30m Yes HRDR431A1R 120VAC Both times external adj 0.1 - 100s On time first 0.1 - 100s Yes If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 413 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/hrdr Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay HRDR SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 100ms - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT, non-isolated Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x 104 , **6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 51.3 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) Function Diagram RECYCLING WITH RESET SWITCH 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 414 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/krd3 KRD3 SERIES Description The KRD3 Series measures only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square.Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRD3 Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to T1 ON time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Provides greater flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OPERATING SEQUENCE KRD3420A 120VAC Onboard knob 0.1 - 10s On time first KRD3421A 120VAC Onboard knob 1 - 100s On time first KRD3434A 120VAC External 1 - 100m On time first If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. Relay contacts are isolated. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 415 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/krd3 KRD3 SERIES External Resistance vs. Time Delay Output Current/Ambient Temperature Function Diagram RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100m in 5 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110VDC, 120 or 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 416 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/krdr KRDR SERIES Description The KRDR Series is a compact time-delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its solid-state timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRDR Series is a cost effective recycling timer for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, reliability, and long life. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output relay energizes and the T2 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T1 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delays, and returns the sequence to the ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T1 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T2 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of the ON time the load de-energizes, and the cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to the OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact design and independent adjustment of ON and OFF times Provides greater flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Wiring Diagram V = Voltage C = Common NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed T1 = OFF Time T2 = ON Time A knob is supplied for adjustable units. L1 N/L2 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLT. ADJUST. T2 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T1 OFF TIME KRDR115MB25M 12VDC Fixed 5m Off time 25m KRDR120A0 12VDC Adjustable 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s KRDR121A1 12VDC Adjustable 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100s KRDR320B0 24VDC Adjustable 0.1 - 10s Off time 0.1 - 10s KRDR321A4 24VDC Adjustable 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100m KRDR321B4 24VDC Adjustable 1 - 100s Off time 1 - 100m KRDR420A3 120VAC Adjustable 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10m KRDR421A4 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 100s On time 1 - 100m KRDR424A0 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 100m On time 0.1 - 10s KRDR424A4 120VAC Adjustable 1 - 100m On time 1 - 100m KRDR440.5SA0 120VAC On time fixed 0.5s On time 0.1 - 10s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 417 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/krdr KRDR SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5 % or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24 or 110VDC; 24, 120 or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110VDC & 120 or 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) Output Current/Ambient Temperature Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1 = OFF Time TD2 = ON Time R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact T1 = OFF Time T2 = ON Time R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 418 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/ksd3 KSD3 SERIES Recycling Flasher Description The KSD3 Series Digi-Timer is a cost effective approach for ON/OFF recycling applications. The on time is equal to the off time. An adjustment of the RT will change the time delays of both on and off times. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 5% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltages. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the ON time. Operation (Recycling Flasher - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of the ON time the load de-energizes, and the cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays and the sequence to the OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5%, + / -5% time delay accuracy Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY OPERATING SEQUENCE KSD3120A 12VDC External 0.1 - 10s ON time first KSD3310.1SA 24VDC Fixed 0.1s ON time first KSD3415MA 120VAC Fixed 5m ON time first KSD3432A 120VAC Onboard 10 - 1000s ON time first If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 419 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/ksd3 Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. KSD3 SERIES Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance ( Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24 or 120VAC; 12 or 24VDC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A DC Operation Negative switching only Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagrams FLASHER (ON FIRST) ON time plus OFF time equals one complete flash. FLASHER (OFF FIRST) V = Voltage L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 420 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/ksdr KSDR SERIES Description The KSDR Series offers independent time adjustment of both delay periods. The KSDR Series is recommended for air drying, automatic oiling, life testing, chemical metering, and automatic duty cycling. This series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable, solid-state timer is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within ± 5% of the target delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the selected time delay. This series is designed for input voltages of 24, 120 or 230VAC. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available in 6 ranges. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to T1 ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2 OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide operating temperature range: -40° to 75°C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE T1 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T2 OFF TIME KSDR40A0 120VAC 0.1 - 10s On time 0.1 - 10s KSDR42A4 120VAC 10 - 1000s On time 1 - 100m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 421 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/ksdr KSDR SERIES Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 ranges Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 422 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/kspd Specifications Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 (Positive Switching) (Negative Switching) V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load T1 & RT1 = First Adjustment T2 & RT2 = Second Adjustment KSPD SERIES Description The KSPD Series is a factory programmed module available with 1 of 12 standard dual functions. The time delays can be factory fixed, externally or onboard adjustable, or a combination of fixed and adjustable. The 1A steady, 10A inrush rated solid-state output provides 100 million operations, typical. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KSPD Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size and long life. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Solid State Timer Ordering Information MODEL INPUT ADJUSTMENT 1 TIME DELAY 1 ADJUSTMENT 2 TIME DELAY 2 FUNCTION KSPDA2222RXE 24 to 240VAC Onboard 1-100s Onboard 1-100s Recycling/On Time First KSPDP110M18SRXE 12 to 120VDC positive switching Fixed 10 mins Fixed 8s Recycling/On Time First If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Terminal Location for External Adjustment. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 423 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/kspd KSPD SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed (to 999) Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±2% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 20ms; ≤ 1500 operations per minute Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 to 120VDC; 24 to 240VAC Tolerance ≤ ±15% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid-state output Rating 1A steady, 10A inrush for 16ms Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V rms terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mt. with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset DELAY-ON-MAKE / DELAY-ON-BREAK V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset DELAY-ON-MAKE / SINGLE SHOT RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 424 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/rs RS SERIES Description The RS Series is a solid-state, encapsulated, recycling timer designed for tough industrial environments. It is used by many testing labs as a life cycle tester; by others as a cycle controller. The RS Series has separate DIP switch adjustments for the on delay and the off delay. These make accurate adjustment possible the first time, every time. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1023 hours are available in 4 ranges. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.1%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity ON and OFF time delay settings Independent adjustment provides greater timing flexibility DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE FIRST DELAY T1 ON TIME T2 OFF TIME MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE FIRST DELAY T1 ON TIME T2 OFF TIME RS1A11 12VDC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments RS4A22 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments RS2B44 24VAC Off time 1 - 1023h in 1h increments 1 - 1023h in 1h increments RS4A24 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 1 - 1023h in 1h increments RS4A11 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments RS4A33 120VAC On time 1 - 1023m in 1m increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments RS4A12 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments RS4B12 120VAC Off time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments RS4A13 120VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments RS6A13 230VAC On time 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 425 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/rs RS SERIES Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Adjustment Switch Operation Adjustment Switch Operation Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range* 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3m in 0.1m increments 1 - 1023m in 1m increments 1 - 1023h in 1h increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±2% or 20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ± 2% Input Voltage 12, or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ ±10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 1W Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current AC ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC; DC ≅ 1mA Voltage Drop AC ≅ 2.5V @ 1A; DC ≅ 1V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) *For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 426 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/tdr Description The TDR Series of time-delay relays are comprised of digital circuitry and an isolated, 10A relay output. The ON and OFF delays are selected by means of two, ten position binary switches, which allow the setting of the desired delay to be precise every time. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the green LED glows, the output relay is energized, the red LED glows, and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes, the red LED turns OFF and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output relay energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the green LED glows, the T1 OFF time begins, the load is OFF. At the end of the OFF time, the T2 ON time begins, the load energizes, and the red LED glows. At the end of the ON time the load de-energizes and the red LED turns OFF. The cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to the OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS ON & OFF time delay settings Independent adjustment allows for greater flexibility 3 Time Ranges Available (0.1s to 2.8h) Makes it versatile for use in many applications Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1% or 20 ms, whichever is greater; Setting Accuracy + / - 2% or 50 ms, whichever is greater DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages LED indication (select models) Provides visual indication of relay status Relay Output, Recycling Time Delay Relay Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 Relay contacts are isolated TDR SERIES Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE LED SEQUENCE ON TIME (SEC) OFF TIME (SEC) TDR1A22 12VDC ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments TDR2A23 24VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4A11 120VAC X ON time first 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments TDR4A12 120VAC X ON time first 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments TDR4A13 120VAC X ON time first 0.1-102.3 in 0.1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4A22 120VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments TDR4A23 120VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4A33 120VAC X ON time first 10-10230 in 10s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR4B22 120VAC X OFF time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments TDR4B23 120VAC X OFF time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 10-10230 in 10s increments TDR6A22 230VAC X ON time first 1-1023 in 1s increments 1-1023 in 1s increments If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 8-PIN 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 427 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/tdr Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Rated at 10A @ 300VAC. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Binary Switch Operation ** For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Function Diagram RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Type Digital integrated circuitry Range** 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ±2% or 50ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 50ms Recycle Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ±5% Input Voltage 12, 24/28, or 110VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110 to 230VAC/DC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz/<=10% Power Consumption ≤ 3.25W Input LED Indicator Green; on when input voltage is applied Output Type Electromechanical relay Form DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/240VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 106 Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Relay LED Indicator Red; ON when output relay energizes Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 81.3 mm (3.2”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 65°C/-30° to 85°C Weight ≅ 6 oz (170 g) TDR SERIES 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 428 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/thd3c42a0 THD3C42A0 Description The THD3C42A0 combines accurate timing circuitry with high power, solid-state switching. It can switch motors, lamps, and heaters directly without a contactor. The THD3C42A0 has equal on and off time delays. A single RT sets both time delays. You can reduce labor, component cost, and increase reliability with these small, easy-to-use, Digi-Power timers. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to T1 ON time. Operation (Recycling Flasher - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2 OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 1% Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces labor and component costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 429 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/Littelfuse.com/thd3c42a0 THD3C42A0 External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Adjustment Single variable resistor changes both the on & off times equally Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Current Steady State Inrush** 20A 200A Minimum Load Current 100mA Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V at rated current OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting ** Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) **Must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 430 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/tsd3411s TSD3411S L1 N/L2 Recycling Timer Description The TSD3411S is a solid-state ON/OFF recycling timer with the on time always equal to the off time. When time delay is changed by the RT, both the ON and the OFF periods are changed. The TSD Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size, and accurate performance is required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is within 1% of the target time delay. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1% of the time delay. The TSD3411S is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 100 hours are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling Flasher - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the T1 ON time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, + / -1% time delay accuracy Extended temperature range Rated to 75°C operating temperature to withstand high heat applications. Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A Steady solid-state output, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wiring Diagram RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 431 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/tsd3411s External Resistance vs. Time Delay Function Diagram FLASHER (ON FIRST) ON time plus OFF time equals one complete flash. TSD3411S Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 100h in 7 adjustable ranges Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±1% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±1% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) V = Voltage L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 432 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/tsdr TSDR SERIES Description The TSDR Series is an ON/OFF or OFF/ON recycling timing module designed to control metering pumps, chemical valves, flash lamps, or use in energy saving or duty cycling applications. The TSDR Series is designed for more demanding commercial and industrial applications where small size and accurate performance are required. The factory calibration for fixed time delays is < ±5%. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.5% of the time delay. The TSDR Series is rated to operate over an extended temperature range. Time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes are available. The output is rated 1A steady and 10A inrush. The modules are totally solid state and encapsulated to protect the electronic circuitry. Operation (Recycling - ON Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1, ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2, OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the T1 ON time. Operation (Recycling - OFF Time First) Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of the T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2 OFF time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy +/- 0.5%, Factory calibration +/- 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Wide operating temperature range: -40° to 75°C Reliable in demanding commercial and industrial applications Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. An onboard adjustment, or terminals 4 & 5 are only included on adjustable units. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLT. ADJUST. T1 ON TIME FIRST DELAY T2 OFF TIME TSDR215SB18M 24VAC Fixed 5s Off time 18m TSDR415SB18M 120VAC Fixed 5s Off time 18m TSDR4412SA1 120VAC On time fixed, off external 12s On time 1 - 100s TSDR442MA2 120VAC On time fixed, off external 2m On time 10 - 1000s TSDR4430SA2 120VAC On time fixed, off external 30s On time 10 - 1000s TSDR610.2SA0.2S 230VAC Fixed 0.2s On time 0.2s TSDR6110SA30S 230VAC Fixed 10s On time 30s TSDR612.5SA4.5S 230VAC Fixed 2.5s On time 4.5s TSDR615SB18M 230VAC Fixed 5s Off time 18m TSDR6412SA1 230VAC On time fixed, off external 12s On time 1 - 100s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 433 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Recycle Littelfuse.com/tsdr TSDR SERIES Accessories P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagrams RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±5% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Current 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Off State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 434 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Percentage Littelfuse.com/pthf4900dk PTHF4900DK L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Optional Low Current Initiate Switch T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time RT = 100 KΩ RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Wiring Diagram Description The PTHF4900DK can be used for a variety of applications from chemical metering, to temperature regulating, to energy management. The infinite adjustability from 1 to 99% provides accurate percentage on control over a wide factory fixed cycle period. When mounted on a metal surface, it can be used to drive solenoids, contactors, relays, or lamps, up to 20A steady, 200A inrush. The PTHF4900DK is the suggested replacement for the PT Series. Operation (Percentage) Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the T1 ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Increasing the ON time decreases the OFF time. The total cycle period is equal to the ON time plus the OFF time. The total cycle period is factory fixed. ON time range is 1 to 99 percent of cycle period. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays, and returns the sequence to the T1 ON time. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / -0.5%, Factory calibration + / - 5% ON/OFF recycling percentage control 1 to 99% Accurate control over a wide factory fixed cycle period Compact, low cost design Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs High load currents up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of motors, lamps, and heaters without a contactor Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 435 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Percentage Littelfuse.com/pthf4900dk PTHF4900DK Specifications Time Delay Type External or onboard knob Range/External Adjustment Resistance Adjustable from 1 - 99% / RT = 100 KΩ Cycle Period Fixed from 10s - 1000m Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Cycle Period Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ± 5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 120 or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Maximum Load Currents Steady State Inrush* 1A 10A Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V at rated current OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting * Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing 6, 10, 20A units: ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) *Units rated ≥ 6A must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. Inrush: Non-repetitive for 16ms. Function Diagram PERCENTAGE V = Input Voltage CP = Cycle Period L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time R = Reset L CP CP CP 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 436 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Dual Function Littelfuse.com/tdmb TDMB SERIES Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 8-PIN OCTAL SPDT 11-PIN DPDT (P/N ends with D) Wiring Diagram Description The TDMB combines both delay-on-make and delay-on-break functions into one plug-in package. Selection of the time period is accomplished with dual switches, one for the on delay and the other for the off delay. SPDT or DPDT output options provide isolated, 10A switching capability. Operation (Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break) Input voltage must be applied at all times. The output relay is de-energized. Upon closure of the initiate switch, the green LED glows and the delay-on-make time delay (T1) begins. At the end of T1, the output relay energizes and the red LED glows. When the initiate switch opens, the green LED turns OFF and the delay-on-break time delay (T2) begins. At the end of T2, the output relay de-energizes and the red LED turns OFF. Reset: Removing input voltage resets time delay and output. Opening the initiate switch during the delay-on-make delay, resets T1. Closing the initiate switch during the delay-on-break delay, resets T2. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Digital circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, Setting accuracy + / - 2% Isolated, 10A, SPDT or DPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages User selectable Delay-on-Make and Delay-on-Break time delay Timing settings are independently adjustable for added flexibility Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors LED Indication Provides visual indication of initiate, timing, and relay output status DIP switch adjustment Provides first time setting accuracy Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. NDS-11 11-pin Socket 11-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. PSC8 or PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use PSC8 with NDS-8 Octal Socket or PSC11 with NDS-11 Socket. Sold in sets of two. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE DELAY-ONMAKE DELAY-ONBREAK PLUG TYPE TDMB411 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments Octal (8-pin) SPDT TDMB413D 120VAC 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 10 - 10230s in 10s increments 11-pin DPDT TDMB422 120VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments Octal (8-pin) SPDT TDMB422D 120VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 11-pin DPDT TDMB622 230VAC 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments Octal (8-pin) SPDT If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch or Thermostat Relay contacts are isolated. 8-PIN 11-PIN 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 23. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 437 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Dual Function Littelfuse.com/tdmb TDMB SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range** 0.1 - 102.3s in 0.1s increments 1 - 1023s in 1s increments 10 - 10,230s in 10s increments Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Setting Accuracy ≤ ±2% or 50ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Control LED Indicator Green; on when the initiate switch is closed Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC; 24 to 240VAC/DC; 12 to 48VDC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 110 to 230VAC/DC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form SPDT or DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 230VAC Life Mechanical - 1 x107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Relay LED Indicator Red; on when output relay energizes (not included on 12VDC units) Protection Insulation Resistance ≥ 100M Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 81.3 mm (3.2”); W 60.7 mm (2.4”); D 45.2 mm (1.8”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in, magnal 11-pin plug-in Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -30° to 85°C Weight ≅ 6 oz (170 g) ** For CE approved applications, power must be removed from the unit when a switch position is changed. Digi-Set Binary Switch Operation Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE / DELAY-ON-BREAK V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 438 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Dual Function Littelfuse.com/esd52233 ESD52233 Delay-on-Make/Interval Wiring Diagram Description The ESD5 Series is an accurate, solid-state, delayed interval timer. It offers a 1A steady, 10A inrush output and is available with adjustable or fixed time delays of 0.1 seconds to 1000 minutes in six ranges. Input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC are available. Encapsulation offers protection against shock and vibration. Adjustment options are factory fixed, onboard or externally adjustable. The repeat accuracy, under stable conditions, is 0.1%. The factory calibration of the time delay is ±5%. Operation (Delayed Interval) Upon application of input voltage, the T1 delay-on-make time delay begins and the output remains de-energized. At the end of this delay, the output energizes and the T2 interval delay begins. At the end of the interval delay period, the output de-energizes. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the time delays, and returns the sequence to the first delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact, low cost design measuring 2 in. (50.8mm) square Allows flexibility for OEM applications and reduces component and labor costs Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.1%, Factory calibration + / - 5% 1A steady, 10A inrush solid-state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load T1 = Delay-on-Make time T2 = Interval delay time RT is the external adjustment component. Note: Terminals 4, 5 and/or 7, 8 are included when external adjustment is ordered. A knob is included when onboard adjust is ordered. Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 439 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Dual Function Littelfuse.com/esd52233 ESD52233 External Resistance vs. Time Delay This chart applies to externally adjustable part numbers. The time delay is adjustable over the time delay range selected by varying the resistance across the RT terminals; as the resistance increases the tie delay increases. When selecting an external RT, add the tolerances of the timer and the RT for the full time range adjustment. Examples: 1 to 50 S adjustable time delay, select time delay range 1 and a 50 K ohn RT. For 1 to 100 S use a 100 K ohm RT. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset Specifications Time Delay Range 0.1s - 1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±5% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 24VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption ≤ 2VA Output Type Solid state Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C OFF State Leakage Current ≅ 5mA @ 230VAC Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 75°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 440 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Dual Function Littelfuse.com/krpd Specifications Wiring Diagram L1 N/L2 V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load A knob is supplied for adjustable units or RT terminals for external adjust. The untimed load is optional. S1 is not used for some functions. KRPD SERIES Description The KRPD Series is a factory programmed time delay relay available with 1 of 12 standard dual functions. The time delays can be factory fixed, onboard or externally adjustable or a combination of fixed and adjustable. The SPDT output relay contacts offer a full 10A rating with complete isolation. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration, and humidity. The KRPD Series is a cost effective approach for OEM applications that require small size, isolation, accuracy and long life. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat Accuracy + / - 0.5% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications Isolated, 10A, SPDT output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Encapsulated Encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1004-95, P1004-95-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Relay Output Timer Ordering Information MODEL INPUT ADJUSTMENT 1 TIME DELAY 1 ADJUSTMENT 2 TIME DELAY 2 FUNCTION KRPD215S190SMB 24VAC Fixed 5s Fixed 90s Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break KRPD417M113MRXD 120VAC Fixed 7m Fixed 13m Recycling/Off Time First KRPDA175S130SMI 24 to 240VAC/DC Fixed 75s Fixed 30s Delay-on-Make/Interval KRPDA2129RXE 24 to 240VAC/DC Onboard 0.1 - 10s Onboard 10 - 1000h Recycling KRPDD2121MB 12 to 48VDC Onboard 0.1-10s Onboard 0.1-10s Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 441 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Dual Function Littelfuse.com/krpd KRPD SERIES Output Current/Ambient Temperature Function Diagrams Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller circuitry Range 0.1s - 1000h in 9 adjustable ranges or fixed (to 999) Repeat Accuracy ±0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ≤ ±2% Reset Time ≤ 150ms Initiate Time ≤ 40ms; 750 operations per minute Time Delay vs. Temperature & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 to 48VDC; 24 to 240VAC/DC Tolerance 12 to 48VDC -15% - 20% 24 to 240VAC/DC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 2VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Isolated relay contacts Form SPDT Rating (at 40°C) 10A resistive @ 125VAC 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC 1/4 hp @ 125VAC Max. Switching Voltage 250VAC Life (Operations) Mechanical - 1 x 107 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connects Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.6 oz (74 g) DELAY-ON-MAKE / DELAY-ON-BREAK V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time RECYCLING (ON FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset RECYCLE (OFF TIME FIRST) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset ACCUMULATIVE DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL DELAY-ON-MAKE / INTERVAL V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1,TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD1, TD2 = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 442 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC CT SERIES L1 N V = Voltage FR = Fan Relay FS = Fan Switch CR = Compressor Relay THMS = Wall Thermostat Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break Timer Description The CT Series combines a delay-on-make and delay-on-break time delay into one unit and may be used to control fan delays in heating and/or cooling equipment. The CT includes bypass circuitry to allow it to operate with cooling anticipators ≥ 3000 ohms. It is designed to operate in 24VAC control circuits. Several CT modules may be combined to provide sequencing of any number of loads and sequencing off of the same loads, such as electric heating elements. Operation (Delay-on-Make/Delay-on-Break) Forced Air Heating or Air Conditioning (as shown): When the thermostat closes, the compressor relay is immediately energized. At the end of a fixed delay-on-make delay (T1), the fan relay is energized. When the thermostat opens, the compressor relay is de-energized and the delay-on-break delay is initiated. On completion of the fixed delay-on- break delay (T2) the fan relay is de-energized. If the thermostat is reclosed during the delay-on-break delay, the delay-on-break delay is reset and the fan relay remains energized. If the thermostat is closed when input voltage is applied, the delay-on-make delay (T1) begins as normal. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and time delays. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Delay-on-Make and Delay-on-Break in one unit Simplifies wiring and installation, and optimizes efficiency of heating and cooling systems Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Interconnectability with other CT modules Combine modules to provide sequencing on of a number of loads and sequencing off of the same loads Accessories P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Wiring Diagram Ordering Information MODEL DELAY-ON-MAKE (FIXED SECONDS) DELAY-ON-BREAK (FIXED SECONDS) CT1S30 1 30 CT1S45 1 45 CT1S8 1 8 CT1S90 1 90 CT30S1 30 1 CT45S45 45 45 CT5S300 5 300 If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Littelfuse.com/ct 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 443 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC Littelfuse.com/ct Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE DELAY-ON-BREAK CT SERIES Specifications Time Delay Type Microcontroller Range 1 - 600s Repeat Accuracy ±5% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±20% Recycle Time ≤ 300ms Input Voltage 24VAC Tolerance ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO Rating 0.75A steady state, 5A inrush at 55°C Voltage Drop ≅ 1.25V Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V rms terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 70°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Thermostat Anticipator Resistor: ≥ 3000 Ω V = Voltage FS = Fan Switch FR = Fan Relay T1 = Delay-on-Make T2 = Delay-on-Break R = Reset = Undefined Time 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 444 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC T2D120A15M Lockout Wiring Diagram Description The T2D provides protection against short cycling of compressors and other motors. At the end of each operation, a lockout delay prevents restarting the compressor or motor until the delay is completed. 24VAC models can be used with thermostats that include a cooling anticipator resistor. It can be connected in series with the load for delay-on-make operation. Operation (Lockout with Random Start) Connection #1: Upon application of input voltage, a random start time delay begins. At the end of this time delay, the output is energized. Lockout Delay: Input voltage must be applied prior to and during timing. When the thermostat or initiate switch opens, the output de-energizes and the lockout time delay begins. At the end of the lockout delay, the output is energized allowing the load to immediately energize when the initiate switch or thermostat closes. Connection #2: Upon application of input voltage and closure of initiate switch, the time delay begins. At the end of the time delay, the output is energized and remains energized until power is removed. Reset: Removing power resets the output and the time delay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Lockout delay Prevents rapid cycling of compressor Random start delay Prevents low voltage starting Analog circuitry Repeat Accuracy + / - 1% Compact design Allows flexibility for OEM applications 1A steady, 10A inrush output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Totally solid state and fully encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration and humidity L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch or Thermostat RANDOM START PLUS LOCKOUT DELAY-ON-MAKE Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Littelfuse.com/t2d120a15m 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 445 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC Littelfuse.com/t2d120a15m T2D120A15M Specifications Input Voltage 120/230VAC in 2 ranges Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Minimum Load Current 24VAC - 100mA; 120/230VAC - 40mA Rating 1A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop ≅ 2.5V @ 1A Time Delay Initiate Time After timing - 16ms Type Analog circuitry Lockout & Random Start Delays 1s - 100m in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Note: The lockout & random start delays are the same length. Tolerance Adjustable: ±30%; factory fixed: ±30% Repeat Accuracy ±1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time After timing - ≤ 16ms; During timing - ≤ 200ms Protection Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Cooling Anticipator (24VAC Units Only) Minimum Cooling Anticipator ≥ 3,000 Ω Function Diagram V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load (CR) E = Ready TD = Time Delay R = Reset RANDOM START PLUS LOCKOUT DELAY-ON-MAKE L L E E 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 446 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC TA SERIES Lockout Wiring Diagram Description The TA Series prevents rapid recycling of a compressor. A lockout delay is started when the thermostat opens, or input voltage is lost. Eliminates tripped circuit breakers or blown fuses caused by a locked rotor during short cycling. The TA will not allow the compressor to start when the line voltage is low. Chatter of the compressor relay is eliminated. Because of the fast initiate time, bounce of the thermostat will not be transmitted to the compressor relay coil. A 30 second delay provides anti-reversing protection for scroll compressors. Operation (Lockout) On initial closure of the S1, the compressor relay energizes immediately. When S1 opens or input voltage is interrupted, a lockout time delay is initiated. During this lockout time delay, the compressor relay cannot be energized. The low voltage (brownout) protection prevents energization of the compressor when the line voltage is low. Reset: The lockout time delay cannot be reset. After the time delay is completed, the unit automatically resets. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Lockout delay Prevents rapid cycling of compressor and eliminates nuisance service calls due to blown fuse or tripped breaker by locked rotor during short cycling Anti-reversing protection for scroll compressors Extends life of equipment Brownout protection Timer will not allow the compressor to start during low line voltage conditions Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A solid state output No moving parts to arc and wear out. Provides up to 100 million operations under typical conditions Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE TIME DELAY TA12D1 12VDC 1m TA12D2 12VDC 2m TA24A0.5 24VAC 30s TA24A3 24VAC 3m TA24A5 24VAC 5m If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch, Contact, or Thermostat CR = Compressor Relay (Load) CA = Optional Cooling Anticipator Littelfuse.com/ta 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 447 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC Littelfuse.com/ta TA SERIES Specifications Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Impedance 450 Ω (anticipator by-pass) Output Minimum Load Current 75mA Maximum Load Current 1A at 60°C Voltage Drop ≤ 1.25V Time Delay Initiate Time ≅ 16ms Lockout Time Fixed 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5m Tolerance -15% - 35% Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Low Voltage Protection ≅ 20V: 24VAC/DC; ≅ 9V: 12VDC Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 70°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) Thermostat Cooling Anticipator Resistor ≥ 1800 Ω Function Diagram LOCKOUT L E V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load (CR) E = Ready TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 448 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC TAC1 SERIES Delay-on-Make Wiring Diagram Description The TAC1 Series was designed to delay the operation of a compressor relay. It eliminates the possibility of relay chatter due to half-wave failure of the output. It connects in series with the load relay coil and provides a delay-on-make time delay each time input voltage is applied. It can be used for random start, anti-short cycling, sequencing, and many other applications. It is an excellent choice for all air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Operation (Delay-on-Make) Upon application of input voltage, the time delay begins. The output is de-energized before and during the time delay. At the end of the time delay, the output energizes and remains energized until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the time delay and output. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Analog circuitry Repeat accuracy + / - 2%, Factory calibration + / - 20% 0.5A steady state, 10A inrush Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Connects in series with load relay coil Fail-safe design eliminates contactor chatter Meets UL 873 UL Recognized for air conditioning and refrigeration equipment Fully encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration and humidity Accessories P1004-XX, P1004-XX-X Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P0700-7 Versa-Knob Designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT TIME DELAY TAC1223 24VAC External 2 - 180s TAC1411 120VAC Fixed 1s TAC1412 120VAC Fixed 2s TAC1413 120VAC Fixed 3s TAC14164 120VAC Fixed 64s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load Load may be connected to terminals 3 or 1. RT is used when external adjustment is ordered. Littelfuse.com/tac1 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 449 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC Littelfuse.com/tac1 TAC1 SERIES Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. VTP(X)(X) Plug-on Adjustment Module Mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25W at 55°C. Available in resistance values from 5KΩ to 5MΩ. Selection Table for VTP Plug-on Adjustment Accessory Time Delay VTP P/N 1 - 0.05-3s 2 - 0.5-60s 3 - 2-180s 4 - 5-600s VTP4B VTP4F VTP4J VTP5N Selection Guide Function Diagram DELAY-ON-MAKE (ON-DELAY) V = Voltage NO = Normally Open Contact NC = Normally Closed Contact TD = Time Delay R = Reset = Undefined Time Specifications Time Delay Type Analog circuitry Range 0.05 - 600s in 4 adjustable ranges or fixed Repeat Accuracy ±2% Tolerance (Factory Calibration) ±20% Recycle Time ≤ 20ms after timing, during timing - 0.1% of time delay or 75ms, whichever is greater Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±10% Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Form NO, open during timing Rating 0.5A steady state, 10A inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop 120 & 230VAC: ≅ 4.2V @ 0.5A 24VAC: ≅ 2.5V @ 0.5A Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 80°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 450 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC TL SERIES Lockout Wiring Diagram Description The TL Series provides protection against short cycling of a compressor. At the end of each operation, or whenever power is lost, a lockout delay is initiated. This lockout delay prevents restarting of the compressor until the head pressure has equalized. Compressor relay chatter due to thermostat bounce is eliminated by use of optional one second delay-on-make. The TL Series should not be used with cooling anticipator resistors or solid-state switches. (See the TA Series). Operation (Lockout) Lockout: On initial closure of S1, the compressor relay energizes immediately (or after an optional 1s delay). When the S1 opens or input voltage is interrupted, the output opens and remains open for the lockout time delay. During this lockout time delay period, the compressor relay cannot be re-energized. Reset: The lockout time delay cannot be reset. After the time delay is completed, the unit automatically resets. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Lockout delay Prevents rapid cycling of compressor and eliminates nuisance service calls due to blown fuse or tripped breaker by locked rotor during short cycling. One second Delay-on-Make (models ending in T) Eliminates contactor chatter due to thermostat bounce Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A steady, 10A inrush, solid state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE LOCKOUT TIME DELAY-ON-MAKE TL120A5T 120VAC 5m 1s TL230A5 230VAC 5m No delay TL24A5T 24VAC 5m 1s If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch CR = Compressor or Control Relay Littelfuse.com/tl 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 451 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC Littelfuse.com/tl TL SERIES Specifications Input Voltage 24, 120, or 230VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Tolerance ±20% Output Minimum Load Current ≤ 40mA Maximum Load Current 1A @ 24VAC; 0.5A @ 120 & 230VAC at 60°C Inrush Current 10A at 60°C Voltage Drop 24VAC - 2.5V @ 1A 120 & 230VAC - 4.2V @ 0.5A Time Delay Initiate Time ≅ 8ms Lockout Time* Fixed 2, 3, or 5m Tolerance -15% - 35% Option 1s delay-on-make eliminates contactor chatter due to thermostat bounce Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 70°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) *Power must be applied for at least 15 s to achieve a full lockout delay. Less than 15 s will result in proportionally shorter delay periods. NOTE: Cooling anticipator resistor or leakage may cause erratic operation. See TA Series for use with 24VAC systems that include anticipator resistors or use solid-state switches. Function Diagram LOCKOUT L E V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load (CR) E = Ready TD = Time Delay R = Reset 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS 452 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — HVAC TSA141300 Anti-Short Cycle, Solid State Timer Wiring Diagram Description The TSA141300 utilizes unique circuitry to provide random start and lockout delay in one small, rugged, inexpensive package. When connected as shown, the TSA141300 in a multiple unit situation, prevents all units from starting at one time with its random start feature. The TSA141300 also prevents the compressor from recycling rapidly which could result in a lock rotor condition. This lockout delay is initiated at the end of each operation of the compressor. A momentary loss of power would also initiate the lockout delay. Operation Random Start: With the thermostat closed, when line voltage is applied to system, a time delay is initiated. At the end of this delay, the compressor relay will be energized. (Random Start delay is equal to lockout delay.) Anti-Short Cycle: At the end of each cycle, when the thermostat opens, a lockout delay is initiated which prevents re-energization of the compressor relay during this period. If the thermostat is closed after the time delay is completed, the compressor relay will energize Immediately. Loss of Power: If there is a momentary loss of power, the lockout will again be initiated preventing the compressor relay from energizing for the duration of the delay. Features & Benefits J Lockout Delay—prevents rapid recycling of compressor in air conditioning, refrigeration, and heat pump equipment J Random Start Delay—provides staggered start up of multiple units J Fast response time J All Solid State with Encapsulated Circuitry COMPRESSOR RELAY LINE R 3 2 1 AUX CONTACT OVERLOAD THERMOSTAT Specifications Time Delay Type Factory fixed 5 minutes Repeat Accuracy ± 5% under fixed conditions Tolerance Factory calibration: ± 15% Time Delay vs. Temperature ± 10% max. Input Voltage 120 volts AC Tolerance ± 20% of nominal AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid State Maximum Load Current 1 ampere steady state, 10 amperes inrush at 60°C Voltage Drop 2.5 volts typical at 1 ampere Protection Transient Protected Dielectric Breakdown Greater than 1500 volts RMS Insulation Resistance 100 megohms min. Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 or #10 screw Package Molded housing with encapsulated circuitry Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Dimensions H 50.80 mm (2.0”); W 50.80 mm (2.0”); D 30.70 mm (1.21”) Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40°C to +80°C/-40°C to +85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Function Diagram RANDOM START/LOCKOUT DELAY V = Input Voltage TH = Thermostat CR = Compressor Relay TD = Time Delay R = Reset TH CR Littelfuse.com/hrv 12 TIME DELAY RELAYSFor dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 453 Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Coin Vending Littelfuse.com/tsa141300 HRV SERIES Coin Counter Wiring Diagram Description The HRV combines the accuracy of microcontroller based circuitry with an electromechanical relay output. The HRV’s switching capacity allows direct control of loads like compressors, pumps, motors, heaters, and lighting. The HRV “S” version provides a vend time after the selected number of initiate switch closures to start is reached. The HRV “A” version includes all of the “S” features and allows the total vend time to be extended for each additional initiate switch closure. The HRV is ideal for cost sensitive single coin or token vending machines. The electronic circuitry is encapsulated to protect against humidity and vibration. Operation Coin Totalizer & Vending Timer (“S” Version): Input voltage must be applied prior to & during operation. When the total number of S1 initiate switch closures equals the number to start set on the lower 3 DIP switches, the load energizes and the vending time set on the upper 7 DIP switches begins. At the end of the vending time, the load de-energizes and the vending time is reset. Closing the initiate switch during vend timing will have no affect on vend time delay. Accumulating Vending Timer (“A” Version): Input voltage must be applied prior to and during operation. When the total number of S1 initiate switch closures equals the number to start set on the lower 3 DIP switches, the load energizes and the vending time starts. For every initiate switch closure, the HRV unit adds one time per coin period, as set on the upper 7 DIP switches, to the total vending time. Operation Note: If S1 is closed when input voltage is applied, the output remains de-energized and the S1 counter remains at zero closures. At least one “vend time” and one “closures to start” DIP switch must be in the “ON” position for proper operation. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the vend time delay, the S1 closure counter, and de-energizes the output relay. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Microcontroller based Repeat accuracy + / - 0.1%, Setting accuracy 0 - 2%, or 50ms Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity 30A , 1Hp at 125VAC, normally open contacts Allows direct control of loads like compressors, pumps, motors, and heaters without a contactor Switch selectable coin start Allows user flexibility to select the number of coins to start vending cycle Coin switch can be connected to a counter Provides user with accurate count of total number of coins collected L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load UTL = Optional Untimed Load ISOLATED OUTPUT NON-ISOLATED OUTPUT Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE VEND TIME MODE OF OPERATION OUTPUT FORM & RATING HRV11SC 12VDC 1 - 127s Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV24AC 24VAC 0.25 - 31.75m Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV41AE 120VAC 1 - 127s Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV41SE 120VAC 1 - 127s Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV42SE 120VAC 5 - 635s Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV43AE 120VAC 0.1 - 12.7m Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) HRV43AN 120VAC 0.1 - 12.7m Accumulating 30A SPDT, NO (non-isolated) HRV43SE 120VAC 0.1 - 12.7m Coin totalizer 30A SPDT, NO (isolated) If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 17. 454 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Time Delay Relays Dedicated — Coin Vending HRV SERIES Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Switch Adjustment Combine upper seven switches in “ON” position for vend time in minutes. Combine lower three switches in “ON” position for number of closures to start. Function Diagram ACCUMULATING VENDING TIMER V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset NO, L ACCUMULATING VENDING TIMER V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch NO = Normally Open Contact L = Load TD = Time Delay R = Reset NO, L COIN TOTALIZER / VENDING TIMER V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load TD = Time Delay L R = Reset Specifications Count Functions/ Switch Type Mechanical (counts on switch closure) Minimum Switch Closure Time ≥ 20ms Minimum Switch Open (between closures) Time ≥ 20ms Count Range to Start 1 - 7 counts Maximum Counts (“A” Version) 250 Time Delay/Range *** Adjustable 1s - 31.75m in 4 ranges Adjustment 7 of a 10 position DIP switch Setting Accuracy 0% to +2% or 50ms, whichever is greater Repeat Accuracy ±0.1% or 20ms, whichever is greater Reset Time ≤ 150ms Time Delay vs Temp. & Voltage ≤ ±2% Input Voltage 12 or 24VDC; 24, 120, or 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120 & 230 VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency/DC Ripple 50/60 Hz / ≤ 10% Power Consumption AC ≤ 4VA; DC ≤ 2W Output Type Electromechanical relay Form Isolated, SPDT or non-isolated, SPDT Ratings SPDT-NO SPDT-NC General Purpose 125/240VAC 30A 15A Resistive 125/240VAC 30A 15A 28VDC 20A 10A Motor Load 125VAC 1 hp* 1/4 hp** 240VAC 2 hp** 1 hp** Life Mechanical - 1 x 106 ; Electrical - 1 x 105 , *3 x 104, ** 6,000 Protection Surge IEEE C62.41-1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 1500V RMS input to output on isolated units Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.1 mm (1.5”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 70°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) ***For CE approved applications, voltage must be removed when a switch position is changed. Littelfuse.com/hrv 12 TIME DELAY RELAYS © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 455 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS Flashers for incandescent or LED lighting used with both alternating and non-alternating applications in the signaling, communications, and advertising industries. FAA approved versions for obstruction lighting control are available. Tower lighting illuminates communications towers, tall buildings, and bridges as required by FA regulation. Designs are also available for powered AM and FM towers. Flashers FSU1000 Series ............................................................................ 456 FS100 Series Low Current Flasher ........................................... 458 FS100 Series Med Power Flasher ............................................ 460 FS200 Series ............................................................................ 462 FS300 Series ............................................................................ 464 FS491 ............................................................................ 466 FS500 Series ............................................................................ 467 SC3 / SC4 Series Sequencing Controls........................................... 469 Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls FA / FS Series ............................................................................ 471 FB Series Flasher & Incandescent Beacon Alarm Relay.... 472 SCR490D Obstruction Lamp Alarm Relay........................... 474 SCR Series Universal Lamp Alarm Relay.............................. 475 FB9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay.............................. 477 SCR9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay.............................. 479 PCR Series Photo Control...................................................... 481 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 456 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fsu1000 Wiring Diagram FSU1000 SERIES Description The FSU1000 incorporates an onboard adjustable flash rate of 10 to 100 FPM and a universal input voltage in one device. Its circuitry is encapsulated and is capable of controlling loads of up to 20A. The versatility of the FSU1000 makes it ideal for applications where various flash rates and operating voltages are required. Operation When input voltage is applied to terminal 2 and the load (lamp), the load energizes steadily. When input voltage is applied to terminal 3, the output flashes. Optional Low Current Switch (S1): This low current switch could be a limit switch or contact. While open, the operator sees the load (lamp) ON and operating. When the limit switch closes, the load (lamp) flashes to attract attention. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Universal input voltage 24 to 240VAC Allows flexibility for a wide range of applications with one part Onboard adjustable flash rate Provides flexibility for user to select flash rate between 10 - 100 FPM Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity High output rating up to 20A, 200A inrush Allows direct operation of high current loads without a contactor Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Ordering Information MODEL INRUSH RATING LOAD RATING FSU1000 10A 1A FSU1003 60A 6A FSU1004 100A 10A FSU1005 200A 20A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N/L2 V = Voltage S1 = Optional low current switch L = Load FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 457 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FSU1000 SERIES FLASHER (NC) Specifications Flasher Function Diagram Technical Data Operation ON/OFF recycling solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Flash Rate Adjustable 10 - 100 FPM ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Range/Frequency 24 to 240VAC / 50/60Hz Output Load Type Inductive, resistive, or incandescent Maximum Load Rating 1, 6, 10, or 20A steady state Inrush 10 times steady state current Mechanical Mounting* Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions FSU1000 H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) FSU1003, FSU1004 H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C (240VAC +50°C) / -40° to 85°C Weight 1A units: ≅ 2.4 oz (68 g) ≥ 6A units: ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) *Units rated > 6A must be bolted to a metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch L = Load R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 Littelfuse.com/fsu1000 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 458 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fs100Lowcurrent Wiring Diagram FS100 SERIES Description The FS100 Series (low current) may be used to control inductive, incandescent or resistive loads. This series offers a 1A (fullwave) or a 2A (halfwave) steady state, 10A inrush solid-state output and may be ordered with an input voltage of 24 or 120VAC. The FS100 Series offers a factory fixed flash rate of 75 FPM or may be ordered with a fixed, custom flash rate ranging from 45 to 150 FPM. Ideal for OEM applications where cost is a factor. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Compact Size: 38 x 23.9mm (1.5” x 0.94”) Ideal for OEM applications Custom Flash Rates Available Tailor to specific application: custom rates range from 45 to 150 FPM Accessories P1023-2 “P” Clamp Mounting Bracket Alum. 15/16 Low Current Flasher Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VAC OUTPUT RATING A OUTPUT TYPE AC LOAD TYPE FLASH RATE FS126 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 75 FPM FS126-45 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 45 FPM FS126-60 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 60 FPM FS126RC 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent, Resistive, & Inductive 75 FPM FS126RC-45 120 1 Fullwave Incandescent, Resistive, & Inductive 45 FPM FS127 120 2 Halfwave Incandescent & Resistive 75 FPM FS146 24 1 Fullwave Incandescent & Resistive 75 FPM FS146RC 24 1 Fullwave Incandescent, Resistive, & Inductive 75 FPM If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 L1 N V = Voltage L = Load R = Red Wire B = Black Wire FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 459 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS100 SERIES Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (OFF FIRST) V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 Specifications Technical Data Operation OFF/ON solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Flash Rate Factory fixed at 75 FPM ±20% Custom Flash Rates Available From 45-150 FPM ±20% ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Voltage 24, 120VAC, ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output Output Fullwave AC or Halfwave rectified AC Load Type Incandescent, resistive, or inductive (Choose RC suffix for inductive loads) Maximum Load Rating Fullwave: 1A steady state Halfwave: 2A steady state Inrush 10A Mechanical Mounting Removable mounting bracket, use one #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw Connection/Wires 18 AWG (0.82mm2) wires 6 in. (15.2cm) Dimensions H 38.1 mm (1.5”); W 23.9 mm (0.94”) Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 1.1 oz (31 g) Low Current Flasher Littelfuse.com/fs100Lowcurrent FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 460 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fs100med Wiring Diagram V = Voltage L = Load FS100 SERIES Description The FS100 Series (medium power) may be used to control inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads. Input voltages of 24, 120, or 230VAC are available. Fixed flash rates in stock range from 30, 50, 60, and 90 FPM, with custom flash rates ranging from 10 to 300 FPM. Encapsulation provides protection against shock, vibration, and humidity. This group of solid-state flashers has proven reliability with years of use throughout the world. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS 3A steady, 30A inrush current Provides direct control of inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. L1 N/L2 Medium Power Flasher Ordering Information MODEL INPUT FLASH RATE FS143 24VAC 90 FPM FS152 120VAC 90 FPM FS152-30 120VAC 30 FPM FS152-60 120VAC 60 FPM FS162 230VAC 90 FPM FS162-30 230VAC 30 FPM If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 461 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS100 SERIES FLASHER (OFF FIRST) V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 Specifications Flasher Function Diagram Technical Data Operation OFF/ON solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Flash Rate Fixed at 90 FPM ±10% Custom Flash Rates 10 - 300 FPM ±10% ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Voltage/Frequency 24, 120, or 230VAC ±15% / 50/60 Hz Output Load Type Inductive, resistive, or incandescent Output Fullwave AC, solid state, SPST Maximum Load Rating 3A steady state Inrush 10 times steady state current Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6 .35 mm) male quick connect terminals Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 2.2 oz (62 g) Medium Power Flasher Littelfuse.com/fs100med FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 462 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fs200 Wiring Diagram FS200 SERIES Description The FS200 Series may be used to control inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads. Factory fixed flash rate of 45 or 90 FPM or may be ordered with a fixed custom flash rate ranging from 10 to 180 FPM. Encapsulation provides protection against shock, vibration, and humidity. Uniform performance, high inrush current capability, and low RFI, make this series ideal for general industrial applications. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS 3A steady, 30A inrush, SPST output contact Provides direct control of inductive, incandescent, or resistive loads Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity High inrush current capability and low RFI Ideal for general industrial applications Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT RATING FLASH RATE FS219-45 12VDC ± 20% 3A 45 FPM FS224 24VDC ± 20% 3A 90 FPM If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 V = Voltage L = Load FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 463 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS200 SERIES FLASHER (OFF FIRST) V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 Specifications Flasher Function Diagram Technical Data Operation OFF/ON solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Flash Rate Fixed at 90 FPM ±10% Custom Flash Rate 10 - 180 FPM ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Voltage 12, 24, 36, 48, or 110VDC Output Load Type Inductive, resistive, or incandescent Maximum Load Rating 0.25 - 3A steady state OFF State Leakage Current 12 & 24VDC ≤ 250 µA Inrush 10 times steady state current Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 2.2 oz (62 g) Littelfuse.com/fs200 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 464 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fs300 Wiring Diagram FS300 SERIES Description The FS300 Series of solid-state flashers were specifically designed to operate lamp loads. Their two-terminal series connection feature makes installation easy. The high immunity to line noise and transients makes the FS300 Series ideal for moving vehicle applications. All solid-state construction means reliability and long life. The FS300 Series offers a factory fixed flash rate of 75 FPM or may be ordered with a fixed, custom flash rate ranging from 60 to 150 FPM. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until input voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity High immunity to line noise and transients Designed specifically for moving vehicle applications High surge current capability (10 times steady state) Direct operation of incandescent lamp loads Two terminal series connection Provides quick and easy installation for new or existing applications Accessories P1023-6 Mounting bracket The 90° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. P1015-64 (AWG 14/16) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT MAXIMUM CURRENT LOAD FS312 12VDC ± 20% 2.5A FS324 24VDC ± 20% 1.5A If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 V = Voltage L = Load FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 16. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 465 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers FS300 SERIES FLASHER (OFF FIRST) V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 Specifications Flasher Function Diagram Technical Data Operation OFF/ON recycling solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Flash Rate Fixed at 75 FPM ±10% Custom Flash Rates 60 - 150 FPM ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Voltage 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, & 110VDC Output Load Type Incandescent or resistive Maximum Load Rating 0.25 - 2.5A steady state Inrush 10 times steady state current Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 30.7 mm (1.21”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 2.2 oz (62 g) Littelfuse.com/fs300 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 466 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fs491 FS491 Description The FS491 is a low leakage AC flasher designed to control LED, or resistive loads. This product offers a solid-state output and accepts an input voltage of 120VAC to 240VAC. It offers a factory fixed flash rate of 75 FPM. The FS491 is the perfect solution for LED lamp flashing. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the output energizes and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output de-energizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output energizes and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the flash sequence. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Totally solid state No moving parts to arc and wear out, up to 100 million operations under typical conditions Fully encapsulated Protects circuitry from shock, vibration and humidity Extremely low leakage current Ideal for use in LED lighting applications Specifications Technical Data Operation ON/OFF solid-state flasher (continuous duty) Flash Rate Fixed at 75 FPM ±20% ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Voltage 120 - 240VAC Tolerance ± 15% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output Load Type LED or resistive Output Bridge Rectifier & FET Maximum Load Rating 120VAC to 240VAC 0.5A steady state; 5A inrush Max. Load Leakage Current 250µA Voltage Drop 2V typical Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with one #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw Dimensions Dia. 23.9 mm (0.94”); L 38.1 mm (1.5”) Protection Surge IEEE C62.41 - 1991 Level A Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 1.1 oz (31 g) L1 N/L2 V = Voltage L = Load R = Red Wire B = Black Wire W = White Wire Wiring Diagram Function Diagram FLASHER (ON FIRST) ON time plus OFF time equals one complete flash. V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 25. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 467 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Wiring Diagram FS500 SERIES Description The FS500 Series flash rate is adjustable from 10 to 100 FPM. A locknut is provided to hold selected flash rate. The long-life electronic circuit combined with a quality electromechanical relay provides flexibility and reliability in most applications. Operation Upon application of input voltage, the output relay is energized and the ON time begins. At the end of the ON time, the output relay de-energizes and the OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the output is energized and the cycle repeats as long as input voltage is applied. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Solid-state circuitry with electromechanical relay Long life circuitry at a reliable low cost Industry standard octal plug connection Eliminates need for special connectors Adjustable flash rate Provides flexibility for user to select flash rate between 10 - 100 FPM 10A, DPDT isolated output contacts Allows control of loads for AC or DC voltages Accessories BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8- or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. NDS-8 Octal 8-pin Socket 8-pin 35mm DIN rail or surface mount. Surface mounted with two #6 screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. PSC8 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug-in controls in any position. Provides protection against vibration. Use with NDS-8 Octal Socket. Sold in pairs. C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE FS512 12VDC FS524 24VAC/DC FS590 120VAC/DC If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 *(some models) * 8-PIN Littelfuse.com/fs500 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 24. 468 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Flashers Littelfuse.com/fs500 FS500 SERIES FLASHER (ON FIRST-DPDT) V = Voltage R = Reset T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed Specifications Flasher Function Diagram Technical Data Operation ON/OFF recycling flasher with adjustable flash rate Flash Rate Adjustable from 10 - 100 operations per minute (guaranteed range) ON/OFF Ratio ≅ 50% Input Input Voltage 12VDC, 24VAC/DC, 120VAC/DC, 230VAC Tolerance 12VDC & 24VDC/AC -15% - 20% 120VAC/VDC & 230VAC -20% - 10% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output Load Type Electromechanical relay Form DPDT Rating 10A resistive @ 120/240VAC & 28VDC; 1/3 hp @ 120/ 240VAC Mechanical Mounting Plug-in socket Dimensions H 91.6 mm (3.62”); W 60.7 mm (2.39”); D 45.2 mm (1.78”) Termination Octal 8-pin plug-in Protection Isolation Voltage ≥ 1500V RMS input to output Polarity DC units are reverse polarity protected Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -30° to 85°C Weight ≅ 5.8 oz (164 g) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 469 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Sequencing Controls Wiring Diagram SC3 / SC4 SERIES Chaser Description The SC3/SC4 Series are solid-state 3 or 4 channel chasers designed for sequential three circuit flashing of incandescent lamp loads. Unlike electromechanical chasers, there are no contacts to arc, wear, and eventually fail. Operation Sequential 3 or 4 circuit flashing of incandescent loads with equal time delays for each load. Upon application of input voltage, Load 1 is energized. At the end of the time delay, Load 1 de-energizes and Load 2 energizes. At the end of the time delay, Load 2 de-energizes and Load 3 energizes. This cycle continues until input voltage is removed. The set time delay (rate) is the timing for the whole cycle, for all 3 loads (output contacts). Reset: Removing input voltage resets the unit and cycle. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Totally solid state and encapsulated No moving parts to arc and wear out over time and encapsulated to protect against shock, vibration, and humidity 1A steady solid state output Provides 100 million operations in typical conditions. Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L1 N/L2 SC4 shown. For SC3, terminal 6 and load L4 are eliminated. V = Voltage L1 = Load 1 L2 = Load 2 L3 = Load 3 L4 = Load 4 Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE RATING CHANNEL FLASH RATE SC3120A 120VAC 1A 3 Sequential Adjustable 30 - 30FPM SC4120A 120VAC 1A 4 Sequential Adjustable 30 - 30FPM If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Littelfuse.com/sc3-sc4 FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 28. 470 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Sequencing Controls Littelfuse.com/sc3-sc4 SC3 / SC4 SERIES Specifications Technical Data Operation Sequential 3 circuit flashing of incandescent lamp loads. Fixed rate. For sequential 4 circuit and adjustable rates, please contact the factory. Rate Fixed: 30 operations per minute (±10%) Input Voltage 120VAC ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60 Hz Output Type Solid state Rating 1A steady state per output Mechanical Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 31 mm (1.22”) Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Dielectric Breakdown ≥ 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface Insulation Resistance ≥ 100 MΩ Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -20° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 5.4 oz (153 g) Flasher Function Diagram FLASHER (CHASING) SC4 shown. For SC3, L4 is eliminated and L1 TD begins as soon as L3 TD is completed. 4 V = Voltage R = Reset L1, L2, L3, L4 = Lamps TD = Time Delay (all are equal) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 471 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Wiring Diagram FA / FS SERIES Description The FA/FS Series have proven their reliability through years of use on communication towers, smoke stacks, cooling towers, tall buildings, bridges and utility towers. The highest quality components are encapsulated in a rugged plastic housing with a molded-in heat transfer plate. The flash rate, ratio, and failsafe design meet FAA regulations. Zero voltage switching can increase lamp life up to ten times. The FS155-30RF includes superior RF filtering circuitry for use in high RF installations, including AM hot towers. Operation FS Series - Flasher (OFF First) FA Series - Auxiliary Modules Upon application of input voltage, the T2 OFF time begins. At the end of the OFF time, the T1 ON time begins and the load energizes. At the end of T1, T2 begins and the load de-energizes. This cycle repeats until voltage is removed. Reset: Removing input voltage resets the output and the sequence to T2. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Zero voltage switching Delivers up to 10 times longer lamp life Encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Metalized mounting surface Facilitates heat transfer in high current applications Superior RF filtering circuitry (RF models only) Ideal for AM hot towers and other high RF installations High inrush capability up to 200A Will withstand the repetitive inrush current of incandescent beacons Accessories P1015-13 (AWG 10/12), P1015-64 (AWG 14/16), P1015-14 (AWG 18/22) Female Quick Connect These 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. P1015-18 Quick Connect to Screw Adapter Screw adapter terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. L1 N/L2 L1 L1 N/L2 N/L2 (H) L1 L2 (H) FS Series FA155 FA165 FA155-2 FA165-2 FA155-2 V = Voltage N = Neutral B = Beacon DL = Dummy Load for Constant Line Loading Rd = 3.3 KΩ @ 5W for 120VAC; 8.5 KΩ @ 5W for 230VAC F = Flasher (FS155-30T, FS155-30RF, FS165-30T) AX = Auxiliary Unit (FA155, FA155-2, FA165, FA156-2) *(FS155 & FA155 models only) * Ordering Information MODEL INPUT VOLTAGE WATTAGE INRUSH RATING DESCRIPTION FA155 120VAC 2500W 200A Auxiliary unit to provide constant line loading FA155-2 120VAC 2500W 200A Auxiliary unit for synchronized operating of additional beacons. Synchronized flashing of additional beacons on a 3 wire system FA165 230VAC 5000W 200A Auxiliary unit to provide constant line loading FA165-2 230VAC 5000W 200A Auxiliary unit for synchronized operating of additional beacons. Synchronized flashing of additional beacons on a 2 wire system FS155-30RF 120VAC 2500W 200A For high RF interference locations including AM hot towers FS155-30T 120VAC 2500W 200A Standard beacon flasher FS165-30T 230VAC 5000W 200A Standard beacon flasher If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 FA155 FS165-30T Littelfuse.com/fa-fs FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 512, Figure 19. 13 472 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Littelfuse.com/fa-fs FA / FS SERIES Flasher Function Diagrams FLASHERS & AUX. MODULES FLASHER (OFF FIRST) Specifications Operation Single & multiple beacon flashing with auxiliary modules Flash Rate (FS Series Only) 30 ±10 FPM ON/OFF Ratio (FS Series Only) 50 - 67% ON time; 33 - 50% OFF time Voltage 120 or 230VAC ±20% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output Rating (Zero Voltage Switching) 2500W @ 120VAC; 5000W @ 230VAC Inrush Current 200A peak for 1 cycle of AC line Mounting* Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 50.8 mm (2”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 38.4 mm (1.51”) Termination 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals Circuitry Encapsulated Operating/Storage Temperature -55° to 65°C / -55° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) * Note: Must be mounted to metal surface using the included heat sink compound. The maximum mounting surface temperature is 90°C. V = Voltage R = Reset L = Load T1 = ON Time T2 = OFF Time T1 ≅ T2 F = Flasher DL = Dummy Load AX = Auxillary Module FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 473 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Littelfuse.com/fb Wiring Diagram FB SERIES Flasher & Incandescent Beacon Alarm Relay Description The FB Series is used to monitor the operation of one twolamp incandescent beacon and one beacon flasher (or auxiliary module). The flasher and lamps are monitored by sensing the flow of current in the circuit. If the lamp(s) or the flasher fail to operate properly, a solid-state output and an isolated SPDT relay energize. When connected to a site monitoring system, this unit provides the remote beacon monitoring protection required by the FAA/FCC. On a multiple beacon structure, one unit is required for each two-lamp incandescent beacon (one unit per beacon for LED beacons). Operation If one lamp in an incandescent beacon fails, the relay and solidstate lamp failure outputs energize after 10s. If the flasher fails in the ON or OFF condition, the relay and the solid-state flasher failure output energizes after 6s. If both failures occur, all three outputs energize after their trip delays. Note: If both incandescent lamps fail, all three outputs will energize. The relay and solid-state flasher failure output energizes after 6s, and the solid-state lamp failure output energizes after 10s. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Toroidal current sensing Reliable low cost monitoring of the flasher and lamps through built-in CT and provides isolatio n from the monitored circuit Failsafe beacon monitoring Alarm monitors for failed incandescent lamps in addition to flasher function One isolated, 5A, SPDT alarm output plus two, 1A, solid-state line voltage alarm outputs When connected to a site monitoring system, it provides the remote beacon monitoring protection required by the FAA / FCC. Fixed trip delays for flasher (6s) and lamp (10s) failures Prevents nuisance alarms L1 N/L2 V = Voltage B = Beacon F = Flasher T = Toroid BRC = Flasher Bypass Relay Contacts AR = FB Alarm Relay BR = Bypass Relay Coil FL = Flasher Failure LED LL = Lamp Failure LED AXL = Lamp Alarm Relay Coil NOTE: Flasher module may be located on either the line or load side of the toroidal sensor. Ordering Information MODEL LINE VOTAGE LAMP TYPE FB120A 120VAC Incandescent Beacon FB230A 230VAC Incandescent Beacon If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Specifications Input Voltage FB120A 120VAC ±15% FB230A 230VAC ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Lamp Socket Voltage ±10%; 50/60Hz Alarm Outputs Type 3 total - 1 relay, 2 solid state; One isolated SPDT relay rated 5A resistive Two solid-state line voltage outputs rated 0.5A steady, 5A inrush Lamp Failure Detection FB120A For two 620W or 700W lamps FB230A For two 500W or 700W lamps Trip Delays Flasher Failure Fixed at 6s; -0/+40% Lamp Failure Fixed at 10s; -0/+40% LEDs Lamp Failure (Red) Glows when one or both lamps fail Flasher Failure (Red) Glows when the flasher fails Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination 7 position barrier block for 20 AWG (0.5 mm2 ) to 14 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) wire Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -55° to 60°C / -55° to 85°C Weight ≅ 7 oz (198 g) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 47. 474 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Littelfuse.com/scr490d Wiring Diagram SCR490D Obstruction Lamp Alarm Relay Description The SCR490D is used to provide remote monitoring of steady burning incandescent marker and obstruction lighting. Four onboard switches allow operator programming for lighting systems with two through nine lamps on a single AC circuit. The SCR490D uses a toroidal sensor and electronic circuitry to sense the failure of one or more lamps. Operation When a lamp fails, the SCR490D senses a decrease in current flow. Then, after a fixed time delay, it transfers to its alarm mode. In alarm mode, the LED indicator, the output relay (SPDT isolated contacts), and a non-isolated solid-state output are energized. Replacement of the failed lamps resets the alarm outputs and the LED indicator. To prevent false alarm signals, power must be applied to the SCR490D at the same time that lamps are energized. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Toroidal current sensing Reliable low cost monitoring of incandescent marker and obstruction lighting through built-in CT which also provides isolation from the lighting circuit Monitors 2 - 9 lamps Senses failed obstruction lamps on a single AC circuit Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output plus one 1A, solid-state line voltage alarm output Provide alarm indication and can also be used for remote monitoring of the lighting system Fixed trip delay (6s) Prevents nuisance alarms Specifications Operation Number of Lamps 2 - 9 (selectable) Lamp Wattage 116W, incandescent lamps Rated Lamp Voltage 120 or 130VAC (selectable) Monitored Voltage 120VAC ±3% Trip Delay ≅ 6s fixed Voltage 120VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Tolerance 120VAC - 20% - 10% Line Voltage Output (Solid State Rated) ≤ 125W to operate a spare lamp or alarm Isolated Alarm Output 10A @ 120VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Mounting Surface mount with two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination Screws with captive clamps for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2 ) wire Circuitry Encapsulated Operating/Storage Temperature -55° to 65°C / -55° to 85°C Humidity 95% relative, non-condensing Weight ≅ 6.8 oz (193 g) L1 N/L2 V = Voltage OL = Obstruction Lamps T = Toroid SS = Selector Switch AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm Relay contacts are isolated. FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 47. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 475 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Wiring Diagram SCR SERIES Universal Lamp Alarm Relay Description The SCR series is a universal lamp alarm relay designed to sense the failure of flashing or steady incandescent beacon lamps or steady side lights. The toroidal current sensor provides isolation and allows monitoring of more than one line at a time. The SCR Series energizes when one or more lamps fail. It will monitor the operation of one to four side lights and up to four beacon lamps. Operation When a lamp fails, the SCR Series senses a decrease in current flow. After a fixed time delay, the LED glows and the two alarm outputs energize. The outputs and the LED are reset when the failed lamps are replaced and the current returns to the nominal setting, or when the input voltage is removed. The SCR will sense an open flasher, it will not sense a continuously ON flasher (see FB Series). Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Toroidal current sensing Provides isolation from the lighting circuit and allows monitoring of multiple lines simultaneously Monitors 1-4 side lights or up to 4 beacon lamps Senses failed incandescent flashing beacon or steady obstruction lamps Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output plus one 1A, solid-state line voltage alarm output Provides alarm indication and can also be used for remote monitoring of the lighting system Fixed trip delay (6s) Prevents nuisance alarms Switch selectable number, voltage, and wattage of lamps User selectable to meet wide application needs with one relay (SCR430T only) L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 BEACON LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM OBSTRUCTION LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM V = Voltage B = Beacon Lamps SS = Selector Switch T = Toroid F = Flasher AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm Relay contacts are isolated. V = Voltage SS = Selector Switch T = Toroid AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm OL = Obstruction Lamps Relay contacts are isolated. Ordering Information MODEL INPUT LAMP TYPE SCR430T 120VAC Incandescent SCR630T 230VAC Incandescent If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Littelfuse.com/scr FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 47. 476 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Littelfuse.com/scr490d SCR SERIES Selection Range SCR430T SCR630T a. 620 W 700 W b. 120 V c. c. a. 116 W 130 V 4L 3L 2L 1L 116 W 4L 3L 2L 1L 1. 2. a. Lamp Wattage - Select the lamp wattage of the lamps in use. b. Lamp Voltage - Select the lamp voltage shown on the lamp (SCR430T) c. Lamps ON - Select the number of lamps on during normal operation. Only one lamp switch at a time may be transferred to the right. Programming Example SCR430T SCR630T a. 620 W 700 W b. 120 V c. c. a. 116 W 130 V 4L 3L 2L 1L 116 W 4L 3L 2L 1L 1. 2. Example Shown: SCR430T-620 watts at 120 VAC lamps, two lamps are ON during normal operation. STEP 1. Select lamp wattage: 116 or 620 watts 2. Select the number of lamps ON (1 thru 4) during normal operation. Only one lamp switch may be ON (RIGHT) at any time. Specifications Operation Lamp Monitoring Capacity (in lamps) 100W 116W 620W 700W SCR430T 120VAC Lamps 4 4 4 n/a SCR630T 230VAC Lamps n/a 4 n/a 4 Time Delay Trip Delay Factory fixed ≅ 6s Input Input Voltage/Tolerance SCR430T - 120VAC ±10% SCR630T - 230VAC ±10% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output To operate a spare lamp or alarm Line Voltage Output (Solid-state Rated) ≤ 125W @ 120VAC ≤ 250W @ 240VAC Isolated Alarm Output (SPDT) 10A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Mechanical Mounting Two #6 (M3.5 x 0.6) screws Dimensions H 88.9 mm (3.5”); W 63.5 mm (2.5”); D 44.5 mm (1.75”) Termination Screws with captive clamps for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2 ) wire Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating Temperature -55° to 65°C Weight ≅ 6.8 oz (193 g) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 477 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Wiring Diagram FB9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay Description The FB9L is a universal lamp alarm relay designed to sense the failure of flashing LED beacon lamps. It will monitor the operation of one to eight beacons connected to a single flasher and/or auxiliary modules and the operation of the flasher. The FB9L output relay energizes when one or more lamps fail. All monitored lamps must be the same wattage and voltage. The 0.5A solid-state output energizes when a flasher failure is sensed. Operation When a LED beacon lamp fails, the FB9L senses a decrease in current flow. After a 10s lamp failure trip delay, the isolated SPDT (4-5-6) and non-isolated SPNO (3-1) relay contacts energize. These contacts are used to indicate a beacon failure has occurred. The “L” onboard LED indicator flashes green during the trip delay and glows red after the output relay energizes. Connected to a site monitoring system, it provides remote beacon monitoring required by FAA-AC No: 150/5345-43E. The FB9L also monitors the operation of the flasher. If the flasher remains in the ON or OFF condition for more than 6s the solidstate output energizes and the “F“ flasher failure, onboard LED glows red. This output is normally used to energize an external flasher bypass relay. The contacts of the bypass relay are used to route voltage around the failed flasher and to indicate an alarm condition. Note: In a single flasher, single beacon system, if the beacon lamp fails, zero current flow is detected. This will cause the flasher failure output to energize after 6s and then the beacon failure outputs after 10s. This is normal operation and can be expected anytime zero current is flowing through the monitored conductor. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Self calibrating Saves time at installation. No fine adjustment required. Failsafe beacon monitoring Alarm monitors for failed LED lamps in addition to flasher function Number of beacons monitored is switch selectable for up to 8 User selection allows quick set up and easy adaption to multiple applications Universal voltage 120 to 230VAC Meets wide application requirements Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output contacts Provides remote beacon monitoring when connected to a site monitoring system, which is required by the FAA Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. L1 N/L2 V = Voltage B = Beacon F = Flasher BRC = Flasher Bypass Relay Contacts T = Toroid AR = FB Alarm Relay BR = Bypass Relay Coil FL = Flasher Failure LED LL = Lamp Failure LED AXL = Lamp Alarm Relay Coil NOTE: Flasher module may be located on either the line or load side of the toroidal sensor. Littelfuse.com/fb9L FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 31. 478 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Littelfuse.com/fb9L FB9L Specifications Sensors Calibration Range (total all Lamps) 150mA - 8.0A Absolute Max Current (total all Lamps) 15A max. (may not calibrate above 8A) Single Lamp Current 150mA - 8.0A (total all lamps ≤ 8.0A) Trip Delay Flasher Failure Fixed at 6s; -0/+40% Lamp Failure Fixed at 10s; -0/+40% Input Input Voltage/Tolerance 120 to 230VAC / ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output To operate a spare lamp or alarm Line Voltage Output (SPNO) 5A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Isolated Alarm Output (SPDT) 10A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Solid-State Line Voltage Output (F) 0.5A steady; 5A inrush Mechanical Mounting One #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 50.8 mm (2”); D 41.7 mm (1.64”) Termination IP20 screw terminals for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2 ) wire or two 16 AWG (1.3 mm2 ) wires LEDs Power/Timing/Lamp Failure (Bi-color) Glows red when one or more lamps fail Flasher Failure (Red) Glows red when the flasher fails Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) FAA-AC No. 150/5345-43E Indicator Table L Green Input ON & Calibrated L Green Flashing Trip Delay L Red Lamp Failure L Red/Green Flashing Calibrating L Red Flashing Not Calibrated F Red Flasher Failure FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 479 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Wiring Diagram SCR9L Universal Lamp Alarm Relay Description The SCR9L is a universal lamp alarm relay designed to sense the failure of flashing or steady LED beacon lamps or obstruction lamps. The SCR9L energizes when one or more lamps fail. It will monitor the operation of one to eight beacon or obstruction lamps. All monitored lamps must be the same wattage and voltage. When connected to a site monitoring system, it provides the remote lamp monitoring protection required by the FAA-AC No: 150/5345-43E. Operation When a lamp fails, the SCR9L senses a decrease in current flow. After a 10s trip delay, the onboard LED glows and the two alarm outputs energize. The outputs and the LED are reset when the failed lamps are replaced and the unit is recalibrated. The SCR9L will sense an open flasher, it will not sense a continuously ON flasher (see FB Series). Removing input voltage de-energizes the output and the LED‘s. It does not change the calibration. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS Self calibrating Designed for use with all types of LED beacon and obstruction lamps Failsafe beacon monitoring Relay will also provide an alarm signal on a failed flasher (open) Number of lamps monitored is switch selectable up to 8 User selection allows quick set up and easy adaption to multiple applications Universal voltage 120 to 230VAC Designed for use in most applications Isolated, 10A, SPDT alarm output contacts Provides remote beacon monitoring when connected to a site monitoring system, as is required by the FAA LED indication Provides visual relay status of operation, alarm, trip delay, and calibration Fully encapsulated Protects against shock, vibration, and humidity Accessories C103PM (AL) DIN Rail 35 mm aluminum DIN rail available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. P1023-20 DIN Rail Adapter Allows module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail with two #10 screws. L1 N/L2 L1 N/L2 BEACON LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM OBSTRUCTION LAMP CONNECTION DIAGRAM V = Voltage B = Beacon Lamps SS = Selector Switch L = LED Indicator F = Flasher AXL = Auxiliary Load/Alarm OL = Obstruction Lamps SI = Sensor Input H = “3“ Spare AC Hot Connection (2A max.) Littelfuse.com/scr9L FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 513, Figure 31. 480 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls www.littelfuse.com/scr9L SCR9L Calibration Alarm relays must be calibrated at initial installation and when LED lamps are replaced. Due to LED lamp aging, recalibration is recommended every 12 months. 1. Remove input voltage 2. Move calibration switch to off position 3. Re-apply input voltage 4. LED will flash red to indicate the unit is ready for calibration 5. Visually inspect structure’s lighting to make sure all lamps and flashers (if used) are operating properly 6. Remove input voltage 7. Adjust lamp selector switches for the correct number of lamps to be monitored (see adjustment diagram below) 8. Re-apply input voltage 9. LED should flash red 10. Move calibrate switch to ON position 11. The LED will alternate flashing red and green 12. LED will glow steady green within 30 secs. Calibration is complete Calibration Failed If the LED double blinks red, calibration failed. Remove input voltage and repeat steps 6-8. Notes: a. Monitoring a mixture of LED beacons and LED obstruction lamps is not possible with the SCR9L. b. This alarm relay is not designed to monitor incandescent lamps. c. Applying input voltage when the calibrate switch is in the OFF position, erases the previous calibration settings. The LED will flash Red. The output relays are OFF and the unit will not sense lamp failures. d. Only one temperature compensated LED beacon can be monitored with this product. A combination of temperature compensated and standard LED beacons cannot be monitored. Adjustment Example OFF ON SCR9L 7. Example Shown: SCR9L two lamps are ON during normal operation. Indicator Table L Green Input ON & Calibrated L Green Flashing Trip Delay L Red Lamp Failure L Red/Green Flashing Calibrating L Red Flashing Not Calibrated Specifications Sensors Calibration Range (total all Lamps) 150mA - 8.0A Absolute Max Current (total all Lamps) 15A max. (may not calibrate above 8A) Single Lamp Current 150mA - 8.0A (total all lamps < 8.0A) Time Delay Trip Delay Factory fixed ≅10s Input Input Voltage/Tolerance 120 to 230VAC ±15% AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Output To operate a spare lamp or alarm Line Voltage Output (SPNO) 5A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Isolated Alarm Output (SPDT) 10A @ 240VAC or 30VDC resistive; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC; 1/2 hp @ 250VAC Auxilliary Input Voltage (H) ≤ 2A @ 230VAC Mechanical Mounting One #10 (M5 x 0.8) screw Dimensions H 76.7 mm (3”); W 51.3 mm (2.02”); D 41.7 mm (1.64”) Termination IP20 screw terminals for up to 14 AWG (2.45 mm2 ) wire or two 16 AWG (1.3 mm2 ) wires Protection Circuitry Encapsulated Environmental Operating / Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / - 40° to 85°C Weight ≅ 3.9 oz (111 g) FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 481 Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Wiring Diagram PCR SERIES Photo Control Description The PCR Series of photo controls is a combination of precision electronic circuitry, electromechanical output, and unique molded plastic housing. Designed and built to meet the demands of the most rigorous requirement of tower and obstruction lighting control, each unit is factory calibrated to meet FAA and FCC specifications. Electronic circuit, output contactor, and terminal block are all contained within front plastic housing. Edge support molded into the bottom edge of housing allows easy wiring of new and existing installations. Available with or without cast aluminum junction box. Operation When the amount of light sensed falls below the actuation level for energization, the output relay energizes. Conversely, when the amount rises above the actuation level for de-energization, the output relay de-energizes. Features & Benefits FEATURES BENEFITS ABS plastic housing with gasket seal Withstands outdoor environmental hazards and protects circuitry from moisture damage Two 20A relay contacts Allows direct control of a lighting circuit without a separate contactor Fixed time delay Eliminates contact chatter Reliable photo sensor Provides automatic lighting circuit operation from dusk to dawn Ordering Information MODEL INPUT DESCRIPTION REPLACES Hughey & Phillips Crouse Hinds PCR10 120VAC Photo Control without aluminum box n/a n/a PCR11 120VAC Photo Control without aluminum box PC800 120V PEC52010 PCR12 230VAC Photo Control with aluminum box n/a n/a PCR13 230VAC Photo Control with aluminum box PC800 240V PEC52010-1 If you don’t find the part you need, call us for a custom product 800-843-8848 Dashed lines are internal connections. ons. Dashed lines are internal connections. ions. *Customer Supplied Jumper Dashed lines are internal connections. Littelfuse.com/pcr FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For dimensional drawing see: Appendix, page 514, Figure 45. 482 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Flashers and Tower Lighting Controls Tower and Obstruction Lighting Controls Littelfuse.com/pcr PCR SERIES Specifications Indication LED indicates power is applied Light Actuation Levels (Factory Calibrated) Energized: ≤ 35 fc De-energized: ≥ 60 fc Voltage 120VAC or 230VAC AC Line Frequency 50/60Hz Tolerance 120 & 230VAC -20% - 10% Output Rating Two SPST NO 20A contacts 1 hp @ 120VAC 2.5 hp @ 240VAC Termination Screw terminals for up to #8 (M4 x 0.7) AWG wire Dimensions H 159.51 mm (6.28”); W 127 mm (5.0”); D 131.75 mm (5.19”) Mounting ABS plastic housing with gasket seal. Multiple knockout holes for optional mounting to Crouse Hinds or Hughey & Phillips cast aluminum electrical boxes. Operating/Storage Temperature -40° to 60°C / -55° to 85°C FLASHERS & TOWER LIGHTING CONTROLS 13 For More Information… on Retrofits, Panel Mount Adapters and more accessories, visit Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 483 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories ACCESSORIES Software............................................................................................. 484 Electrical............................................................................................. 485 Ground Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, & Relay Testers.................................................................................. 488 Remote Indication.............................................................................. 489 Communication Adapters & Modules................................................ 492 Terminations & Adapters................................................................... 493 Liquid Level Control............................................................................ 495 Current Transformers (CTs) CT Selection Guide............................................................................. 495 Current Transformers......................................................................... 496 Instrumentation & Metering Transformers........................................ 497 Current Transformer Sizing Chart....................................................... 498 ELCT Series........................................................................................ 499 ZSCT Series........................................................................................ 501 Mounting Adapters and Enclosures Panel-Mount Adapters....................................................................... 503 DIN Rail & Mounting Adapters.......................................................... 505 Brackets & Clips................................................................................. 506 Enclosures & Watertight Covers........................................................ 507 Sockets............................................................................................... 508 ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 484 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Software SOFTWARE SOFTWARE Product Features Accessory For Solutions-M Relay Interface Software Provides the ability to configure and monitor Modbus networks. The features include data logging, real-time data monitoring and fault and event monitoring. Devices can be added and configured manually or the software can scan an existing network to identify devices which can be used as is or reconfigured by the user. Setpoints for each device can be uploaded and downloaded for easy monitoring and reconfiguration. RS485 TCP/IP networks MotorSaver and PumpSaver Devices SE-COMM-RIS Relay Interface Software Provides remote access to metering, control, data logging, and programming features. Setpoints can be accessed individually, downloaded as a file, and protective curves can be plotted. Metered data can be observed or logged for later study. FPU-32 FPS MPS MPU-32 SE-FLASH Firmware Update Utility Used to update relay firmware to add new features. FPU-32 FPS MPS MPU-32 EL731 SE-MON330 Relay Interface Software Used to receive data from the SE-330. It displays relay set points and measured values, and features data logging of information at a selectable interval. SE-330 SE-330AU SE-330HV VMPU Virtual Motor Protection Relay Allows the user to scroll through the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay menu. MPU-32 VMPS Virtual Motor Protection System Allows the user to scroll through the MPS Motor Protection System menu. MPS VFPU Virtual Feeder Protection Relay Allows the user to scroll through the FPU-32 Feeder Protection Relay menu. FPU-32 MPU-32 Tutorial MPU-32 Online Self-Training Tutorial Online Self-Training tutorial for MPU-32 programming. MPU-32 Protection Relays and Alarm Systems are supplied with free software. The software simplifies programming and allows the user to save setpoint files and reuse them for similar applications. The software gives the ability to change parameters and see the impact on the protection time current curves. It also allows another device curve to be entered to view simple coordination. ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 485 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Electrical ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Product Features Accessory For PGA-1100.0010 Diode Logic Unit Used in installations with more than one breaker and more than one Littelfuse Arc-Flash Relay. It separates the trip paths, so the breakers can be tripped independently from each other. Full datasheet and ordering information available at Littelfuse.com/pga1100 PGR-8800 AF0500 AF0100 D0920 D1000 P1004-XX-(X) Versa-Pot Panel mountable, industrial potentiometer recommended for remote time delay adjustment. The shaft is slotted for screwdriver adjustment and serrated for slip-proof finger adjustment. Accepts Versa-Knob or Lock Shaft. May be ordered with two 8 in (20.3 cm) wires soldered to pot (clockwise increase) and female quick connect terminals on other ends by adding suffix -X to end of part number. Specifications Rating 0.25 W at 55 °C Taper Linear Shaft Rotation 300° ±5° Tolerance ±10 % Shaft Diameter 0.25 in P1004-95 & P1004-95-X: Consult individual datasheet for compatibility P1004-174 & P1004-175: PHS Series P1004-16 & P1004-16-X: Series: ERDM ERDI ERD3 TRB TRM TRS TS1 TS6 P1004-15, P1004-14, P1004-13, P1004-12, & P1004-12-X: Series: ORB ORM ORS TAC1 THD7 TRB TRM TRS TS1 TS2 TS4 TS6 TSD7 TSU2000 PART NUMBER WITH WIRE LEADS VALUE P1004-199 50 kΩ P1004-174 100 kΩ P1004-175 200 kΩ P1004-95 P1004-95-X 100 kΩ P1004-17 500 kΩ P1004-16 P1004-16-X 1M Ω P1004-15 1.5M Ω P1004-14 2M Ω P1004-12 P1004-12-X 3M Ω P1004-13 5M Ω P0700-7 Versa-Knob Versa-Knob is designed for 0.25 in (6.35 mm) shaft of Versa-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1004-XX-(X) P0700-8 Lock Shaft Fits 0.25 in (6.35 mm) potentiometer shafts. Locks by tightening nut onto four tapered/slotted fingers. Pressure on the shaft locks control against mis-adjustment. Nickel plated brass finish. P1004-XX-(X) P1004-9 P1004-10 P1004-31 Mini-Pot A high quality, industrial potentiometer for remote time delay adjustment. The shaft extends through the timer’s center hole for easy panel mounting. Use mini-mount bracket for standup mounting of timer. Adjustment by screwdriver or mini-knob. May be ordered with two 3 in (7.6 cm) wires soldered to pot (clockwise increase) and female quick connect terminals on other ends by adding suffix -X to end of part number. Specifications Rating 0.25 W at 55 °C Taper Linear Shaft Rotation 300° ±5° Tolerance ±10 % Shaft Diameter 0.125 in (3.2 mm) Series: TAC1 TS1 TS2 TS4 TS6 TSD7 TSU2000 PART NUMBER VALUE P1004-9 500kΩ P1004-10 1MΩ P1004-31 3MΩ P0700-21 Mini-Knob Mini-Knob is designed for 0.125 in (3.2 mm) shaft of Mini-Pot. Semi-gloss industrial black finish. P1004-9 P1004-10 P1004-31 ACCESSORIES 14 For full datasheet, see pg. 81 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 486 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Electrical ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Product Features Accessory For P0200-19 Heat Sink Compound 2 grams P0200-20 Heat Sink Compound 100 grams Single package/container of heat sink compound consisting of primarily zinc oxide and having a 12 month shelf life (EOD date on the label). P0200-19 mounts one high current, plated 2 x 2 in (50.8 x 50.8 mm) timer or flasher. P0200-20 mounts 50+ units. Any 2 x 2 in (50.8 x 50.8 mm) plated timer or flasher. P1015-18 Quick Connect Screw Adaptor Screw adaptor terminal designed for use with all modules with 0.25 in (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Screw terminal accepts ring or spade terminals. Modules with 0.25 in (6.35 mm) male quick connect terminals. Consult the individual datasheet to determine compatibility. P1015-13 P1015-64 P1015-14 Female Quick Connect Terminals These 0.25 in (6.35 mm) female terminals are constructed with an insulator barrel to provide strain relief. Consult individual datasheet to determine compatibility. P0400 Time Adjustment Dials Dials for use with remote Versa-Pot and panel mounted Mini-Pot. Reverse screen printed on clear plastic to avoid damage to printed image. P1004-9 P1004-10 P1004-12 P1004-13 P1004-16 P1004-31 P1004-95 PART NUMBER RANGE INCREMENTS P0400-12 0.05 - 1 s 0.1 s P0400-86 0.1 - 10 m 1 m P0400-82 0.1 - 10 s 1 s P0400-17 1 - 30 s 5 s P0400-83 1 - 60 s 10 s P0400-27 0 - 10 MRD* *Multiplier Reference Dial VTPXX VTP The VTP Series mounts on modules with in-line adjustment terminals. Rated at 0.25 W at 55 °C. Available in resistance values from 5 kΩ to 5 MΩ Series: TAC1 THD7 THDM TS1 TS2 TS4 TS6 TSD7 PART NUMBER RT VALUE RANGE PART NUMBER RT VALUE RANGE VTP0E 250 kΩ 0.5–20s VTP3L 2 MΩ 0.1–4 m VTP1B 0.5 MΩ 0.05–3s VTP4B 3 MΩ 0.05–3 s VTP1C 0.5 MΩ 0.1–10s VTP4F 3 MΩ 0.5–60 s VTP1D 0.5 MΩ 0.5–10s VTP4J 3 MΩ 2–180 s VTP2A 1 MΩ 0.05–1s VTP4P 3 MΩ 1–100 m VTP2C 1 MΩ 0.1–10s VTP5G 5 MΩ 1–100 s VTP2E 1 MΩ 0.5–20s VTP5K 5 MΩ 10–1000 s VTP2F 1 MΩ 0.5–60s VTP5N 5 MΩ 0.1–10 m VTP2J 1 MΩ 2–180s VTP5P 5 MΩ 1–100 m VTP2P 1 MΩ 1–100m VTPDF 50 kΩ 0.5–60 s VTP3B 2 MΩ 0.05–3s ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 487 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Electrical ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES Product Features Accessory For LPSM003ZXID Indicating Fuse Holder LPSM003Z Non-indicating Fuse Holder Littelfuse POWR-SAFE Dead Front holders provide optimum protection to personnel for Class CC and Midget-Style fuses. 600 V ac/dc Class CC and Midget-Style fuses 0KLK002.T Midget Fuse (2 Amp) 10 x 38 fast acting, high-interrupting capacity, current-limiting type fuse. 600 V ac/500 V dc FH3P LPSM003ZXID LPSM003Z VRM6048 Voltage Monitor Accessory Module The VRM6048 accessory module allows the voltage monitor to monitor a 3-phase 550 to 600 V ac Line. Adjustment If the measured line voltage is 575 V ac, connect as shown and adjust/select the voltage monitor for 460 V ac operation. Package Molded housing with encapsulated circuitry Mounting Surface mount with one #10 (M5 x 0.8) plastic screw. May be DIN-rail mounted using P1023-20 Adaptor. Termination Screw terminals with captive wire clamps for up to No.12 AWG wire. Operating -40 °C to 70 °C Storage -40 °C to 85 °C Humidity 95 % relative, non-condensing Voltage Input Output* 600 V ac 480 V ac 575 V ac 460 V ac 550 V ac 440 V ac *The VRM6048 must be connected as shown. If the voltage monitor is disconnected, the VRM output voltage equals the input voltage. Series: PLM PLR PLS TVM TVW (manufactured after December 2003) VRM Module Voltage Monitor 575 V ac → 460 V ac V150LA10AP LA Varistor The V150LA10AP, a transient voltage surge suppressor, is a radial leaded varistors (MOVs) that is designed to be operated continuously across ac power lines. This UL Recognized varistor requires very little mounting space. Any of our products that operate below 150 V ac or 200 V dc. PRODUCT MAX. OPERATING VOLTAGE MAX IMPULSE CURRENT 80.20 μs CURRENT WAVE (A) VARISTOR VOLTAGE AT 1MA DC TEST CURRENT PEAK CLAMPING VOLTAGE WITH 80.20 μs WAVE CAPACITANCE DISC DIAMETER SIZE (MM) AC (V) DC (V) MIN. (V) MAX. (V) VC (V) 1PK (A) V150LA10AP 150 200 4500 216 264 395 50 800 14 ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 488 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Ground Reference Modules, High-Tension Couplers, & Relay Testers GROUND-REFERENCE MODULES Product Features Accessory For SE-GRM024 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 24 V dc bus. SE-601 SE-GRM048 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 48 V dc bus. SE-601 SE-GRM125 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 125 V dc bus. SE-601 SE-GRM250 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 250 V dc bus. SE-601 SE-GRM500 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 500 V dc bus. SE-601 SE-GRM780 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 780 V dc bus. SE-601 SE-GRM1000 Ground Reference Module Connects the SE-601 relay to an ungrounded 1000 V dc bus. SE-601 HIGH-TENSION COUPLERS Product Features Accessory For PGH-5000 High Tension Couplers Allows 5 kV systems to be connected to relay. PGR-6100 PGR-3200 PGH-6000 High Tension Couplers Allows 6 kV systems to be connected to relay. PGR-6100 PGR-3200 PROTECTION RELAY TESTERS Product Features Accessory For SE-100T Ground-Fault Relay Tester Tests the current pickup level ground-fault protection. Tests the entire ground-fault circuit. Any Relay on Substations, MCCs, Central Distribution Panels, Switchboards, and Test Benches SE-400 Ground-Fault-Relay Test Unit Tests the current pickup level, time delay and coordination of ground-fault protection. Tests the entire ground-fault circuit. Any Relay on Substations, MCCs, Central Distribution Panels, Switchboards, and Test Benches GR MODULES, HIGH-TENSION COUPLERS, & RELAY TESTERS ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 489 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Remote Indication INPUT MODULES & METERS REMOTE INDICATION & METERS Product Features Accessory For RK-105 Remote Indication and Reset Assembly Panel-mounted remote indication and reset with NEMA 1 rating. SE-105 SE-107 RK-105I Remote Indication Assembly Panel-mounted remote indication with NEMA 1 rating. SE-105 SE-107 RK-102 Industrial Remote Indication and Reset Kit Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting, with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-105 SE-107 RK-132 Industrial Remote Indication and Reset Kit Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting, with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 RK-325 Remote Indication and Reset Assembly Panel-mounted remote indication and reset with NEMA 1 rating. SE-325 INPUT MODULES Product Features Accessory For MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module Provides 8 programmable inputs to connect Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, and Cu10 RTDs. MPU-32 MPS MPS-DIF Differential Current Module Adds motor differential protection, compatible with core balance and summation current transformer connections. MPU-32 MPS MPU-CIM Current Input Module Interface between current transformers and MPU-32 or FPU-32 series relays. Reduces potential for open CT hazard. MPU-32 FPU-32 PGA-LS10 Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2 m half-sphere. Local LED continually displays sensor health or trip state. PGR-8800 AF0500 AF0100 PGA-LS20 Fiber-Optic Sensor Used to detect light and coordinate with current detection to eliminate nuisance tripping. 8 m (26.2 ft) active; 10 m (32.8 ft) total. PGR-8800 AF0500 AF0100 PGA-LS30 Fiber-Optic Sensor Used to detect light and coordinate with current detection to eliminate nuisance tripping. 18 m (59 ft) active; 20 m (66 ft) total PGR-8800 AF0500 AF0100 A0200/A0300 Light Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2 m halfsphere. Available in both 180° and 360°. D0920 A0220 Arc Detecting Point Sensor Line-of-sight light sensor detects an arc as small as 3 kA within a 2 m half-sphere. Available with 10 or 15 m cable. Full datasheet and ordering information available at Littelfuse.com/a0220 PGR-8800 AF0500 AF0100 D0920 D1000 LCSC10T12 Toroidal Current Sensor Remote monitoring of currents up to 50 A. Inner diameter 9.14 mm (0.36”) DCSA Series ACCESSORIES 14 For full datasheet and ordering information, see pg. 80 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 490 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Remote Indication REMOTE INDICATION & METERS Product Features Accessory For RK-325I Remote Indication Assembly Panel-mounted remote indication with NEMA 1 rating. SE-325 RK-302 Remote Indication and Reset Kit Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-325 RK-332 Remote Indication and Reset Kit Panel-mounted remote indication and reset, standard 22 mm mounting with NEMA 4 and NEMA 13 rating. SE-330 SE-330AU SE-330HV PGA-0500 Analog % Current Meter Panel-mounted analog meter displays ground-fault current as a percentage of the set point. SE-601 PGR-4300 PGR-6100 SE-701 SE-703 SE-704 PGA-0510 Analog Ohm Meter Panel-mounted analog ohmmeter displays insulation resistance from 0 Ω to infinity. PGR-3200 PGR-6100 PGR-6101-120 SENSING RESISTORS Product Features Accessory For ER-600VC (PGE-600V) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 1 kV. (Continuous duty) SE-330 SE-325 SE-330AU SE-MRE-600 Enclosure Used in outdoor enclosures. (ER-600 VC ordered separately) ER-600VC ER-5KV (PGE-05KV) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 5 kV. (Continuous duty) SE-330 SE-325 SE-330AU ER-5WP (PGE-05WV) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 5 kV, includes weather-protected terminals for use in outdoor enclosures. (Continuous duty) SE-330 SE-325 SE-330AU ER-15KV (PGE-15KV) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 15 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330 SE-325 SE-330AU SE-330HV ER-25KV (PGE-25KV) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 25 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330 SE-325 SE-330AU SE-330HV ER-35KV (PGE-35KV) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 35 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330 SE-330AU SE-330HV ER-72KV (PGE-72KV) Sensing Resistor Used on systems up to 72 kV. (Non-continuous duty) SE-330HV METERS & SENSING RESISTORS ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 491 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Remote Indication REMOTE INDICATION & MONITORING REMOTE INDICATORS & MONITORS Product Features Accessory For RM1000 RM1000-3R RM1000 NEMA 4 Motor-monitoring Device Motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products, and the 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM1000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/rm1000 777 series 77C series 601 series RM2000 RM2000CBM+ RM2000-RTDW Motor-monitoring Device Motor-monitoring device to be used in conjunction with the 777 family of products (excluding the P1 Series), 77C family of products and the Model 601 voltage monitors, via Modbus protocol with a communications module. The RM2000/777 motor management system combines unsurpassed electronic motor protection and critical, user-friendly, motor monitoring. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/rm2000 777 series 77C series 601 series INFORMER Remote diagnostic tool Hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with single-phase pump relays. The Informer uses an infrared receiver to access information sent from the relay which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system. Comes with IR Kit-12 (12" long). Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/informer 111P 111-Insider-P 111P-ENCL 231-Insider-P 232-Insider 233P-1.5 233P-ENCL 233P-1.5-ENCL 234-P 235P 235P-ENCL IR Kit-36 (36" long) Informer Fiber Optic Kit Use with the Informer. Simply attaches to the face of the unit to provide remote diagnostics without opening the panel. LSRX1 111-Insider-P 455 LSRX-C 231-Insider-P INFORMER-MS Remote diagnostic tool Hand-held diagnostic tool designed for use with the Littelfuse 455 series. The Informer-MS uses an infrared receiver to read valuable information transmitted from the 455, which can be helpful for troubleshooting the system Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/informer-ms 455 series OL-RESET Remote Reset Module Allows the 777 line of motor and pump relay products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Simply connect the module to the 777 communication port, connect a wire to each of the two applicable pins on the OL-RESET and to a normally-open push-button switch (sold separately). Mount the push-button switch in a convenient location. 777 series 777-MRSW Manual Remote Reset Kit (24” long) Allows the 777 line of motor and pump relay products to be manually reset without opening the panel door. Simply connect the 9-pin adapter to the 777 communication port and mount the push-button switch in a convenient location. 777 series M500 Electronic Megohmmeter Automatic, portable, battery-powered insulation tester. This unit is specifically designed as an inexpensive alternative to costly swing needle megohmmeters. The M500 measures insulation resistance values of motors, generators and transformers up to 1000 megohms at 500 V ac, indicating the condition of insulation on the zone scale. Its compact design and ease of use makes the M500 a great diagnostic tool for motor rewind shops, electrical maintenance personnel and pump installers. ACCESSORIES 14 For full datasheet, see pg. 246 For full datasheet, see pg. 248 For full datasheet, see pg. 250 For full datasheet, see pg. 252 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 492 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Communication COMMUNICATION ADAPTERS & MODULES COMMUNICATION ADAPTERS Product Features Accessory For RS485-RS232 Converter with cable & plug Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the RS232 (serial) port. The converter provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and dc power supply connections. An optional power supply may be required for laptops or other computers with low power serial ports, or for very large networks. Pre-wired for easy installation on the RS485MS-2W module. RS485MS-2W RS485-USB Converter with cable & plug/RS232:USB Allows RS485 devices to be connected to a PC via the USB port. The converter provides convenient terminal blocks for making signal and dc power supply connections. An optional power supply may be required for laptops or other computers with low power serial ports, or for very large networks. Pre-wired for easy installation on the RS485MS-2W module. RS485MS-2W AC700-CUA Communications Adapter Optical network-interface and firmware-upgrade communication adapter. Field-installed. EL731 COMMUNICATION MODULES Product Features Accessory For RS485MS-2W Communication Module This module is required when the RM1000, RM2000 or other Modbus capable device is used with 77X-type products. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/rs485ms2w Series: RM1000 77X RM2000 CIO-DN-P CIO-120-DN-P Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems Convenient and cost-effective Devicenet™ interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Devicenet network. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/ciodnp-cio120dnp 777 series CIO-EN Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems The CIO-EN Module (non-POE) is a convenient and costeffective Modbus-TCP and Modbus-RTU interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/cioen 777 series CIO-MB CIO-120-MB Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems Convenient and cost-effective Modbus-RTU interfaces capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of an overload relay over a Modbus network. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/ciomb-cio120mb 777 series CIO-777-PR Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems Convenient and cost-effective Profibus interface capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a Profibus network. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/cio777pr 777 series ending in P, -P, or -P2 CIO-601CS-DN-P1 Convenient and cost-effective DeviceNet device capable of providing discrete control and monitoring of motor starters, drives and other devices over a DeviceNet network. 601-CS-D-P1 COM 4-20 Communication link to PLC/ SCADA/monitoring systems Send a 4-20 mA signal proportional to the output power. It can also be used to send the input power by setting the efficiency setting on the 777-AccuPower monitor to one. This module allows communication to a PLC with an analog input and no Modbus input. Full datasheet available at Littelfuse.com/com420 777-AccuPower ACCESSORIES 14 For full datasheet, see pg. 254 For full datasheet, see pg. 257 For full datasheet, see pg. 260 For full datasheet, see pg. 255 For full datasheet, see pg. 259 For full datasheet, see pg. 261 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 493 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Terminations & Adapters TERMINATIONS & ADAPTERS Product Features Accessory For 1N5339B Termination Device 5 W axial-lead ground-check termination. Included with SE-105 and SE-107. SE-105 SE-107 SE-TA6-SM Stud-Mount Termination Assembly 50 W ground-check termination that is robust and compact for submersible pumps. Wire lead simplifies installation. (Replacement for 1N4553B) SE-105 SE-107 SE-TA6 Termination Assembly 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-105 SE-107 SE-TA6A (PGA-0T6A) Termination Assembly Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C SE-TA6A-WL Termination Assembly Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C SE-TA6ASF-WL Small-Format Termination Assembly with Wire Leads Temperature compensated 12 W ground-check termination, ideal for use in cable-coupler end caps and submersible pumps. Mounting holes and wire leads. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C SE-TA12A Termination Assembly Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-135 SE-145 SE-TA12ASF-WL Small-Format Termination Assembly with Wire Leads Temperature compensated 12 W ground-check termination, ideal for use in cable-coupler end caps and submersible pumps. Mounting holes and wire leads. SE-135 SE-145 SE-TA12A-WL Termination Assembly Temperature compensated 50 W ground-check termination with convenient mounting holes and screw terminals. SE-135 SE-145 SE-TA12A SE-TA12B Termination Assemblies Used together to allow an SE-134C to monitor a splitter box and two cables. SE-134C PPI-600V Parallel Path Isolator Parallel ground-path rejection for ground-check monitors. Eliminates intermachine arcing and prevents stray dc currents from flowing in a monitored ground wire. SE-105 SE-107 SE-134C SE-135 RK-13 Relay Interface Module Separate ground-fault and ground-check indication contacts for the SE-105, and separate ground-fault and resistor-fault contacts for the SE-325. Used to provide output to a PLC and operate standard pilot lights. Complete with conformally coated circuit boards. SE-105 SE-107 SE-325 SE-485-DIN Industrial RS-485 to RS-232 Converter Industrial network quality RS-485 to RS-233 serial converter. DIN-rail mounted, 24 V dc required. MPS FPS SE-485-PP Port-Powered Serial Converter Converts an RS-485 signal to an RS-232 signal. Used for set-point programming and updating flash memory. 115.2 kbit/s maximum transfer rate. MPU-32 MPS FPU-32 FPS CA-945 Serial Connector Adapter Kit Connects an RJ45 to a 9-pin serial connector. Includes 1.5 m cable and plug-in adapter. MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-ICUSB232 USB to RS-232 Converter Connects a 9-pin serial cable to a USB port. SE-330 CA-945 SE-330AU SE-330HV SE-485-PP SE-485-DIN TERMINATIONS & ADAPTERS ACCESSORIES 14 Accessories Liquid Level Control Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. LIQUID LEVEL PROBES & PROBE HOLDERS LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL ELECTRODES Product Features Accessory For LLP-24 Liquid Level Probe Threaded stainless steel probe measuring 24 in (61 cm) long. Designed for use with PHST-38QTN liquid level control electrodes. PHST-38QTN PHST-38QTN Probe Holder P0700-409 Protective Boot Designed for use with all conductive liquid level controls. Composed of insulators and metal parts made of number 300 series stainless steel. These internally conductive probe holders are designed for a maximum steam pressure of 240 PSI; 400 °F maximum. Maximum voltage from electrode to ground. PHST-38QTN is UL 353 Recognized. Series: LLC1 LLC2 LLC4 LLC5 LLC6 LLC8 PC-XXX-LLC-CZ PC-XXX-LLC-GM 460-15-100-LLS Inches (Millimeters) 4.20 (106.68) REF 3/8” NPT NO.8–32 THDS 2.25 +.05 (57.15 +1.27) .68 (17.27) REF .75 (19.05) .80 MAX (19.05) .74 MIN (18.80) ACCESSORIES 14 494 ACCESSORIES 14 Accessories Liquid Level Control © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 495 Littelfuse.com/relayct Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) CT SELECTION GUIDE PRODUCT GROUND-FAULT CT GROUND-FAULT TRIP LEVEL (or insulation level) PHASE CTS PAGE # SE-601 No CTs required 1–20 mA N/A – PGR-3100 No CTs required Indication only N/A – PGR-3200 No CTs required Warnings at 30 kΩ & 50 kΩ Alarm at 10 kΩ N/A – SE-701/SE-703 CT200 series 10–198 A N/A 480 EFCT series 50 mA–4.95 A 480 SE-CS30 series 300 mA–29.7 A 480 SE-704 SE-CS30 series 10 mA–5 A N/A 480 EL731 EFCT series 30–5,000 mA ac and dc N/A 480 SE-105/SE-107 CT200 series 0.5–4 A N/A 480 SE-134C/SE-135 SE-CS10 series 0.5–12.5 A N/A 480 SE-330 CT200 series 12–200 A N/A 480 EFCT series 100 mA–5 A 480 SE-CS30 series 600 mA–30 A 480 SE-325 CT200 series 0.5–4 A N/A 480 MPU-32* CT200 series 10–200 A N/A 480 EFCT series 50 mA–5 A 480 SE-CS30 series 300 mA–30 A 480 MPS* CT200 10–200 A 1-A, 5-A Secondary CTs 480 EFCT series (5-A Primary) 50 mA–5 A 480 SE-CS30 series (30-A Primary) 300 mA–30 A 480 MPU-32-X69X-PMA16 Existing CTs can be used or same as MPU-32. 480 MPS-469X-PMA24 Existing CTs can be used or same as MPS. 480 FPU-32* CT200 series 10–200 A 1-A, 5-A Secondary CTs 480 EFCT series 50 mA–5 A 480 SE-CS30 series 300 mA–30 A 480 FPS* CT200 10–200 A 1-A, 5-A Secondary CTs 480 EFCT series (5-A Primary) 50 mA–5 A 480 SE-CS30 series (30-A Primary) 300 mA–30 A 480 PGR-8800‡ N/A N/A 5-A Secondary CTs (optional) 480 Note: See page 502 for additional information on CT selection. See page 482 for CT sizing chart. *Phase CTs should be selected with a primary rating of 100–300 % of rated current to maintain specified accuracy. ‡Select a CT with a primary rating approximately equal to the system’s rated current. GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION GROUNDCONDUCTOR MONITORING RESISTANCE GROUNDING MOTOR & PUMP PROTECTION FEEDER PROTECTION ARC-FLASH PROTECTION ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayct 496 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS CURRENT TRANSFORMERS Product Features Inner Diameter Accessory For CT200 (PGC-2056) Current Transformer Detects phase current or ground-fault current (200-A primary) 56 mm (2.20") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-8800 SE-105/107 SE-330 SE-325 SE-701 CT200L (PGC-2089) Current Transformer Detects phase current or ground-fault current (200-A primary) 89 mm (3.50") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-8800 SE-105 SE-107 SE-701 EFCT-26 (PGC-3026) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive current transformer used to detect ground-fault current (5-A primary) 26 mm (1.02") EL731 FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 SE-330 SE-701 EFCT-1 (PGC-3082) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive current transformer used to detect ground-fault current (5-A primary) 82 mm (3.23") EL731 FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 SE-330 SE-701 EFCT-2 (PGC-3140) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Sensitive current transformer used to detect ground-fault current (5-A primary) 140 mm (5.50") EL731 FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 SE-701 EFCT-1FC (PGC-31FC) Flux Conditioner Fits in the EFCT-1 window to reduce saturation and prevent false operation due to large surge currents 70 mm (2.75") EFCT-1 SE-CS10-2.5 (PGC-4064) Current Sensor Detects ground-fault current 64 mm (2.50") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 SE-CS10-4 (PGC-4108) Current Sensor Detects ground-fault current 108 mm (4.25") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 SE-CS10-6 (PGC-4160) Current Sensor Detects ground-fault current 160 mm (6.31") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 SE-CS10-8 (PGC-4210) Current Sensor Detects ground-fault current 210 mm (8.25") SE-134C SE-135 SE-145 SE-CS30-26 (PGC-5025) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 25 mm (0.98") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-330 SE-701 SE-704 SE-CS30-70 (PGC-5060) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 60 mm (2.36") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-330 SE-701 SE-704 SE-CS30-4 (PGC-5095) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 95 mm (3.74") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-330 SE-701 SE-704 SE-CS30-5 (PGC-5130) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 130 mm (5.12") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-330 SE-701 SE-704 SE-CS30-8 (PGC-5200) Ground-Fault Current Transformer Current Transformer for low-level ground faults, flux conditioner is standard (30-A primary) 200 mm (7.87") FPS FPU-32 MPS MPU-32 PGR-6100 PGR-6101 SE-330 SE-701 SE-704 SE-CS40-6 Current Sensor Detects ground-fault current 160 mm (6.31”) SE-135 SE-145 NOTE: Contact factory for additional CT offerings. ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 497 Littelfuse.com/relayct Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) INSTRUMENTATION & METERING TRANSFORMERS Dimensional Drawing 2RL 56RL 76RL DONUT STYLE 2SFT 56SFT 76SFT FOOT MOUNTED WITH BRASS TERMINALS Donut Style Foot Mounted Description Littelfuse offers a wide array of instrument rated current transformers in 1–3 inch diameter opening. Voltage class: 600 V BIL rating: 10 kV Certification: cRUus (WICC File E100575) Ordering Information DONUT MODEL WINDOW CURRENT RATIO CT-0050-D10 1.0" 50:5 CT-0075-D10 1.0" 75:5 CT-0100-D10 1.0" 100:5 CT-0150-D10 1.0" 150:5 CT-0200-D10 1.0" 200:5 CT-0300-D10 1.0" 300:5 CT-0200-D20 2.0" 200:5 CT-0300-D20 2.0" 300:5 CT-0400-D20 2.0" 400:5 CT-0500-D20 2.0" 500:5 FOOTED MODEL WINDOW CURRENT RATIO CT-0050-F10 1.0" 50:5 CT-0100-F10 1.0" 100:5 CT-0150-F10 1.0" 150:5 CT-0200-F10 1.0" 200:5 CT-0300-F10 1.0" 300:5 CT-1200-F15 1.5" 1200:5 CT-0150-F20 2.0" 150:5 CT-0200-F20 2.0" 200:5 CT-0300-F20 2.0" 300:5 CT-0400-F20 2.0" 400:5 CT-0600-F20 2.0" 600:5 CT-0400-F30 3.0" 400:5 CT-0800-F30 3.0" 800:5 CT - xxx - D10 Style Series Window Size Current Ratio D = Donut Style F = Footed Style 10 = 1.0 inch 15 = 1.5 inches 20 = 2.0 inches 30 = 3.0 inches xxx:5 current ratio Part Numbering System ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayct 498 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) INSTRUMENTATION AND METERING TRANSFORMERS Product Features Inner Diameter Accessory For CT-XXXX-DXX Series Donut Style Transformer Littelfuse offers a wide array of instrument rated current transformers in 1–3 inch diameter opening. Full datasheet and ordering information available at Littelfuse.com/ctxxxxdxx 25.4 - 76.2 mm (1 - 3") Series: 777 DCSA ECS ECSW LSR-0 LSR-XX LSRU LSRX TCS TCSA LCSC10T12 CT-XXXX-FXX Series Footed Style Transformer Littelfuse offers a wide array of instrument rated current transformers in 1–3 inch diameter opening. Full datasheet and ordering information available at Littelfuse.com/ctxxxxfxx 25.4 - 76.2 mm (1 - 3") Series: 777 DCSA ECS ECSW LSR-0 LSR-XX LSRU LSRX TCS TCSA LCSC10T12 INSTRUMENTATION & METERING TRANSFORMERS Installation Instructions: When installing the Zero-Sequence CTs, ensure the following: 1. Only the load carrying conductors pass through the center of the CT. This means L1 + N for 1-phase and L1+ L2 + L3 for 3-phase. 2. The power conductors pass through the center of the CT and are preferably bound together to keep the conductors uniformly spaced. 3. The power conductors pass perpendicular to the CT and, where practical, continue perpendicular to the CT on both sides of the CT for 3”. 4. The power conductors should not be installed in a way that allows them to run along the side edges of the CT. 5. Where practical, locate the CT away from noise-generating devices such as transformers, frequency converters, etc. Current Transformer Sizing Chart Conductor Size (AWG/kcmil) Minimum CT Window Size (Inner Diameter in mm) Number of Conductors 1 3 4 6 8 12 12 4 8 9 11 13 15 10 6 10 11 14 16 19 8 7 12 14 17 20 24 6 9 15 18 22 25 31 4 11 19 22 28 32 39 3 13 22 25 31 36 44 2 14 25 28 35 40 49 1 16 28 32 39 45 55 1/0 18 31 36 44 51 62 2/0 20 35 40 49 57 69 3/0 23 39 45 55 64 78 4/0 25 44 51 62 72 88 250 28 48 55 67 78 95 350 33 56 65 80 92 113 500 39 67 78 95 110 135 750 48 82 95 117 135 165 1000 55 95 110 135 156 191 ACCESSORIES 14 For full datasheet and ordering information, see page 481. For full datasheet and ordering information, see page 481. © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 499 Littelfuse.com/relayct Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) ELCT SERIES Description TThe ELCT series is a sensitive current transformer with integrated flux conditioner used with Littelfuse relays to detect low levels of earth-leakage current. Accessories CBLTP Twisted-pair wire for connection to CT. Order in desired length in meters. Specifications Current Rating ELCT5: 5:0.05 A ELCT30: 30:0.05 A Accuracy ELCT5: 3 % @ 0.01 VA ELCT30: 3 % @ 0.06 VA Frequency 50 to 400 Hz Insulation Level 600 V Operating Temperature -40 °C to 55 °C (-40 °F to 131 °F) Application SE-701 Wire Gauge 0.05-3.3 mm2 (12–30 AWG) Tightening Torque 0.5 N-m Certification UL, cUL, CE Compliance RoHS, IEC 61869-2, ANSI/IEEE C57.13 Note: One frequency response may be extended for specific product families Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER TURNS RATIO WINDOW SIZE, ID WEIGHT ELCT5-31 100:1 31 mm (1.22 in) 127.0 g (0.28 lbs) ELCT5-88 100:1 88 mm (3.46 in) 635.0 g (1.40 lbs) ELCT30-31 600:1 31 mm (1.22 in) 131.5 g (0.29 lbs) ELCT30-88 600:1 88 mm (3.46 in) 680.4 g (1.50 lbs) 0.01 0.1 0.1 1.0 1.0 5.0 10.0 50.0 SECONDARY EXCITING VOLTAGE (VOLTS) ELCT5-31 ELCT5-88 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT (MILLIAMPERES) 0.1 1.0 0.1 10.0 1.0 50.0 10.0 50.0 SECONDARY EXCITING VOLTAGE (VOLTS) ELCT30-31 ELCT30-88 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT (MILLIAMPERES) Current Transformer ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayct 500 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) ELCT SERIES Dimensions and Mounting Diagram Inches [millimeters] Mount the ELCT5-31 and ELCT30-31 using M5 or #10 screws. Mount the ELCT5-88 and ELCT30-88 using M6 or 1/4" screws. CONNECTION CTs should be wired according to the diagram below: DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING DIAGRAM Dimensions shown are Inches (millimeters). Mount the CT using M5 or #8 screws. ELCT5-31 and ELCT30-31 ELCT5-88 and ELCT30-88 73.36 2.888 72.64 2.860 31.56 1.243 36.34 1.431 55.97 2.204 33.72 1.328 46.80 1.843 20.64 0.813 2.41 R0.095 62.28 2.452 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 73.36 2.888 36.34 1.431 33.72 1.328 2.41 R0.095 62.28 2.452 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 73.36 2.888 72.64 2.860 31.56 1.243 36.34 1.431 55.97 2.204 33.72 1.328 46.80 1.843 20.64 0.813 2.41 R0.095 62.28 2.452 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 145.42 5.725 87.73 3.454 75.60 2.976 137.69 5.421 61.09 2.405 28.58 1.125 3.38 R0.133 44.83 1.765 115.59 4.551 7.62 0.300 NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNDIMTOFRAANTWTHRNO145.42 5.725 87.73 3.454 75.60 2.976 137.69 5.421 61.09 2.405 28.58 1.125 3.38 R0.133 44.83 1.765 115.59 4.551 134.12 5.280 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 145.42 5.725 87.73 3.454 75.60 2.976 137.69 5.421 61.09 2.405 28.58 1.125 3.38 R0.133 44.83 1.765 115.59 4.551 7.62 0.300 NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWDIMENSIONS ARE IN INCTOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL THREE PLACE DECIMAL NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Disclaimer Notice – Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, users should independently evaluate the suitability of and test each product selected for their own applications. Littelfuse products are not designed for, and may not be used in, all applications. Read complete Disclaimer Notice at www.littelfuse.com/product-disclaimer. H1 H2 X1 X2 TOPVIEW AND MOUNTING DETAIL FRONTVIEW SIDEVIEW 090-04583-00 ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 501 Littelfuse.com/relayct Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) ZSCT SERIES Description The ZSCT series is a current transformer used with Littelfuse relays to detect low levels of earth-leakage current. Accessories CBLTP Twisted-pair wire for connection to CT. Order in desired length in meters. Specifications Current Rating ZSCT5: 5:0.05 A ZSCT30: 30:0.05 A Accuracy ZSCT5: 3 % @ 0.01 VA ZSCT30: 3 % @ 0.06 VA Frequency 50 to 400 Hz Insulation Level 600 V Operating Temperature -40 °C to 55 °C (-40 °F to 131 °F) Application MP8000 Wire Gauge 0.05-3.3 mm2 (12–30 AWG) Tightening Torque 0.5 N-m Certification UL, cUL, CE Compliance RoHS, IEC 61869-2, ANSI/IEEE C57.13 Note: One frequency response may be extended for specific product families Ordering Information ORDERING NUMBER TURNS RATIO WINDOW SIZE, ID WEIGHT ZSCT5-31 100:1 31 mm (1.22 in) 117.9 g (0.26 lbs) ZSCT5-88 100:1 88 mm (3.46 in) 499.0 g (1.10 lbs) ZSCT30-31 600:1 31 mm (1.22 in) 113.4 g (0.25 lbs) 0.01 0.1 0.1 1.0 1.0 5.0 10.0 50.0 SECONDARY EXCITING VOLTAGE (VOLTS) ZSCT5-31 ZSCT5-88 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT (MILLIAMPERES) 0.1 1.0 10.0 50.0 SECONDARY EXCITING VOLTAGE (VOLTS) ZSCT30-31 SECONDARY EXCITING CURRENT (MILLIAMPERES) 0.1 1.0 10.0 50.0 Current Transformer ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayct 502 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Current Transformers (CTs) ZSCT SERIES Dimensions and Mounting Diagram Inches [millimeters] Mount the ZSCT5-31 and ZSCT30-31 using M5 or #10 screws. Mount the ZSCT5-88 using M6 or 1/4" screws. CONNECTION CTs should be wired according to the diagram below: DIMENSIONS AND MOUNTING DIAGRAM Dimensions shown are Inches (millimeters). Mount the CT using M5 or #8 screws. ZSCT5-31 and ZSCT30-31 ZSCT5-88 73.36 2.888 72.64 2.860 31.56 1.243 36.34 1.431 55.97 2.204 33.72 1.328 46.80 1.843 20.64 0.813 2.41 R0.095 62.28 2.452 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 73.36 2.888 72.64 2.860 31.56 1.243 36.34 1.431 55.97 2.204 33.72 1.328 46.80 1.843 20.64 0.813 2.41 R0.095 62.28 2.452 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 145.42 5.725 87.73 3.454 75.60 2.976 137.69 5.421 61.09 2.405 28.58 1.125 3.38 R0.133 44.83 1.765 115.59 4.551 7.62 0.300 NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNDIMTOFRAANTWTHNO145.42 5.725 87.73 3.454 75.60 2.976 137.69 5.421 61.09 2.405 28.58 1.125 3.38 R0.133 44.83 1.765 115.59 4.551 7.62 0.300 NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWDIMENSIONS ARE IN INCTOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL THREE PLACE DECIMAL NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Disclaimer Notice – Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, users should independently evaluate the suitability of and test each product selected for their own applications. Littelfuse products are not designed for, and may not be used in, all applications. Read complete Disclaimer Notice at www.littelfuse.com/product-disclaimer. H1 H2 X1 X2 TOPVIEW AND MOUNTING DETAIL FRONTVIEW SIDEVIEW 090-04588-00 73.36 2.888 36.34 1.431 33.72 1.328 2.41 R0.095 62.28 2.452 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 145.42 5.725 87.73 3.454 75.60 2.976 137.69 5.421 61.09 2.405 28.58 1.125 3.38 R0.133 44.83 1.765 115.59 4.551 134.12 5.280 7.62 0.300 WEIGHT: SHEET 1 OF 1 PART NUMBER: REV DESCRIPTION: NAME DATE DRAWN BY MATERIAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL 1/64 ANGULAR: 1 deg TWO PLACE DECIMAL 0.01 THREE PLACE DECIMAL 0.005 NOT DRAWN TO SCALE ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 503 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures RELAY TO REPLACE PANEL MOUNT NEW RELAY AB BULLETIN 1406 PMA-14 MPS FPL-GFRM PMA-6 SE-701/SE-704 GE S1 PMA-9 MPU-32/FPU-32 GE LODTRAK III PMA-10 MPU-32 GE MULTILIN 169, 269, or 369 PMA-13 MPS PMA-16 MPU-32 PMA-16 FPU-32 GE MULTILIN 469 PMA-24 MPS GE MULTILIN P4A PMA-15 MPU-32/FPU-32 GEC/MCGG PMA-3 SE-701/SE-704 GE & WESTINGHOUSE FT-11 PMA-12 MPU-32 P & B GOLDS Contact Factory FPU-32 WESTINGHOUSE CO9 & CO11 Contact Factory FPU-32 Adapter Plates PMA SERIES Panel Mount Adapters — Retrofits Description A variety of protection relay retrofit adapter plates are available for the products listed below. These adapter plates simplify the process of updating electromechanical or poorly functioning existing relays. Consult factory if you have a specific product to replace that is not featured. Adapters are available in either plate style for panel mounting or drawout style depending on the relay being replaced. Motor, feeder and ground-fault protection upgrades are available for electromechanical or solid state relays that are nearing the end of their life. For a complete list of the Littelfuse Panel Mount Adapter Plates please see next page. Example of a panel mount adapter (PMA-3). Relay is for illustrative purposes only and must be purchased separately from adapter plate. For more information on our complete offering of panel mount adapters see the following page. Example Shown: PMA-3 FEATURES BENEFITS Mounting Fits in existing mounting holes and panel openings Multiple adapter sizes Plate style or drawout style adapters are available to fit various outdated relays Features & Benefits ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 504 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures Note: Relays are not included with the PMA-Series Panel Mount Adapters. PANEL MOUNT ADAPTERS Product Features Accessory For PMA-2 Adapter Plate Used when replacing the AB Bulletin 1406. MPU-32 PMA-3 Adapter Plate Used when replacing GEC/MCGG ground-fault relays. Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60. SE-704 SE-701 PMA-4 Adapter Plate Used when replacing the Multilin 139/239. MPU-32 PMA-6 Adapter Plate Used when replacing FPL-GFRM ground-fault relays. Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60. SE-701 PMA-7 Adapter Plate Used when replacing the GE Lodtrak II. MPU-32 PMA-8 Adapter Plate Used when replacing an Atkinson Omser II with an SE-130-Series Monitor. SE-134C SE-135 PMA-9 Adapter Plate Used when replacing relays in the GE S1 Case. Requires PMA-55 or PMA-60. MPU-32 FPU-32 PMA-10 Adapter Plate Used when replacing the GE Lodtrak III. MPU-32 PMA-12 Adapter Plate Used when replacing GE and Westinghouse FT-11 relays. MPU-32 PMA-13 Adapter Plate Used when replacing the GE Multilin 169, 269, or 369. MPS PMA-14 Adapter Plate Used for rough cutouts and when replacing the AB Bulletin 1406. MPS PMA-15 Adapter Plate Used for rough cutouts and when replacing the GE Multilin P4A. MPU-32 FPU-32 PMA-16 Adapter Plate PMA-16-RTDB Mounting Bracket The PMA-16 mounting plate is used when replacing the GE Multilin 169, 269, and 369 relays. The PMA-16-RTDB is a mounting bracket for the optional MPS-RTD Temperature Input Module. MPU-32 FPU-32 PMA-17 Adapter Plate Used when replacing Sprecher & Schuh Cet 4. MPU-32 PMA-18 Adapter Plate Used when replacing Sprecher & Schuh Cet 3. MPU-32 PMA-21 Adapter Plate Used when replacing an ABB RACIF. FPU-32 PMA-23 Adapter Plate Custom mounting plate for FPU-32 to replace 3 Westinghouse C0 relays. FPU-32 PMA-24 Adapter Plate Used when replacing the GE Multilin 469. MPS PMA-55 Adapter Plate Used to panel mount the SE-601 and SE-701. SE-601 PGR-4300 SE-701 SE-704 PMA-60 Adapter Plate Used to panel mount the relay; IP 53 and NEMA 3 rating, tamper resistant. SE-601 PGR-4300 SE-701 SE-704 MPU-32-SMK Surface-Mount Kit Used to surface mount the MPU-32 or FPU-32. MPU-32 FPU-32 PANEL-MOUNT ADAPTERS ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 505 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures DIN RAIL & MOUNTING ADAPTERS DIN RAIL & MOUNTING ADAPTERS Product Features Accessory For C103PM (Al) DIN Rail Industry standard 35 mm aluminum or steel DIN rail. C103PM aluminum rail is available in a 36 in. (91.4 cm) length. Can be used with all DIN-rail compatible units. AC700-SMK Mount Adapter DIN-rail and Surface-mount adapter for back-plane mounting. EL731 D0050 DIN-Rail Adapter Clip Plastic clip allowing DIN-rail mounting of the PGR-8800 and AF0500 Arc-Flash Relay. AF0500 PGR-8800 P1023-20 DIN Rail Mount Adaptor Allows any 2 x 2 in (50.8 x 50.8 mm) or 2 x 3 in (50.8 x 76.2 mm) module to be mounted on a 35 mm DIN type rail. Comes complete with mounting hardware (one #10 - 24 x 1.00 screw and one #10 - 24 x 1.25 screw) for 0.75 in (19 mm) and 1 in (25.4 mm) thick modules. Consult the individual datasheet to determine part compatibility. P0500-178 Surface Mount Adapter P0500-178 is surface mountable with 2 Quick Mount Fasteners. ASXX/DSXX Series Timers Inches (Millimeters) P0500-179 DIN Rail Mount Adapter P0500-179 snaps onto DIN rail. ASXX/DSXX Series Timers Inches (Millimeters) ACCESSORIES 14 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 506 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures BRACKETS & CLIPS BRACKETS & CLIPS Product Features Accessory For BZ1 Front Panel Mount Kit Provides an easy method of through-the-panel mounting of 8-pin or 11-pin plug-in timers, flashers, and other controls. May be mounted in panels up to 0.125 in (3.2 mm) thick. Includes two clamps and two screws. Series: ARP FS500 LLC4 LLC5 LLC6 PLM PLMU PLR PLS PRLM TDB TDBH TDBL TDI TDIH TDIL TDM TDMB TDMH TDML TDR TDS TDSH TDSL TRB TRDU TRM TRS TRU PANEL OPENING 1.9 +/-.02 (48.3 +/-.5) 2.6 +/-.02 (66.0 +/-.5) Inches (Millimeters) Illustrates panel opening size required to mount BZ1. P1023-6 P1023-7 Mounting Brackets 0.56 (14.3) 1.25 (31.8) 2.1 (53.3) 0.47 (11.9) 1.5 (38.1) 0.19 (4.8) d Inches (Millimeters) Provides a convenient method of mounting modules. The 90 ° orientation of mounting slots makes installation/removal of modules quick and easy. Made from steel with a cadmium surface finish. PART NUMBER MOUNTING HOLE SIZE MOUNTING METHOD P1023-6 0.19 in (4.8 mm) #8 (M4 x 0.7) screw P1023-7 0.25 in (6.35 mm) Mini-Pot Used on many 2" x 2" timers. Refer to individual series datasheet to determine if this accessory is compatible. PSCRB8 Hold-down Brackets Designed for use with P1011-6 socket. Securely mounts 8-pin plug-in controls in any position, and provides protection against vibration. Sold in pairs. P1011-6 PSC8 PSC11 Hold-down Clips Securely mounts plug in controls in any position. Also provides protection against vibration. Select the PSC8 for use with NDS-8, or the PSC11 for use with NDS-11 sockets. Sold in pairs. NDS-8 Socket NDS-11 Socket P1023-2 P Clamp Removable P clamp bracket for mounting MSM series timers and FS100 and FS400 series flashers. Timers series: MSM Flasher series: FS100 FS400 ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 507 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures ENCLOSURES & WATERTIGHT COVERS ENCLOSURES Product Features Accessory For NGRM-ENC NGR Monitor Control Panel NEMA 4 painted steel control panel, complete with the SE-325 or SE-330, and a fused 600/480:120 V PT for relay control power. Suitable for indoor or outdoor mounting, CSA certified. When NGR Monitor is back-plane mounted, 22 mm NEMA 4 indicators and reset button are included. Please contact factory for additional information. Littelfuse.com/ngrm-enc SE-325 SE-330 NEMA-3R-L A Enclosure Metal NEMA-3R electrical box with lenses for viewing the single-phase PumpSaver® status lights. H 6.0” x W 6.0” x D 4.0” Single-Phase PumpSaver RM-1000-ENCL Enclosure Steel enclosure for protecting the RM1000 from weather and vandalism. Protects from UV, hail, and it seals to keep rain from contacting the RM1000 connections. The enclosure also features a built-in padlock tab (padlock not included). H 6.4” x W 6.3” x D 1.7” RM1000 WATERTIGHT COVERS Product Features Accessory For MPU-16A-Y92A-96N Watertight Cover Watertight cover for outdoor applications. MPU-32 FPU-32 SE-IP65CVR-G Watertight Cover Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection. SE-134C SE-135 SE-330 SE-330AU SE-330HV SE-400 SE-IP65CVR-M Watertight Cover Watertight cover. Tamper-resistant. IP65 protection. MPS FPS SE-MRE-600 Moisture-Resistant Enclosure Kit Protects the connection terminals from snow and rain in outdoor applications. ER-600VC ER-1000HV ACCESSORIES 14 For full datasheet and ordering information, see pg. 67 Littelfuse.com/relayaccessories 508 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Accessories Mounting Adapters and Enclosures SOCKETS SOCKETS Product Features Accessory For OT08PC Octal Socket 8-Pin 8-pin 35 mm DIN-rail or surface mount octal socket. Rated at 10 A @ 600 V ac and has pressure clamp terminals. AWG 12 to 22 (3.2 to 0.33 mm²) wire sizes. Consult individual datasheet for compatibility NDS-8 Octal Socket 8-Pin Screw terminals with captive wire clamps 8-pin 35 mm DIN-rail or surface mount octal socket. Rated at 10 A @ 300 V ac. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. A spring mechanism allows easy removal. Uses PSC8 hold-down clips. Up to two #14 AWG (2.45 mm²) wire size Series: ARP FS500 LLC4 LLC5 PRLM TDB TDBH TDBL TDI TDIH TDIL TDM TDMB TDMH TDML TDR TDS TDSH TDSL TRDU TRM TRS TRU P1011-6 Octal Socket 8-Pin 8-pin surface mount socket with binder head screw terminals. Rated at 10 A @ 600 V ac. UL Listed combination when used with TDM, TDB, TDS series timers. Uses PSCRB8 hold-down brackets. Series: ARP FS500 LLC4 LLC5 PRLM TDB TDM TDMB TDR TDS TRB TRDU TRM TRS TRU OT11PC Magnal Socket 11-Pin Magnal Sockets are for plug-in units 11-pin Plug-in units Series: ARP LLC6 TDB TDBH TDBL TDMB TDS TDSH TDSL TRB TRDU TRM TRS TRU SD12-PC Rectangle Socket 12-pin 12-pin surface Rectangle Socket. ACBC-120 NDS-11 11-pin Magnal Socket Screw terminals with captive wire clamps 11 pin 35 mm DIN-rail or surface mount socket. Rated at 10 A @ 300 V ac. Surface mounted with two #6 (M 3.5 x 0.6) screws or snaps onto a 35 mm DIN rail. A spring mechanism allows easy removal. Uses PSC11 hold-down clips. AWG 12 to 22 (3.2 to 0.33 mm²) wire sizes Series: ARP LLC6 TDB TDBH TDBL TDMB TDS TDSH TDSL TRB TRDU TRM TRS TRU ACCESSORIES 14 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 509 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview For More Information… and to download our Protection Relay Overview, visit Littelfuse.com/TechnicalCenter OVERVIEW Glossary of Terms............................................................................... 510 Introduction........................................................................................ 513 I. Introduction to Protection Relays............................................ 513 II. Relay Application.................................................................... 514 III. CT Application ....................................................................... 522 IV. Resistance-Grounding Conversion ........................................ 523 IEEE/ANSI Device Numbers............................................................... 526 Typical Suffixes.................................................................................. 526 PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Overview Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 510 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Glossary of Terms Active Power–Measured in kW. In a diesel generator application, it is the power produced by the engine. Alarm Level–A setting on a protection relay at which an LED or output contact operates. Alarm Relay Contact–An output of a relay that acts as a switch and is typically connected to a visual or audible alarm. Analog Output–A discrete, continually variable 0-1 mA, 4-20 mA, or 0-5 Vdc signal from a protection relay used to pass information to a device or controller. Apparent Power–The vector sum of the active and reactive power. Arc Flash Hazard–A dangerous condition associated with the possible release of energy caused by an electric arc. Arc Flash Risk Assessment–A study investigating a worker’s potential exposure to arc flash energy, conducted for the purpose of injury prevention and to determine safe work practices, arc flash boundary, and the necessary types of personal protective equipment (PPE). Arc Flash Suit–A complete arc-rated clothing and equipment system covering the entire body, except for hands and feet. Arc Flash Boundary–When an arc flash hazard exists, the boundary is an approach limit at a distance from a prospective arc source within which a person could receive a second degree burn if an electrical arc flash were to occur. Arc Rating–The value attributed to materials that describes their performance to exposure to an electrical arc discharge. The arc rating is expressed in cal/cm2 and is derived from the determined value of the arc thermal performance value (ATPV) or energy of break open threshold (EBT) (Should a material system exhibit a break open response below the ATPV value). Arc rating is reported as either ATPV or EBT, whichever is the lower value.ˆ Asynchronous Motor–A motor in which the speed of the rotor is not the same as the connected system frequency. Charging Current–System charging current is the current that will flow into the grounding connection when one phase of an ungrounded system is faulted to ground. Although not physically connected to ground, electrical conductors and the windings of all components are capacitively connected to ground. Consequently, a small current will flow to ground from each phase. This current does not occur at any particular location; rather, it is distributed throughout the system just as the capacitance to ground is distributed throughout the system. Conformal Coating–A Silicone coating used to protect circuit boards from pollutants, corrosion, mildew, etc. Core-Balance Current Transformer–See Earth-Fault Current Transformer. Current Transformer (CT)–A transformer that produces a current in its secondary circuit in a known proportion to current in its primary circuit. CT Verification–A continuous check of CT continuity to verify connection. CT Saturation–A condition that occurs when a CT cannot maintain a secondary current proportional to a relatively large primary current. CT Local Saturation–A condition where the magnetic flux is not evenly distributed throughout the CT. A resulting secondary current could be induced when no ground fault is present; it may lead to the false operation of a protective relay. This could occur if conductors are not centered in a CT window. CT Saturation Compensation–A feature in which a protective relay can recognize that a CT is saturated and compensate for the condition in order to maintain service. Data Logging–Collecting and storing information in a format that can be reviewed for trending, troubleshooting, and reporting. De-energized–Free from any electrical connection to a source of potential difference and from electrical charge; not having a potential different from that of the earth. DFT–See Discrete Fourier Transform. Differential Module–An accessory for the MPU-32 Motor Protection Relay and MPS Motor Protection System to add phasedifferential protection. Digital Harmonic Filter–The use of digital signal-processing techniques such as a discrete Fourier Transform to eliminate the measurement of harmonic components. With regard to groundfault detection, this allows for a setting below the background noise level. Discrete Fourier Transform–A mathematical algorithm used to extract a single frequency, such as the fundamental frequency, from a signal. Earth Leakage–See Leakage Current. Earth-Fault Current Transformer–A current transformer used to measure low-level ground-fault current. Electrical Hazard–A dangerous condition such that contact or equipment failure can result in electric shock, arc flash burn, thermal burn, or blast. Electrical Safety–Recognizing hazards associated with the use of electrical energy and taking precautions so hazards do not cause injury or death. Electrically Safe Work Condition–An electrical conductor or circuit part has been disconnected from energized parts, locked/tagged in accordance with established standards, tested to ensure the absence of voltage, and grounded if determined necessary. Fail-Safe Mode (also known as Undervoltage or UV)– An output relay is energized during normal (not tripped) operation. If the protection relay loses supply voltage, the system will trip or alarm. (Also see Non-Fail-Safe.) Fault Current–A current that flows when a phase conductor is faulted to another phase or ground. Feeder–All circuit conductors between the service equipment or other power-supply source and the load or branch-circuit overcurrent device. PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 511 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Glossary of Terms Feeder Protection–Overcurrent or overvoltage devices installed on a feeder circuit to interrupt the supply in the event of a fault. Flux Conditioner–A ring of magnetically permeable material inserted in an earth-fault current transformer window; used to reduce local saturation. Fundamental Frequency–In an alternating-current power system, the frequency of the generated voltage. In North America this is typically 60 Hz (60 cycles per second). Ground Check Conductor–An insulated conductor in a trailing cable used to assist in monitoring continuity of the ground conductor. Typically designed to be the smallest conductor, it is the first to break connection when cable couplers are disconnected. Ground-Check Loop–A circuit that includes a ground-check conductor, a ground-check termination device, and a ground conductor. Ground-Check Termination–A device installed at the load end of a ground-check loop. Ground-Continuity Monitor–A protection relay that continuously monitors a ground-check loop and trips if the loop opens or shorts. Ground Fault–An unintentional contact between a phase conductor and ground or equipment frame. The words “ground” and “earth” are used interchangeably. Ground-Fault Current–A current that returns to the supply neutral through a ground-fault and ground-return path. Ground-Fault Current Transformer–See Earth-Fault Current Transformer. Ground-Fault Relay–A protection relay designed to detect a phase-to-ground fault on a system and trip or alarm when the condition exceeds its pickup setting for longer than its time delay. Ground-Fault Protection–The use of a ground-fault relay or indication system in order to interrupt the supply or alarm personnel in the event of a ground fault. Ground Reference Module–A resistor network that limits ground-fault current and provides a system reference for a DC ground-fault relay. Harmonic Filter–A device or method to remove or ignore non-fundamental frequency components of a signal. Harmonic Frequency–Harmonic-frequency components (voltage and current) are multiples of the fundamental frequency and, in a power system, can be considered noise. Harmonicfrequency components are often present with the use of adjustable-speed drives. High-Resistance Grounding–Using a neutral-grounding resistor to limit the current to a low level. Typically, HighResistance Grounding limits ground-fault current to 25 A or lower. (Also see Low-Resistance Grounding.) High Tension Coupler–An accessory used to isolate system voltage from a protective relay. I 2t (I squared t)–Thermal capacity, or used thermal capacity. With regard to motor protection, thermal capacity is used to measure and describe motor heating in terms of current (I). This method is more accurate than temperature sensing because of temperature-sensor placement and the time delay inherent in temperature measurement. IEEE Device Numbers–The devices in switching equipment are referred to by numbers, according to the functions they perform. These numbers are based on a system which has been adopted as standard for automatic switchgear by the IEEE. This numbering system is used on connection diagrams, in instruction literature, and in specifications. Incident Energy–The amount of energy impressed on a surface, a certain distance from the source, generated during an electrical arc event. One of the units used to measure incident energy is calories per centimeter squared (cal/cm2). Incident Energy Analysis–Used to predict the incident energy of an arc flash for a specified set of conditions. Insulation Monitoring–Monitoring the resistance from phase to ground to detect insulation breakdown on a system. Insulation Resistance–A measurement of the ability of an insulator, such as a cable jacket, to prevent current flow when a voltage is applied; typically measured in megaohms (MΩ). Insulation resistance change can be monitored to predict failure. Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection–A method by which time-to-trip of a protective device, such as an overcurrent or ground-fault relay, decreases as the magnitude of the fault increases. Leakage Current–Low-level ground-fault current, typically measured in milliamperes (mA). Low-Resistance Grounding–A Resistance-Grounding System that allows high currents to flow during a ground fault. Typically, 100 A and higher is considered Low-Resistance Grounding. (Also see High-Resistance Grounding.) LSIG Protection–An acronym for Long-time, Short-time, Instantaneous overcurrent, and Ground-fault protection; a term often used to describe protection required for a power-distribution feeder, or a protection relay with these functions. Motor Protection–Technology designed to ensure that a motor operates within its rated thermal capacity in order to maximize its service life. Neutral-Grounding Resistor (NGR)–A current-limiting resistor connecting the power-system neutral to ground. N.C. Contact (Normally Closed Contact)–A relay contact that is closed when the relay is not energized. N.O. Contact (Normally Open Contact)–A relay contact that is open when the relay is not energized. Non-Fail-Safe Mode (also known as Shunt Trip or SH)– An output relay is energized and contacts change state when a trip occurs. If the protective device loses supply voltage, the system can continue to operate but will not be protected. (Also see Fail-Safe Mode.) PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Overview Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 512 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Non-Volatile Memory–Data is retained when power is removed. Nuisance Trip–A false operation of a protective relay. Phase Current–Current present in a phase conductor. Phase-Current Transformer–A current transformer installed so that current from one phase conductor flows in its primary winding. With regard to motor protection, feeder protection, and metering in a three-phase system, three current transformers are typically used to measure phase currents. Phase-Differential Protection–Protection designed to detect low-level winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground failures in an AC motor. Phase Voltage–The voltage measured between a phase conductor and ground, or another phase. Power factor (cosφ)–The relation between the active power [kW] and apparent power [kVA]. Primary Rating (for CTs)–The current rating of the primary side of a current transformer. For example, the first number in the ratio 500:5 is the primary rating. 500 A of primary current flowing through the CT will produce 5 A of current out of the secondary terminals. Pulsing Ground-Fault Systems–Modulating the groundfault current on a resistance-grounded system using a contactor to short out part of the NGR elements (or to open one of two NGRs connected in parallel). This technique is used to locate ground faults by tracing the pulsing ground-fault current to the source of the fault. Online or Offline Monitoring–Monitoring system parameters such as insulation integrity when the system is energized or de-energized, respectively. Open-CT Hazard–An open-circuited CT secondary which can develop a dangerously high voltage when primary current is present. Reactive Power–Measured in kVAR. The power used for magnetization of asynchronous alternators, motors and transformers, coils etc. The amount of reactive power has no effect on the torque of the prime mover (e.g. diesel engine). Therefore the reactive power has no effect on the engine. It is however very important for the alternator, as the total load on he alternator is the vector sum of active and reactive load. Relay (1)–An electrical switch that opens and closes a contact (or contacts) under the control of another circuit. Typically an electromagnet. Relay (2)–A device that receives inputs, compares them to set points, and provides outputs based upon that comparison. Relay Operating Mode–Method of operation used for undervoltage or shunt-trip breakers. (Also see Fail-Safe Mode, Non-Fail-Safe Mode.) Resistance-Grounded System–An electrical system in which the transformer or generator neutral is connected to ground through a current-limiting resistor. (Also see Solidly Grounded System, Ungrounded System.) Reverse Power–An active power [kW] fed into a generator that thus is working as an electric motor, turning the prime mover. As this would damage the prime mover (e.g. an internal combustion engine), reverse power relays are used in applications where generators run in parallel with each other or with the utility. These relays detect the amount and direction of the power, and in case of excessive reverse power, disconnect the generator breaker. Ride-Through Time–The amount of time a protection relay can maintain operation during a supply voltage loss. RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector)–A device that experiences a linear change in resistance with a change in temperature. It is used to provide temperature metering. Common RTDs are 100 Ω platinum, 100 Ω nickel, 120 Ω nickel, and 10 Ω copper. Sensitive Ground-Fault Protection–Protection designed to accurately detect low-level ground-fault current. Shock Hazard–A dangerous condition associated with possible release of energy caused by contact or approach to energized electrical conductors or circuit parts. Solidly Grounded System–An electrical system in which the neutral point of a wye-connected supply transformer is connected directly to ground. (Also see Resistance-Grounded System, Ungrounded System.) Switchgear, Arc-Resistant–Equipment designed to withstand the effects of an internal arcing fault and that directs the internally released energy away from the employee. Time Delay–A setting on a protection relay that determines the time between the fault detection and relay operation. Trailing Cable–A power cable used to supply electrical power to mobile equipment. They typically contain three phase conductors, two ground conductors, and a pilot wire (also known as a ground-check conductor). Trip Level–A setting on a protection relay at which an LED or output contact operates. Trip Relay Contact–An output of a relay that acts as a switch and is typically connected to an undervoltage-release or shunt-trip coil of a circuit breaker. Trip State–The state of the output contact during a relay trip. True RMS–“Root-Mean-Square” calculation used to derive an average current or voltage value in a waveform. Ungrounded System–An electrical system in which no point of the system is intentionally grounded, such as a deltaconnected supply transformer. Zero-Sequence Current Transformer–See Earth-Fault Current Transformer. Glossary of Terms PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. 513 Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols Overview Introduction I. INTRO TO PROTECTION RELAYS What is a protection relay? g Inputs and Settings g Processes g Outputs How do protection relays solve electrical problems? g Stage 1 – Early stages of a failure g Stage 2 – During a failure g Stage 3 – After a failure II. RELAY APPLICATION Ground-Fault Protection g Definition of Ground Fault g DC Systems g Ungrounded AC Systems g Solidly Grounded Systems g Resistance-Grounded Systems g System Capacitive Charging Current g Resistor Monitors g Ground-Continuity Monitors Motor Protection g Overview g Common Motor Problems and Solutions g Motor Protection and the NEC® Arc-Flash Protection g Overview g Arc-Flash Safety Standards g Arc-Flash Mitigation g Arc-Flash Relays g Selection Criteria III. CT APPLICATION g Current Transformers g Lead Length g CT Installation IV. RESISTANCE GROUNDING CONVERSION I. INTRODUCTION TO PROTECTION RELAYS What is a Protection Relay? A protection relay is a smart device that receives inputs, compares them to set points, and provides outputs. Inputs can include current, voltage, resistance, or temperature. Outputs can include visual feedback in the form of indicator lights and/or an alphanumeric display, communications, control warnings, alarms, and turning power off and on. A diagram is shown below. CURRENT VOLTAGE INSULATION TEMPERATURE VISUAL INDICATION WARNING ALARM COMMUNICATIONS REMOVE POWER PROTECTION RELAY PICK-UP LEVELS TIME INPUTS OUTPUTS SETTINGS FIGURE 1 Protection relays can be either electromechanical or electronic/microprocessor-based. Electromechanical relays consist of mechanical parts that require routine calibration to stay within intended tolerances. Microprocessor-based or electronic relays provide quick, reliable, accurate, and repeatable outputs. Using an electronic or microprocessorbased relay instead of an electromechanical design provides numerous advantages including improved accuracy, additional functions, reduced maintenance, smaller space requirements and lower life-cycle costs. Inputs A relay needs information from the system to make a decision. These inputs can be collected in a variety of ways. In some cases, the wires in the field can be connected directly to the relay. In other applications, additional devices are needed to convert the measured parameters to a format that the relay can process. These additional devices can be current transformers, potential transformers, high-tension couplers, RTDs, or other devices. Settings Many protection relays have adjustable settings. The user selects settings (pick-up levels) that allow the relay to make a decision. The relay compares the inputs to these settings and responds accordingly. Processes Once the inputs are connected and the settings are made, the relay compares these values and makes a decision. Depending on the need, different types of relays are available for different functions. PROTECTION OVERVIEW 15 Overview Littelfuse.com/relayscontrols 514 © 2022 Littelfuse, Inc. Ground-Fault Protection Outputs A relay can have several ways of communicating that a decision has been made. Typically the relay will operate a switch (relay contact) to indicate that an input has surpassed a setting, or the relay can provide notification through visual feedback such as a meter or LED. One advantage of many electronic or microprocessor-based relays is an ability to communicate with a network or a PLC. As an example, a thermostat can be evaluated using the diagram in Figure 1. The input that is measured is temperature and the input device is the temperature sensor. The user sets the desired temperature setting (pick-up level). The relay measures the existing air temperature and compares it to the setting. The outputs can be used to provide controls (turning an air conditioner or furnace on and off) and visual indication on the thermostat display. How Do Protection Relays Solve Electrical Problems? Similar to how the thermostat solves the problem of automating the control of the air conditioner or furnace in a home, protection relays can solve electrical problems. The purpose of the protection relay is to detect a problem, ideally during its initial stage, and to either eliminate or significantly reduce damage to personnel and/or equipment. The following stages illustrate how an electrical problem develops: Stage 1: When conductors with good insulation are exposed to fault initiators such as moisture, dust, chemicals, persistent overloading, vibration or just normal wear, the insulation will slowly deteriorate. Such small changes will not be immediately obvious until the damage is severe enough to cause an electrical fault. Relays can detect that a problem is developing by identifying slight deviations in current, voltage, resistance, or temperature. Due to the small magnitude in change, only a sophisticated device such as a sensitive protection relay or a monitor can detect these conditions and indicate that a problem may be developing, before any further damage occurs. Stage 2: As the problem becomes more severe, further changes take place such as insulation breakdown, overheating, or overvoltage. Since the change from normal to abnormal is great, traditional devices can be used to interrupt power. Protection relays can also be used to provide additional protection by detecting the fault contributors (overheating, overvoltage, etc.) not possible with fuses and circuit breakers. Stage 3: At this point, the problem has occurred and caused damage. Different types of protection relays and monitors can reduce or eliminate damage because they detect problems in advance of traditional devices. As an example, if a facility is continually resetting circuit breakers, replacing fuses, or repairing equipment and cannot locate the problem, they may be experiencing overcurrents. If this is the case, the user can install a protection relay that has an overcurrent feature. The relay measures the current (input) and allows the user to program limits (settings). The settings typically are more sensitive than the fuses or circuit breakers. Once these limits are exceeded, the relay will operate an internal switch (relay contacts). The user has the option to use the switch to turn on a light (alarm indication) or remove power (trip) before greater problems occur. The user can use the alarm indication to help identify the faulty equipment prior to the traditional fuse or circuit breaker clearing the fault. II. RELAY APPLICATION Ground-Fault Protection The primary purpose of grounding electrical systems is to provide protection against electrical faults. However, this was not common practice until the 1970’s. Until then, most commercial and industrial systems were ungrounded. Although ungrounded systems do not cause significant damage during the first ground fault, the numerous disadvantages associated with ground faults resulted in a change to the grounding philosophy. There are other advantages for a grounded system, such as reduction of shock hazards and protection against lightning. Electrical faults can be divided into two categories: phase-tophase faults and ground faults. Studies have shown that 98% of all electrical faults are ground faults (Source: Woodham, Jack, P.E. “ The Basics of Grounding Systems” May 1, 2003